TC-R2B

Safety manual for those who install

and set-up the tapping center

Tapping center
TC-R2B

Please read this safety manual carefully before

operating the tapping center.

Brother Industries, Ltd. Machinery & Solution Company.

2009/10/21 1 eTR2BSAIN1-1.doc
 TC-R2B

Contents
Outline of the safety manual ---------- 3
Read this manual ---------------------------------------------- 3
Purpose --------------------------------------------------------- 3
Contents of Safety Manual and
Relationship with Other Manuals --------------------------- 3
Relationship to safety labels --------------------------------- 4
Language------------------------------------------------------- 4
Purchasing ----------------------------------------------------- 4
Handling the safety manual---------------------------------- 5
Degree of danger ---------------------------------------------- 5
Explanation order --------------------------------------------- 5
Meaning of symbols ------------------------------------------ 6

Section Names --------------------------- 8

TC-R2B ------------------------------------------------------- 8

Warnings and preventive measures 10

DANGER ------------------------------------------------------ 10
WARNING ---------------------------------------------------- 11

Safety label check ----------------------- 20

2009/10/21 2 eTR2BSAIN1-1.doc
TC-R2B

Outline of the safety manual

Read this manual
All people who use the tapping center, including those who install the tapping center at the factory,
who process materials by operating the TAPPING CENTER, who adjust and repair the tapping
center, are requested to read this safety manual.
In this safety manual, all people who use the tapping center are expressed as the user.

Purpose
The tapping center consists of high voltage electric circuits, tools which rotate at high speed, and
tables and ATC magazines which move with powerful force. Therefore, various hazards are
associated with the machine.
The purpose of this safety manual is to protect users from these hazards.
Therefore, the safety manual explains the following:
Warnings: types of hazards
Preventive measures: ways to prevent any hazards from occurring

Contents of Safety Manual and Relationship with Other

Manuals
Each instruction manual, other than the programming manual, includes a safety manual.
Safety manuals are given to each respective personnel group.
Please read the main text of the instruction manual for machine functions and operation methods.
1.Operation manual (For general operators)
“Safety Manual for Operator”
“Safety Manual for those who install and set-up the tapping center”
“Operation manual”: How to operate the machine necessary for basic
operations.
English part code : 693481001

2.Operation manual (For advanced personnel)

“Safety Manual for Operator”
“Safety Manual for those who install and set-up the tapping center”
“Door interlock function”
“Operation manual”: How to operate the machine necessary for set-up
and machining
(Operation) Japanese part code : 693477001
English part code : 693480001
(Data) Japanese part code : 693204001
English part code : 693206001

3.Instruction manual “ “Safety manual for those who install and set-up the tapping center”
“Installation manual”: How to install and assemble the machine and
options.
Japanese part code : 693476001
English part code : 693479001

4.Programming manual “Programming manual” : How to create machine programs

(Conversation)Japanese part code : 693219001
English part code : 693220001
(NC) Japanese part code : 693203001
English part code : 693205001

5.Maintenance manual “Safety manual for those who qualified for tapping center
maintenance attached to the maintenance manual.”
“Maintenance manual: Adjust and repair of the machine”
The maintenance manual is not distributed to customers.

2009/11/02 3 eTR2BSA1-2.doc
Relationship to safety labels
Items of particular importance that appear in this safety manual are also attached to the machine as
safety labels.
An explanation of the safety labels is provided at the end of this safety manual. If any safety
labels have peeled off the machine, obtain new safety labels and attach them correctly.

Language
Machines shipped domestically within Japan are provided with safety manuals and safety labels
written in Japanese. Machines shipped abroad from Japan are provided with safety manuals and
safety labels written in four languages: English, German, French, and Chinese.
For manuals and labels in other languages, consult the dealer from which you purchased the
machine.

Purchasing
When the safety manuals or safety labels have been lost, obtain these items from the dealer you
have purchased the machine from.
If you do not know of a dealer, consult the offices specified below.

1-5, Kitajizoyama, Noda-cho, Kariya-shi, Aichi-ken, 448-0803, Japan.

BROTHER INDUSTRIES, LTD. Machinery & Solution Company.
phone +81-566-95-0075
fax +81-566-25-3721

2011/05/27 4 eTCOMSA1-3.doc
 Handling the safety manual
Be careful not to lose the safety manuals, and keep them handy at all times.
Also, when the machine changes hands, pass the manuals to the new owner together with the
machine.
Degree of danger
The degree of danger is classified into three categories depending upon the level of damage that
may occur when instructions are not observed.

1. DANGER

DANGER
Damage which may result in death or severe injury to persons.

2. WARNING

WARNING
Damage which may lead to a serious injury.

3. CAUTION

CAUTION
Damage less serious than that above.

Explanation order
The safety instructions are explained in the following order:
1. Signal words (DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION) and symbols indicating the degree of danger
2. Type of danger (Subject)
3. Type of predicted damages
4. Preventive measure

2011/05/27 5 eTCOMSA1-3.doc
 Meaning of symbols
Symbols are used on the safety labels and in the warnings in the safety manual to intuitively
explain possible dangers.

1. Hazard

Slippery Moving parts

Stumble Electric shock

Electric shock Caught

Hand pinched High temperature

High temperature Cut

Cut Burst

Sharp point Falling object

Falling object Rotating object

Fall Splash

Splash Fire

2011/05/27 6 eTCOMSA1-3.doc
 2. Preventive measures

Protect ears. Protect hands.

Protect feet. Remove power plug.

Do not touch. Protect head.

Connect grounding cable. Do not disassemble.

Protect eyes.

2011/05/27 7 eTCOMSA1-3.doc
部品名 Section Names Bezeichnung der Komponenten Noms de sections 各部件名称

A
6 21 23
12 24
2
1
7 1

38
25

30
12
14
A
22

9
28

11 31

18

19 34 20
5 10
3.4
35 37
16 17
15 32

36
0906-1~7.ai

2010/12/10 8 TR2BSA2.doc
部品名 Section Names Bezeichnung der Komponenten Noms de sections 各部件名称

No. 各部の名称 Section names Bezeichnung der Komponenten Noms de sections 各部件名称
日本語 English Deutsch Français 中文
1. 制御箱 control box Steuerschrank armoire de commande 控制箱
2. 機械ｶﾊﾞｰ machine cover Maschinenabdeckung couvercle de la machine 机械外罩
3. ﾌｨｰﾄﾞﾎｰﾙﾄﾞｽｲｯﾁ feed hold switch Vorschubhaltschalter interrupteur d'arrêt de l'avance 进给保持开关
4. ﾌｨｰﾄﾞﾎｰﾙﾄﾞﾗﾝﾌﾟ feed hold lamp Vorschubhalt-Kontrollleuchte témoin de contrôle d'arrêt de l'avance 进给保持指示灯
5. ﾄﾞｱｲﾝﾀﾛｯｸｽｲｯﾁ door interlock switch Türverriegelungsschalter interrupteur de verrouillage de porte 门互锁开关
6. ﾒﾝﾃﾅﾝｽｶﾊﾞｰ maintenance cover Wartungsabdeckung couvercle d'entretien 维修罩盖
7. 正面扉 front door Vordertür porte avant 正面门
9. ﾄﾞｱｲﾝﾀﾛｯｸｷｰ door interlock key Schlüssel des Türverriegelungsschalters clé de verrouillage de porte 门互锁键
10. ｽﾋﾟﾝﾄﾞﾙ spindle Spindel broche 主轴
11. ATC ﾏｶﾞｼﾞﾝ ATC magazine ATC-Magazin magasin ATC ATC 刀库
12. とって handle Griff poignée 把手
14. ﾚﾍﾞﾘﾝｸﾞﾎﾞﾙﾄ leveling bolt Nivellierschraube boulon de mise à niveau 调平螺栓
15. ｸｰﾗﾝﾄﾉｽﾞﾙ coolant nozzle Kühlmitteldüse buse de liquide d'arrosage 冷却液喷嘴
16. 工具 tool Werkzeug outil 刀具
17. 工具ﾎﾙﾀﾞ tool holder Werkzeughalter porte-outil 刀具夹
18. ｽﾋﾟﾝﾄﾞﾙﾍｯﾄﾞ spindle head Spindelkopf tête de broche 主轴头
19. 非常停止ｽｲｯﾁ emergency stop switch Not-Aus-Schalter interrupteur d'arrêt d'urgence 紧急停止开关
20. ｸｲｯｸﾃｰﾌﾞﾙ quick table Schnellschalttisch table à action instantanée 快速回转工作台
21. 主電源ﾌﾞﾚｰｶ main power breaker Hauptschalter disjoncteur d’alimentation principale 主电源开关
22. ｸｰﾗﾝﾄﾀﾝｸ coolant tank Kühlmitteltank réservoir de liquide d'arrosage 冷却液罐
23. ﾒﾝﾃﾅﾝｽｶﾊﾞｰ maintenance cover Wartungsabdeckung couvercle d'entretien 维修罩盖
24. 回生抵抗ｶﾊﾞｰ regenerative resistor cover Abdeckung d. Rückkopplungswiderstands couvercle de la résistance régénérative 再生电阻罩
25. 操作ﾊﾟﾈﾙ operation panel Bedientafel pupitre de commande 操作面板
28. ｸﾞﾘｯﾌﾟｶﾊﾞｰ grip cover Griffschutz couverture de jambe 刀柄护罩
30. 自動間欠給油ﾎﾟﾝﾌﾟ automatic intermittent lubricating unit Automatische Intervallschmieranlage unité de lubrication intermittente autom. 自动间歇加油泵
31. 内扉 inter door Innentür porte intérieure 内门
34. Y 軸ﾃﾚｽｺｶﾊﾞｰ Y-axis telescopic cover Y-Achsen-Teleskopabdeckung carter télescopique de l'axe Y Y 轴伸缩护罩
35. X 軸ﾃﾚｽｺｶﾊﾞｰ X-axis telescopic cover X-Achsen-Teleskopabdeckung carter télescopique de l'axe X X 轴伸缩护罩
36. ｴﾌﾟﾛﾝｶﾊﾞｰ apron cover Schutzschürze carter de tablier 防溅护罩
37. 洗浄ｶﾞﾝ clearing gun Reinigungspistole pistolet de nettoyage 气力清洁枪
38. 側面扉 side door Seitentür porte latérale 侧面门

2010/12/10 9 TR2BSA2.doc
 TC-R2B

Warnings and preventive measures

The numbers in ( ) such as 1, 2 correspond to the names of each part.
Danger Danger
SD1 Various hazards are associated with the tapping center.
SD1-1 Read the safety manual before operating the machine to understand these hazards
and preventive measures.
SD1-2 All users must know the position of the emergency stop switch (19) and its
operation.

SD2 High voltage parts are present in the control box (1). Touching such parts by
mistake may result in serious injury or death.
SD2-1 Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the electric circuits of
this machine are allowed to maintain and inspect the electrical components.
SD2-2 Turn off the main power breaker (21) before operation. Put up a signboard which
says 'Under maintenance.'
SD2-3 When leaving the machine, close the control box door and bolt it.

SD3 You may be caught in the machine during machining, resulting in a serious injury.
SD3-1 Do not enter within the machine cover (2) during operation.
SD3-2 Visually check that nobody is inside the machine cover before starting machine
operation.
SD3-3 Keep your hands, feet, and body away from moving parts during operation.
SD3-4 When you have to enter the machine, turn off the main power breaker and padlock it
so that the main power breaker (21) cannot be turned on.

SD4 When the door interlock switch (5) is invalid, the machine moves even when the
front door (7) or the side door (38) is open. You may cut yourself on a rotating tool
or be caught in the machine.
SD4-1 During machine maintenance, pay extreme attention to the machine motion so that
you can stop the machine whenever required. After finishing maintenance and
set-up, return the door interlock switch to valid. Pull out the door interlock key (9)
for storage.
SD4-2 Do not leave the machine with the door interlock switch invalid.

SD5 When the door interlock switch (5) is invalid, the quick table (20) may move.
You may be caught by the quick table or in the machine, resulting in injury.
SD5-1 During machine set-up, pay extreme attention to the machine motion so that you can
stop the machine whenever required. When you have finished machine set-up,
return the door interlock switch to ON. The door interlock key (9) must be pulled
out and kept by the supervisor.

2010/12/07 10 eTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SD7 Grounding the machine incorrectly may result in an electric shock, causing serious
injuries or death.
SD7-1 Ground the machine according to the designated procedure.

SD8 Using oil-based coolant for machines equipped with a Coolant Through Spindle
(CTS) system may cause a fire.
SD8-1 Be sure to use wafer-soluble coolant.

Warning WARNING

SW1 Touching rotating tools (16) results in injury.

SW1-1 Keep away from rotating tools.

SW2 You may be injured due to broken tools (16) or parts flung out.
SW2-1 Close the front door (7) and the side door (38), and start machine operation.

SW3 You may be caught in the rotating part, resulting in an injury.

SW3-1 Keep away from rotating tools (16) , the spindle (10), and the ATC magazine (11).
SW3-2 Wear snug-fitting clothes. Put long hair up in cap. Do not wear gloves except for
set-up operations carried out with the machine stopped. Do not wear any
accessories. Do not hold the rotating part.

SW4 If the safety device is modified, its function may be altered, thus you may be caught
in the machine, hit your body against the machine, or get an electric shock.
SW4-1 Do not modify safety devices. Do not alter the safety device in such a way that it
does not function.

2010/12/07 11 eTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW5 When chips scatter and get into the eyes, you may damage your eyeballs and lose
your eyesight.
SW5-1 Wear safety goggles against the chips.
SW5-2 Do not blow the chips by air.

SW6 If you touch chips with bare hands, you may have your hand cut or burnt.
SW6-1 Do not touch chips with bare hands. Do not touch sharp edges of workpieces.
SW6-2 Wear gloves use a brush to remove chips.
SW6-3 Clean cutting chips when machine is stopped.

SW7 If you grip the tool (16) blade, you may cut your hand.
SW7-1 Do not touch the edge of the tool. Always hold the shank of the tool holder (17).

SW8 Dropping a heavy object onto your foot may fracture your foot bones.
SW8-1 When lifting heavy objects, wear safety shoes.

SW9 Lifting heavy objects may cause a hernia of vertebral disk.

SW9-1 When lifting heavy objects, ask for help.
SW9-2 Lift object with the strength of your legs instead of your back.

SW10 Hearing ability is reduced when ears are exposed to excessive noise for a long
period of time.
SW10-1 Use protection such as earplugs when working in a noisy environment.

SW11 You may hurt your eyes and ears due to high pressure air bursts.
SW11-1 People other than those qualified in high pressure air handling and who understand
the piping of this machine are not allowed to install or change the high pressure air
piping.
SW11-2 To repair the high pressure air hose, disconnect the pressure source and release
remaining pressure first. Put up a signboard which says “Under maintenance.”

2010/12/07 12 eTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW12 You may hit your head when standing up.

SW12-1 Wear a helmet when working in and around the machine.

SW13 When the machine is operated while any tools are left in the machine, the tools may
scatter and you may be injured.
SW13-1 Do not leave hand tools in the machine.

SW14 Your hand may be caught in the front door (7), inner door (31), or side door (38)
if you open or close the door while holding any part other than the handles (12, 32,
and 39).
SW14-1 Hold the handle when opening and closing the doors.

SW16 If you place tools on the control box (1), the operation panel (25), or the machine,
these may fall down due to vibration.
SW16-1 Do not place any objects on the control box and the machine.

SW17 You may fall down and be injured when climbing on the machine or the coolant
tank (22).
SW17-1 Do not climb on the machine or the coolant tank.

SW18 When putting your hand under the leveling bolts (14), you may have your hand
caught, resulting in an injury.
SW18-1 Do not put your hands under the leveling bolt. Use tools to adjust the level.

SW19 When the cable is hanging down or is not covered, you may stumble or slip and fall.
SW19-1 Remove any slack in the cable. Cover the cable when placing the cable on the
floor.

2010/12/07 13 eTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW20 Remodeling the machine may affect the safety device, rendering all given warnings
invalid.
SW20-1 Do not modify the machine. When modification is required, contact Brother
Industries, Ltd. beforehand and ask for permission in writing.

SW21 You may have your eyes hurt if coolant splashes into your eyes.
SW21-1 When adjusting the coolant nozzle (15), wear safety goggles.
SW21-2 When using the cleaning gun (37), wear safety goggles.
SW21-3 When coolant has splashed into your eyes, wash your eyes with clean water, and see
a doctor.

SW22 If you put your finger in the clearance of the machine, you may have your finger
caught, resulting in an injury.
SW22-1 Do not put fingers the grip cover (28).
SW22-2 Do not put the finger in the clearance between the tool (16) or the tool holder (17)
and the ATC magazine (11) .
SW22-3 Do not put the finger in the clearance between the tool or the tool holder and the
spindle (10).

SW23 When coolant, oil, or chips are scattered, you may slip and fall down or hit yourself
against something, resulting in an injury.
SW23-1 Turn off the power of the machine, clean inside and the surroundings of the machine,
and then start operation.
SW23-2 Wear a helmet and safety shoes during machine installation.

SW24 When attaching and detaching tool holder (17), you may cut your hand on the edge
of a tool (16) or hit your hand against the machine.
SW24-1 Do not hold the edge of the tool. Wear leather gloves. Hold the tool holder with
both hands.

SW25 The machine may suddenly move or tools may fall down.
SW25-1 When the emergency stop switch is not pressed, do not put your hands, feet, and
body under the spindle head (18).
SW25-2 Position the quick table (20) to set-up.
SW25-3 Turn off the main power breaker (21), padlock the main power breaker so that it
cannot be turned on, and apply grease to the machine.

2010/12/07 14 eTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW26 When machining workpiece using an oil type coolant, the machined part may heat
up and catch fire.
SW26-1 When using an oil type coolant, install a fire alarm and an automatic fire
extinguisher.
SW26-2 When machining the workpiece, an operator must attend the machine.

SW27 If you lean on the machine, you may be caught or hit yourself against the machine
when the machine moves, resulting in an injury.
SW27-1 Do not lean on the machine.

SW28 When objects are hung on the emergency stop switch (19), the emergency stop
switch may not be pressed.
SW28-1 Do not hang any objects on the emergency stop switch.

SW30 Because the coolant tank (22) is heavy, you may suffer from a herniated vertebral
disk or drop the tank on your feet when lifting the tank.
SW30-1 Do not lift the coolant tank even when removing chips.

SW31 When entering the machine, you may slip and fall down or be caught in the
machine.
SW31-1 When entering the machine, be sure to turn off the main circuit power breaker (21),
padlock the breaker so that the breaker is not turned on, and remove any coolant and
chips.
Also, wear safety shoes and a helmet. Put up a signboard which says “Under
maintenance” near the machine.

SW32 If the machine cover (2) maintenance cover (6), (23) is not attached, you may be
caught in the machine or injured due to broken tools.
SW32-1 Visually check that the maintenance cover is attached before turning on the power.

SW33 Tools (16) or tool holders (17) whose weight and size exceed the specified limit may
spring out while being used.
SW33-1 Use tools and tool holders whose weight and size are within the specified limit.
SW33-2 For the limit of the tools, see the tool label attached on the machine or the operation
manual.

2010/12/07 15 eTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW34 If you touch the regenerative resistor, you may be burned because the regenerative
resistor is heated during operation.
SW34-1 Do not remove the regenerative resistor cover (24).

SW35 If you touch the motor, you may be burned because the motor is heated during
operation.
SW35-1 Do not touch the motor for 30 minutes after operation is fineshed.

SW37 If the setting of protective unit is changed, a fire may break out because the
protective device does not function.
SW37-1 Do not change the setting of the protective unit.

SW38 If the ATC magazine (11) rotates, tools (16) may hit machined workpieces, jigs, or
the machine, and may be broken.
SW38-1 Set the tool length so that the tools do not contact machined workpieces, jigs, or the
machine even if the ATC magazine rotates.

SW39 If the control box (1) or the operation panel (25) are wet, you may get an electric
shock.
SW39-1 Do not sprinkle coolant, water, or chips on the control box and the operation panel.
SW39-2 Do not touch the control box with wet hands.

SW40 When the power PE line wired from outside is too short, the PE line may come off
when the cable is pulled and you may get an electric shock.
SW40-1 Make the power PE line longer than other lines (L1, L2, L3) allowing some slack.

SW41 If the power is turn on or workpieces are machined in an explosive atmosphere, an

explosion may occur due to a spark from the machine.
SW41-1 Do not install the machine in an explosive atmosphere.
SW41-2 Do not turn on the power of the machine, and carry out machining and set-up in an
explosive atmosphere.

SW43 If you touch the cable crushed by a heavy object, you may get an electrical
shock.The crushed cable may cause a short circuit.
SW43-1 The person qualified for electrical work must lay the cables so that these are not
crushed,and replace the cables if crushed.

2010/12/07 16 eTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW44 Cutting chips may catch fire or explode depending on the workpiece material
(e.x. Magnesium).
SW44-1 Remove any cutting chips immediately.
SW44-2 Install a fire extinguisher near the machine when machining a workpiece made of
such material, and never perform unmanned operation.

SW45 For the tool (16) having a replaceable insert, if the insert is not secured tightly,
it may come off during the spindle rotation, resulting in serious injury.
SW45-1 Check that the insert is secured tightly, and then mount the tool to the machine.

SW49 Fire may occur when a 3-wire sensor that includes an exclusive power line is used.
SW49-1 Use a 2-wire sensor, instead of a 3-wire sensor.
SW49-2 If it is not possible to avoid using 3-wire sensors, add a fuse( 1 A or less) to the
power line of each sensor.

SW50 Any impact on the pipes may result in leakage and coolant entering your eyes may
result in loss of eyesight.
SW50-1 Do not allow any impact on the pipes.

SW51 When adjusting the direction of the coolant nozzle, you may cut your hand on the
edge of a tool or hit your hand against the machine.
SW51-1 Wear leather gloves.

SW52 Moving the machine with the cables connected may result in an electric shock.
SW52-1 Disconnect the cables from the machine main body and the water supply unit (22)
before moving the machine.

SW55 Because the automatic intermittent lubricating unit(30) is in a high location, oil may
spill out when refilling the tank and enter your eyes.
SW55-1 Be sure to wear protective glasses when refilling the tank.

2010/12/07 17 eTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW56 As a large amount of mist is generated, the operator may feel sick when replacing
the workpiece.
SW56-1 Attach a mist collector.

SW57 Coolant may splash and injure your eyes when performing filter cleaning or
replacement, or similar maintenance on machines equipped with a Coolant Through
Spindle (CTS) system.
SW57-1 Be sure to bleed residual pressure before performing maintenance.

SW58 You may hit your head on the tool if you enter the machine while the tool (16) is
attached to the magazine (11) or the spindle (10).
SW58-1 Be sure to wear a helmet when entering the machine.

SW59 The cover (transparent glass) of machine light and table light may break if excessive
force is applied, causing you to cut your hands.
SW59-1 Do not hit the cover (transparent glass) of the machine light and table light with any
object or apply excessive force.
SW59-2 Be sure to wear gloves when replacing the fluorescent light.

SW60 The jack used for leveling the machine comes off and your hand may be crushed.
SW60-1 Position the jack in the center forward of the bottom of the base when using it.

SW61 Climbing the coolant tank (22) may cause you to slipover resulting in injuries.
SW61-1 Do not climb them.

2010/12/07 18 eTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW62 If the terminal block screws are loose after wiring, heat may be generated
due to faulty contact, causing a fire.
SW62-1 Make sure that there are no loose screws after wiring.

SW63 Installing the machine on an unstable surface may cause the machine to shift or
topple during machining, resulting in injury or damage to the machine.
SW63-1 Install the machine on a solid and level surface.
Check that the floor satisfies the following requirements:
 Placement of a 2600kg object of does not cause the floor to warp or buckle.
 The floor is level, without humps or hollows.
 Floor surface is completely solid and not distorted when pressure of 1.0 MPa
(10 kgf/cm2) is applied.
 The floor is made of material that will not deteriorate with time.

SW64 When the plant is poorly illuminated, inside the machine is dark and you may injure
your hands on jigs or cutters.
SW64-1 Install a machine light when the illumination inside the machine is 500 lux or
below.

SW65 If you climb on the X-axis telescopic cover R (35), Y-axis telescopic cover (34),
or apron cover (36), you may slip and fall, resulting in injuries.
SW65-1 Do not climb on the cover.

SW66 You may be injured if you work in an unnatural posture.

SW66-1 Do not work in an unnatural posture.

SW67 You may stumble over the anchor plate, resulting in injuries.
SW67-1 Be sure to wear a helmet and safety shoes when passing or working by the side
of the machine.

SW68 There are high voltage sections inside the cover (transparent glass) of the machine
light. Touching these sections by mistake may result in electric shock, serious
injury, or death.
Foreign matter (e.g. coolant, chips) may damage the parts or cause fire.
SW68-1 Be sure to turn off the main power circuit breaker and apply a padlock before
replacing the bulb. Place a signboard displaying “During Replacement.”
Be careful of foreign matter during replacement.
Wash hands before replacing the fluorescent bulb.
Do not replace the protection fuse inside the machine light.
Be sure to close the waterproof plug before checking the light.

SW69 The ceiling cover is heavy. You may be injured if you drop it when removing or
attaching it.
SW69-1 Have at least two persons when removing or attaching the ceiling cover.

2010/12/07 19 eTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

Safety label check

Safety labels are attached to the machine at the positions shown in the drawing. Check that the
safety labels are firmly attached. If any labels have peeled off, obtain new labels and attach them
correctly.

6
3

8
7

0906.ai

2010/12/10 20 eTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[1] Safety label , Front

Language Part code
Japanese, Chinese, English 693508001
English, German, French 693504001

2010//12/10 21 eTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

[2] Tool label , Front

The contents vary depending on spindle speed, and spindle type.

BT type

Part code
693526001 Tool label BT2

BBT type

Part code
693525001 Tool label BBT2

2010/12/10 22 eTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[3] Safety label, Back

Language Part code

Japanese, Chinese, English . 693502001
English, German, French 693500001

2010//12/10 23 eTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

[4] Label, Regenerative resistor

Language Part code

Japanese, Chinese, English. 690729001
English, German, French. 691058001

[5] Label, Tool removing

Language Part code

Japanese, Chinese, English. 693515001
English, German, French. 693513001

2010/12/10 24 eTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[6] Safety label, Side cover

Language Part code

Japanese, Chinese, English. 693512001
English, German, French 693510001

2010//12/10 25 eTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

[7] Label safety 1, CTS

Language Part code

Japanese, Chinese, English. 693001001
English, German, French. 693002001

2010/12/10 26 eTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[8] Label 2, CTS

Language Part code

Japanese, Chinese, English, German, French. 693003001

693003001(1-1).wmf

[9] “Keep Off” label 40

Part code
693178001

693178001.ai

2010//12/10 27 eTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

( This page is blank )

2010/12/10 28 eTR2BSA4
TC-R2B Door interlock function

DOOR INTERLOCK FUNCTION

1 General Precautions
2 Overall View
3 Inspection of Door Interlock
4 Function Details

2010/12/13 1 eR2BDoor.doc
Door interlock function TC-R2B

1 General Precautions
1.1 Warnings
DANGER
When the door interlock switch is invalid, the machine moves
when the front door is open. You may cut yourself on a rotating
tool or be caught in the machine.
When the door interlock switch is invalid, do not put your hands,
feet, and body in the machine. Report it to the supervisor.
When the door interlock is invalid, the supervisor must not allow
anybody to operate the machine.
Visually check by yourself that the door interlock switch is valid
before starting machine operation.
If the door interlock key is attached, report it to the supervisor.
The supervisor must always keep the door interlock key.

WARNING
Touching rotating tools results in injury.
Keep away from rotating tools.

WARNING
You may be caught in the rotating part, resulting in an injury.
Keep away from rotating tools, the spindle, and the ATC magazine.
Wear snug-fitting clothes. Put long hair up in cap.
Do not wear gloves except for set-up operations carried out with
the machine stopped. Do not wear any accessories.
Do not hold the rotating part.

2010/12/13 2 eR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B Door interlock function

Purpose
The door interlock function protects workers from being caught in the machine while tools are
rotating and parts are moving.

Unit Description
The interlock is activated so that the doors are locked and the maximum speed is limited to suit the
situation.

Unit Structure
The door interlock unit is composed of the following:
1. Door limit switch
2. Door lock

Using the Door Interlock Function

1. During daily operation
Always keep the door interlock function switch (1) on.
2. During set-up and maintenance
Turn the switch off only when it is necessary to release the interlock function during set-up
and maintenance.
Read the “Safety manual for those who install and set-up the tapping center” and the
“Safety manual for those qualified for tapping center maintenance” before starting set-up
and maintenance.
Please observe the following when the interlock function is off.
• When the door interlock function is off, be extremely careful not to be caught on a
rotating tool or any moving parts.
• After set-up or maintenance, turn the switch on.
• The supervisor is responsible for keeping the key (2).

Operation panel

door.01.ai

2010/12/13 3 eR2BDoor.doc
Door interlock function TC-R2B

2 Overall View
TC-R2B
Standard stroke type
Key

Door limit
switch

Do001.ai

2010/12/13 4 eR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B Door interlock function

3 Inspection of Door Interlock

Be sure to check the door interlock and emergency stop systems before starting operation.
If either or both systems are not functioning correctly, report it to your supervisor immediately.

Steps to check door interlock system

Steps to check that the machine does not operate when the door is open.
(1) Check that the [door interlock] switch is enabled, and then turn the power on.
(2) Open the front door.
(3) Enter manual mode, and then press the [P.INDX] key on the operation panel.
(4) Check that the pallet does not rotate, and the alarm message "Door open” is displayed.
This alarm indicates that the door interlock system is functioning correctly.
(5) Check side door (optional) from (2) to (4) steps.

Steps to check the door is locked.

(6) Close the front door, side door (optional).
(7) Press the [P.INDX] Key.
(8) Try to open the front door while the pallet rotates. Be sure if the front door is locked.
If the door is locked, it means that the door interlock is functioning correctly.
(9) Close the front door, side door (optional).
(10) Press the [SP.CW] key, and the spindle rotates.
(11) Try to open the side door (optional) to check that the side door is locked.
If the door is locked, it means that the door interlock is functioning correctly.
(12) Press the [STOP] key, and the spindle stops.

Steps to check emergency stop system

(1) Press the [EMERGENCY STOP] switch on the operation panel.
(2) Check that the alarm message "∗Emergency button activated" is displayed on the screen.
(3) Turn the [EMERGENCY STOP] switch clockwise to release it.
(4) Press the [RST] key on the operation panel.
(5) Check that the alarm message has been cleared.

2010/12/13 5 eR2BDoor.doc
Door interlock function TC-R2B

4 Function Details
Door Side Outside Inside Side door Outside door
interlock door Machine operation
door door lock
switch (*8) lock

Invalid Cls Cls Op/Cls Not locked Not locked All operations are possible.
(*6) (*5)
Opn Cls When C axis has been indexed,
C axis rotates at low speed. (*1)
The additional axis of outside pallet rotates at low
speed. (*1)
• MEMORY operation is possible only in
single operation mode.
• MDI operation stops at each block end.
The axes other than those mentioned above can
perform all operations
When C axis has not been indexed
all axes move at low speed. (*1)
magazine swivel, ATC, and tapping are
impossible.
• Spindle rotation, magazine swivel, ATC,
and tapping are impossible.
• Axis movement, spindle stop, and spindle
orientation are possible.
• MEMORY operation is possible only in
single operation mode.
• MDI operation is impossible.
Opn All axes move at low speed. (*1)
• Spindle rotation, magazine swivel, ATC,
and tapping are impossible.
• Axis movement, spindle stop, and spindle
orientation are possible.
• MEMORY operation is possible only in
single operation mode.
• MDI operation stops at each block end.
Cls Operations (including spindle rotation) stop
↓ immediately (*3)
Opn
Cls Cls When C axis has been indexed
Only additional axis of outside pallet stops
↓ immediately.
Opn
When C axis is rotating, or not indexed yet,
Operations (including spindle rotation) stop
immediately (*3)
Opn Operations (including spindle rotation) stop
immediately (*3)
Op Op/Cls Op/Cls All axes move at low speed. (*1)
• Spindle rotation, magazine swivel, ATC,
and tapping are impossible.
• Axis movement, spindle stop, and spindle
orientation are possible.
• MEMORY operation is possible only in
single operation mode.
• MDI operation stops at each block end.
Cls Op Operations (including spindle rotation) stop
↓ immediately (*3)
Opn
Opn Cls Operations (including spindle rotation) stop
↓ immediately (*3)
Opn
Cls Op/Cls Op/Cls Operations (including spindle rotation) stop
↓ immediately (*3)
Opn

2010/12/13 6 eR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B Door interlock function

Door Side
door Outside Inside Side door Outside door
interlock Machine operation
(*8) door door lock
switch lock

Valid Cls Cls Cls Locked while Locked while All operations are possible.
side door is outside door
closed and (front door) is
during machine closed
operation Or, locked
during
(During machine
machine operation with
operation = C axis not
Axis indexed.
movement,
spindle (During
rotation, MDI machine
or MEMORY operation =
operation, or Axis
active handle) movement,
(*4) spindle
rotation, MDI
or MEMORY
operation, or
active handle)
(*4)

Opn Locked while All operations are possible.

outside door
(front door) is
closed
and during
machine
operation.
(During
machine
operation =
Axis
movement,
spindle
rotation, MDI
or MEMORY
operation, or
active handle)
(*4)
Opn Cls Not locked When C axis has been indexed,
C axis and additional axis of outside pallet cannot
be rotated. (*2)
The axes other than those mentioned above can
perform all operations
When C axis has not been indexed,
all operations are impossible. (*2)(*7)
Opn All operations are impossible. (*2)(*7)
Cls Operations (including spindle rotation) stop
↓ immediately (*3)(*7)
Opn
Cls Cls － When C axis or additional axis of outside pallet is
rotating, or not indexed yet,
↓ Operations (including spindle rotation) stop
Opn immediately (*3)(*7)
Other than above, all operations are possible.
Opn Operations (including spindle rotation) stop
immediately (*3)(*7)
Opn Op/Cls Op/Cls Not locked All operations are impossible. (*2)(*7)

Cls Cls All operations are impossible. (*2)(*7)

↓ ↓
Opn Opn
Cls Op/Cls Op/Cls － Operations (including spindle rotation) stop
↓ immediately (*3)(*7)
Opn
Invalid Cls Cls Op/Cls － － Nothing changes
↓ Opn Cls When C axis or additional axis of outside pallet
Valid is rotating, or not indexed yet,
Operations (including spindle rotation) stop
immediately (*3)(*7)
Other than above, all operations are possible.
Opn Operations (including spindle rotation) stop
immediately (*3)(*7)
Opn Op/Cls Op/Cls Operations (including spindle rotation) stop
immediately (*3)(*7)

2010/12/13 7 eR2BDoor.doc
Door interlock function TC-R2B

*1 Low speed movement and low speed rotation

The rapid traverse feedrate is the speed preset by the “Rapid feedrate (door open)” of machine
parameter. The cutting feedrate is also restricted to the speed preset by the “Rapid feedrate
(door open)”.
Additional axes are restricted to the speed preset by the “5th~8th-axis Rapid feedrate (door
open)” of machine parameter. The C axis is restricted to the speed preset by the “4th-axis
Rapid feedrate (door open)” of machine parameter.

*2 The “Outside door open” or “Side door open” error occurs when an operation is attempted.

*3 Operations stop at each block end during tapping, spindle orientation, ATC, or magazine
swivel.
If the door is opened during spindle rotation, the “Spindle stopped with door open” error
occurs and the spindle stops. When the door is closed and operation is restarted, the rotating
condition before spindle stop is recovered.
However, when the following operations are performed, the “Spindle stopped with door open”
error disappears, and even if the door is closed and operation is restarted, the rotating
condition before spindle stop is not recovered.
The [RST] key is pressed.
Spindle operation is performed in manual mode.

*4 During machine operation

The term “during machine operation” includes both temporary stop and block stop (except a
stop when the program finished or during program stop) in the MDI or MEMORY operation.

*5 With the outside door (front door) closed, when the inside door is open or the pallet has not
been indexed, the door is locked during ATC or magazine swivel (in the MDI or MEMORY
operation only).

*6 When the side door is closed, the door is locked during ATC or magazine swivel (in the MDI
or MEMORY operation only).

*7 When the door interlock is valid, the servomotors of additional axis for outside pallet and all
axes turn off according to the situations.

*8 When the side door (optional) is not provided, it is assumed to be closed.

○ Servomotor OFF of additional axis for outside pallet

With additional axis of outside pallet stopped, with the pallet indexed, and with the inside door
closed, if the outside door (front door) is opened, the servomotor for additional axis of outside
pallet turns off. (The “5th~8th-axis servomotor turned off” error occurs. The operation does not
stop.)
If the outside door (front door) is closed or the door interlock is invalidated, the servomotor
will turn on and the error will disappear.

○ Servomotor OFF of all axes

When the inside door is open before the MEMORY operation starts (machine is in stop state),
or if the outside door (front door) is opened with the QT not indexed, the servomotors of all
axes turn off. (The “Open door” error occurs.) If the outside door (front door) is closed or the
door interlock is invalidated, the servomotors will turn on and the error will disappear.

2010/12/13 8 eR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B

Sicherheitshandbuch für die mit

Aufstellung und Einrichtung des
Tapping Center betrauten Techniker

Tapping Center
TC-R2B

Vor Inbetriebnahme des Tapping Center das

vorliegende Sicherheitshandbuch bitte sorgfältig
durchlesen.

Brother Industries, Ltd. Machinery & Solution Company.

2010/01/20 1 gTR2BSAIN1-1.doc
 TC-R2B

Inhalt
Überblick über das Sicherheitshandbuch------ 3
Dieses Handbuch durchlesen ------------------------------------------------- 3
Zweck dieses Handbuchs ----------------------------------------------------- 3
Inhalt des Sicherheitshandbuchs und
Zusammenhang mit anderen Handbüchern --------------------------------- 3
Zusammenhang mit Sicherheitsaufklebern --------------------------------- 4
Sprache -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Nachbestellen------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Umgang mit dem Sicherheitshandbuch ------------------------------------- 5
Gefahrenstufe------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Reihenfolge bei der Erläuterung --------------------------------------------- 5
Bedeutung der Symbole------------------------------------------------------- 6

Bezeichnung der Komponenten ----------------- 8

TC-R2B ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8

Warnungen und vorbeugende Maßnahmen -- 10

GEFAHR------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10
WARNUNG -------------------------------------------------------------------- 11

Kontrolle der Sicherheitsaufkleber -------------- 20

2010/01/20 2 gTR2BSAIN1-1.doc
TC-R2B

Überblick über das Sicherheitshandbuch

Dieses Handbuch durchlesen
Alle Personen, die mit dem Tapping Center arbeiten, einschließlich der Personen, die das Tapping
Center im Werk installieren, die Werkstoffe mit dem TAPPING CENTER bearbeiten und die das
Tapping Center einstellen und reparieren, sind angehalten, dieses Sicherheitshandbuch durchzulesen.
In diesem Sicherheitshandbuch werden alle Personen, die mit dem Tapping Center arbeiten, als
Benutzer bezeichnet.

Zweck dieses Handbuchs

Das Tapping Center beinhaltet elektrische Hochspannungskreise, mit hoher Drehzahl umlaufende
Werkzeuge sowie Tische und ATC-Magazine, die sich mit hoher Kraft bewegen. Daher sind mit
dieser Maschine verschiedene Gefahren verbunden.
Sinn und Zweck dieses Sicherheitshandbuchs ist es, die Benutzer vor diesen Gefahren zu schützen.
Daher ist im Sicherheitshandbuch Folgendes erläutert:
Warnungen: Hinweis auf Gefahren
Vorbeugende Maßnahmen: Maßnahmen zur Vermeidung von Gefahrensituationen

Inhalt des Sicherheitshandbuchs und Zusammenhang mit

anderen Handbüchern
Jede Betriebsanleitung, mit Ausnahme der Programmieranleitung beinhaltet ein Sicherheitshandbuch.
Sicherheitshandbücher werden an die entsprechenden Personenkreise verteilt.
Die wichtigen Anweisungen der Betriebsanleitung zu Maschinenfunktionen und Betriebsverfahren
bitte durchlesen.
1. Bedienungsanleitung (für Maschinenbediener)
"Sicherheitshandbuch für den Bediener"
"Sicherheitshandbuch für die mit Aufstellung und Einrichtung des
Tapping Center betrauten Techniker"
"Bedienungsanleitung": Grundlegende Anweisungen zur Bedienung
der Maschine.
Englischer Teilecode : 693481001
2. Bedienungsanleitung (für Fachpersonal)
"Sicherheitshandbuch für den Bediener"
"Sicherheitshandbuch für die mit Aufstellung und Einrichtung des
Tapping Center betrauten Techniker"
"Türverriegelungsfunktion"
"Bedienungsanleitung": Anweisungen zur Einrichtung der Maschine
und zur Bearbeitung mit der Maschine
(Betrieb) Japanischer Teilecode : 693477001
Englischer Teilecode : 693480001
(Daten) Japanischer Teilecode : 693204001
Englischer Teilecode : 693206001
3. Betriebsanleitung “ "Sicherheitshandbuch für die mit Aufstellung und Einrichtung des
Tapping Center betrauten Techniker"
"Aufstellungsanleitung": Anweisungen zur Aufstellung und Montage
der Maschine und optionaler Ausrüstungen.

Japanischer Teilecode : 693476001

Englischer Teilecode : 693479001
4. Programmieranleitung "Programmieranleitung": Anweisungen zur Erstellung von
Bearbeitungsprogrammen
(Dialogbetrieb) Japanischer Teilecode : 693219001
Englischer Teilecode : 693220001
(NC-Steuerung) Japanischer Teilecode : 693203001
Englischer Teilecode : 693205001
5. Wartungsanleitung "Der Wartungsanleitung beiliegendes Sicherheitshandbuch für
Wartungstechniker, die für die Wartung des Tapping Center
qualifiziert sind"
"Wartungsanleitung: Einstellung und Reparatur der Maschine"
Die Wartungsanleitung wird nicht an die Kunden ausgehändigt.

2010/01/20 3 gTR2BSA1-2.doc
Zusammenhang mit Sicherheitsaufklebern
Besonders wichtige Hinweise, die in diesem Sicherheitshandbuch erwähnt sind, sind auch in Form
von Sicherheitsaufklebern an der Maschine angebracht.
Am Ende dieses Sicherheitshandbuches befindet sich eine Erläuterung der Sicherheitsaufkleber.
Wenn sich Sicherheitsaufkleber von der Maschine gelöst haben, müssen neue Sicherheitsaufkleber
besorgt und korrekt angebracht werden.

Sprache
Innerhalb von Japan transportierte Maschinen werden mit in japanischer Sprache abgefassten
Sicherheitshandbüchern und Sicherheitsaufklebern versandt. Von Japan ins Ausland versandte
Maschinen werden mit Sicherheitshandbüchern und Sicherheitsaufklebern in den folgenden vier
Sprachen ausgeliefert: Englisch, Deutsch, Französisch und Chinesisch.
Zu Handbüchern und Aufklebern in anderen Sprachen wenden Sie sich bitte an den Händler, bei
dem die Maschine gekauft wurde.

Nachbestellen
Wenn Sicherheitshandbücher oder Sicherheitsaufkleber verloren gegangen sind, können sie bei
dem Händler nachbestellt werden, bei dem die Maschine gekauft wurde.
Wenn Sie den für Sie zuständigen Händler nicht kennen, wenden Sie sich bitte an die unten
genannte Vertriebsstelle.

1-5, Kitajizoyama, Noda-cho, Kariya-shi, Aichi-ken, 448-0803, Japan.

BROTHER INDUSTRIES, LTD. Machinery & Solution Company.
Tel. +81-566-95-0075
Fax +81-566-25-3721

2011/05/27 4 gTCOMSA1-3.doc
 Umgang mit dem Sicherheitshandbuch
Darauf achten, dass keine Sicherheitshandbücher verloren gehen. Sie müssen stets griffbereit
aufbewahrt werden.
Außerdem bei einem Weiterverkauf der Maschine die Handbücher zusammen mit der Maschine an
den neuen Besitzer übergeben.
Gefahrenstufe
Basierend auf dem Ausmaß der Gefahren bei Missachtung der Sicherheitsvorschriften und
sonstiger Anweisungen lassen sich drei Gefahrenstufen unterscheiden.

1. GEFAHR

GEFAHR
Lebensgefahr oder Gefahr ernster Körperverletzungen.

2. WARNUNG

WARNUNG
Gefahr ernster Verletzungen.

3. VORSICHT

VORSICHT
Gefahr leichter oder mittelschwerer Verletzungen.

Reihenfolge bei der Erläuterung

Die Sicherheitsvorschriften werden in der folgenden Reihenfolge erläutert:
1. Signalwörter (GEFAHR, WARNUNG, VORSICHT) und Symbole, die den Grad der Gefahr
angeben.
2. Art der Gefahr (Gegenstand)
3. Art der möglichen Schäden und Verletzungen
4. Vorbeugende Maßnahme

2011/05/27 5 gTCOMSA1-3.doc
 Bedeutung der Symbole
Symbole werden auf den Sicherheitsaufklebern und in den Warnhinweisen im
Sicherheitshandbuch verwendet, um mögliche Gefahren anschaulich zu machen.

1. Gefahr

Rutschgefahr Gefahr beweglicher Teile

Stolpergefahr Gefahr eines Stromschlags

Gefahr eines Stromschlags Quetschgefahr

Quetschgefahr Gefahr hoher Temperaturen

für die Hand

Gefahr hoher Temperaturen Schnittgefahr

Schnittgefahr Explosionsgefahr

Gefahr scharfer Kanten Gefahr eines fallenden

Gegenstands

Gefahr eines fallenden Gefahr umlaufender

Gegenstands Gegenstände

Sturzgefahr Spritzgefahr

Spritzgefahr Brandgefahr

2011/05/27 6 gTCOMSA1-3.doc
 2. Vorbeugende Maßnahmen

Gehörschutz tragen. Handschuhe tragen.

Sicherheitsschuhe tragen. Netzstecker herausziehen.

Nicht berühren. Helm tragen.

Erdungskabel anschließen. Nicht zerlegen.

Augenschutz tragen.

2011/05/27 7 gTCOMSA1-3.doc
部品名 Section Names Bezeichnung der Komponenten Noms de sections 各部件名称

A
6 21 23
12 24
2
1
7 1

38
25

30
12
14
A
22

9
28

11 31

18

19 34 20
5 10
3.4
35 37
16 17
15 32

36
0906-1~7.ai

2010/12/10 8 TR2BSA2.doc
部品名 Section Names Bezeichnung der Komponenten Noms de sections 各部件名称

No. 各部の名称 Section names Bezeichnung der Komponenten Noms de sections 各部件名称
日本語 English Deutsch Français 中文
1. 制御箱 control box Steuerschrank armoire de commande 控制箱
2. 機械ｶﾊﾞｰ machine cover Maschinenabdeckung couvercle de la machine 机械外罩
3. ﾌｨｰﾄﾞﾎｰﾙﾄﾞｽｲｯﾁ feed hold switch Vorschubhaltschalter interrupteur d'arrêt de l'avance 进给保持开关
4. ﾌｨｰﾄﾞﾎｰﾙﾄﾞﾗﾝﾌﾟ feed hold lamp Vorschubhalt-Kontrollleuchte témoin de contrôle d'arrêt de l'avance 进给保持指示灯
5. ﾄﾞｱｲﾝﾀﾛｯｸｽｲｯﾁ door interlock switch Türverriegelungsschalter interrupteur de verrouillage de porte 门互锁开关
6. ﾒﾝﾃﾅﾝｽｶﾊﾞｰ maintenance cover Wartungsabdeckung couvercle d'entretien 维修罩盖
7. 正面扉 front door Vordertür porte avant 正面门
9. ﾄﾞｱｲﾝﾀﾛｯｸｷｰ door interlock key Schlüssel des Türverriegelungsschalters clé de verrouillage de porte 门互锁键
10. ｽﾋﾟﾝﾄﾞﾙ spindle Spindel broche 主轴
11. ATC ﾏｶﾞｼﾞﾝ ATC magazine ATC-Magazin magasin ATC ATC 刀库
12. とって handle Griff poignée 把手
14. ﾚﾍﾞﾘﾝｸﾞﾎﾞﾙﾄ leveling bolt Nivellierschraube boulon de mise à niveau 调平螺栓
15. ｸｰﾗﾝﾄﾉｽﾞﾙ coolant nozzle Kühlmitteldüse buse de liquide d'arrosage 冷却液喷嘴
16. 工具 tool Werkzeug outil 刀具
17. 工具ﾎﾙﾀﾞ tool holder Werkzeughalter porte-outil 刀具夹
18. ｽﾋﾟﾝﾄﾞﾙﾍｯﾄﾞ spindle head Spindelkopf tête de broche 主轴头
19. 非常停止ｽｲｯﾁ emergency stop switch Not-Aus-Schalter interrupteur d'arrêt d'urgence 紧急停止开关
20. ｸｲｯｸﾃｰﾌﾞﾙ quick table Schnellschalttisch table à action instantanée 快速回转工作台
21. 主電源ﾌﾞﾚｰｶ main power breaker Hauptschalter disjoncteur d’alimentation principale 主电源开关
22. ｸｰﾗﾝﾄﾀﾝｸ coolant tank Kühlmitteltank réservoir de liquide d'arrosage 冷却液罐
23. ﾒﾝﾃﾅﾝｽｶﾊﾞｰ maintenance cover Wartungsabdeckung couvercle d'entretien 维修罩盖
24. 回生抵抗ｶﾊﾞｰ regenerative resistor cover Abdeckung d. Rückkopplungswiderstands couvercle de la résistance régénérative 再生电阻罩
25. 操作ﾊﾟﾈﾙ operation panel Bedientafel pupitre de commande 操作面板
28. ｸﾞﾘｯﾌﾟｶﾊﾞｰ grip cover Griffschutz couverture de jambe 刀柄护罩
30. 自動間欠給油ﾎﾟﾝﾌﾟ automatic intermittent lubricating unit Automatische Intervallschmieranlage unité de lubrication intermittente autom. 自动间歇加油泵
31. 内扉 inter door Innentür porte intérieure 内门
34. Y 軸ﾃﾚｽｺｶﾊﾞｰ Y-axis telescopic cover Y-Achsen-Teleskopabdeckung carter télescopique de l'axe Y Y 轴伸缩护罩
35. X 軸ﾃﾚｽｺｶﾊﾞｰ X-axis telescopic cover X-Achsen-Teleskopabdeckung carter télescopique de l'axe X X 轴伸缩护罩
36. ｴﾌﾟﾛﾝｶﾊﾞｰ apron cover Schutzschürze carter de tablier 防溅护罩
37. 洗浄ｶﾞﾝ clearing gun Reinigungspistole pistolet de nettoyage 气力清洁枪
38. 側面扉 side door Seitentür porte latérale 侧面门

2010/12/10 9 TR2BSA2.doc
 TC-R2B

Warnungen und vorbeugende Maßnahmen

Die Zahlen in Klammern wie z.B. (1), (2) entsprechen den betreffenden Komponenten in der Liste
der einzelnen Komponenten.
Gefahr Gefahr
SD1 Mit dem Tapping Center sind verschiedene Gefahren verbunden.
SD1-1 Das Sicherheitshandbuch vor Inbetriebnahme der Maschine durchlesen, um sich mit
diesen Gefahren und den betreffenden vorbeugenden Maßnahmen vertraut zu machen.
SD1-2 Alle Benutzer müssen mit der Position des Not-Aus-Schalters (19) sowie mit seiner
Funktion vertraut sein.

SD2 Der Steuerschrank (1) beinhaltet unter hoher Spannung stehende Teile. Werden
solche Teile versehentlich berührt, so kann dies schwerwiegende Verletzungen oder
den Tod zur Folge haben.
SD2-1 Nur für Arbeiten an der Elektrik qualifiziertes und mit dem Umgang mit den
elektrischen Stromkreisen dieser Maschine vertrautes Personal ist befugt, die
elektrischen Komponenten instand zu halten und Inspektionen durchzuführen.
SD2-2 Vor Aufnahme des Betriebs den Hauptschalter (21) ausschalten. Es muss ein Schild
mit der Aufschrift 'Wartungsarbeiten im Gange' angebracht werden.
SD2-3 Beim Verlassen der Maschine die Tür des Steuerschranks schließen und festschrauben.

SD3 Es besteht die Gefahr, sich während der Bearbeitung in der Maschine zu verfangen
und dabei schwer zu verletzen.
SD3-1 Nicht während des Betriebs in den Bereich hinter der Maschinenabdeckung (2)
greifen oder diesen Bereich betreten.
SD3-2 Vor Aufnahme des Betriebs sicherstellen, dass sich niemand hinter der
Maschinenabdeckung befindet.
SD3-3 Hände, Füße und Körper während des Betriebs von den beweglichen Teilen
fernhalten.
SD3-4 Vor dem Greifen in die Maschine oder vor dem Betreten der Maschine den
Hauptschalter (21) ausschalten und mit einem Vorhängeschloss sichern, damit er
nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.

SD4 Solange der Türverriegelungsschalter (5) deaktiviert ist, finden auch dann
Maschinenbewegungen statt, wenn die Vordertür (7) oder die Seitentür (38) offen steht.
Es besteht die Gefahr, sich an einem umlaufenden Werkzeug zu schneiden oder sich
in der Maschine zu verfangen.
SD4-1 Während der Wartung der Maschine muss auf eventuelle Maschinenbewegungen
Acht gegeben werden, damit die Maschine im Bedarfsfall sofort angehalten werden
kann. Nach Abschluss von Wartung und Einrichtung den Türverriegelungsschalter
stets wieder aktivieren. Den Schlüssel des Türverriegelungsschalters (9) abziehen
und sicher aufbewahren.
SD4-2 Bei deaktiviertem Türverriegelungsschalter darf die Maschine nicht verlassen werden.

SD5 Bei deaktiviertem Türverriegelungsschalter (5) kann sich der Schnellschalttisch (20)
bewegen.
Der Bediener kann sich am Schnellschalttisch verfangen und dabei verletzen.
SD5-1 Während der Maschineneinrichtung muss auf eventuelle Maschinenbewegungen
Acht gegeben werden, damit die Maschine im Bedarfsfall sofort angehalten werden
kann. Nach Abschluss der Maschineneinrichtung den Türverriegelungsschalter stets
wieder aktivieren (Stellung ON). Der Schlüssel des Türverriegelungsschalter (9)
muss abgezogen und vom Vorgesetzten aufbewahrt werden.

2010/12/07 10 gTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SD7 Eine fehlerhafte Erdung der Maschine kann Stromschläge zur Folge haben, was
schwerwiegende Verletzungen oder den Tod verursachen kann.
SD7-1 Die Maschine wie vorgeschrieben erden.

SD8 Bei Verwendung von Kühlmittel auf Ölbasis für Maschinen die mit einem System
für die Kühlmittelzufuhr durch die Spindel (CTS) ausgerüstet sind, besteht
Brandgefahr.
SD8-1 Stets wasserlösliches Kühlmittel verwenden.

Warnung WARNUNG

SW1 Bei Berührung umlaufender Werkzeuge (16) sind Verletzungen die Folge.
SW1-1 Ausreichenden Abstand zu umlaufenden Werkzeugen halten.

SW2 Es besteht Verletzungsgefahr durch abgebrochene Werkzeuge (16) oder

herausgeschleuderte Werkstücke.
SW2-1 Vordertür (7) und Seitentür (38) schließen und die Maschine in Gang setzen.

SW3 Der Bediener kann sich in umlaufenden Teilen verfangen, was eine Verletzung zur
Folge haben kann.
SW3-1 Ausreichenden Abstand zu umlaufenden Werkzeugen (16), Spindel (10) und
ATC-Magazin (11) halten.
SW3-2 Eng anliegende Kleidung tragen. Langes Haar unter der Arbeitskappe verstecken.
Handschuhe ausschließlich bei Einrichtarbeiten tragen, die bei still stehender
Maschine durchgeführt werden. Keinen Schmuck o.ä. tragen. Umlaufende Teile
nicht festhalten.

SW4 Wenn Sicherheitsvorrichtungen verstellt oder in irgendeiner Weise verändert

werden, ist ihre korrekte Funktion nicht mehr gewährleistet. Es besteht die Gefahr,
sich in der Maschine zu verfangen, sich an ihr zu stoßen oder einen Stromschlag zu
erhalten.
SW4-1 Sicherheitsvorrichtungen dürfen nicht verstellt oder in anderer Weise verändert
werden. Eine Sicherheitsvorrichtung nicht so verändern, dass sie nicht mehr ihre
korrekte Funktion ausüben kann.

2010/12/07 11 gTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW5 Wenn Späne in die Augen geschleudert werden, besteht die Gefahr,
Augenverletzungen davonzutragen oder sogar das Augenlicht zu verlieren.
SW5-1 Eine Schutzbrille zum Schutz gegen herausgeschleuderte Späne tragen.
SW5-2 Späne nicht mit Druckluft fortblasen.

SW6 Falls Späne mit bloßen Händen berührt werden, besteht die Gefahr, sich zu
schneiden oder zu verbrennen.
SW6-1 Späne nicht mit bloßen Händen berühren. Werkstücke nicht an ihren scharfen
Kanten anfassen.
SW6-2 Zum Entfernen von Spänen Handschuhe tragen und eine Bürste verwenden.
SW6-3 Späne stets bei angehaltener Maschine entfernen.

SW7 Sollte das Werkzeug (16) an der Schneide angefasst werden, besteht die Gefahr von
Schnittverletzungen.
SW7-1 Werkzeuge nicht an der Schneide anfassen. Die Werkzeuge immer am Schaft des
Werkzeughalters (17) anfassen.

SW8 Wenn schwere Gegenstände auf die Füße fallen, kann dies zu Knochenbrüchen führen.
SW8-1 Beim Heben schwerer Gegenstände sind Sicherheitsschuhe zu tragen.

SW9 Das Anheben von schweren Gegenständen kann zu einem Bandscheibenvorfall führen.
SW9-1 Beim Heben von schweren Gegenständen Hilfe in Anspruch nehmen
SW9-2 Gegenstände aus den Beinen heraus und nicht aus dem Rücken heraus heben.

SW10 Es kann zu Gehörschäden kommen, wenn über längere Zeiträume enorme

Lärmbelastung herrscht.
SW10-1 Beim Arbeiten in einer Umgebung mit starker Geräuschentwicklung einen
Gehörschutz wie z.B. Ohrstöpsel tragen.

SW11 Hochdruckluft kann explodieren und Augen oder Ohren verletzen.

SW11-1 Nur entsprechend qualifizierte und kundige Fachkräfte dürfen an dieser Maschine
Hochdruck-Luftrohrleitungen installieren oder verändern.
SW11-2 Vor der Reparatur von Hochdruck-Luftschläuchen zunächst die Schläuche von der
Druckquelle abtrennen und Restdruck entweichen lassen. Es muss ein Schild mit der
Aufschrift "Wartungsarbeiten im Gange" angebracht werden.

SW12 Beim Aufrichten kann sich der Bediener den Kopf stoßen.
SW12-1 Einen Schutzhelm tragen, wenn an der Maschine gearbeitet wird.

2010/12/07 12 gTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW13 Wenn Werkzeuge in der Maschine liegen geblieben sind und die Maschine in Gang
gesetzt wird, können die Werkzeuge herausgeschleudert werden und Verletzungen
verursachen.
SW13-1 Keine Handwerkzeuge in der Maschine zurücklassen.

SW14 Es besteht die Gefahr, sich die Hände an Vordertür (7), Innentür (31) oder Seitentür
(38) zu klemmen, wenn diese beim Öffnen und Schließen nicht an den
entsprechenden Griffen (12, 32 und 39) angefasst werden.
SW14-1 Zum Öffnen und Schließen die Tür am Griff anfassen.

SW16 Wenn Werkzeuge auf den Steuerschrank (1), auf die Bedientafel (25) oder auf die
Maschine gelegt werden, können sie aufgrund der Maschinenvibration
herunterfallen.
SW16-1 Keine Gegenstände auf Steuerschrank und Maschine legen.

SW17 Wenn man auf die Maschine oder den Kühlmitteltank (22) steigt, besteht die Gefahr,
zu stürzen.
SW17-1 Nicht auf Maschine oder Kühlmitteltank klettern.

SW18 Wenn man mit der Hand unter die Nivellierschrauben (14) kommt, kann die Hand
eingeklemmt werden, was eine Verletzung zur Folge hat.

SW18-1 Nicht mit den Händen unter die Nivellierschraube greifen. Zum Nivellieren
Werkzeuge verwenden.

SW19 Wenn ein Kabel frei herumhängt oder nicht ordnungsgemäß bedeckt ist, besteht die
Gefahr, darüber zu stolpern.
SW19-1 Kabel müssen straff verlegt werden. Auf dem Boden verlegte Kabel müssen
abgedeckt werden.

SW20 Veränderungen an der Maschine können Sicherheitsvorrichtungen in ihrer Funktion

beeinträchtigen, so dass alle Warnungen hinfällig werden.
SW20-1 Die Maschine nicht verändern. Sollte eine Änderung erforderlich werden, vorher mit
Brother Industries, Ltd. Kontakt aufnehmen und schriftlich um Erlaubnis bitten.

2010/12/07 13 gTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW21 Es besteht die Gefahr von Augenverletzungen, falls Kühlmittel in die Augen spritzt.
SW21-1 Bei Einstellung der Kühlmitteldüse (15) eine Schutzbrille tragen.
SW21-2 Bei Verwendung der Reinigungspistole (37) eine Schutzbrille tragen.
SW21-3 Falls Kühlmittel in die Augen gespritzt ist, die Augen mit klarem Wasser
auswaschen und einen Arzt aufsuchen.

SW22 Wenn in Maschinenspalte gegriffen wird, kann man sich die Finger quetschen und
verletzen.
SW22-1 Nicht mit den Fingern hinter den Griffschutz (28) greifen.
SW22-2 Nicht die Finger in den Spalt zwischen Werkzeug (16) oder Werkzeughalter (17)
und ATC-Magazin (11) stecken.
SW22-3 Nicht die Finger in den Spalt zwischen Werkzeug oder Werkzeughalter und Spindel
(10) stecken.

SW23 Wenn Kühlmittel, Öl oder Späne auf dem Boden verteilt sind, besteht die Gefahr,
auszurutschen und zu stürzen oder sich zu stoßen und so zu verletzen.
SW23-1 Die Stromversorgung der Maschine ausschalten, die Maschine innen sowie den
Bereich rund um die Maschine säubern und dann mit der Bearbeitung beginnen.
SW23-2 Bei Aufstellung der Maschine einen Schutzhelm und Sicherheitsschuhe tragen.

SW24 Beim Einsetzen und Herausnehmen des Werkzeughalters (17) besteht die Gefahr,
sich die Hand an der Schneide des Werkzeugs (16) zu schneiden oder mit der Hand
gegen die Maschine zu stoßen.
SW24-1 Werkzeuge nicht an der Schneide anfassen. Lederhandschuhe tragen.
Den Werkzeughalter mit beiden Händen festhalten.

SW25 Die Maschine kann sich abrupt in Gang setzen oder es können Werkzeuge
herunterfallen.
SW25-1 Nicht mit Händen, Füßen und anderen Körperteilen unter den Spindelkopf (18)
kommen, wenn der Not-Aus-Schalter nicht betätigt wurde.
SW25-2 Den Schnellschalttisch (20) für Einrichtzwecke positionieren.
SW25-3 Den Hauptschalter (21) ausschalten und mit einem Vorhängeschloss sichern, damit
er nicht eingeschaltet werden kann. Erst dann die Maschine schmieren.

SW26 Bei Bearbeitung von Werkstücken mit einem Kühlmittel auf Ölbasis kann sich das
bearbeitete Teil erhitzen und Feuer fangen.
SW26-1 Wenn mit Kühlmittel auf Ölbasis gearbeitet wird, einen Feuermelder und einen
automatischen Feuerlöscher installieren.
SW26-2 Bei der Bearbeitung von Werkstücken muss stets ein Bediener anwesend sein.

2010/12/07 14 gTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW27 Wenn sich der Bediener gegen die Maschine lehnt, kann er erfasst werden oder
gegen die Maschine stoßen, wenn sich die Maschine bewegt. Dies kann
Verletzungen zur Folge haben.

SW27-1 Nicht gegen die Maschine lehnen.

SW28 Wenn Gegenstände an den Not-Aus-Schalter (19) gehängt werden, kann dieser im
Bedarfsfall möglicherweise nicht richtig betätigt werden.
SW28-1 Es ist untersagt, Gegenstände jeglicher Art an den Not-Aus-Schalter zu hängen.

SW30 Der Kühlmitteltank (22) ist schwer. Beim Versuch, ihn zu heben, kann der Tank auf
die Füße fallen oder es kann zu einem Bandscheibenvorfall kommen.
SW30-1 Den Kühlmitteltank nicht anheben - auch nicht zum Beseitigen von Spänen.

SW31 Beim Betreten der Maschine besteht die Gefahr, auszurutschen und zu fallen oder
sich in der Maschine zu verfangen.
SW31-1 Beim Betreten der Maschine stets den Hauptschalter (21) ausschalten und mit einem
Vorhängeschloss sichern, damit er nicht wieder eingeschaltet werden kann. Erst
dann Kühlmittel und Späne beseitigen.
Zusätzlich Sicherheitsschuhe und einen Schutzhelm tragen. Im Bereich der
Maschine muss ein Schild mit der Aufschrift "Wartungsarbeiten im Gange"
angebracht werden.

SW32 Solange Maschinenabdeckung (2) und Wartungsabdeckungen (6), (23) nicht

angebracht sind, besteht die Gefahr, sich in der Maschine zu verfangen oder sich an
abgebrochenen Werkzeugen zu verletzen.
SW32-1 Vor dem Einschalten der Stromversorgung sicherstellen, dass die
Wartungsabdeckung ordnungsgemäß angebracht ist.

SW33 Werkzeuge (16) oder Werkzeughalter (17), deren Gewicht oder Größe den
vorgegebenen Grenzwert überschreitet, können bei der Bearbeitung
herausgeschleudert werden.
SW33-1 Die vorgeschriebene Gewichts- und Größenbeschränkung der Werkzeuge und
Werkzeughalter einhalten.
SW33-2 Bezüglich der geltenden Beschränkungen für die Werkzeuge siehe den
Werkzeugaufkleber an der Maschine oder die Bedienungsanleitung.

2010/12/07 15 gTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW34 Bei Berührung des Rückkopplungswiderstands kann man sich verbrennen, da dieser
während des Betriebs heiß wird.
SW34-1 Die Abdeckung des Rückkopplungswiderstands (24) nicht abnehmen.

SW35 Bei Berührung des Motors kann man sich verbrennen, da dieser während des
Betriebs heiß wird.
SW35-1 Der Motor darf frühestens 30 Minuten nach dem Ausschalten der Maschine berührt
werden.

SW37 Wenn der Sollwert der Schutzvorrichtung geändert wird, funktioniert die
Schutzvorrichtung nicht. Es besteht Brandgefahr.
SW37-1 Den Sollwert der Schutzvorrichtung nicht ändern.

SW38 Bei Drehung des ATC-Magazins (11) können Werkzeuge (16) gegen bearbeitete
Werkstücke, Spannvorrichtungen oder andere Maschinenteile schlagen und
beschädigt werden.
SW38-1 Die Werkzeuglänge so einstellen, dass die Werkzeuge nicht mit den bearbeiteten
Werkstücken, Spannvorrichtungen oder anderen Maschinenteilen kollidieren können
- auch dann nicht, wenn sich der ATC dreht.

SW39 Wenn Steuerschrank (1) oder Bedientafel (25) nass sind, kann der Bediener einen
Stromschlag bekommen.
SW39-1 Darauf achten, dass weder Kühlmittel noch Wasser oder Späne auf den
Steuerschrank oder die Bedientafel gelangen.
SW39-2 Den Steuerschrank nicht mit nassen Händen berühren.

SW40 Wenn der von außen angeschlossene Netz-Schutzerdeleiter (PE) zu kurz ist, kann er
sich lösen, wenn am Kabel gezogen wird. Es besteht die Gefahr eines Stromschlags.
SW40-1 Darauf achten, dass der Netz-Schutzerdeleiter (PE) länger als die anderen Leiter (L1,
L2, L3) ist, und einen gewissen Durchhang zulassen.

SW41 Beim Einschalten der Stromversorgung oder bei Bearbeitung eines Werkstücks an
Orten, an denen Explosionsgefahr besteht, kann es aufgrund von Funkenentwicklung
an der Maschine zu einer Explosion kommen.
SW41-1 Die Maschine darf nicht an Orten aufgestellt werden, an denen Explosionsgefahr besteht.
SW41-2 An Orten, an denen Explosionsgefahr besteht, darf die Maschine weder eingeschaltet
noch eingerichtet werden und es darf an solchen Orten auch keine Bearbeitung
ausgeführt werden.

SW43 Wenn ein von einem schweren Gegenstand zerdrücktes Kabel mit den Fingern
berührt wird, besteht die Gefahr eines Stromschlags. Das zerdrückte Kabel kann
einen Kurzschluss verursachen.
SW43-1 Qualifizierte Elektriker müssen die Kabel so verlegen, dass sie nicht
zusammengedrückt werden. Beschädigte Kabel müssen durch neue ersetzt werden.

2010/12/07 16 gTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW44 Je nach zu bearbeitendem Werkstückmaterial (z.B. Magnesium) können die Späne

Feuer fangen oder explodieren.
SW44-1 Späne müssen sofort entfernt werden.
SW44-2 Bei der Bearbeitung solcher Werkstoffe stets einen Feuerlöscher griffbereit halten
und die Maschine auf keinen Fall unbemannt laufen lassen.

SW45 Wenn bei Werkzeugen (16) mit auswechselbarem Schneideneinsatz letzterer nicht
ordnungsgemäß befestigt wird, kann er sich während der Spindeldrehung vom
Werkzeug lösen und umstehende Personen ernsthaft verletzen.
SW45-1 Vor dem Einsetzen des Werkzeugs in die Maschine sicherstellen, dass der
Schneideneinsatz sicher befestigt ist.

SW49 Bei Verwendung eines Dreileiter-Sensors mit eigener Stromleitung besteht Brandgefahr.
SW49-1 Anstelle eines Dreileiter-Sensors einen Zweileiter-Sensor verwenden.
SW49-2 Wenn die Verwendung eines Dreileiter-Sensors unumgänglich ist, eine zusätzliche
Sicherung (max. 1 A) an der Stromleitung jedes Sensors zwischenschalten.

SW50 Sollten Rohrleitungen Schlägen ausgesetzt sein, kann es zu Undichtigkeiten kommen. In

die Augen gelangendes Kühlmittel kann zu Verlust des Augenlichts führen.
SW50-1 Darauf achten, dass die Rohrleitungen keinen Schlägen ausgesetzt sind.

SW51 Bei Ausrichtung der Kühlmitteldüse besteht die Gefahr, sich die Hand an der
Werkzeugschneide zu schneiden oder mit der Hand gegen die Maschine zu stoßen.
SW51-1 Lederhandschuhe tragen.

SW52 Das Verschieben der Maschine mit angeschlossenen Kabeln kann einen Stromschlag
zur Folge haben.
SW52-1 Die Kabel vom Hauptgehäuse der Maschine und vom Kühlmitteltank (22) abtrennen,
bevor die Maschine transportiert wird.

SW55 Aufgrund der hohen Anordnung der automatischen Intervallschmieranlage (30) kann
beim Auffüllen des Tanks Öl überlaufen und in die Augen gelangen.
SW55-1 Beim Auffüllen des Tanks stets eine Schutzbrille tragen.

SW56 Da starker Ölnebel entsteht, kann dem Bediener beim Auswechseln des Werkstücks
schlecht werden.
SW56-1 Einen Ölnebelabscheider montieren.

2010/12/07 17 gTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW57 Bei Filterreinigung, Filterwechsel oder ähnlichen Wartungsarbeiten an einer

Maschine, die mit einem System für Kühlmittelzufuhr durch die Spindel (CTS)
ausgestattet ist, kann Kühlmittel herausspritzen und die Augen schädigen.
SW57-1 Vor der Ausführung von Wartungsarbeiten stets Restdruck entweichen lassen.

SW58 Bei in das Magazin (11) oder in die Spindel (10) eingespanntem Werkzeug (16)
besteht die Gefahr, sich beim Betreten der Maschine den Kopf am Werkzeug zu
stoßen.
SW58-1 Beim Betreten der Maschine stets einen Schutzhelm tragen.

SW59 Die Abdeckungen der Maschinenleuchte und der Tischleuchte (aus durchsichtigem
Glas) können bei Gewaltanwendung zerbrechen und Handverletzungen verursachen.
SW59-1 Nicht mit einem Gegenstand gegen die Abdeckungen der Maschinenleuchte und der
Tischleuchte (aus durchsichtigem Glas) schlagen oder eine zu hohe Kraft darauf ausüben.
SW59-2 Beim Auswechseln der Leuchtstofflampe stets Handschuhe tragen.

SW60 Der Hebebock für die Nivellierung der Maschine könnte sich lösen, wobei die
Gefahr besteht, sich die Hand zu quetschen.
SW60-1 Falls ein Hebebock verwendet wird, muss er von vorn mittig unter den Sockel
gesetzt werden.

SW61 Wer auf den Kühlmitteltank (22) klettert läuft Gefahr, auszurutschen und sich zu
verletzen.
SW61-1 Nicht auf Teile der Maschine klettern.

SW62 Wenn Klemmenleistenschrauben nach der Verdrahtung lose sind, kann sich
aufgrund des mangelhaften Kontakts Wärme entwickeln. Es besteht Brandgefahr.

SW62-1 Nach der Verdrahtung sicherstellen, dass keine Schrauben lose sind.

SW63 Wenn die Maschine auf instabilem Untergrund aufgestellt wird, kann sie sich bei
der Bearbeitung verschieben oder umstürzen und dadurch Verletzungen oder
Maschinenschäden verursachen.
SW63-1 Die Maschine auf festem und ebenem Untergrund aufstellen.
Der Untergrund muss folgende Anforderungen erfüllen:
 Der Untergrund darf unter einem Gewicht von 2600 kg nicht nachgeben oder
sich verziehen.
 Der Untergrund muss eben, d.h. frei von Buckeln oder Vertiefungen sein.
 Die Bodenfläche muss verfestigt sein und darf sich unter einem Druck von
1,0 MPa nicht verziehen.
 Das Bodenmaterial darf nicht altern.

2010/12/07 18 gTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW64 Bei mangelhafter Beleuchtung der Anlage ist der Innenraum der Maschine dunkel
und es besteht die Gefahr, sich die Hände an Spannvorrichtungen oder
Werkzeugschneiden zu verletzen.
SW64-1 Bei einer Beleuchtungsstärke im Inneren der Maschine von max. 500 Lux eine
Maschinenleuchte einbauen.

SW65 Beim Klettern auf X-Achsen-Teleskopabdeckung R (35),

Y-Achsen-Teleskopabdeckung (34) oder Schutzschürze (36) besteht die Gefahr,
auszurutschen und zu stürzen und sich so zu verletzen.

SW65-1 Nicht auf Abdeckungen klettern.

SW66 Es besteht Verletzungsgefahr, wenn in unnatürlicher Körperhaltung gearbeitet wird.

SW66-1 Bei der Arbeit stets eine natürliche Körperhaltung einnehmen.

SW67 Es besteht die Gefahr, über die Ankerplatte zu stolpern und sich zu verletzen.
SW67-1 Stets einen Schutzhelm und Sicherheitsschuhe tragen, wenn an der Maschine
gearbeitet oder daran vorbeigegangen wird.

SW68 Im Lampenschirm (durchsichtiges Glas) der Maschinenbeleuchtung befinden sich

Hochspannungsteile. Beim versehentlichen Berühren der Innenseite des Schirms
besteht die Gefahr, einen elektrischen Schlag zu bekommen und schwer verletzt
oder getötet zu werden.
Fremde Dinge (z. B. Kühlmittel, Späne) können die Teile beschädigen oder ein
Feuer verursachen.
SW68-1 Vor dem Auswechseln den Hauptschalter ausschalten und mit einem
Vorhängeschloss verschließen. Mit einem Schild anzeigen, dass in der Maschine
gearbeitet wird.
Während des Auswechselns darauf achten, dass keine fremden Dinge
reinkommen.
Vor dem Auswechseln der Fluoreszenzlampe Hände waschen.
Die Sicherung in der Maschinenbeleuchtung nicht auswechseln .
Die wasserdichte Kappe schließen und dann die Maschinenbeleuchtung überprüfen.

SW69 Die Abdeckplatte ist schwer. Beim Aus- und Einbau besteht Verletzungsgefahr
durch Herunterfallen.
SW69-1 Die Abdeckplatte muss von mindestens zwei Personen aus- und eingebaut werden.

2010/12/07 19 gTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

Kontrolle der Sicherheitsaufkleber

Sicherheitsaufkleber sind an der Maschine an den in der Abbildung gezeigten Positionen
angebracht. Sicherstellen, dass die Sicherheitsaufkleber fest kleben. Wenn sich
Sicherheitsaufkleber lösen, neue Aufkleber besorgen und korrekt anbringen.

6
3

8
7

0906.ai

2010/01/20 20 gTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[1] Sicherheitsaufkleber, Vorderseite

Sprache Teilecode
Japanisch, Chinesisch, Englisch 693508001
Englisch, Deutsch, Französisch 693504001

2010/01/20 21 gTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

[2] Werkzeugaufkleber, Vorderseite

Der Inhalt variiert je nach Spindeldrehzahl und Spindeltyp.

Typ BT

Teilecode
693526001 Werkzeugaufkleber BT2

Typ BBT

Teilecode
693525001 Werkzeugaufkleber BBT2

2010/01/20 22 gTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[3] Sicherheitsaufkleber, Rückseite

Sprache Teilecode
Japanisch, Chinesisch, Englisch . 693502001
Englisch, Deutsch, Französisch 693500001

2010/01/20 23 gTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

[4] Aufkleber, Rückkopplungswiderstand

Sprache Teilecode
Japanisch, Chinesisch, Englisch 690729001
Englisch, Deutsch, Französisch 691058001

[5] Aufkleber, Werkzeugausbau

Sprache Teilecode
Japanisch, Chinesisch, Englisch 693515001
Englisch, Deutsch, Französisch 693513001

2010/01/20 24 gTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[6] Sicherheitsaufkleber, Seitenabdeckung

Sprache Teilecode
Japanisch, Chinesisch, Englisch 693512001
Englisch, Deutsch, Französisch 693510001

2010/01/20 25 gTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

[7] Sicherheitsaufkleber 1, Kühlmittelzufuhr durch die Spindel

Sprache Teilecode
Japanisch, Chinesisch, Englisch 693001001
Englisch, Deutsch, Französisch 693002001

2010/01/20 26 gTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[8] Aufkleber 2, Kühlmittelzufuhr durch die Spindel

Sprache Teilecode
Japanisch, Chinesisch, Englisch, Deutsch, Französisch 693003001

693003001(1-1).wmf

[9] Aufkleber "Betreten verboten" 40

Teilecode
693178001

693178001.ai

2010/01/20 27 gTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

(Diese Seite ist leer.)

2010/01/20 28 gTR2BSA4
TC-R2B Türverriegelungsfunktion

TÜRVERRIEGELUNGSFUNKTION

1 Allgemeine Vorsichtsmaßnahmen
2 Äußere Ansicht
3 Inspektion der Türverriegelung
4 Einzelheiten der Funktion

2010/12/09 1 gR2BDoor.doc
Türverriegelungsfunktion TC-R2B

1 Allgemeine Vorsichtsmaßnahmen
GEFAHR
Umlaufende Werkzeuge und laufende Teile können Sie verletzen.
Wenn der Verriegelungsschalter außer Kraft ist, darf man mit
keinem Körperteil in die Maschine kommen.
Wenn der Verriegelungsschalter außer Kraft ist, darf man mit
keinem Körperteil in die Maschine kommen. Den Betriebsleiter
verständigen.
Bei außer Kraft gesetzter Verriegelung darf der Betriebsleiter
niemanden die Maschine benutzen lassen.
Vor Inbetriebnahme der Maschine sich mit eigenen Augen
vergewissern, daß die Verriegelung in Kraft ist.
Sollte der Verriegelungsschlüssel im Schloß stecken, muß der
Betriebsleiter darüber informiert werden.
Den Verriegelungsschlüssel muß der Betriebsleiter aufbewahren.

WARNUNG
Verriegelung in Kraft ist.
Wenn die Innentür nicht veschlossen sein sollte, muß der
Betriebsleiter davon benachrichtigt werden.

WARNUNG
Umlaufende Teile könnten Sie hineinziehen und verletzen.
Von umlaufenden Teilen, Werkzeugen, der Spindel und dem
ATC- Magazin sich fernhalten.
Körperanliegende Bekleidung tragen.
Lange Haare müssen unter einem Hut aufgesteckt werden.
Beim Arbeiten an der laufenden Maschine keine Handschuhe
tragen.
Keinen Schmuck tragen.
Umlaufende Teile nicht berühren.

2010/12/09 2 gR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B Türverriegelungsfunktion

Zweck
Die Türveriegelungsfunktion schützt die Benutzer der Maschine vor der Gefahr, durch umlaufende
Werkzeuge oder laufende Teile verletzt zu werden, oder durch umlaufende Teile in die Maschine
hineingezogen zu werden.

Einrichtungsbeschreibung
Bei in Kraft gesetzter Verriegelung wird die Außentür verriegelt, und die Höchstgeschwindigkeit
entsprechend der Situation vermindert.

Einrichtungsaufbau
Die Türverriegelungseinrichtung besteht aus Folgendem :
1. Türendschalter
2. Türschloß

Benutzung der Funktion

1. Beim täglichen Betrieb
muß der Verriegelungsschalter (1) immer in Kraft gesetzt sein.
2. Beim Einstellen der Arbeitsprozesse und Warten
darf man den Schalter nur notwendigenfalls außer Kraft setzen.
Lesen Sie bitte vor dem Einstellen und Warten der Maschine "Sicherheitsvorschrift für
Personen, die die Maschine installieren und den Arbeitsprozeß aufstellen" und
"Sicherheitsvorschrift für qualifiziertes Wartungspersonal".

Bitte halten Sie Folgendes bei außer Kraft gesetzter Verriegelung ein.
Umlaufende Werkzeuge und andere laufende Teile beachten.
Nach dem Einstellen und Warten den Schalter in Kraft setzen.
Den Schlüssel (2) muß der Betriebsleiter aufbewahren.

Betriebstafel

door.01.ai

2010/12/09 3 gR2BDoor.doc
Türverriegelungsfunktion TC-R2B

2 Äußere Ansicht
TC-R2B

Standardhub-Typ
Schlüssel

Türendschalter

Do001.ai

2010/12/09 4 gR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B Türverriegelungsfunktion

3 Inspektion der Türverriegelung

Vor Aufnahme des Betriebs sicherstellen, daß Türverriegelung und Not-Aus-Systeme einwandfrei
funktionieren.
Sollte eines dieser Systeme oder sogar beide nicht richtig funktionieren, muß dies unverzüglich
dem Vorgesetzten gemeldet werden.

Schritte zum Kontrollieren des Türverriegelungssystems

Schritte zum Kontrollieren auf Blockierung des Maschinenbetriebs bei geöffneter
Tür
(1) Sicherstellen, daß der Türverriegelungsschalter [DOOR INTERLOCK] aktiviert ist und
erst dann die Stromversorgung einschalten.
(2) Die Vordertür öffnen.
(3) In den manuellen Betrieb schalten und die Taste [P.INDX] an der Bedientafel drücken.
(4) Sicherstellen, daß die Spindel sich nicht bewegt und dass der Alarm "Door open” (Tür
offen) angezeigt wird.
Dieser Alarm beweist, daß das Türverriegelungssystem einwandfrei funktioniert.
(5) Anhand der oben beschriebenen Schritte (2) bis (4) die Seitentür kontrollieren.

Schritte zum Kontrollieren auf verriegelte Tür

(6) Die Vordertür bzw. Seitentür (Sonderausstattung) schließen.
(7) Die Taste [P.INDX] drücken.
(8) Bei umlaufender Spindel versuchen, die Vordertür zu öffnen. Sicherstellen, daß die
Vordertür verriegelt ist.
(9) Die Vordertür bzw. Seitentür (Sonderausstattung) schließen.
(10) Die Taste [SP.CW] drücken; die Spindeldrehung setzt ein.
(11) Versuchen, die Seitentür (Sonderausstattung) zu öffnen und sicherstellen, daß sie
verriegelt ist.
Ist die Tür verriegelt, beweist dies, daß die Türverriegelung einwandfrei funktioniert.
(12) Die Taste [STOP] drücken; die Spindel wird gestoppt.

Ablauf zum Überprüfen des Notstoppsystems

(1) Den [EMERGENCY STOP]-Schalter auf der Steuerkonsole drücken.
(2) Prüfen, dass die Alarmmeldung "Notschalter wurde aktiviert" auf dem Bildschirm
angezeigt wird.
(3) Den [EMERGENCY STOP]-Schalter im Uhrzeigersinn drehen, um ihn auszulösen.
(4) Die [RST]-Taste auf der Steuerkonsole drücken.
(5) Prüfen, dass die Alarmmeldung gelöscht wurde.

2010/12/09 5 gR2BDoor.doc
Türverriegelungsfunktion TC-R2B

4 Einzelheiten der Funktion

Türverrie Seitentür
gelungs (*8) Außentür Innentür Seitentür-Schloß Außentür-Schloß Maschinenbedienung
schalter
außer Zu Zu Auf/Zu nicht verriegelt nicht verriegelt (*5) Jeder Betrieb ist möglich.
Kraft Auf Zu (*6) Wenn die C-Achse geschaltet wurde, dreht sie sich mit
niedriger Drehzahl. (*1)

Auch die Zusatzachse der äußeren Palette dreht sich

mit niedriger Drehzahl. (*1)
 SPEICHER-Betrieb ist nur im Einzelsatzmodus
möglich.
 Am Ende eines jeden Satzes stoppt der
MDI-Betrieb.

Für die anderen Achsen (die oben nicht genannt sind)

können alle Funktionen genutzt werden.

Wenn die C-Achse nicht geschaltet wurde, werden alle

Achsen langsam bewegt. (*1)
Magazinschwenk, automatischer Werkzeugwechsel und
Gewindebohren sind nicht möglich.
 Spindeldrehung, Magazinschwenk,
automatischer Werkzeugwechsel und
Gewindebohren sind nicht möglich.
 Achsenverfahrbewegung, Spindelhalt und
Spindelausrichtung sind möglich.
 SPEICHER-Betrieb ist nur im Einzelsatzmodus
möglich.
 Der MDI-Betrieb ist nicht möglich.

Auf Alle Achsen werden langsam bewegt. (*1)

 Spindeldrehung, Magazinschwenk,
automatischer Werkzeugwechsel und
Gewindebohren sind nicht möglich.
 Achsenverfahrbewegung, Spindelhalt und
Spindelausrichtung sind möglich.
 SPEICHER-Betrieb ist nur im Einzelsatzmodus
möglich.
 Am Ende eines jeden Satzes stoppt der
MDI-Betrieb.

Zu↓ Der ganze Betrieb (einschießlich der Spindelrotation)

Auf hält sofort an.(*3)
Zu Zu Nur die zusätzliche Achse der Außenpalette hält sofort
↓ an, wenn die C-Achse an einer indexierten Position ist.
Auf Alle Betriebsabläufe (einschließlich der Spindelrotation)
sofort anhalten, während der C-Achsenrotation oder
wenn die C-Achse an einer nicht-indexierten Position
ist.(*3)
Auf Der ganze Betrieb (einschießlich der Spindelrotation)
hält sofort an.(*3)
Auf Auf/Zu Auf/Zu Alle Achsen verschieben sich mit niedriger
Geschwindigkeit.(*1)
 Spindelrotaition, Magazindrehung, ATC und
Gewindebohren sind nicht möglich.
 Achsenverschiebung, Spindelhalt und
Spindelausrichtung sind möglich.
 Programmierbedienung ist nur bei
Einzelbetriebsart möglich.
 Tastatureingabebedienung hält an jedem
Satzende.
Zu Auf Der ganze Betrieb (einschießlich der Spindelrotation)
↓ hält sofort an.(*3)
Auf
Auf Zu Der ganze Betrieb (einschießlich der Spindelrotation)
↓ hält sofort an.(*3)
Auf
Zu Auf/Zu Auf/Zu Der ganze Betrieb (einschießlich der Spindelrotation)
↓ hält sofort an.(*3)
Auf

2010/12/09 6 gR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B Türverriegelungsfunktion

Türverrie Seitentür
gelungs (*8) Außentür Innentür Seitentür-Schloß Außentür-Schloß Maschinenbedienung
schalter
in Kraft Zu Zu Zu Die Tür ist Verriegelt bei geschlossener Jeder Betrieb ist möglich.
verriegelt, Außentür und während der
wenn die Rotation der C-Achse oder
Seitentür der zusätzlichen Achse der
geschlossen Außenpalette oder während
ist und die des Maschinenbetriebs,
Maschine wenn die C-Achse an einer
arbeitet nicht-indexierten Position ist
(während der (Achsenverschiebung,
Achsenverschi Spindelrotation,
ebung, der Tastatureingabe- und
Spindelumdre Programmierbedienung
hung, des oder wenn der manuelle
MDI-Betriebs, Impulsgeber in Kraft gesetzt
des ist). (*4)
Auf Speicherbetrie Die Tür ist verriegelt, wenn Jeder Betrieb ist möglich.
bs oder wenn die Außentür geschlossen
der manuelle ist und die Maschine
Impulsgenerat arbeitet (während der
or Achsenverschiebung, der
eingeschaltet Spindelumdrehung, des
ist). MDI-Betriebs, des
Speicherbetriebs oder wenn
der manuelle
Impulsgenerator
eingeschaltet ist).
Auf Zu nicht verriegelt Wenn die C-Achse geschaltet wurde, können die
C-Achse und die Zusatzachse der äußeren Palette
nicht gedreht werden. (*2)
Für die anderen Achsen (die oben nicht genannt sind)
können alle Funktionen genutzt werden.
Wenn die C-Achse nicht geschaltet wurde, kann keine
Funktion ausgeführt werden. (*2)(*7)
Auf Alle Betriebe sind unmöglich. (*2) (*7)
Zu ↓ Der ganze Betrieb (einschießlich der
Auf Spindelrotation)hält sofort an. (*3) (*7)
Zu Zu - Wenn die C-Achse oder die Zusatzachse der äußeren
↓ Palette sich dreht oder ihr Schaltvorgang noch nicht
Auf abgeschlossen ist, wird der Betrieb (einschließlich der
Spindeldrehung) sofort gestoppt. (*3)(*7)

Andere Funktionen als die oben genannten sind

möglich

Auf Der ganze Betrieb (einschießlich der Spindelrotation)

hält sofort an. (*3) (*7)
Auf Auf/Zu Auf/Zu nicht verriegelt Alle Betriebe sind unmöglich. (*2) (*7)

Zu Zu Alle Betriebe sind unmöglich. (*2) (*7)

↓ ↓
Auf Auf
Zu Auf/Zu Auf/Zu - Der ganze Betrieb (einschießlich der Spindelrotation)
↓ hält sofort an. (*3) (*7)
Auf
außer Zu Zu Auf/Zu - - Keine Änderung
Kraft Auf Zu Wenn die C-Achse oder die Zusatzachse der äußeren
↓ Palette sich dreht oder ihr Schaltvorgang noch nicht
in abgeschlossen ist, wird der Betrieb (einschließlich der
Kraft Spindeldrehung) sofort gestoppt. (*3)(*7)

Andere Funktionen als die oben genannten sind

möglich.

Auf Der ganze Betrieb (einschießlich der Spindelrotation)

hält sofort an. (*3) (*7)
Auf Auf/Zu Auf/Zu Der ganze Betrieb (einschießlich der Spindelrotation)
hält sofort an. (*3) (*7)

2010/12/09 7 gR2BDoor.doc
Türverriegelungsfunktion TC-R2B

*1 Verschiebung / Rotation bei niedriger Geschwindigkeit

Die Schnellgangvorschubgeschwindigkeit ist für "Schnellvorschubgeschwindigkeit (bei
offener Tür)" von Maschinenparameter vorgegeben.
Die Schneidevorschubgeschwindigkeit ist auf die vorgegebene
"Schnellvorschubgeschwindigkeit (bei offener Tür)" auch begrenzt.
Die Geschwindigkeit der zusätzlichen Achsen ist auf die vorgegebene "5. - 8.Achse
Schnellvorschubgeschwindigkeit (bei offener Tür)" von Maschinenparameter begrenzt.
Die C-Achsengeschwindigkeit ist auf die vorgegebene "4.Achse
Schnellvorschubgeschwindigkeit (bei offener Tür)" von Maschinenparameter begrenzt.

*2 Beim Versuch zu bedienen, kommt der Fehler “Äußere Tür AUF” oder “Seitentür AUF”.

*3 Bedienungsschritte, die Gewindebohren, Spindelausrichtung, ATC oder Magazindrehung

beinhalten, halten an jedem Satzende. Wenn die Tür während der Spindelrotation geöffnet
werden sollte, kommt der Fehler “Spindelstopp wegen offener Tür” und die Spindel hält an.
Wenn man die Tür zumacht und die Maschine wieder anlaufen läßt, steigt die
Spindeldrehzahl wieder auf den vorprogrammierten Wert.
Mit folgenden Bedienungsschritten wird der Fehler “Spindelstopp wegen offener Tür”
ausgelöst.
Auch wenn die Tür geschlossen ist und der Betrieb wieder angelaufen ist, steigt die
Spindeldrehzahl nicht wieder auf den vorprogrammierten Wert.
1) Wenn die [RST]-Taste gedrückt wird.
2) Wenn die Spindel manuell bedient wird.
Anmerkung
Wenn die Tür während der Spindelrotation nach der ersten Bewegung vom
Gewindebohrfräsen (XY-Achsenverschiebung und Spindelrotation) geöffnet wird, hält die
Spindel an, aber der Fehler “Spindelstopp wegen offener Tür” kann nicht vorkommen.
Auch wenn die Tür zugemacht und der Betrieb wiederaufgenommen wird, wird der
Rotationszustand von vor dem Stopp nicht wiederhergestellt. Die Spindel rotiert
automatisch, wenn die Z-Achse sich während des Schnittes vom Punkt “R” entfernt.

*4 Maschine arbeitet jetzt

Pause und Blockunterbrechung während des MDI- oder Speicherbetriebs (beim Ende oder
Stopp des Programms ausgenommen) werden als "Maschine arbeitet jetzt" betrachtet.

*5 Bei ATC und der Magazindrehung ist die Tür verriegelt, wenn bei geschlossener Außentür
die Innentür geöffnet ist oder die Palette nicht eingeteilt ist (nur beim MDI- oder
Speicherbetrieb).

*6 Bei geschlossener Seitentür wird die Tür während des Werkzeugwechsels oder der
Magazindrehung verriegelt.

*7 Bei in Kraft gesetzter Türverriegelung werden die Servomotoren für zusätzliche Achsen der
Außenpalette oder alle Achsen je nach Zustand ausgeschaltet.

*8 Die Tür wird verriegelt, wenn die Maschine nicht mit der Seitentür (Sonderausstattung)
ausgestattet ist.

<Servomotoren für zusätzliche Achsen der Außenpalette AUS>

Wenn die Außentür (Vordertür) geöffnet wird, während die zusätzlichen Achsen der Außenpalette
angehalten sind, die Palette eingeteilt ist, und die Innentür geschlossen ist, dann werden die
Servomotoren für die zusätzlichen Achsen der Außenpalette ausgeschaltet. (Der Fehler "5. - 8.
Achse Servostrom AUS" kommt vor. Der Betrieb wird nicht angehalten.)
Wenn die Außentür (Vordertür) geschlossen wird oder die Türverriegelung außer Kraft gesetzt
wird, schalten sich die Servomotoren ein und der Fehler wird gelöscht.

<Servomotoren für alle Achsen AUS>

Wenn die Außentür (Vordertür) vor dem Speicherbetrieb (Maschine ist angehalten) geöffnet wird,
während die Innentür geöffnet ist oder der Schnelltisch nicht eingeteilt ist, dann werden die
Servomotoren für alle Achsen ausgeschaltet. (Der Fehler "Tür AUF" kommt vor.) Wenn die
Außentür (Vordertür) geschlossen wird oder die Türverriegelung außer Kraft gesetzt wird, schalten
sich die Servomotoren ein und der Fehler wird gelöscht.

2010/12/09 8 gR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B

Manuel de sécurité destiné à ceux qui

installent
et règlent le centre de taraudage

Centre de taraudage
TC-R2B

Veuillez lire ce manuel de sécurité avec attention

avant de faire fonctionner le centre de taraudage.

Brother Industries, Ltd. Machinery & Solution Company.

2010/01/20 1 fTR2BSAIN1-1.doc
 TC-R2B

Table des matières

Grandes lignes du manuel de sécurité --- 3
Lisez le présent manuel ---------------------------------------------- 3
Objectif----------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Contenu du manuel de sécurité et
Liens avec d'autres manuels ----------------------------------------- 3
Liens avec les étiquettes de sécurité -------------------------------- 4
Langue------------------------------------------------------------------ 4
Achat ------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Utilisation du manuel de sécurité ----------------------------------- 5
Niveau de danger------------------------------------------------------ 5
Ordre des explications------------------------------------------------ 5
Signification des symboles ------------------------------------------ 6

Noms des pièces ------------------------------ 8

TC-R2B --------------------------------------------------------------- 8

Avertissements et mesures préventives - 10

DANGER -------------------------------------------------------------- 10
AVERTISSEMENT -------------------------------------------------- 11

Contrôle de l'étiquette de sécurité--------- 20

2010/01/20 2 fTR2BSAIN1-1.doc
TC-R2B

Grandes lignes du manuel de sécurité

Lisez le présent manuel
Toute personne utilisant le centre de taraudage, y compris celles qui installent le centre de
taraudage en usine, qui usinent les matières en faisant fonctionner le CENTRE DE TARAUDAGE,
et qui règlent et réparent le centre de taraudage, doivent lire le présent manuel de sécurité.
Dans le présent manuel de sécurité, le terme utilisateur fait référence à toutes les personnes
utilisant le centre de taraudage.

Objectif
Le centre de taraudage est composé de circuits électriques à haute tension, d'outils tournants à
grande vitesse et de tables et magazins ATC se déplaçant avec une force importante. Par
conséquent, divers dangers en lien avec la machine peuvent survenir.
Le but du présent manuel de sécurité est de protéger les utilisateurs de ces dangers.
Le manuel de sécurité décrit donc les éléments suivants :
Avertissements : types de danger
Mesures préventives : manières d'éviter les dangers de survenir

Contenu du manuel de sécurité et liens avec d'autres

manuels
Chaque manuel d'instruction, hormis le manuel de programmation, comporte un manuel de
sécurité.
Les manuels de sécurité sont fournis pour chaque groupe de personnel précis.
Veuillez lire le manuel d'instruction pour les fonctions de la machine et les méthodes de
fonctionnement.
1. Manuel de fonctionnement (à l'usage des opérateurs non spécialisés)
"Manuel de sécurité pour opérateur"
"Manuel de sécurité pour ceux qui installent et règlent le centre de
taraudage"
"Manuel de fonctionnement" : comment faire fonctionner la machine
pour les opérations de base.
Code de pièce anglais : 693481001
2. Manuel de fonctionnement (à l'usage des opérateurs spécialisés)
"Manuel de sécurité pour opérateur"
"Manuel de sécurité pour ceux qui installent et règlent le centre de
taraudage"
"Fonction de verrouillage de porte"
"Manuel de fonctionnement" : comment faire fonctionner la machine
pour le réglage et l'usinage
(Fonctionnement) Code de pièce japonais : 693477001
Code de pièce anglais : 693480001
(Données) Code de pièce japonais : 693204001
Code de pièce anglais : 693206001
3. Manuel d'instructions "Manuel de sécurité pour ceux qui installent et règlent le centre de
taraudage"
"Manuel d'installation" : comment installer et monter la machine et
les options.
Code de pièce japonais : 693476001
Code de pièce anglais : 693479001
4. Manuel de programmation "Manuel de programmation" : comment créer les programmes machine
(Conversation) Code de pièce japonais : 693219001
Code de pièce anglais : 693220001
(NC) Code de pièce japonais : 693203001
Code de pièce anglais : 693205001
5. Manuel d'entretien "Manuel de sécurité destiné au personnel qualifié pour l'entretien du
centre de taraudage, joint au manuel d'entretien."
"Manuel d'entretien" : réglages et réparations de la machine"
Le manuel d'entretien n'est pas distribué aux clients.

2010/01/20 3 fTR2BSA1-2.doc
Liens avec les étiquettes de sécurité
Les éléments d'importance particulière qui apparaissent dans ce manuel de sécurité sont également
fixés à la machine comme étiquettes de sécurité.
Une explication des étiquettes de sécurité est fournie à la fin de ce manuel de sécurité. Si des
étiquettes de sécurité se détachent de la machine, obtenez de nouvelles étiquettes de sécurité et
fixez-les correctement.

Langue
Les machines expédiées sur le territoire national, au sein du Japon, sont fournies avec des manuels
de sécurité et des étiquettes de sécurité écrits en japonais. Les machines quittant le Japon, sont
fournies avec des manuels de sécurité et des étiquettes de sécurité écrits en quatre langues: anglais,
allemand, français et chinois,
Pour ce qui est des manuels et des étiquettes dans d'autres langues, consultez le revendeur auprès
duquel vous avez acheté la machine.

Achat
Lorsque les manuels de sécurité ou les étiquettes de sécurité ont été perdus, obtenez-les du
revendeur auprès duquel vous avez acheté la machine.
Si vous ne connaissez pas de revendeur, appelez le bureau spécifié ci-dessous.

1-5, Kitajizoyama, Noda-cho, Kariya-shi, Aichi-ken, 448-0803, Japon.

BROTHER INDUSTRIES, LTD. Machinery & Solution Company.
téléphone +81-566-95-0075
fax +81-566-25-3721

2011/05/27 4 fTCOMSA1-3.doc
 Utilisation du manuel de sécurité
Faites attention de ne pas perdre les manuels de sécurité, veillez à ce qu'ils soient à portée de main
et que l'on puisse les consulter à tout moment.
Lorsque la machine change de mains, remettez les manuels au nouveau propriétaire.
Niveau de danger
Le niveau de danger est classifié en trois catégories en fonction du niveau d'endommagement
pouvant survenir quand les instructions ne sont pas observées.

1. DANGER

DANGER
Endommagement pouvant provoquer la mort ou de graves blessures

2. AVERTISSEMENT

AVERTISSEMENT
Endommagement pouvant entraîner une blessure grave

3. PRECAUTION

PRECAUTION
Endommagement moins grave que celui susmentionné

Ordre des explications

Les instructions de sécurité sont expliquées dans l'ordre suivant:
1. Mots (DANGER, AVERTISSEMENT, PRECAUTION) et symboles indiquant le niveau de
danger
2. Type de danger (sujet)
3. Type de dommages prédits
4. Mesure préventive

2011/05/27 5 fTCOMSA1-3.doc
 Signification des symboles
Des symboles sont utilisés sur les étiquettes de sécurité et dans les avertissements dans le manuel
de sécurité pour expliquer de manière intuitive les dangers possibles.

1. Danger

Glissement Pièces mobiles

Electrocution Choc électrique

Choc électrique Accroché

Main pincée Haute température

Haute température Coupure

Coupure Eclatement

Point tranchant Chute d'objet

Chute d'objet Objet rotatif

Chute Projection

Projection Feu

2011/05/27 6 fTCOMSA1-3.doc
 2. Mesures préventives

Protégez vos oreilles. Protégez vos mains.

Protégez vos pieds. Retirez la fiche d'alimentation.

Ne touchez pas. Protégez votre tête.

Connectez Ne démontez pas.

le câble de mise à la terre.

Protégez vos yeux.

2011/05/27 7 fTCOMSA1-3.doc
部品名 Section Names Bezeichnung der Komponenten Noms de sections 各部件名称

A
6 21 23
12 24
2
1
7 1

38
25

30
12
14
A
22

9
28

11 31

18

19 34 20
5 10
3.4
35 37
16 17
15 32

36
0906-1~7.ai

2010/12/10 8 TR2BSA2.doc
部品名 Section Names Bezeichnung der Komponenten Noms de sections 各部件名称

No. 各部の名称 Section names Bezeichnung der Komponenten Noms de sections 各部件名称
日本語 English Deutsch Français 中文
1. 制御箱 control box Steuerschrank armoire de commande 控制箱
2. 機械ｶﾊﾞｰ machine cover Maschinenabdeckung couvercle de la machine 机械外罩
3. ﾌｨｰﾄﾞﾎｰﾙﾄﾞｽｲｯﾁ feed hold switch Vorschubhaltschalter interrupteur d'arrêt de l'avance 进给保持开关
4. ﾌｨｰﾄﾞﾎｰﾙﾄﾞﾗﾝﾌﾟ feed hold lamp Vorschubhalt-Kontrollleuchte témoin de contrôle d'arrêt de l'avance 进给保持指示灯
5. ﾄﾞｱｲﾝﾀﾛｯｸｽｲｯﾁ door interlock switch Türverriegelungsschalter interrupteur de verrouillage de porte 门互锁开关
6. ﾒﾝﾃﾅﾝｽｶﾊﾞｰ maintenance cover Wartungsabdeckung couvercle d'entretien 维修罩盖
7. 正面扉 front door Vordertür porte avant 正面门
9. ﾄﾞｱｲﾝﾀﾛｯｸｷｰ door interlock key Schlüssel des Türverriegelungsschalters clé de verrouillage de porte 门互锁键
10. ｽﾋﾟﾝﾄﾞﾙ spindle Spindel broche 主轴
11. ATC ﾏｶﾞｼﾞﾝ ATC magazine ATC-Magazin magasin ATC ATC 刀库
12. とって handle Griff poignée 把手
14. ﾚﾍﾞﾘﾝｸﾞﾎﾞﾙﾄ leveling bolt Nivellierschraube boulon de mise à niveau 调平螺栓
15. ｸｰﾗﾝﾄﾉｽﾞﾙ coolant nozzle Kühlmitteldüse buse de liquide d'arrosage 冷却液喷嘴
16. 工具 tool Werkzeug outil 刀具
17. 工具ﾎﾙﾀﾞ tool holder Werkzeughalter porte-outil 刀具夹
18. ｽﾋﾟﾝﾄﾞﾙﾍｯﾄﾞ spindle head Spindelkopf tête de broche 主轴头
19. 非常停止ｽｲｯﾁ emergency stop switch Not-Aus-Schalter interrupteur d'arrêt d'urgence 紧急停止开关
20. ｸｲｯｸﾃｰﾌﾞﾙ quick table Schnellschalttisch table à action instantanée 快速回转工作台
21. 主電源ﾌﾞﾚｰｶ main power breaker Hauptschalter disjoncteur d’alimentation principale 主电源开关
22. ｸｰﾗﾝﾄﾀﾝｸ coolant tank Kühlmitteltank réservoir de liquide d'arrosage 冷却液罐
23. ﾒﾝﾃﾅﾝｽｶﾊﾞｰ maintenance cover Wartungsabdeckung couvercle d'entretien 维修罩盖
24. 回生抵抗ｶﾊﾞｰ regenerative resistor cover Abdeckung d. Rückkopplungswiderstands couvercle de la résistance régénérative 再生电阻罩
25. 操作ﾊﾟﾈﾙ operation panel Bedientafel pupitre de commande 操作面板
28. ｸﾞﾘｯﾌﾟｶﾊﾞｰ grip cover Griffschutz couverture de jambe 刀柄护罩
30. 自動間欠給油ﾎﾟﾝﾌﾟ automatic intermittent lubricating unit Automatische Intervallschmieranlage unité de lubrication intermittente autom. 自动间歇加油泵
31. 内扉 inter door Innentür porte intérieure 内门
34. Y 軸ﾃﾚｽｺｶﾊﾞｰ Y-axis telescopic cover Y-Achsen-Teleskopabdeckung carter télescopique de l'axe Y Y 轴伸缩护罩
35. X 軸ﾃﾚｽｺｶﾊﾞｰ X-axis telescopic cover X-Achsen-Teleskopabdeckung carter télescopique de l'axe X X 轴伸缩护罩
36. ｴﾌﾟﾛﾝｶﾊﾞｰ apron cover Schutzschürze carter de tablier 防溅护罩
37. 洗浄ｶﾞﾝ clearing gun Reinigungspistole pistolet de nettoyage 气力清洁枪
38. 側面扉 side door Seitentür porte latérale 侧面门

2010/12/10 9 TR2BSA2.doc
 TC-R2B

Avertissements et mesures préventives

Les numéros entre ( ) tels que 1, 2 correspondent aux noms de chaque pièce.
Danger Danger
SD1 Divers dangers sont liés au centre de taraudage.
SD1-1 Lisez le manuel de sécurité avant de faire fonctionner la machine pour comprendre
ces dangers et les mesures préventives pour les éviter.
SD1-2 Tous les utilisateurs doivent connaître la positition de l'interrupteur d'arrêt d'urgence
(19) et son fonctionnement.

SD2 Des pièces à haute tension se trouvent dans l'armoire de commande (1). Leur
contact involontaire peut provoquer de graves blessures ou la mort.
SD2-1 Seuls les opérateurs qualifiés pour les travaux électriques et connaissant les circuits
électriques de la machine sont autorisés à entretenir et contrôler les composants électriques.
SD2-2 Coupez le disjoncteur de l'alimentation principale (21) avant le fonctionnement.
Placez un panneau signalétique indiquant 'En cours d'entretien'.
SD2-3 Lorsque vous quittez la machine, fermez la porte de l'armoire de commande et
verrouillez-la à l'aide de vis.

SD3 Lors de l'usinage, vous pouvez être pris dans la machine, provoquant de graves
blessures.
SD3-1 N'entrez pas dans le couvercle de la machine (2) pendant le fonctionnement.
SD3-2 Contrôlez que personne ne se trouve dans le couvercle de la machine avant de la
démarrer.
SD3-3 Tenez vos mains, pieds et corps loin des pièces mobiles lors du fonctionnement.
SD3-4 Si vous devez entrer dans la machine, coupez le disjoncteur de l'alimentation
principale (21) et verrouillez-le de sorte qu'il ne puisse pas être remis en route.

SD4 Lorsque l'interrupteur de verrouillage de porte (5) est désactivé, la machine se

déplace même lorsque la porte avant (7) ou latérale (38) est ouverte. Vous pouvez
vous couper avec un outil rotatif
ou être pris dans la machine.
SD4-1 Lors de la maintenance de la machine, faites extrêmement attention au déplacement
de la machine de sorte que vous puissiez arrêter la machine quand cela est
nécessaire. Une fois l'entretien et le réglage terminés, activez à nouveau l'interrupteur
de verrouillage de porte. Retirez la clé de verrouillage de porte (9) et conservez-la.
SD4-2 Ne quittez pas la machine en laissant l'interrupteur de verrouillage de porte désactivé.

SD5 Lorsque l'interrupteur de verrouillage de porte (5) est désactivé, la table à action
instantanée peut se déplacer.
Vous pouvez être pris dans la table à action instantanée ou la machine et vous
blesser.
SD5-1 Lors du réglage de la machine, faites extrêmement attention aux déplacements de la
machine pour pouvoir l'arrêter si nécessaire. Une fois le réglage de la machine
terminé, activez à nouveau l'interrupteur de verrouillage de porte. La clé de
verrouillage de porte (9) doit être retirée et conservée par le superviseur.

2010/12/07 10 fTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SD7 La mise à la masse incorrecte de la machine peut provoquer un choc électrique et de

graves blessures voire la mort.
SD7-1 Mettez la machine à la masse en suivant la procédure.

SD8 L'utilisation de liquide d'arrosage à base d'huile pour les machines équipées du
système CTS (refroidissement traversant la broche) peut provoquer un incendie.
SD8-1 Assurez-vous d'utiliser du liquide d'arrosage soluble dans l'eau.

Avertissement AVERTISSEMENT

SW1 Le contact avec les outils rotatifs (16) peut provoquer des blessures.
SW1-1 Tenez-vous éloigné des outils rotatifs.

SW2 Les outils brisés (16) ou les pièces éjectées peuvent vous blesser.
SW2-1 Fermez la porte avant (7) et latérale (38) et démarrez la machine.

SW3 Vous pouvez être pris dans la pièce rotative, provoquant une blessure.
SW3-1 Tenez-vous éloigné des outils rotatifs (16), de la broche (10) et du magasin ATC
(11).
SW3-2 Portez des vêtements ajustés. Les cheveux longs doivent être placés sous un
couvre-chef. Ne portez pas de gants, sauf pour les opérations de réglage lorsque la
machine est arrêtée. Ne portez pas d'accessoires. Ne tenez pas les pièces rotatives.

SW4 Si le dispositif de sécurité est modifié, son fonctionnement peut être altéré. Vous
risquez ainsi d'être pris dans la machine, de vous cogner ou de prendre une décharge
électrique.
SW4-1 Ne modifiez pas les dispositifs de sécurité. N'altérez pas le dispositif de sécurité
afin de ne pas provoquer de dysfonctionnement.

2010/12/07 11 fTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW5 Si des copeaux sont éjectés vers vos yeux, ils peuvent provoquer des blessures
occulaires et même la cécité.
SW5-1 Portez des lunettes de sécurité contre les copeaux.
SW5-2 N'enlevez pas les copeaux avec de l'air.

SW6 Si vous touchez les copeaux à mains nues, vous pouvez vous couper ou vous brûler.
SW6-1 Ne touchez pas les copeaux à mains nues. Ne touchez pas les bords tranchants des
pièces.
SW6-2 Portez des gants et utilisez une brosse pour retirer les copeaux.
SW6-3 Nettoyez les copeaux de coupe lorsque la machine est arrêtée.

SW7 Si vous saisissez la lame de l'outil (16) à la main, vous pouvez vous couper.
SW7-1 Ne touchez pas le bord de l'outil. Tenez toujours la tige du porte-outil (17).

SW8 La chute d'un objet lourd sur votre pied peut entraîner des fractures.
SW8-1 Lors du soulèvement d'objets lourds, portez des chaussures de sécurité.

SW9 Le soulèvement d'objets lourds peut provoquer une hernie discale.

SW9-1 Lors du soulèvement d'objets lourds, demandez de l'aide.
SW9-2 Soulevez l'objet à la force de vos jambe et non de votre dos.

SW10 Les capacités auditives sont réduites lorsque les oreilles sont exposées à un bruit
excessif pendant une longue durée.
SW10-1 Utilisez des protections pour les oreilles lors de travaux dans un environnement
bruyant.

SW11 Les explosions d'air à haute pression peuvent endommager vos yeux et vos oreilles.
SW11-1 Les personnes non qualifiées pour la manipulation de l'air à haute pression et ne
connaissant pas les conduites de haute pression de la machine ne sont pas autorisées
à les installer ou les remplacer.
SW11-2 Pour réparer le flexible d'air à haute pression, débranchez la source de pression et
libérez tout d'abord la pression résiduelle. Placez un panneau signalétique indiquant
"En cours d'entretien".

2010/12/07 12 fTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW12 Vous pouvez vous cogner la tête en vous levant.

SW12-1 Portez un casque lors de travaux à l'intérieur et autour de la machine.

SW13 Lorsque la machine fonctionne alors que des outils sont restés dedans, ils peuvent
être éjectés et provoquer des blessures.
SW13-1 Ne laissez pas d'outils manuels dans la machine.

SW14 Votre main peut se prendre dans la porte avant (7), interne (31) ou latérale (38)
si vous ouvrez ou fermez la porte en tenant d'autres pièces que les poignées (12, 32
et 39).
SW14-1 Tenez la poignée lors de l'ouverture et de la fermeture des portes.

SW16 Si vous placez des outils sur l'armoire de commande (1), le pupitre de commande,
ou la machine, ils peuvent tomber en raison des vibrations.
SW16-1 Ne placez pas d'objets sur l'armoire de commande et la machine.

SW17 Vous pouvez tomber et vous blesser si vous grimpez sur la machine ou le réservoir
de liquide d'arrosage (22).
SW17-1 Ne grimpez pas sur la machine ou le réservoir de liquide d'arrosage.

SW18 Lorsque vous placez votre main sous les boulons de mise à niveau (14), votre main
peut être prise, ce qui entraîne une blessure.
SW18-1 Ne placez pas vos mains sous les boulons de mise à niveau. Utilisez des outils pour
la mise à niveau.

SW19 Si un câble pend ou n'est pas couvert, vous pouvez trébucher ou glisser et tomber.
SW19-1 Tendez tous les câbles. Couvrez les câbles lorsque vous les placez au sol.

SW20 Des modifications sur la machine peuvent affecter le dispositif de sécurité, rendant
invalides tous les avertissements indiqués.
SW20-1 Ne modifiez pas la machine. Si des modifications sont nécessaires, contactez au
préalable Brother Industries, Ltd. et demandez une permission écrite.

2010/12/07 13 fTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW21 Vous risquez de vous blessez gravement si du liquide d'arrosage entre en contact
avec vos yeux.
SW21-1 Lors du réglage de la buse de liquide d'arrosage (15), portez des lunettes de sécurité.
SW21-2 Lors de l'utilisation du pistolet de nettoyage (37), portez des lunettes de sécurité.
SW21-3 Lorsque du liquide d'arrosage a pénétré dans vos yeux, lavez-les avec de l'eau propre
et consultez un docteur.

SW22 Si vous placez vos doigts dans l'espace de la machine, ils peuvent être
pris, ce qui entraîne une blessure.
SW22-1 Ne placez pas vos doigts sur la couverture de jambe (28).
SW22-2 Ne placez pas vos doigts dans l'espace entre l'outil (16) ou le porte-outil (17)
et le magasin ATC (11).
SW22-3 Ne placez pas vos doigts dans l'espace entre l'outil ou le porte-outil et la broche (10).

SW23 Si du liquide d'arrosage, de l'huile ou des copeaux sont au sol, vous pouvez glisser et
tomber ou vous cogner, provoquant des blessures.
SW23-1 Coupez l'alimentation de la machine, nettoyez-la à l'intérieur et autour, puis
démarrez-la.
SW23-2 Portez un casque et des chaussures de sécurité lors de l'installation de la machine.

SW24 Lorsque vous attachez et détachez le porte-outil (17), vous pouvez vous couper sur
le bord d'un outil (16) ou cogner votre main contre la machine.
SW24-1 Ne tenez pas le bord de l'outil. Portez des gants en cuir. Tenez le porte-outil des
deux mains.

SW25 La machine peut se déplacer brusquement ou des outils peuvent tomber.

SW25-1 Lorsque l'interrupteur d'arrrêt d'urgence n'est pas actionné, ne placez pas vos mains,
pieds et corps sous la tête de broche (18).
SW25-2 Placez la table à action instantanée (20) pour le réglage.
SW25-3 Coupez le disjoncteur de l'alimentation principale (21) et verrouillez-le de sorte qu'il
ne puisse pas être remis en route et graissez la machine.

SW26 Lors de l'usinage de la pièce à l'aide d'un liquide d'arrosage à base d'huile, la pièce
usinée peut chauffer et prendre feu.
SW26-1 Lors de l'utilisation de liquide d'arrosage à base d'huile, installez une alarme
incendie et un extincteur automatique.
SW26-2 Lors de l'usinage de pièces, un opérateur doit être présent.

2010/12/07 14 fTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW27 Si vous vous appuyez contre la machine, vous pouvez être pris ou vous cogner
contre la machine lors du déplacement de la machine, provoquant des blessures.
SW27-1 Ne vous appuyez pas contre la machine.

SW28 Si des objets sont accrochés à l'interrupteur d'arrêt d'urgence (19), il peut ne pas être
possible de l'actionner.
SW28-1 N'accrochez aucun objet à l'interrupteur d'arrêt d'urgence.

SW30 En raison du poids important du réservoir de liquide d'arrosage (22), vous pouvez
vous faire une hernie discale ou faire tomber le réservoir sur vos pieds si vous le
soulevez.
SW30-1 Ne soulevez pas le réservoir de liquide d'arrosage même lorsque vous retirez les
copeaux.

SW31 Lorsque vous entrez dans la machine, vous pouvez glisser et tomber ou être pris
dans celle-ci.
SW31-1 Lorsque vous entrez dans la machine, assurez-vous de coupez le disjoncteur de
l'alimentation du circuit principal (21) et de le verrouiller pour qu'il ne puisse pas
être remis en route, puis retirez le liquide d'arrosage et les copeaux.
Portez également des chaussures de sécurité et un casque. Placez un panneau
signalétique indiquant "En cours
d'entretien" près de la machine.

SW32 Si du couvercle de la machine (2) et le couvercle d'entretien (6), (23) ne sont pas
attachés, vous risquez d'être pris dans la machine ou blessés par des outils brisés.
SW32-1 Contrôlez que le couvercle d'entretien est attaché avant de mettre l'alimentation en
marche.

SW33 Les outils (16) ou porte-outils (17) dont le poids et la taille dépassent la limite
spécifiée peuvent s'éjecter lors de leur utilisation.
SW33-1 Utilisez des outils et des porte-outils dont le poids et la taille sont dans les limites
spécifiées.
SW33-2 Pour les limites des outils, veuillez vous reporter à l'étiquette d'outil apposée sur la
machine ou au manuel de fonctionnement.

SW34 Si vous touchez la résistance régénérative, vous risquez de vous brûler car elle
chauffe lors du fonctionnement.
SW34-1 Ne retirez pas le couvercle de la résistance régénérative (24).

SW35 Si vous touchez le moteur, vous risquez de vous brûler car il chauffe lors du
fonctionnement.
SW35-1 Ne touchez pas le moteur dans les 30 minutes après la fin de son fonctionnement.

2010/12/07 15 fTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW37 Si la disposition du dispositif de protection est incorrecte, un feu peut éclater parce
que le dispositif de protection ne marche pas.
SW37-1 Ne changez pas la disposition du dispositif de protection.

SW38 Si le magasin ATC (11) tourne, des outils (16) peuvent heurter les pièces usinées, les
dispositifs de serrage ou la machine et peuvent se casser.
SW38-1 Réglez la longueur d'outil de sorte que les outils n'entrent pas en contact avec les
pièces usinées, les dispositifs de serrage ou la machine même si le magasin ATC
tourne.

SW39 Si l'armoire de commande (1) ou le pupitre de commande (25) est mouillé, vous
pouvez recevoir une décharge électrique.
SW39-1 Veillez à ce qu'il n'y ait pas de liquide d'arrosage, d'eau ou de copeaux sur l'armoire
de commande et le pupitre de commande.
SW39-2 Ne touchez pas l'armoire de commande si vous avez les mains mouillées.

SW40 Lorsque le câble pour PE secteur câblé de l'extérieur est trop court, le câble pour PE
peut se détacher lorsque le câble est tiré et vous pouvez recevoir un choc
électrique.
SW40-1 Utilisez un câble plus long que les autres (L1, L2, L3) pour PE secteur en laissant un
peu de mou.

SW41 Si l'alimentation est en marche ou les pièces usinées dans une atmosphère explosive,
une explosion peut se produire en raison d'une étincelle provenant de la machine.
SW41-1 N'installez pas la machine dans une atmosphère explosive.
SW41-2 Ne mettez pas en marche l'alimentation de la machine et n'effectuez pas l'usinage et
le réglage dans une atmosphère explosive.

SW43 Si vous touchez un câble écrasé par un objet lourd, vous pouvez recevoir une
décharge électrique. Le câble écrasé peut provoquer un court-circuit.
SW43-1 La personne qualifiée pour les travaux électriques doit placer les câbles de sorte
qu'ils ne soient pas écrasés et les remplacer s'ils le sont.

SW44 Les copeaux de coupe peuvent prendre feu ou exploser en fonction de la matière de
la pièce (p.ex. Magnésium).
SW44-1 Retirez immédiatement tout copeau de coupe.
SW44-2 Installez un extincteur près de la machine lors de l'usinage d'une pièce constituée
d'un tel matériau et ne réalisez jamais de fonctionnement automatique.

2010/12/07 16 fTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW45 Pour ce qui est de l'outil (16) ayant un insert remplaçable, si l'insert n'est pas bien
serré, il peut se détacher lors de la rotation de la broche, provoquant de graves
blessures.
SW45-1 Vérifiez que l’insert est bien serré, puis montez l’outil sur la machine.

SW49 Un incendie peut se déclencher lorsqu'un capteur 3 fils comprenant un conducteur

d'alimentation exclusif est utilisé.
SW49-1 Utilisez un capteur 2 fils au lieu d'un capteur 3 fils.
SW49-2 S'il n'est pas possible d'éviter l'utilisation de capteurs 3 fils, ajoutez un fusible (1 A
ou moins) au conducteur pour chaque capteur.

SW50 Un impact sur les tuyaux peut entraîner une fuite et du liquide d'arrosage pénétrant
dans vos yeux peut entraîner la cécité.
SW50-1 Evitez tout impact sur les tuyaux.

SW51 Lors du réglage de la direction de la buse de liquide d'arrosage, votre main peut être
coupée sur le bord d'un outil ou vous pouvez cogner votre main contre la machine.
SW51-1 Portez des gants en cuir.

SW52 Le déplacement de la machine avec les câbles connectés peuvent provoquer des
décharges électriques.
SW52-1 Débranchez les câbles du corps principal de la machine et de le réservoir de liquide
d'arrosage (22) avant de déplacer la machine.

SW55 Puisque l'unité de lubrification intermittente automatique (30) est placée en hauteur,
de l'huile peut se répandre lors du remplissage du réservoir et entrer en contact avec
vos yeux.
SW55-1 Assurez-vous de porter des lunettes de protection lors du remplissage du réservoir.

SW56 Puisque une grande quantité de brouillard est générée, l'opérateur peut se sentir mal
lors du remplacement de la pièce.
SW56-1 Fixez un collecteur de brouillard.

SW57 Il y a un risque de projection de liquide d'arrosage dans vos yeux lors du nettoyage
ou du remplacement du filtre, ou d'entretiens similaires sur les machines équipées du
système CTS.
SW57-1 Assurez-vous de purger la pression résiduelle avant d'effectuer l'entretien.

2010/12/07 17 fTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW58 Vous pouvez vous cogner la tête sur l'outil si vous entrer dans la machine alors que
l'outil (16) est fixé sur le magasin (11) ou la broche (10).
SW58-1 Assurez-vous de porter un casque lorsque vous entrez dans la machine.

SW59 Le cache (en verre transparent) de la lampe de la machine et de la lampe de la table

peut se casser si une force excessive est appliquée et vous blesser les mains.
SW59-1 Ne cognez pas le cache (en verre transparent) de la lampe de la machine et de la
lampe de la table avec un objet ni n'appliquez une force excessive.
SW59-2 Assurez-vous de porter des gants lors du remplacement de la lampe fluorescente.

SW60 Si le cric utilisé pour la mise à niveau de la machine s'enlève, il peut vous écraser la
main.
SW60-1 Placez le cric au centre de la base vers l'avant.

SW61 Si vous montez sur le réservoir du liquide d'arrosage (22), vous pouvez glisser et
vous blesser.
SW61-1 Ne montez pas dessus.

SW62 Si les vis de la plaque à bornes sont desserrées après le câblage, de la chaleur peut
être générée en raison d'un mauvais contact, provoquant un incendie.
SW62-1 Assurez-vous qu'il n'y a pas de vis desserrées après le câblage.

SW63 L'installation de la machine sur une surface instable peut entraîner le décalage ou
le basculement de la machine lors de l'usinage et provoquer des blessures ou des
dommages sur la machine.
SW63-1 Installez la machine sur une surface solide et plane.
Contrôlez si le sol satisfait aux exigences suivantes :
 Si vous placez un objet de 2600 kg, le sol ne gondole pas ni ne se voile.
 Le sol est horizontal et ne présente pas de bosses ni de creux.
 La surface du sol est totalement solide et n'est pas déformée lorsqu'une
pression de 1,0 MPa (10 kgf/cm2) est appliquée.
 Le sol est fait d'une matière qui ne se déteriorera pas avec le temps.

SW64 Si la zone est mal éclairée et que l'intérieur de la machine est sombre, vous pouvez
vous blesser les mains sur des dispositifs de serrage ou des lames.
SW64-1 Installez une lampe de machine lorsque l'éclairage à l'intérieur de la machine est de
500 lux ou moins.

2010/12/07 18 fTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW65 Si vous montez sur le carter télescopique de l'axe X R (35), le carter télescopique de
l'axe Y (34) .
ou le carter de tablier (36), vous pouvez glisser et tomber et vous blesser.
SW65-1 Ne montez pas sur le carter.

SW66 Vous risquez de vous blesser si vous travaillez dans une position non naturelle.
SW66-1 Ne travaillez pas dans une position non naturelle.

SW67 Vous pouvez trébucher par-dessus la plaque d'ancrage et vous blesser.

SW67-1 Assurez-vous de porter un casque et des chaussures de sécurité lorsque vous passez
ou travaillez sur le côté de la machine.

SW68 Le couvercle (transparent) de l’éclairage machine contient des organes sous haute
tension qu’il faut éviter de toucher: risque d’électrocution grave voire mortelle.
Les corps étrangers tels les éclaboussures de réfrigérant ou les copeaux, risquent
d’endommager les pièces ou de provoquer des incendies.
SW68-1 Avant de remplacer le tube fluorescent, couper l’alimentation électrique principale
au disjoncteur et poser un cadenas. Placer une pancarte indiquant «En cours de
remplacement».
Attention de ne pas laisser de corps étrangers pénétrer dans le couvercle. Vérifier
que vous avez les mains propres lorsque vous remplacez le tube.
Ne pas changer le fusible de protection de l’intérieur de l’éclairage de la machine.
Avant de vérifier l’éclairage ne pas oublier de fermer le bouchon étanche.

SW69 Le revêtement de plafond est lourd. Attention de ne pas vous blesser lorsque vous le
déposez ou le remettez en place.
SW69-1 Prévoir au moins deux personnes pour retirer ou fixer le revêtement de plafond.

2010/12/07 19 fTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

Contrôle de l'étiquette de sécurité

Les étiquettes de sécurité sont apposées sur la machine aux emplacements indiqués sur le dessin.
Assurez-vous que les étiquettes de sécurité sont bien fixées. Si une étiquette se décolle,
demandez-en une nouvelle et apposez-la correctement.

6
3

8
7

0906.ai

2010/01/20 20 fTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[1] Etiquette de sécurité, avant

Langue Code de pièce
Japonais, chinois, anglais 693508001
Anglais, allemand, français 693504001

2010/01/20 21 fTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

[2] Etiquette d'outil, avant

Le contenu varie en fonction de la vitesse de broche et du type de broche.

Type BT

Code de pièce
693526001 Etiquette d'outil BT2

Type BBT

Code de pièce
693525001 Etiquette d'outil BBT2

2010/01/20 22 fTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[3] Etiquette de sécurité, arrière

Langue Code de pièce

Japonais, chinois, anglais . 693502001
Anglais, allemand, français 693500001

2010/01/20 23 fTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

[4] Etiquette, résistance régénérative

Langue Code de pièce

Japonais, chinois, anglais 690729001
Anglais, allemand, français 691058001

[5] Etiquette, retrait d'outil

Langue Code de pièce

Japonais, chinois, anglais 693515001
Anglais, allemand, français 693513001

2010/01/20 24 fTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[6] Etiquette de sécurité, couvercle latéral

Langue Code de pièce

Japonais, chinois, anglais 693512001
Anglais, allemand, français 693510001

2010/01/20 25 fTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

[7] Etiquette de sécurité 1, CTS

Langue Code de pièce

Japonais, chinois, anglais 693001001
Anglais, allemand, français 693002001

2010/01/20 26 fTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[8] Etiquette 2, CTS

Langue Code de pièce

Japonais, chinois, anglais, allemand, français 693003001

693003001(1-1).wmf

[9] Etiquette "Entrée interdite" 40

Code de pièce
693178001

693178001.ai

2010/01/20 27 fTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

(Cette page est blanche.)

2010/01/20 28 fTR2BSA4
TC-R2B Fonction de la fermeture de sécurité des portes

FONCTION DE LA FERMETURE DE
SÉCURITÉ DES PORTES

1 Précautions générales
2 Vue d'apparence
3 Contrôle
4 Détails de la fonction

2010/12/10 1 fR2BDoor.doc
Fonction de la fermeture de sécurité des portes TC-R2B

1 Précautions générales
DANGER
Lorsque le commutateur de sécurité (5) est invalidé, la machine
fonctionne lorsque la porte avant (7) est ouverte.
Si vous touchez des outils tournants et des parties mobiles, vous
vous blesserez.
Quand l'interrupteur de l'enclenchement avec verrouillage de la
porte est invalidé, ne mettez pas vos mains, vos pieds, et votre
corps dans la machine. Avertissez-en le superviseur.
Quand l'interrupteur de l'enclenchement avec verrouillage de la
porte est invalidé, le superviseur ne doit autoriser personne à
travailler.
Assurez-vous visuellement que l'enclenchement avec verrouillage
de la porte est validé avant l’opération de la machine.
Si la clef de l'enclenchement avec verrouillage de la porte est
attachée, avertissez-en le superviseur.
Le superviseur doit toujours garder la clef de l'enclenchement
avec verrouillage de la porte.

AVERTISSEMENT
Si vous touchez des outils tournants, vous vous blesserez.
Ne vous approchez pas des outils tournants.

AVERTISSEMENT
Vous pouvez être pris dans la section tournante et vous blesser.
Ne vous approchez pas des outils tournants, de la broche, et du
COA magasin.
Portez des vêtements collants. Mettez les cheveux longs dans un
bonnet. Portez des gants pour arrêter la machine et faire
l'arrangement. Ne portez pas de bijoux. Ne tenez pas la section
tournante.

2010/12/10 2 fR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B Fonction de la fermeture de sécurité des portes

Intention
La Fonction de la fermeture de sécurité des portes vous évite d'être pris dans les outils tournants et
les parties mobiles.

Description de la fonction
L'enclenchement avec verrouillage de la porte fonctionne pour que la porte extérieure soit
verrouillée et que la vitesse maximale soit limitée selon les circonstances.

Structure de l'unité
L'enclenchement avec verrouillage de la porte est constitué par les éléments ci-dessous.
1. l'interrupteur de la limite de la porte
2. le verrou de la porte

Comment se servir de l'enclenchement avec verrouillage de la porte

1. en opération ordinaire
L'interrupteur de la Fonction de la fermeture de sécurité des portes (1) doit
toujours être placé sur "on".
2. en réglage et maintenance
Tournez l'interrupteur sur "off" seulement en cours de réglage et de maintenance. Lisez le
"Manuel de sûreté pour ceux qui installent et arrangent le centreur tapant" et le "Manuel de
sûreté pour ceux qui sont qualifiés pour la maintenance du centreur tapant" avant le réglage
et la maintenance.
Observez cela ci-dessous, quand la Fonction de la fermeture de sécurité des portes est OFF.
Prenez garde de ne pas être pris dans l'outil tournant ou les parties mobiles.
Tournez l'interrupteur sur "on" après le réglage et la maintenance.
Le superviseur doit garder la clef (2).

panneau
d'opération

door.01.ai

2010/12/10 3 fR2BDoor.doc
Fonction de la fermeture de sécurité des portes TC-R2B

2 Vue d'apparence
TC-R2B

A course normale
Clef

Interrupteur de la
limite de la porte

Do001.ai

2010/12/10 4 fR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B Fonction de la fermeture de sécurité des portes

3 Contrôle
Contrôles lors de la mise en exploitation
Veillez à vérifier les systèmes de verrouillage de porte et d'arrêt d'urgence avant la mise en
exploitation.
Si l'un des systèmes ou les deux ne fonctionnent pas correctement, signalez-le immédiatement à
votre supérieur.

Etapes pour le contrôle du système de verrouillage de porte

Etapes permettant de vérifier que la machine ne fonctionne pas lorsque la porte est
ouverte.
(1) Vérifiez que l'interrupteur de verrouillage de porte [DOOR INTERLOCK] est activé,
puis mettez sous tension.
(2) Ouvrez la porte avant.
(3) Passez au mode manuel, puis actionnez la touche [P.INDX] sur le pupitre de commande.
(4) Vérifiez que la broche ne se déplace pas que le message d'alarme "Door open” est affiché.
Cette alarme indique que le système de verrouillage de porte fonctionne correctement.
(5) Vérifiez la porte latérale (en option) des étapes (2) à (4).

Etapes permettant de vérifier que la porte est verrouillée.

(6) Fermez la porte avant, la porte latérale (en option).
(7) Actionnez la touche [P.INDX].
(8) Essayez d'ouvrir la porte avant lors de la rotation de la broche. Assurez-vous que la porte
avant est verrouillée.
(9) Fermez la porte avant, la porte latérale (en option).
(10) Actionnez la touche [SP.CW] et la broche tourne.
(11) Essayez d'ouvrir la porte latérale (en option) pour vérifier qu'elle est verrouillée.
Si la porte est verrouillée, cela signifie que le verrouillage de porte fonctionne
correctement.
(12) Actionnez la touche [STOP] et la broche s'arrête.

Etapes de vérification de l’arrêt d’urgence

(1) Appuyez sur la touche [EMERGENCY STOP] du tableau de commande.
(2) Vérifiez si le message "Arrêt d’urgence actif" s’affiche à l’écran.
(3) Tournez le commutateur [EMERGENCY STOP]dans le sens horaire pour le relâcher.
(4) Appuyez sur la touche [RST] du tableau de commande.
(5) Vérifiez que le message d’avertissement est effacé.

2010/12/10 5 fR2BDoor.doc
Fonction de la fermeture de sécurité des portes TC-R2B

4 Détails de la fonction
Interrupteur Porte la Porte Verrou de la
du térale extéri-e Porte Verrou de la porte Fonctionnement de la machine
porte
verrouillage (*8) intérieure extérieure
ure Térale
des portes
OFF Fermée Fermée Ouverte/ Ne sera pas Ne sera pas verrouillé Toutes les opérations sont possibles.
Fermée verrouillé (*5)
Ouverte Fermée (*6) Lorsque l'axe C a été indexé, il tourne à basse
vitesse. (*1)
L’axe ajouté pour la palette extérieure tourne à basse
vitesse. (*1)
 L'opération MEMOIRE n’est possible que dans
le mode de fonctionnement unique.
 L'opération IMD cesse à chaque fin de bloc.

Les axes autres que ceux susmentionnés peuvent

effectuer toutes les opérations.
Lorsque l'axe C n'a pas été indexé, tous les axes se
déplacent à basse vitesse. (*1) Le pivotement du
magasin, l'ATC et le taraudage sont impossibles.
 La rotation de la broche, le pivotement du
Magasin, l’ATC et le taraudage sont
impossibles.
 Le déplacement de l'axe, l'arrêt de la broche
et l'orientation de la broche sont possibles.
 L'opération MEMOIRE n'est possible que dans
le mode de fonctionnement unique.
 L’opération IMD est impossible.

Ouverte Toutes les axes se déplacent à basse vitesse. (*1)

 La rotation de la broche, le pivotement du
magasin, l'ATC et le taraudage sont
impossibles.
 Le déplacement de l'axe, l'arrêt de la broche et
l'orientation de la broche sont possibles.
 L'opération MEMOIRE n'est possible que dans
le mode de fonctionnement unique.
 L'opération IMD cesse à chaque fin de bloc.

Fermée Touts les opérations, y compris la rotation de la broche,

↓ s'arrêtent immédiatement.(*3)
Ouverte
Fermée Fermée Seul l'axe additionnel de palette extérieure s'arrête dès
↓ que l'axe C est sur une position indexée.
Ouverte Toutes les opérations, y compris la rotation de la
broche, s'arrêtent immédiatement pendant la rotation
de l'axe C ou lorsque l'axe C est sur une position non
indexée. (*3)
Ouverte Toutes les opérations, y compris la rotation de la
broche, s'arrêtent immédiatement. (*3)
Ouverte Ouverte Ouverte / Tous les axes se déplacent à vitesse lente. (*1)
/ Fermée  Rotation de la broche, pivotement du magasin,
Fermée COA et taraudage impossibles.
 Déplacement des axes, arrêt de la broche et
orientation de la broche possibles.
 L'opération par mémoire est possible
seulement en mode d'opération simple.
 L'opération par IMD s'arrête à chaque fin de
bloc.
Fermée Ouverte Toutes les opérations, y compris la rotation de la
↓ broche, s'arrêtent immédiatement. (*3)
Ouvert
Ouvert Fermée Toutes les opérations, y compris la rotation de la
↓ broche, s'arrêtent immédiatement. (*3)
Ouverte
Fermée Ouverte Ouverte / Toutes les opérations, y compris la rotation de la
↓ / Fermée broche, s'arrêtent immédiatement. (*3)
Ouverte Fermée

2010/12/10 6 fR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B Fonction de la fermeture de sécurité des portes
Interrupteur Porte la Porte Verrou de la
du térale extéri-e Porte Verrou de la porte Fonctionnement de la machine
porte
verrouillage (*8) intérieure extérieure
ure Térale
des portes
ON Fermée Fermée Fermée Verrouillage Verrouillé quand la Toutes les opérations sont possibles.
de la porte porte extérieure est
lorsque le fermée et l'axe C ou
portillon l’axe additionnel de
latéral est palette extérieure en
fermé et que rotation, ou lorsque la
la machine machine est en marche
est en avec l'axe C en position
marche (lors non indexée
du (déplacement d’un axe,
déplacement rotation de la broche,
des axes, de opération par IMD,
la rotation de opération par mémoire,
la broche, du ou quand l’impulseur
fonctionnem manuel est mis sur ON).
ent en (*4)
Ouverte automatique Verrouillage de la porte Toutes les opérations sont possibles.
ou si le lorsque le portillon
générateur extérieur est fermé et
d’impulsions que la machine est en
manuel est marche (lors du
activé). déplacement des axes,
de la rotation de la
broche, du
fonctionnement en
automatique ou si le
générateur d’impulsions
manuel est activé).
Ouverte Fermée Ne sera pas verrouillé Lorsque l'axe C a été indexé, l'axe C et l'axe
supplémentaire de la palette extérieure ne peuvent pas
tourner. (*2)
Les axes autres que ceux susmentionnés peuvent
effectuer toutes les opérations.

Lorsque l'axe C n'a pas été indexé, toutes les

opérations sont impossibles. (*2)(*7)

Ouverte Toutes les opérations sont impossibles. (*2) (*7)

Fermée Toutes les opérations, y compris la rotation de la
↓ broche, s'arrêtent immédiatement. (*3) (*7)
Ouverte
Fermée Fermée - Lorsque l’axe C ou l’axe ajouté pour la palette
↓ extérieure tourne ou n’est pas encore indexé, les
Ouverte opérations (y compris la rotation de la broche)
s’arrêtent immédiatement. (*3)(*7)
Pour les axes autres que ceux susmentionnés, toutes
les opérations sont possibles.
Ouverte Touts les opérations, y compris la rotation de la broche,
s'arrêtent immédiatement. (*3) (*7)
Ouverte Ouverte/ Ouverte/ Ne sera pas Toutes les opérations sont impossibles. (*2) (*7)
Fermée Fermée verrouillé
Fermée Fermée Toutes les opérations sont impossibles. (*2) (*7)
↓ ↓
Ouverte Ouverte
Fermée Ouverte/ Ouverte/ - Toutes les opérations, y compris la rotation de la
↓ Fermée Fermée broche, s'arrêtent immédiatement. (*3) (*7)
Ouverte
OFF Fermée Fermée Ouverte/ - - Aucune opération ne change.
↓ Fermée
ON Ouverte Fermée Lorsque l’axe C ou l’axe ajouté pour la palette
extérieure tourne ou n’est pas encore indexé, les
opérations (y compris la rotation de la broche)
s’arrêtent immédiatement. (*3)(*7)
Pour les axes autres que ceux susmentionnés, toutes
les opérations sont possibles.
Ouverte Toutes les opérations, y compris la rotation de la
broche, s'arrêtent immédiatement. (*3) (*7)
Ouverte Ouverte/ Ouverte/ Toutes les opérations, y compris la rotation de la
Fermée Fermée broche, s'arrêtent immédiatement. (*3) (*7)

2010/12/10 7 fR2BDoor.doc
Fonction de la fermeture de sécurité des portes TC-R2B

*1 Déplacement lent/rotation
L’avance rapide est limitée à la vitesse préréglée par le paramètre machine “avance rapide
(portillon ouvert)”.
La vitesse de coupe également est limitée à la vitesse préréglée dans “avance rapide
(portillon ouvert)”.
La vitesse de déplacement supplémentaire des axes est également limitée à la vitesse réglée
au paramètre machine “avance rapide des axes 5 et 8 (portillon ouvert)”.
La vitesse de l’axe C est limitée à la vitesse réglée au paramètre machine “avance rapide de
l’axe 4 (portillon ouvert)”.

*2 L’essai d’opération entraîne l'erreur “Porte externe ouverte” ou “Porte latérale ouverte”.

*3 Les opérations, y compris le taraudage, l'orientation de la broche, le COA et le pivotement

du magasin, s'arrêtent à la fin de chaque bloc. Quand la porte s’ouvre au cours de la rotation
de la broche, le message d’erreur "Arrêt de broche porte ouverte" apparaît et la broche
s'arrête. Quand la porte est fermée et que l'opération est remise à la même vitesse de
rotation qu’au moment de l'arrêt de la broche, les conditions de rotation précédant l'arrêt de
la broche sont recouvrées.
Cependant, quand les opérations ci-dessous sont effectuées, l'erreur "Arrêt de broche porte
ouverte" est remise à zéro. Même si la porte se ferme et même si l'opération est remise à la
même vitesse de rotation que celle avant l'arrêt de la broche, la condition de rotation
précédant l'arrêt de la broche n'est pas recouvrée.
1) La clef [RST] est pressée.
2) L'arrêt de la broche est effectué en mode manuel.

*4 Machine en cours de marche

La machine est considérée en marche pendant une pause ou l’arrêt d’un bloc en mode
automatique ou IMD (sauf si le programme est terminé ou arrêté).

*5 La porte est verrouillée pendant un ATC ou lorsque le magasin tourne alors que le portillon
extérieur (porte de protection) est fermé et le portillon intérieur ouvert ou lorsque la palette
n’est pas indexée (ceci concerne uniquement les modes automatiques ou IMD).

*6 La porte est verrouillée pendant un ATC ou lorsque le magasin tourne alors que la porte
latérale est fermée.

*7 Lorsque la fermeture de sécurité est activée, les servomoteurs d’axes supplémentaires de

palette extérieure ou de tous les axes sont désactivés, selon la situation.

*8 La porte est verrouillée lorsque la machine n’est pas équipée de porte latérale (en option).

<Servomoteurs des axes supplémentaires de palette extérieure désactivés>

Les servomoteurs des axes supplémentaires de palette extérieure sont désactivés lorsque le
portillon extérieur (porte de protection) est ouvert à l’arrêt de ces axes, lors de l’indexage
de la palette et lorsque le portillon intérieur est fermé. (Le message d’erreur “alimentation
du servo des axes 5 à 8 désactivée” s’affiche. La machine ne s’arrête pas.)
Fermez le portillon extérieur (porte de protection) ou désactivez la fermeture de sécurité
pour mettre les servomoteurs en marche et annuler le message d’erreur.

<Tous les servomoteurs d’axes supplémentaires désactivés>

Les servomoteurs de tous les axes sont désactivés lorsque le portillon extérieur (porte de
protection) est ouvert ou que la tapauteuse rapide n’est pas indexée avant le démarrage
d’une opération automatique (machine à l’arrêt) (le message d’erreur “Porte ouverte”
s’affiche.) Fermez le portillon extérieur (porte de protection) ou désactivez la fermeture de
sécurité pour mettre les servomoteurs en marche et annuler le message d’erreur.

2010/12/10 8 fR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B

安装作业人员以及准备作业人员的
安全操作规程

攻丝中心
TC-R2B

请在接触攻丝中心前仔细阅读本安全操作
规程。

兄弟工业公司
玛西纳丽和苏琉雄公司

2009/10/28 1 cTR2BSAIN1-1.doc
 TC-R2B

目录

什么是安全操作规程 ------------------------------------------------------- 3
务必阅读本规程----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
目的-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
安全操作规程的内容和其他规程的关系 ----------------------------------------------------------------- 3
和安全签条的关系-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
语言-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
索取方法-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
安全操作规程的使用----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
危险程度-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
说明的顺序----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
象形图的意思-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
各部件名称 ------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
警告和回避方法 ------------------------------------------------------------10
安全签条的说明 ------------------------------------------------------------20

2009/10/28 2 cTR2BSAIN1-1.doc
TC-R2B

什么是安全操作规程
务必阅读本规程
凡接触攻丝中心的人员，诸如在工厂安装攻丝中心的人员、使用攻丝中心进行加工的人员和
调整修理攻丝中心的人员，务必阅读本安全操作规程。
本规程把接触攻丝中心的所有人员称为｢使用者｣。

目的
攻丝中心由使用高电压的电器回路、高速旋转机具、大功率移动台和 ATC 送料装置组成。
所以该机器带有许多危险因素。
制订本规章的目的是保护使用者免受攻丝中心所带危险因素的伤害。
为此本安全操作规程对下述问题进行说明。
警告：有什么危险
回避方法：如何回避其危险

安全操作规程的内容以及和其他规程的关系
安全操作规程按使用对象进行分类，附在各说明书里（程序控制缝纫机除外）。您想知道机
器的功能和操作方法，请阅读说明书本篇。

1 操作说明书（面向一般操作人员） ｢操作人员安全操作规程｣
｢安装和做准备作业人员的安全操作规程｣
｢操作说明书｣（基本作业所需要的机械操作方法）
中文零件编码 : 693493001
2 操作说明书（面向专门操作人员） ｢操作人员安全操作规程｣
｢安装和做准备作业人员的安全操作规程｣
｢ 机门连动机能｣
｢ 操作说明书｣ (准备和加工所需要的机械操作方法)
（操作） 日文零件编码 :693477001 英文零件编码 : 693480001
（数据） 日文零件编码 :693204001 英文零件编码 : 693206001
3 安装说明书 ｢安装和做准备作业人员的安全操作规程｣
｢安装说明书｣（机械和配件的安装及其组装方法）
日文零件编码 : 693476001 英文零件编码 : 693479001
4 编制程序说明书 ｢编制程序说明书｣（加工程序的制作方法）
（对话） 日文零件编码 : 693219001
英文零件编码 : 693220001
（NC 语言） 日文零件编码 : 693203001
英文零件编码 : 693205001
5 维修说明书 ｢受过培训的维修作业人员安全操作规程｣
｢维修说明书｣（机械的调整和修理方法）
对顾客不发维修说明书。

2009/11/05 3 cTR2BSA1-2.doc
 和安全签条的关系
安全操作规程中特别重要的部分被制作成安全签条，贴在机器上。

安全操作规程的最后部分是关于安全签条的说明。如果机器上的安全签条脱落，请设法索取
签条后重新贴上。

语言
日本国内销售的机器，所贴的安全操作规程和安全签条均用日文。
销售到国外的机器，用的是英文、德文、法文和中文四国文字。
请设法取得所懂语言的安全操作规程和安全签条。
关于其他国家的安全操作规程和语言签条，请询问您所购买的机器销售店。

索取方法
如果安全操作规程或安全签条遗失，请到您所购买的机器销售店索取。
如销售店无法解决，请向下列单位咨询。

日本国外联系地址：
1-5, Kitajizoyama, Noda-cho, Kariya-shi, Aichi-ken, 448-0803, Japan.
BROTHER INDUSTRIES, LTD. Machinery & Solution Company.
phone +81-566-95-0075
fax +81-566-25-3721

2011/05/27 4 cTCOMSA1-3.doc
 安全操作规程的使用
安全操作规程应注意妥善保存，做到随时可以阅读。如机器更换所有人，请转交机器的新持
有人。

危险程度
如无视警告，所引起的危险的程度按受害程度可分 3 种。

1.危险

危 险
招致死亡或不可复原的严重疾患的危险。

2.警告

警 告
招致重伤的危险。

3.注意

注 意
轻度危险

说明的顺序
按下列顺序进行说明：
1. 表示危险程度的文字标记（危险、警告、注意）和象形图
2. 危险的种类
3. 伤害的预测
4. 回避方法

2011/05/27 5 cTCOMSA1-3.doc
 象形图的意思

安全签条和安全操作规程的警告语言使用象形图，形象地说明其危险程度和回避方法。现将
图像的意义说明如下。

1. 危险

当心滑倒 活动部件

当心绊倒 注意触电

当心触电 当心夹人

夹进手里 注意高温

注意高温 谨防割伤

谨防断裂 注意破裂

当心刺伤 有物落下

有物落下 旋转物体

当心坠落 注意飞散

注意飞散 谨防火灾

2011/05/27 6 cTCOMSA1-3.doc
 2. 回避方法

保护耳朵 保护双手

保护双脚 拔掉电源

严禁触摸 保护头部

需接地线 不准分解

保护眼睛

2011/05/27 7 cTCOMSA1-3.doc
部品名 Section Names Bezeichnung der Komponenten Noms de sections 各部件名称

A
6 21 23
12 24
2
1
7 1

38
25

30
12
14
A
22

9
28

11 31

18

19 34 20
5 10
3.4
35 37
16 17
15 32

36
0906-1~7.ai

2010/12/10 8 TR2BSA2.doc
部品名 Section Names Bezeichnung der Komponenten Noms de sections 各部件名称

No. 各部の名称 Section names Bezeichnung der Komponenten Noms de sections 各部件名称
日本語 English Deutsch Français 中文
1. 制御箱 control box Steuerschrank armoire de commande 控制箱
2. 機械ｶﾊﾞｰ machine cover Maschinenabdeckung couvercle de la machine 机械外罩
3. ﾌｨｰﾄﾞﾎｰﾙﾄﾞｽｲｯﾁ feed hold switch Vorschubhaltschalter interrupteur d'arrêt de l'avance 进给保持开关
4. ﾌｨｰﾄﾞﾎｰﾙﾄﾞﾗﾝﾌﾟ feed hold lamp Vorschubhalt-Kontrollleuchte témoin de contrôle d'arrêt de l'avance 进给保持指示灯
5. ﾄﾞｱｲﾝﾀﾛｯｸｽｲｯﾁ door interlock switch Türverriegelungsschalter interrupteur de verrouillage de porte 门互锁开关
6. ﾒﾝﾃﾅﾝｽｶﾊﾞｰ maintenance cover Wartungsabdeckung couvercle d'entretien 维修罩盖
7. 正面扉 front door Vordertür porte avant 正面门
9. ﾄﾞｱｲﾝﾀﾛｯｸｷｰ door interlock key Schlüssel des Türverriegelungsschalters clé de verrouillage de porte 门互锁键
10. ｽﾋﾟﾝﾄﾞﾙ spindle Spindel broche 主轴
11. ATC ﾏｶﾞｼﾞﾝ ATC magazine ATC-Magazin magasin ATC ATC 刀库
12. とって handle Griff poignée 把手
14. ﾚﾍﾞﾘﾝｸﾞﾎﾞﾙﾄ leveling bolt Nivellierschraube boulon de mise à niveau 调平螺栓
15. ｸｰﾗﾝﾄﾉｽﾞﾙ coolant nozzle Kühlmitteldüse buse de liquide d'arrosage 冷却液喷嘴
16. 工具 tool Werkzeug outil 刀具
17. 工具ﾎﾙﾀﾞ tool holder Werkzeughalter porte-outil 刀具夹
18. ｽﾋﾟﾝﾄﾞﾙﾍｯﾄﾞ spindle head Spindelkopf tête de broche 主轴头
19. 非常停止ｽｲｯﾁ emergency stop switch Not-Aus-Schalter interrupteur d'arrêt d'urgence 紧急停止开关
20. ｸｲｯｸﾃｰﾌﾞﾙ quick table Schnellschalttisch table à action instantanée 快速回转工作台
21. 主電源ﾌﾞﾚｰｶ main power breaker Hauptschalter disjoncteur d’alimentation principale 主电源开关
22. ｸｰﾗﾝﾄﾀﾝｸ coolant tank Kühlmitteltank réservoir de liquide d'arrosage 冷却液罐
23. ﾒﾝﾃﾅﾝｽｶﾊﾞｰ maintenance cover Wartungsabdeckung couvercle d'entretien 维修罩盖
24. 回生抵抗ｶﾊﾞｰ regenerative resistor cover Abdeckung d. Rückkopplungswiderstands couvercle de la résistance régénérative 再生电阻罩
25. 操作ﾊﾟﾈﾙ operation panel Bedientafel pupitre de commande 操作面板
28. ｸﾞﾘｯﾌﾟｶﾊﾞｰ grip cover Griffschutz couverture de jambe 刀柄护罩
30. 自動間欠給油ﾎﾟﾝﾌﾟ automatic intermittent lubricating unit Automatische Intervallschmieranlage unité de lubrication intermittente autom. 自动间歇加油泵
31. 内扉 inter door Innentür porte intérieure 内门
34. Y 軸ﾃﾚｽｺｶﾊﾞｰ Y-axis telescopic cover Y-Achsen-Teleskopabdeckung carter télescopique de l'axe Y Y 轴伸缩护罩
35. X 軸ﾃﾚｽｺｶﾊﾞｰ X-axis telescopic cover X-Achsen-Teleskopabdeckung carter télescopique de l'axe X X 轴伸缩护罩
36. ｴﾌﾟﾛﾝｶﾊﾞｰ apron cover Schutzschürze carter de tablier 防溅护罩
37. 洗浄ｶﾞﾝ clearing gun Reinigungspistole pistolet de nettoyage 气力清洁枪
38. 側面扉 side door Seitentür porte latérale 侧面门

2010/12/10 9 TR2BSA2.doc
 TC-R2B

警告和回避方法
( )中的数字 1, 2 与各部分的名称号码相对应。
危险 危 险
SD1 在攻丝中心里隐藏着许多危险。
SD1-1 为了熟知危险的内容和回避方法，请在操作机器前阅读安全操作规程。
SD1-2 所有使用者均须知道紧急停止开关(19)的位置和操作方法。

SD2 控制箱(1)中有高电压装置，不慎触摸该装置，会引起重大伤亡事故。
SD2-1 电气系统的维修检查作业，只允许具有本机械电气回路知识、持有电工执照的
人员才能操作。
SD2-2 应关掉主电源总开关(21)后进行作业，并设置｢ 正在作业｣ 的表示牌。
SD2-3 离开机器时，关闭控制柜，并拧紧。

SD3 被运转中的机器卷入，有可能会受到重大伤害。
SD3-1 机器在运转时，不能将身体伸入机械外罩(2)中去。
SD3-2 亲眼确认机械外罩中确实无人后，才能开动机器。
SD3-3 在机器运转时，手足和身体不能靠近机器的转动部分。
SD3-4 在万不得已必须进入机器进行操作时，应切断主电源控制板(21)的电源，并加
铁锁保护，以免电源接入。

SD4 机门连动装置的开关(5)处于无效状态时，即使打开正面门(7)及侧面门(38)，机
械也会运行。有被机械夹伤的危险。
SD4-1 保养作业时，应密切注意机器的运转情况，做到能随时停机。保养作业结束后，
应将机门连动装置拨到有效位置。并取下机门连动装置的钥匙(9)并保管好。
SD4-2 不能在机门连动装置处于无效状态下离开机器。

SD5 机门连动装置的开关(5)处于无效状态时，快速回转工作台(20)有时也会移动。
因此有被快速回转工作台夹住而受伤的危险。也有被机械夹住而受伤的危险。
SD5-1 调试设备时，应密切注意机器的运转情况，做到能随时停机。调试结束后，应
将机门连动装置拨到“开”位置。并取下机门连动装置的钥匙(9)，交监督人员
保管。

SD7 如不按规定方法将机器接上地线，有可能发生触电和重大伤害事故。
SD7-1 应按规定方法加接地线。

2010/12/07 10 cTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SD8 装载有空心主轴装置的机器如果使用油性切削液的话，有可能引火而造成火
灾。
SD8-1 必须使用水溶性切削液。

警告 警 告

SW1 触摸转动中的刀具(16)会受伤。
SW1-1 不准靠近转动中的刀具。

SW2 折断的刀具(16)和工件弹出会造成伤害。
SW2-1 应关闭正面门(7)及侧面门(38)后再运行机械。

SW3 夹紧转动部件可能导致受伤。
SW3-1 勿靠近转动部件(16)、主轴(10)和 ATC 刀库(11)。
SW3-2 应穿合身服装。长发应拢入工作帽内。除非停机做准备工作，不能戴手套。不
能戴首饰。勿摸弄转动部件。

SW4 改装安全装置，会带来安全装置失灵、触电、被夹和被打等危险。
SW4-1 勿改装安全装置。勿固定安全装置，以免安全装置失灵。

SW5 切屑碎屑飞入眼内，会伤及眼球而失明。
SW5-1 应戴用铁屑防护眼镜。
SW5-2 勿用压缩空气清扫切屑碎屑。

2010/12/07 11 cTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW6 用手触摸切屑碎屑，会造成外伤或烫伤。
SW6-1 勿用手触摸切屑碎屑。勿用手触摸加工件的尖利部分。
SW6-2 清理切屑碎屑应戴手套，使用刷子。
SW6-3 应在停机后清理切屑碎屑。

SW7 勿握摸刀具(16)的刀刃，以免手被割破。
SW7-1 勿握摸刀具的刀刃。拿取刀具时应拿住刀具夹(17)部分。

SW8 重物跌落脚上，会造成足部骨折。
SW8-1 抬拿重物时应穿安全鞋。

SW9 抬拿重物时，注意闪腰。
SW9-1 抬拿重物时，应请他人协助。
SW9-2 抬拿重物时，应双脚用力而非腰部用力。

SW10 长时间身处噪音之中或巨大的噪音之中，会造成双耳失聪。
SW10-1 在噪音中作业时，应戴耳塞等保护器具。

SW11 高气压设备有可能爆裂而伤及眼目。
SW11-1 没有接受过高气压设备使用方法培训、不懂该机器配管的人员，不能安装和改
装高气压设备。
SW11-2 在进行高气压设备的配管作业时，应切断高压电源，放去残留高压空气后再进
行作业。并设置｢ 正在作业｣ 的表示牌。

SW12 站起时注意碰伤头。
SW12-1 在机器内部或周围进行作业时应戴安全帽。

2010/12/07 12 cTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW13 开机时，机器中如有未取出的刀具，刀具有可能飞散而造成工伤。
SW13-1 勿将刀具遗忘在机器中。

SW14 持握把手(12)(32)(39)以外的部分开闭正面门(7)或者内门(31)或者侧面门(38)的
话，有手被夹伤的危险。
SW14-1 开闭门时，应持握把手。

SW16 在控制箱(1)及操作面板(25)以及机械上放置工具类的话，有工具类震落的危险。
SW16-1 在控制箱和机器上勿放置物品。

SW17 勿攀登机器和冷却液罐(22)，须注意坠落受伤。
SW17-1 勿攀登机器和冷却液罐。

SW18 把手伸进调平螺栓(14)的下面，须注意手被夹伤。
SW18-1 勿将手伸进调平螺栓(14)的下面。
调节调平螺栓应使用工具。

SW19 缆绳下垂或不加缆绳护罩，会发生绊滑跌倒等工伤事故。
SW19-1 应收紧缆绳的松余部分，沿地板拖放时应加缆绳护罩。

SW20 擅自改装机器，会使安全装置失灵，安全操作规程和安全签条的警告事项将失
去作用。
SW20-1 勿改装机器。需要改装时，应事先和兄弟工业公司联系，取得兄弟工业公司的
书面允许。

SW21 冷却液进入眼睛，会损伤眼睛。
SW21-1 调整冷却液喷嘴(15)时，应配戴防护眼镜。
SW21-2 使用气力清洁枪(37)时，应配戴防护眼镜。
SW21-3 冷却液进入眼睛后，应用清水洗眼，接受医生诊治。

2010/12/07 13 cTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW22 手指伸入机器夹缝，应注意手会被夹伤。
SW22-1 禁止把手指放在刀柄护罩(28)上。
SW22-2 请勿将手指伸入刀具(16)或刀具夹(17)与 ATC 刀库(11)之间的空隙中去｡
SW22-3 请勿将手指放入工具或工具架与主轴(10)之间。

SW23 如冷却液、机油或切削碎屑被打翻，会因滑脚、跌倒、碰撞而受伤。
SW23-1 应切断电源，并清扫机器内部和机器周围以后，再进行作业。
SW23-2 安装作业应戴安全帽和穿安全鞋。

SW24 拆卸刀具夹(17)时，须注意手可能会被刀具(16)的刀刃所伤或手被机器打着。
SW24-1 不得握摸刀具的刀刃。拿刀具时应戴皮手套。应用双手持拿刀具。

SW25 机器可能突然停机，刀具可能突然脱落。
SW25-1 没有按下紧急停止开关时，不要将手脚、身体伸到主轴头(18)下面去。
SW25-2 定位快速工作台(20)，准备安装。
SW25-3 切断主电源总开关(21)，加锁以防止总开关打开，然后补充润滑液。

SW26 如使用油性冷却液加工，加工部位可能受热起火。
SW26-1 使用油性冷却液时，应设置火警预报器和自动灭火装置。
SW26-2 加工时，操作人员不得离开机器。

SW27 机器开动时，人傍靠在机器上，会有被夹、被打致伤的危险。
SW27-1 勿傍靠在机器上。

SW28 紧急停止开关(19)上挂有物品时，紧急停止开关会按不进去。
SW28-1 不得在紧急停止开关上钩挂物品。

SW30 冷却液罐(22)很重，抬拿时需注意闪腰或脚被砸伤。
SW30-1 清理切削铁屑时也不得抬拿冷却液罐。

2010/12/07 14 cTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW31 进入机器时，须注意滑倒或被机器夹住。
SW31-1 进入机器前，应先切断主电源开关(21)，加锁以防止总开关被打开。清扫润滑
液和铁屑时，应穿戴安全鞋和安全帽，并在操作板(25)附近置放｢ 正在作业｣
的标牌。

SW32 别忘记安装机械外罩(2)的维修罩盖(6)、(23)，以免操作人员被夹或被断裂的
刀具(16)打伤。
SW32-1 在打开电源前应亲自确认是否装上了维修罩盖｡

SW33 如果使用超重超大的刀具(16)、刀具夹(17)，该刀具或该刀具夹有可能飞脱。
SW33-1 应使用重量和尺寸都在规定以内的刀具夹｡
SW33-2 刀具的限制条件请见刀具签条和操作说明书。

SW34 机器在运转过程中，再生电阻会发热，须注意触摸再生器会被烫伤。
SW34-1 勿拆卸再生电阻罩(24)。

SW35 机器在运转过程中，马达会发热，须注意触摸马达可能会被烫伤。
SW35-1 在停止运转后的 30 分钟内不要触摸马达。

SW37 如果保护装置的设置发生变化，因为保护装置不工作，可能引起火灾。
SW37-1 禁止修改保护装置的设置。

SW38 在旋转 ATC 刀库(11)时，刀具(16)会碰到工作物、夹具或者机器而折断。

SW38-1 将刀长设定在即时在旋转 ATC 刀库时，也不会让刀具碰到工作物、夹具或机
器的位置。

2010/12/07 15 cTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW39 如控制箱(1)和操作板(25)潮湿，须注意有可能触电。
SW39-1 不能将冷却液、水、切削铁屑撒到控制箱和操作盘上。
SW39-2 不能用潮湿的手触摸控制箱。

SW40 为防止触电，应确确实实地连接地线。
SW40-1 从外部引进的动力线 PE 线过短的话，当拉动电缆线时，PE 线有可能松脱而触
电。
SW40-2 接续 PE 线时，应留有余地，长于其他电线(L1、L2､ L3)。

SW41 如果在有爆炸危险的环境下打开机器电源，或进行加工作业，有可能因机器的
火花而引起爆炸。
SW41-1 不要将机器安装在有爆炸危险的环境下。
SW41-2 不得在有爆炸危险的环境下打开机器电源，或进行加工作业。

SW43 接触被重物压坏的电缆线时有可能被麻电，或电缆线被重物压坏而造成短路。
SW43-1 应让持有电工执照的人员进行电缆线的铺设，以防止电缆线被弄坏。电缆线破
损时应调换新的电缆线。

SW44 切削碎屑有可能引起加工材料起火或爆炸。
SW44-1 切削碎屑应立即清除。
SW44-2 在加工上述材料时，机器附近应放置灭火设备或进行无人作业。

SW45 对于刀具（16）有一个垫片，如果该垫片没有上紧，则可能在主轴旋转的过程
中脱落，导致人身伤害。
SW45-1 检查垫片是否安装牢固，然后将刀具安装到机床上。

SW49 使用设有电源线专用配线的 3 线式感应器的时候，有引火的危险。

SW49-1 请不要使用 3 线式感应器，应使用 2 线式感应器。
SW49-2 不得已使用 3 线式感应器的时候，应在电源线部处追加个别保险丝(1A 以下)。

2010/12/07 16 cTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW50 撞击配管部可能造成配管泄漏，润滑液进入眼睛有可能引起失明。
SW50-1 使用时应注意避免撞击配管。

SW51 在调整润滑液储存罐的喷头时，应注意手会被加工刀具(15)割伤，或被打到机
器上去。
SW51-1 调整时应戴皮手套。

SW52 移动机器时，如电缆线原封不动地接在机器上，电缆线有可能脱落而触电。
SW52-1 移动前应拆下机器本体及冷却液罐(22)｡

SW55 由于自动间歇加油泵(30)放置于高处，加油时要防止油飞人眼睛。
SW55-1 加油时要戴防护眼镜。

SW56 由于产生大量的喷雾，作业人员在工作交换时可能会产生恶心。
SW56-1 一定要戴防雾面具。

SW57 装载有空心主轴装置的机器，在进行清扫、交换过滤网等保养时，要防止切削
液飞人眼睛而受伤。
SW57-1 放掉残压后进行作业。

SW58 刀具(16)安装在刀库(11)及主轴(10)上的时候，进入机械内的话，有因刀具碰到
头而受伤的危险。
SW58-1 进入机器里面时要戴安全帽。

2010/12/07 17 cTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

SW59 不要对机床灯罩、工作台灯罩（透明玻璃）施加外力，
否则会使其破损并有可能将手弄伤。
SW59-1 不要使其他物体碰撞到机床灯罩、工作台灯罩（透明玻璃），
也不要无端对其施加外力。
SW59-2 交换荧火灯时要戴手套。

SW60 进行机床的水平测量作业用的千斤顶脱落以致手被夹住。
SW60-1 应将起重器放在基板底面的中央部分使用。

SW61 攀登冷却液箱(22)的话有滑倒受伤的危险。
SW61-1 请勿攀登。

SW62 配线时，端子台的螺丝锁得不紧的话，会导致由于接触不良引起发热、起火的
危险。
SW62-1 配线时，螺丝应无松缓。

SW63 将机器设置在不稳定场所的话，会因加工中机器移动或倒下及破损而导致受伤
的危险。
SW63-1 机器的设置应选在平坦且坚固的场所进行。
请确认地面是否达到下述的所有条件。
· 即使放置重达 2600 公斤的物体，地面也应无问题不变形。
· 地面应无凸出、凹进而平坦。
· 地面表面应非常坚固，即使施加 1.0MPa(10Kgf／cm2)的压力也不变形。
· 地面应经得起漫长岁月的变更而不劣化。

SW64 如果工厂内照明光线昏暗的话，有因机械内光线变暗而导致夹具及刀具弄伤手
的危险。
SW64-1 机械内照明度低于 500 勒克斯以下的场合，应设置照明灯。

2010/12/07 18 cTR2BSAIN3.doc
TC-R2B

SW65 踩在 X 轴伸缩护罩(35)、Y 轴伸缩护罩(34)、或者防溅护罩(36)上方的话，

有滑倒受伤的危险。
SW65-1 不应踩在护罩上方。

SW66 使用不合理的姿势进行作业的话，有受伤的危险。
SW66-1 请勿使用不合理的姿势进行作业。

SW67 有被地基板绊倒而摔伤的危险。
SW67-1 走过机械侧面或者在机械侧面进行作业时，应使用安全帽与安全鞋。

SW68 机内灯罩(透明玻璃)内有高压电部分，有误摸触电受重伤及死亡的危险。
有因侵入切削油及切削粉等异物导致零部件破损及引火的危险。
SW68-1 应关闭主电源开关，上锁后进行萤光灯的更换。
应显示正在进行萤光灯的更换。
萤光灯的更换时应注意异物的侵入。
应用干净的(没有污垢的)手进行萤光灯的更换。
不应更换机内灯罩内部的保险丝。
应关闭防水插头(盖)后进行点灯的检查。

SW69 因为天棚罩极重，取下及安装时，有掉落受伤的可能性。
SW69-1 取下及安装天棚时，应由 2 人以上的人员进行。

2010/12/07 19 cTR2BSAIN3.doc
 TC-R2B

安全签条的说明
机械上贴有安全签条，安全签条是安全操作规格中特别重要的部分。
请在充分理解了安全签条的内容以后再进行机械的操作。
安全签条贴在机械的下述位置，请确认安全签条有否脱落。如有脱落，请索取后重贴。

6
3

8
7

0906.ai

2010/12/10 20 cTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[1] [前面] 安全签条

语言 零件编码
日中英文 693508001

2010/12/10 21 cTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

[2] 前面刀具标签
根据主轴转速以及主轴规格，相应的记载内容会有所变化。

ＢＴ情况下

语言 零件编码
日中英文 693526001

ＢＢＴ情况下

语言 零件编码
日中英文 693525001

2010/12/10 22 cTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[3] 背面安全签条

语言 零件编码
日中英文 693502001

2010/12/10 23 cTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

[4] 再生阻抗器罩签条

语言 零件编码
日中英文 690729001

[5] 加工机具装脱签条

语言 零件编码
日中英文 693515001

2010/12/10 24 cTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[6] 侧面维修罩安全签条

语言 零件编码
日中英文 693512001

2010/12/10 25 cTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

[7] 有空心主轴（CTS）安全签条 1

语言 零件编码
日中英文 693001001

2010/12/10 26 cTR2BSA4
TC-R2B

[8] 有空心主轴（CTS）签条 2

语言 零件编码
日中英文 693003001

693003001(1-1).wmf

[9] 远离勿踏标签

语言 零件编码
日中英文 693178001

693178001.ai

2010/12/10 27 cTR2BSA4
 TC-R2B

(此页空白。)

2010/12/10 28 cTR2BSA4
TC-R2B 机门连动器机能

机门连动器机能

1 操作注意事项
2 外观图
3 检查
4 规格的详细内容

2010/12/09 1 cR2BDoor.doc
机门连动器机能 TC-R2B

1 操作注意事项
危险
机门连动器开关无效时，即使门呈开启状态机器依然运转。
手可能会被旋转的机具划破、夹住和受伤。机门连动器开关无效时，手脚
和身体不能伸进机器。
应向管理员汇报情况。
机门连动器开关无效时，管理员不能让作业人员操作机器。
应亲眼确认机门连动器开关有效后，才能进入操作。
发现机门连动器上挂有钥匙时，应向管理员汇报。

警告
小心转动工具伤人。
别靠近转动工具。

警告
小心卷进转动机件而受伤。
别靠近转动中的机具、机轴和送料装置。
服装要合身。
长发应梳理进工作帽内。
除非停机做准备工作，不准戴用手套。
不戴首饰。
不用手抓摸转动机件。

2010/12/09 2 cR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B 机门连动器机能

目的
机门连动器机能是保护作业人员，避免卷入转动的机具、可动部件。

装置说明
在外门关闭状态下能锁机或限制机器动作，但视情况不同而各异。

结构
机门连动器由下列部件构成：
1. 机门限位开关
2. 机门锁定装置

用法
1. 平时
机门连动器机能开关(1)置于有效位置。

2. 准备作业和维修作业时
要做准备作业和维修作业时，如确有必要，才可把开关置于无效位置。
请先阅读「在安装和做准备工作时操作人员安全操作规程」「经培训后的操作人员安全操作
规程」后，再进行准备工作和维修作业。

机门连动器机能开关无效时需遵守下列事项：
 注意别卷入转动的机具、可动部件和转动部件中去。
 作业结束后应将开关回复到有效位置。
 钥匙(2)请管理员保管。

操作板

door.01.ai

2010/12/09 3 cR2BDoor.doc
机门连动器机能 TC-R2B

2 外观图
TC-R2B
标准行程类型 钥匙

机门限位
开关

Do001.ai

2010/12/09 4 cR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B 机门连动器机能

3 检查
开始运转前，请务必检查门联锁装置和紧急停止装置。
并且在维修（修理）作业之后也请同样地进行检查。
不能正常动作时，请立即向负责人汇报。

检查门互锁系统的步骤方法
门打开时设备不工作的检查步骤
(1) 检查【门互锁】(DOOR INTERLOCK)开关是否被启用，然后接通电源。
(2) 打开前门。
(3) 输入手动模式，然后按下操作面板上的【工作台分度】[P.INDX] 键。
(4) 检查主轴是否移动，以及是否显示“门打开”报警消息。
该报警表示门互锁系统工作正常。
(5) 从(2)到(4)步检查侧门（选项）。

检查门互锁的步骤
(6) 关闭前门、侧门（选项）。
(7) 按下【工作台分度】[P.INDX] 键。
(8) 托盘回转时打开正面的门，确认正面的门是否已经锁定。
正面的门如果已经锁定，表明门联锁装置功能正常。
(9) 关闭前门、侧门（选项）。
(10) 按下【主轴正转】 [SP.CW] 键，检查主轴是否旋转。
(11) 尝试打开侧门（选项），以检查侧门是否被锁定。
如果该门被锁定，表示门互锁工作正常。
(12) 按下【主轴停止】[STOP] 键，检查主轴是否停止。

紧急停止的检查方法
(1) 按机械操作面板上的【紧急停止】(EMERGENCY STOP)开关。
(2) 请确认画面上发生【*紧急按钮被激活】的报警信号。
(3) 将【紧急停止】(EMERGENCY STOP)开关的旋转扭向右旋转，将旋转扭归位。
(4) 请按操作面板上的【重新设置】(RST)键。
(5) 请确认画面上的报警信号消失。

2010/12/09 5 cR2BDoor.doc
机门连动器机能 TC-R2B

4 规格的详细内容
门 侧门 侧门
锁定 外门 内门 外门锁定 动作
开关 (*8) 不
无效 关 关 开/关 不锁定 不锁定 可以全动作
(*6) (*5) C 轴处于分度状态时
开 关
C 轴低速旋转（*1）
外侧工作台的附加轴低速旋转（*1）
 自动运行仅限单动运行
 MDI 运行、程序段停止
上述以外的轴可进行所有动作

C 轴未分度状态下
全軸低速移動(*1)
刀库转动、ATC、攻丝不能动作
 主轴回转、刀库转动、ATC、攻丝不能
动作
 轴移动、主轴停止、主轴定位可运行
 自动运行、仅限单一运转
 不可进行 MDI 运行
开 全轴低速移动(*1)
 主轴回转、刀库转动、ATC、攻丝不能
动作
 轴移动、主轴停止、主轴定位可运行
 自动运行、仅限单一运转
 MDI 运转，程序块停止
关 动作即时停止（含主轴回转）(*3)
↓
开
关 关 在 C 轴分度状态下
↓ 仅外侧工作台的附加轴即时停止。
开
在 C 回转中或 C 轴未分度状态向下，
动作即时停止（含主轴回转）(*3)
开 动作即时停止（含主轴回转）(*3)
开 开/关 开/关 全轴低速移动(*1)
 主轴回转、刀库转动、ATC、攻丝不能
动作
 轴移动、主轴停止、主轴定位可运行
 自动运行、仅限单一运转。
 MDI 运转，程序块停止
关 开 动作即时停止（含主轴回转）(*3)
↓
开
开 关 动作即时停止（含主轴回转）(*3)
↓
开
关 开/关 开/关 动作即时停止（含主轴回转）(*3)
↓
开

2010/12/09 6 cR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B 机门连动器机能

门 侧门 侧门
锁定 外门 内门 外门锁定 动作
开关 (*8) 不
有效 关 关 关 侧门关&机 外门（正门） 可以全动作
床动作中锁 关&
定 C 轴及外侧工
作台附加轴运
（机床动作 转中锁定。
中指轴移
动、主轴回 C 轴及外侧工
转、MDI、 作台附加轴运
自动运行 转中锁定。
中、手控有
（机床动作中
效）(*4) 指轴移动、主
轴回转、MDI、
自动运行中、
手控有效）
(*4)
开 外门（正门） 可以全动作
关&
机床动作中锁
定
（机床动作中
指轴移动、主
轴回转、MDI、
自动运行中、
手控有效）
(*4)
开 关 不锁定 在 C 轴分度状态下
C 轴及外侧工作台附加轴不能回转(*2)
除上述轴以外可以全动作

C 轴未分度状态下
不能动作(*2)(*7)
开 不能全动作(*2)(*7)
关 动作即时停止（含主轴回转）(*3) (*7)
↓
开
关 关 － C 轴或外侧工作台的附加轴处于旋转过程中，
↓ 或者
开 C 轴处于未分度状态时
动作（含主轴旋转）
即时停止(*3) (*7)
上述之外可以进行所有动作
开 动作即时停止（含主轴回转）(*3) (*7)
开 开/关 开/关 不锁定 不能全动作(*2)(*7)

关 关 不能全动作(*2)(*7)
↓ ↓
开 开
关 开/关 开/关 － 动作即时停止（含主轴回转）(*3) (*7)
↓
开

2010/12/09 7 cR2BDoor.doc
机门连动器机能 TC-R2B

门 侧门 侧门
锁定 外门 内门 外门锁定 动作
开关 (*8) 不
无效 关 关 开/关 － － 不变化
→
开 关 C 轴或外侧工作台的附加轴处于旋转过程中，
有效
或者
C 轴处于未分度状态时
动作（含主轴旋转）
即时停止(*3) (*7)
上述之外可以进行所有动作
开 动作即时停止（含主轴回转）(*3) (*7)

开 开/关 开/关 动作即时停止（含主轴回转）(*3) (*7)

2010/12/09 8 cR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B 机门连动器机能

*1. 低速移动、低速回转
快速进给移动速度变为以机床参数的“快速进给速度（开门时）”设定的速度。切削
移动速度也受限于“快速进给速度（开门时）”设定的速度。
对于附加轴、受机床参数的“快速进给速度 5～8 轴（开门时）”速度的限制。对于 C
轴、受机床参数的“快速进给速度 4 轴（开门时）”速度的限制。

*2. 动作将开始时，发生“外门打开”、或“侧门打开”的错误。

*3. 攻丝、主轴定位、ATC、刀库回转中，程序块停止。
主轴回转中如果开着门，会发生“门开、主轴回转停止中”的错误。接下来、关门、
再起动、恢复到主轴停止前的回转状态。
但是、显示正在进行以下操作时，“门开、主轴回转停止中”的错误消失，关门，再
起动，仍不能回到主轴停止前的回转状态。
按下“复位”键，在手动状态主轴操作。

*4. 机床动作中
MDI、自动运行一时停止･程序块停止中（程序结束时、除程序停止中）也包括在机
床动作中。

*5. 外门（正门）关、在内门开或工作台未分度的情况下，ATC 运行中、刀库运转中，门

锁定。（仅限 MDI、自动运行时）

*6. 侧门关时、刀具更换中或、刀库转动中门锁定。（仅限 MDI、自动运行时）

*7. 门互锁有效时、根据情况外侧工作台的附加轴、全轴的伺服 OFF。

*8. 无侧门(选项)时、视为关。

○ 关于外侧工作台的附加轴的伺服 OFF
・外侧附加轴在停止状态、且工作台在分度状态、内门关闭时、如开外门（正门）外侧
附加轴伺服就 OFF。发生（“5～8 轴的伺服已 OFF”错误。运转不停。）
关外门（正门）或是将门互锁无效，伺服置于 ON 错误也就可以消除了。

○ 关于全轴伺服 OFF
・在自动运行开始前（机床停止状态）、内门开，还是 QT 处于未分度状态时，如外门
（正门）打开则全轴伺服成 OFF。（发生“门开”错误。）外门（正门）关，或让门
互锁无效，伺服 ON 错误也会消失。

2010/12/09 9 cR2BDoor.doc
机门连动器机能 TC-R2B

(此页空白。)

2010/12/09 10 cR2BDoor.doc
TC-R2B Title

TC-R2B

INSTALLATION
MANUAL

Please read this manual carefully before starting operation.

2009/11/02 1 eTR2BINT.doc
Title TC-R2B

Introduction

Congratulations on your purchase of the Brother TC-R2B.

Correct usage of the machine is of most importance to assure the expected machine capabilities
and functions as well as operator's safety. Read this Manual thoroughly before starting operation.

The relation between the manuals is as follows.

• OPERATION MANUAL (For general operators)
This manual describes the basic operations of the machine.

• OPERATION MANUAL (For advanced personnel)

This manual describes the advanced operations of the machine.

• INSTALLATION MANUAL
This manual describes the installation of the machine.

• PROGRAMMING MANUAL
This manual describes the programming of the machine.

We shall not bear any responsibility for accidents caused by user's special handling or handling
deviating from the generally recognized safe operation.
Keep this manual for future reference.
Please include this manual when reselling this product.
When this manual or labels are lost or damaged, please replace them (charged) from your nearest
agency.

* All rights reserved: No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system,
or transmitted in any form without prior permission of the manufacturer.
* The contents of this Manual are subject to change without notice.
* This manual are complied with utmost care. If you encounter any question or doubt,
please contact your local dealer.
* We will provide you with the source code for the software under GPL or LGPL. Please
contact us if necessary. (A small fee will be charged to cover media, postage and handling
expenses.)
* Ethernet is a trade mark of Xerox. Corp., USA.

2009/11/02 2 eTR2BINT.doc
TC-R2B Title

HOW TO USE THE MANUAL

This Instruction Manual consists of the following elements:
(1) General description Is an outline of the description given in the section.
(2) Alarm Is a alert given against a danger which may cause serious
damage or death to human being or may damage the machine.
The hazards are explained in this order:
(2-1) degree of danger,
(2-2) subject of danger,
(2-3) expected damage,
(2-4) preventive measure,
(3) Operation procedure Is a procedure of activating a function.
(4) Screen Is given to describe important points of a procedure given. This
screen is only a representation of the information displayed on
the actual screen and therefore differs somewhat from the
actual screen layout and screen fonts.
(5) Illustration Is a sketch, figure, view, etc. indicating dimensions, position or zone,
given in the points where it is necessary to provide complementary
information to the text description.

(2) Alarm (3) Operation procedure

(1) General description

1.3 Precautions of first 1.3.1Before starting operation

Before starting operation careful to read bellow.

WARNING
(1)Turn off the main power breaker handle on
Dropping a heavy object onto the control box door. Never touch the primary side
power source or the terminal of the main power
your foot may fracture your foot breaker, as these have high voltage applied.
bones. (2)Put up a signboard which says' Under Maintenance
When lifting heavy objects, (3)Never allow people to approach the machine,
particularly moving areas.
wear safety shoes. (4)Do not place any unnecessary object around the
machine.
(5)Wear a helmet and safety shoes.

1-2 1-3

(5) Illustration (4) Screen

*(Ref.~) in the text indicates the block of the data on the data bank screen.

2009/11/02 3 eTR2BINT.doc
Title TC-R2B

Striving for environmental preservation

Your cooperation is requested

Thank you very much for employing our products.

We at BROTHER have established an environmental policy with the basic
concept “environmentally-friendly production from product development through
to disposal” to preserve vegetation on earth. As an excellent corporation that can
coexist with the community and the environment, we positively promote
environmental preservation activities.
To meet this end, we would like the users of our products to agree to our
environmental policy and to pay particular attention to the following to cooperate
with our environmental preservation activities.

1. Call a specialized company to collect unnecessary packing materials and

cutting chips so that they can be recycled as much as possible.
2. An outflow of coolant, used oil, and so on may result in environmental
pollution.
Install the machine correctly to prevent any such outflow.
3. Dispose of coolant, used oil, electrical components, replaced parts, and so
on according to national laws and local regulations.

Note based on California law (USA) on the use and handling of Perchlorate
This product contains a CR Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply.
See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

2009/11/02 4 eTR2BINT.doc
TC-R2B Contents

Chapter 1 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS -------------------------- 1-1

1.1 Precautions of first importance-------------------------------------------- 1-2
1.1.1 When making an access to machine motion area -----------------------------------------1-3
1.1.2 In case of machine trouble or danger -------------------------------------------------------1-4
1.1.3 When operating -------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-4
1.1.4 When the door interlock switch is invalid -------------------------------------------------1-4
1.1.5 Air piping --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-5
1.2 Precautions on safety--------------------------------------------------------- 1-6
1.2.1 Before starting operation---------------------------------------------------------------------1-6
1.2.2 During operation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-6
1.2.3 After machining -------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-6
1.2.4 Other precautions -----------------------------------------------------------------------------1-6
1.3 Person Allowed for Operation---------------------------------------------- 1-7
1.3.1 Operation qualifications----------------------------------------------------------------------1-7
1.3.2 Working area ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-8

Chapter 2 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION--------------- 2-1

2.1 Main Features-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-2
2.1.1 Spindle head -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-2
2.1.2 X-, Y- and Z-axis feeding mechanisms ----------------------------------------------------2-2
2.2 Basic Configuration ---------------------------------------------------------- 2-2
2.2.1 Basic Configuration --------------------------------------------------------------------------2-2
2.3 Overall View and Major Dimensions ------------------------------------- 2-4
2.4 Machine Specifications------------------------------------------------------- 2-8
2.5 Accessories ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-14
2.5.1 Standard accessories --------------------------------------------------------------------------2-14
2.5.2 Optional Parts ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-14

Chapter 3 TRANSPORT, KEEPING ------------------------------ 3-1

3.1 Relocating the Machine ----------------------------------------------------- 3-2
3.1.1 Preparation for relocation --------------------------------------------------------------------3-2
3.1.2 Unloading the machine from the forklift----------------------------------------------------3-5

Chapter 4 INSTALLATION------------------------------------------ 4-1

4.1 Environmental Standards for Installation ------------------------------ 4-2
4.1.1 Environmental conditions--------------------------------------------------------------------4-2
4.1.2 Notes for installation -------------------------------------------------------------------------4-3
4.2 Installing the Machine--------------------------------------------------------- 4-4
4.3 Wiring between Primary Power and Machine Power --------------- 4-5
4.3.1 Outline------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-5
4.3.2 Opening and closing the door of the CNC unit -------------------------------------------4-6
4.3.3 Grounding--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-7
4.3.4 Transformer box layout ----------------------------------------------------------------------4-8
4.3.5 200V System type-----------------------------------------------------------------------------4-8
4.3.6 400V System (Other than Europe)-----------------------------------------------------------4-12
4.3.7 400V System (Europe)-------------------------------------------------------------------------4-17
4.4 Piping------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-22
4.5 Air Pressure Adjustment----------------------------------------------------- 4-22
4.5.1 Setting-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-22
4.5.2 Quick table overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------4-25
4.6 Leveling---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-26

2010/10/17 1 eTR2BINC.doc
Contents TC-R2B

Chapter 5 EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS ---------- 5-1

5.1 Location of External Input/output Signal Boards -------------------- 5-3
5.2 IO Board, SRQT Board-------------------------------------------------------- 5-4
5.2.1 Connection of external input/output terminal on the IO board ------------------------5-6
5.2.2 Connection of free-mapping external input/output terminal on the IO board.-------5-13
5.2.3 Power output terminal on the IO board. --------------------------------------------------5-15
5.3 EXIO board ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-16
5.3.1 EXIO 1&2 boards ---------------------------------------------------------------------------5-16
5.4 Precautions when using External Input and Output Signals ---- 5-26
5.4.1 Input common type1 (INCOM:IOG, OUTCOM:IO24, OUTCOMD:24V) --------5-28
5.4.2 Input common type2 (INCOM:IO24, OUTCOM and OUTCOMD:IOG) ----------5-32
5.5 External Output Signal Status During Memory Operation -------- 5-36

Chapter 6 INPUT OUTPUT ----------------------------------------- 6-1

6.1 I/O Status Display -------------------------------------------------------------- 6-2
6.2 Input/ Output --------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-2
6.2.1 Other screens---------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-9
6.3 Servo ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-11
6.4 External I/O signal-------------------------------------------------------------- 6-12
6.5 Soft switch------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-12
6.6 Machine diagnosis ------------------------------------------------------------- 6-13
6.7 PLC---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-13
6.8 Running Counters-------------------------------------------------------------- 6-14

Chapter 7 MACHINE PARAMETER ------------------------------ 7-1

7.1 Machine Parameter ------------------------------------------------------------ 7-2
7.2 Default Value----------------------------------------------------------------------7-34

Chapter 8 ADJUSTMENT ------------------------------------------- 8-1

8.1 Spindle, X-, Y-, Z- axis and Magazine Positioning
Check in Case of Servo Error ---------------------------------------------- 8-2

Chapter 9 INSPECTIONS--------------------------------------------- 9-1

9.1 Regular Inspections ----------------------------------------------------------- 9-2
9.1.1 Check before operation of the quick table------------------------------------------------9-3
9.2 Inspection of Machine Lubricants ---------------------------------------- 9-4
9.2.1 Greasing interval ----------------------------------------------------------------------------9-4
9.2.2 Recommended grease -----------------------------------------------------------------------9-4
9.2.3 Lubricating points ---------------------------------------------------------------------------9-4
9.2.4 Gear-oil supply and replacement ----------------------------------------------------------9-6
9.3 Key Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-6
9.4 Periodic Machine Cleaning-------------------------------------------------- 9-8
9.4.1 Cleaning inside telescopic cover ----------------------------------------------------------9-8
9.4.2 Cleaning inside apron cover----------------------------------------------------------------9-10
9.5 Consumable Parts Replacement ------------------------------------------ 9-13
9.5.1 Door parts replacement ---------------------------------------------------------------------9-14
9.5.1.1 Door roller replacement ------------------------------------------------------------9-14
9.5.1.2 Door wire replacement -------------------------------------------------------------9-17
9.5.1.3 Wire sheave replacement-----------------------------------------------------------9-19
9.5.2 Telescopic cover cushion replacement----------------------------------------------------9-20
9.5.3 Telescopic cover wiper replacement ------------------------------------------------------9-26
9.5.4 Y rear cover roller replacement------------------------------------------------------------9-27
9.5.5 Battery Replacement ------------------------------------------------------------------------9-28
9.5.5.1 Battery alarm ------------------------------------------------------------------------9-28

2010/10/17 2 eTR2BINC.doc
TC-R2B Contents

9.5.5.2 “Battery is dead (local)” alarm ----------------------------------------------------9-30

9.5.6 Replacement procedure for tool cleaning system filter element-----------------------9-32
9.6 List of consumable parts ---------------------------------------------------- 9-33

Chapter 10 DISPOSAL ------------------------------------------------ 10-1

10.1 Disposal Precautions --------------------------------------------------------- 10-2

Chapter 11 Accessories---------------------------------------------- 11-1

Chapter 11(1) COOLANT UNIT ------------------------------------- 11-1-1
1 Cautions for Handling------------------------------------------------------------- 11-1-2
2 Sketch Drawing --------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-1-6
3 Specifications ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-1-8
4 Cable Connection ------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-1-8
5 Motor Protection Unit ------------------------------------------------------------- 11-1-9
6 Coolant Unit Installation Check------------------------------------------------ 11-1-10
6.1 NC language -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-1-10
6.2 Conversation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-1-11
7 Tool Washing System (with Air Assist Function)------------------------ 11-1-12
7.1 Handling Precautions ---------------------------------------------------------------------------11-1-12
7.2 System Outline ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-1-12
7.3 Piping Method -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-1-14
7.4 Parameter Setting--------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-1-16
7.5 Operation Check---------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-1-16
7.6 Coolant Level Sensor Adjustment Procedure------------------------------------------------11-1-17
7.7 Maintenance -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-1-17
7.8 Line Filter Element Replacement Procedure ------------------------------------------------11-1-18
7.9 Consumable Parts -------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-1-18

Chapter 11(2) CTS UNIT

(COOLANT THROUGH SPINDLE) ----------- 11-2-1
1 Precautions for Handling -------------------------------------------------------- 11-2-2
2 Sketch Drawing --------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-2-7
3 Specifications ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-2-8
4 Piping Method ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-2-10
5 Cable Connection ------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-2-11
5.1 Motor protection unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------11-2-11
6 Installation Check ------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-2-12
7 Inspection and Consumable Parts-------------------------------------------- 11-2-13
7.1 Points of the Inspection-------------------------------------------------------------------------11-2-13
7.2 Consumable Parts -------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-2-20
8 Pull-stud Sketch -------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-2-21
9 Parameter Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-2-22

Chapter 11(3) HANDLE (MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR)- 11-3-1

1 Precautions for Handling -------------------------------------------------------- 11-3-2
2 Overall View -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-3-2
3 Mounting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-3-2
4 Motion check------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-3-4

Chapter 11(4) MACHINE LIGHT ------------------------------------ 11-4-1

1 Cautions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-4-2
2 External View ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-4-3
3 Mounting Method ------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-4-4
4 Motion Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-4-4

2010/10/17 3 eTR2BINC.doc
Contents TC-R2B

Chapter 11(5) INDICATION LAMP --------------------------------- 11-5-1

1 Cautions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-5-2
2 External View ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-5-2
3 Mounting the indication lamp -------------------------------------------------- 11-5-3

Chapter 11(6) AUTOMATIC CENTERING UNIT---------------- 11-6-1

1 Precautions For Handling ------------------------------------------------------- 11-6-2
2 Connection --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-6-3
3 Motion Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-6-5

Chapter 11(7) SIMPLIFIED ROTARY JOINT (*1) -------------- 11-7-1

Chapter 11(8) AUTOMATIC INTERMITTENT

LUBRICATING UNIT ------------------------------- 11-8-1
1 Cautions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-8-2
2 Overall View -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-8-2
3 Specifications ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-8-3
4 Wiring ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-8-6

Chapter 11(9) CEILING COVER ------------------------------------ 11-9-1

1 Cautions For Handling------------------------------------------------------------ 11-9-2
2 Sketch Drawing and Installation----------------------------------------------- 11-9-2

Chapter 11(10) AUTOMATIC THERMAL DISTORTION

COMPENSATION SYSTEM (*2) ---------------- 11-10-1

Chapter 11(11) EXTENDED IO BOARD Z (*1) ------------------- 11-11-1

Chapter 11(12) TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTOR ---------------- 11-12-1
1 Handling Precautions ------------------------------------------------------------- 11-12-2
2 External View ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-12-2
3 Attachment Procedure------------------------------------------------------------ 11-12-3
4 Connection Check------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-12-6

Chapter 11(13) AUTOMATIC DOOR -------------------------------- 11-13-1

1 Cautions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-13-2
2 Sketch Drawing --------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-13-2
3 Wiring of Automatic Door-------------------------------------------------------- 11-13-3
4 Stroke Study ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-13-5
5 Signal Input Check ----------------------------------------------------------------- 11-13-6
6 Operation Check -------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-13-6
7 Area sensor -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-13-7

2010/10/17 4 eTR2BINC.doc
TC-R2B Contents

Chapter 11(14) SPINDLE OVERRIDE ------------------------------ 11-14-1

1 Cautions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-14-2
2 Overall View -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-14-2
3 Mounting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-14-3
4 Connection Check------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-14-5

Chapter 11(15) CHIP CONVEYOR (*1) ----------------------------- 11-15-1

Chapter 11(16) FLOPPY DISK DEVICE (*1) ---------------------- 11-16-1

Chapter 11(17) EXIO 1&2 BOARDS ------------------------------- 11-17-1

1 Handling Precautions ------------------------------------------------------------- 11-17-2
2 Outline --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-17-2
3 Configuration ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-17-3
4 Attachment Procedure------------------------------------------------------------ 11-17-6

Chapter 11(18) MEMORY CARD INTERFACE (*1) ------------- 11-18-1

Chapter 11(19) MANUAL UNCLAMP DEVICE (*1) ------------- 11-19-1

Chapter 11(20) MANUAL GREASE LUBRICATOR (*1) ------- 11-20-1

Chapter 11(21) RS232C 9-25PIN

CONVERSION CABLE ---------------------------- 11-21-1
1 Handling Precautions ------------------------------------------------------------- 11-21-2
2 Outline Drawing --------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-21-2
3 Specifications ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-21-3
4 Wiring ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-21-4
5 Accessory----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-21-6

Chapter 11(22) SIDE DOOR ----------------------------------------- 11-22-1

1 Cautions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-22-2
2 External View ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-22-2
3 Mounting Method ------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-22-3
4 Motion Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11-22-4

Chapter 11(23) COOLANT TANK WITH CHUTE (*1) ---------- 11-23-1

Chapter 11(24) OUTSIDE INDEX ROTATION SWITCH ------ 11-24-1

1 Handling precautions ------------------------------------------------------------- 11-24-2
2 Attachment Procedure------------------------------------------------------------ 11-24-2
3 Operation Check -------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-24-3

2010/10/17 5 eTR2BINC.doc
Contents TC-R2B

Chapter 11(25) AUTOMATIC GREASE LUBRICATOR-------- 11-25-1

1 Handling Precautions ------------------------------------------------------------- 11-25-2
2 Outline View of the Pump-------------------------------------------------------- 11-25-2
3 Specifications ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-25-3
4 Replenishing Grease -------------------------------------------------------------- 11-25-3
4.1 Replacement Procedures -----------------------------------------------------------------------11-25-3
4.2 Purchasing Method------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-25-4

Chapter 11(26) PNEUMATIC RELAY BOX------------------------ 11-26-1

1 How to install pneumatic relay box------------------------------------------- 11-26-2
2 Cautions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-26-5

Chapter 11(27) HYDRAULIC ROTARY JOINT ------------------------- 11-27-1

1 How to install hydraulic rotary joint------------------------------------------ 11-27-2
2 Cautions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-27-6
*As the function of the chapters with *1 are not available for this machine, the details are omitted.
*As the function of the chapter with *2 requires no installation operation, the details are omitted.

2010/10/17 6 eTR2BINC.doc
TC- R2B Quick index

Chpt. 1 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS 1

Chpt. 2 GENERALSYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2

Chpt. 3 TRANSPORT, KEEPING 3

Chpt. 4 INSTALLATION 4

Chpt. 5 EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS 5

Chpt. 6 INPUT OUTPUT 6

Chpt. 7 MACHINE PARAMETER 7

8
Chpt. 8 ADJUSTMENT 8

Chpt. 9 INSPECTIONS 9

Chpt.10 DISPOSAL 10

Chpt.11 ACCESSORIES 11

2009/11/02 1 eTR2BININ.doc
Quick index TC- R2B

(This page is blank.)

2009/11/02 2 eTR2BININ.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 1 General precautions

CHAPTER 1

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

1.1 Precautions of First Importance

1.2 Precautions on Safety
1.3 Person Allowed for Operation

2010/01/26 1-1 eTR2BIN1.doc

 Chapter 1 General precautions TC-R2B

1.1 Precautions of First Importance

DANGER
1 You may be caught in the machine during machining, resulting in
a serious injury.
Do not enter within the machine cover during operation.

DANGER
Visually check that nobody is inside the machine cover before
starting machine operation.
Keep your hands, feet, and body away from moving parts during
operation.
When you have to enter the machine, turn off the main power
breaker and padlock it so that the main power breaker cannot be
turned on.

DANGER
When the door interlock switch is invalid, the machine moves
even when the door is open.
You may cut yourself on a rotating tool or be caught in the
machine.
After set-up has been completed, return the door interlock switch
to valid. During machine maintenance, pay extreme attention to
the machine motion so that you can stop the machine whenever
required. After finishing maintenance and set-up, return the
door interlock switch to valid. Pull out the door interlock key for
storage.
Do not leave the machine with the door interlock switch invalid.
The door interlock key must be pulled out and kept by the
supervisor.

WARNING
When objects are hung on the emergency stop switch, the
emergency stop switch may not be pressed.
Do not hang any objects on the emergency stop switch.

2010/01/26 1-2 eTR2BIN1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 1 General precautions

1.1.1 When making an access to machine motion area

When making an access to machine motion area, be sure to open the power supply circuitry with
the handle of the main power breaker on the control panel.

Fig.1-1 Handle of main power breaker (OFF)

1
1 ON

O OFF

0101-1.ai

Lock a handle by pad lock.

Fig.1-2 Main power breaker off lock

1 ON Plate

Pull the plate to lock

the handle with a
padlock.
O OFF

0102-1.ai

2010/01/26 1-3 eTR2BIN1.doc

 Chapter 1 General precautions TC-R2B

1.1.2 In case of machine trouble or danger

The [EMERGENCY STOP] switch, if pressed, stops on the spot all of machine motions.
Press this pushbutton immediately when there is any indication of machine trouble or danger.

Fig.1-3 [EMERGENCY STOP] switch

1 Operation panel

EMERGENCY STOP switch

0101.ai

1.1.3 When operating

Please read this manual carefully before starting operation.

1.1.4 When the door interlock switch is invalid

When the door interlock switch is invalid, the machine moves even when the work door is open.

2010/01/26 1-4 eTR2BIN1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 1 General precautions

1.1.5 Air piping

Cut the pressure source before connecting the high pressure air pipes.
Put up a signboard which says 'Under Maintenance'

Disconnect the pressure source as below.

1. Loosen the screw to remove the cover.
2. Pull the pressure regulating knob and turn it until the pressure becomes ' 0 '. 1
Check that the pressure has become ' 0 ' with a pressure gauge.
Lower the knob and lock it.
3. Mount the cover and tighten the screw.

Fig.1-4 Pressure adjustment

Cover Cover fixing screw

Pressure regulating knob

Pressure gauge

0105-1.ai

2010/01/26 1-5 eTR2BIN1.doc

 Chapter 1 General precautions TC-R2B

1.2 Precautions on Safety

WARNING
Dropping a heavy object onto your foot may fracture your foot
1 bones.
When lifting heavy objects, wear safety shoes.

WARNING
You may hit your head when standing up.
Wear a helmet when working in and around the machine.

1.2.1 Before starting operation

(1) Turn off the main power breaker handle on the control box door. Never touch the primary
side power source or the terminal of the main power breaker, as these have high voltage
applied.
(2) Put up a signboard which says ' Under Maintenance '.
(3) Never allow people to approach the machine, particularly moving areas.
(4) Do not place any unnecessary object around the machine.
(5) Wear a helmet and safety shoes.
(6) For pneumatic works, disconnect the pressure air source and remove the remaining
pressure. Wear ear plugs and protective goggles.

1.2.2 During operation

(1) When two or more operators are working together, alert each other by voice.
(2) Only qualified persons are allowed to open the control box. The supervisor is responsible
for keeping the key.
(3) When leaving the machine, close the control box door and lock it.
(4) Clean around and inside the machine.
(5) Do not put the hands or body under the spindle head.
(6) Do not put the fingers between the ATC grip cover and the machine body. Do not put the
fingers between the tool or the tool holder and magazine.

1.2.3 After machining

(1) Close the control box door and lock it.
(2) Turn off the main power breaker handle on the control box door.
(3) Set the door interlock switch to on.
(4) Set the safety device again.
(5) Set the safety cover such as the maintenance cover to the original position.
(6) Do not leave any hand tool inside the machine.
(7) Return the air pressure to the original level, then secure the cover with the cover fixing
screw.

1.2.4 Other precautions

 Do not hang any objects on the emergency stop switch.
 Record important programs and data on paper and store them.
 Do not put heavy load such as mist collector on top of the ceiling cover.

2010/01/26 1-6 eTR2BIN1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 1 General precautions

1.3 Person Allowed for Operation

DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box.
Touching such parts by mistake may result in serious injury or 1
death.
Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the
electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and
inspect electrical components.
Cut the main power breaker and work on the machine. Put up a
signboard which says "Under maintenance".
When leaving the machine, close the control box door and tighten
the screws.

WARNING
You may hurt your eyes due to high pressure air bursts.
People other than those qualified in high pressure air handling and
who understand the piping of this machine are not allowed to
install or change the high pressure air piping.
To repair the high pressure air hose, disconnect the pressure
source and release remaining pressure first.
Put up a signboard which says "Under maintenance".

This manual is prepared for personnel who under take tapping centre installation.

1.3.1 Operation qualifications

Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the electrical circuits of this machine
are allowed to maintain and inspect electrical components.
People other than those qualified in high pressure air handling and who understand the piping of
this machine are not allowed to install or change the high pressure air piping.
Children cannot operate this device.
Only those who have completed compulsory training are allowed to operate the machine.

2010/01/26 1-7 eTR2BIN1.doc

 Chapter 1 General precautions TC-R2B

1.3.2 Working area

Secure the area shown in the drawing for machine operation.

Fig. 1-5 Working area（TC-R2B）

Maintenance area
1
1000
450
4290
2140
700

Operation and
working area
700 or more 1400 700 or more
2800
(Measure/mm)
0106-3.ai

2010/01/26 1-8 eTR2BIN1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 2 General system description

CHAPTER 2

GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2.1 Main Features

2.2 Basic Configuration
2.3 Overall View and Major Dimensions
2.4 Machine Specifications
2.5 Accessories

2011/02/02 2-1 eTR2BIN2.doc

 Chapter 2 General system description TC-R2B

2.1 Main Features

This section describes the features of the tapping center.
2.1.1 Spindle head
(1) High precision spindle bearings maintain maximum rotating accuracy over a long time.
(2) The spindle head is grease sealed, so you don’t have to grease.
(3) AC spindle servo motor for spindle offers wider speed range.

2 2.1.2 X-, Y- and Z-axis feeding mechanisms

(1) AC servo motors are adopted for axis feed, so you don’t have to change brush.
(2) Feed motors are directly connected to high precision ball screws and the guide ways are
provided with linear motion bearings. These features minimize stick-slip and eliminates
gear backlash, thus allowing smooth feed. Gear backlash means clearances between gears
when they are engaged. Stick slip means intermittent motion when the table begins to
move as there is certain amount of frictional force which prevents smooth motion.

2.2 Basic Configuration

This section describes the basic configuration of the machine.

2.2.1 Basic configuration

(1) Vertical spindle head.
(2) X and Y axes: Column moves.
(3) Z axis: Spindle head feed.
(4) Double-sided pallet changer of 0º/180º turn table method (quick table) are installed as
standard equipment. The rotating axis of the pallet is C-axis.
(5) Random access mechanism taking shortest paths and unique armless ATC mechanism
allow quick tool change.
(6) Integrated control unit on the back of the machine minimizing floor space required for
installation.

2011/02/02 2-2 eTR2BIN2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 2 General system description

Fig.2-1 Overall view and parts name of the machine (TC-R2B)

Operation panel

Front view Right side view

Machine cover

Main power
breaker

Control box

Backside view Left side view

Spindle motor

Table Spindle

Right side detail

2011/02/02 2-3 eTR2BIN2.doc

 Chapter 2 General system description TC-R2B

2.3 Overall View and Major Dimensions

Fig.2-2 TC-R2B External View (front view)

1456
2 28 1400 28
85 1230 85
358 687 355
655

31
396
42 7
330 8

783
995

215 0
140
908 .5
725

920
1020

(Measure/mm)

2011/02/02 2-4 eTR2BIN2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 2 General system description

Fig.2-3 TC-R2B External View (right side view)

69 2589
2140 449
540 1082 518

2
130

131
1053
2020

842
735
450

511
165

4-
80

155 1178
85 1338
149 1513 10
279 1662 693

（Measure/mm）

2011/02/02 2-5 eTR2BIN2.doc

 Chapter 2 General system description TC-R2B

Fig.2-4 TC-R2B External View (Backside view)

250 899 250

235

172.5 390 172.5

332.5 735 332.5

（Measure/mm）

2011/02/02 2-6 eTR2BIN2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 2 General system description

Fig.2-5 Table dimensions

270
10 100 100

14
2
B
600

A
14

10
300
840
12H8
12H8
11

11
10

5
20

A B

2011/02/02 2-7 eTR2BIN2.doc

 Chapter 2 General system description TC-R2B

2.4 Machine Specifications

Table 2-1 machine specifications (1)
Item Unit TC-R2B
Travel X-axis travel mm 420
Y-axis travel mm 320
Z-axis travel (Spindle head mm 305
vertical stroke)
Distance from table top surface mm 200~505
2 to spindle nose
Table Table working space mm 600×300
Max load on table kg 120（*2 170）(Single-sided)
(*1 Uniform load) *2 Can support through separate
*1 Distribution of load may discussion
affect the accuracy.
Table top surface configuration 3 X direction T-slots (12mm)
1 Y direction key-slot
Spindle Spindle speed min-1(rpm) 10~10000 (10k type)
16~16000 (16k type)
Maximum spindle speed in min-1(rpm) 6000
tapping
Spindle taper hole BT type BT type：7/24 taper No.30
BBT type BBT type：7/24 taper No.30
Spindle bearing ID mm BIG-PLUS
(Taper side × Motor side) φ50×φ45
Feedrate Rapid traverse
(X,Y,Z) mm/min 50000
(C) min-1 15
Cutting feedrate
(X,Y) mm/min 1~10000
(Z) mm/min 1~20000
Manual feedrate
(X,Y,Z) mm/min 50~4000 (22 steps)
Low speed feedrate
(4,5 and 6 axes) min-1 0.1~7.5 (19 steps)
Tool Tool shank BT type ：MAS-BT30
(ATC) BBT type ：MAS-BT30/BBT30
Tool Maximum tool storage capacity pcs. 14
magazine (BT Only) MAS-P30T
(ATC)
-2(30°)
Maximum tool diameter
mm 0~30 mm : φ46.30~160m : φ80
160~200 mm : φ40(Disc cutter
Maximum tool length diameter is φ125)
Maximum tool weight mm 200
Total tool weight kg 3.0
Tool selection kg 25(14 tools)
Random bidirectional

*Refer to Operation manual Chapter 3 3.7.2 “Limitation of tool holder” for details.

2011/02/02 2-8 eTR2BIN2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 2 General system description

Table 2- 2 machine specifications (2)

Item Unit TC-R2B
Automatic Tool changing time (tool to tool) sec 0.9 (50Hz, 60Hz 14 tools type)
Tool Changer Tool changing time (chip to chip) sec 1.7 (50Hz, 60Hz 14 tools type)
(ATC)
Motor Spindle motor 10000 min-1 (rpm) type
kw 19.2 (Max.)
kw 10.1 (10 min, rating)
kw 6.7 (continuous)

16000 min-1 (rpm) type

kw 16.0 (Max.) 2
kw 7.4 (10 min, rating)
kw 4.9 (continuous)

10000 min-1 (rpm)

High torque type
kw 26.2 (Max.)
kw 12.8(10 min, rating)
kw 8.8 (continuous)

Axis feed motor (X,Y) kw 1.0

(Z) kw 1.5
(C) kw 0.75
Power Power supply V ±10%
requirement Hz 50/60±1
Power 10000 min-1 (rpm) type
capacity Continuous rating kVA 9.5
(Single-phase current) (A/phase) (27.5)
Instant rating kVA 37.0
(Single-phase current) (A/phase) (107)
16000 min-1 (rpm) type
Continuous rating kVA 9.5
(Single-phase current) (A/phase) (27.5)
Instant rating kVA 34.2
(Single-phase current) (A/phase) (98.7)

10000 min-1 (rpm)

High torque type
Continuous rating kVA 10.4
(Single-phase current) (A/phase) (30)
Instant rating kVA 42.7
(Single-phase current) (A/phase) (123.5)
Air supply Pressure MPa 0.4~0.6 (4~6kgf/cm2)
Flow rate L/min 60
(air purge) (ANR)
Machine size Machine height (from floor level) mm
･From floor level to cable bearer top 2588
･When full covers installed 2637
･Leveling plate adjusting width 50～60
Required floor size mm
(including control box opening space)
･When control unit door opened 1456×3454
･Machine door including tank closed 1456×2644
Machine weight (when full options kg 2600
including control unit and machine cover
installed)

2011/02/02 2-9 eTR2BIN2.doc

 Chapter 2 General system description TC-R2B

Item Unit TC-R2B

Accuracy Positioning accuracy (X) mm 0.005/300
(Y) mm 0.005/300
(Z) mm 0.005/300
(JIS B 6201-1987)
Repeatability positioning accuracy mm ±0.003
(JIS B 6201-1987)
Pallet change repeatability （X,Z,Y） mm 0.01
(at the XY stroke center of table)
Noise Equivalent sound level L Aeq dB 71.5
Measured at a distance of 1meter from
2 the surface of the machinery and at a
height of 1.6meter from the floor
Operating conditions
ISO 8525
Annex B 3.3.1
Automatic Number of pallets 2-face
pallet changer Pallet change system sec 0°/180°
Turntable type
Pallet change time 2.9

Fig.2-4 Spindle motor Torque characteristic figure (10000 min-1 type)

50

40
Acc./Dec. range
Torque (N·m)

30

21

20
16
14
Continuous duty range
10
6

0
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000
-1
Number of rotation (min )

2011/02/02 2 - 10 eTR2BIN2.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 2 General system description

Fig.2-5 Spindle motor Torque characteristic figure (16000 min-1 type）

40

30
27
Acc./Dec. range
Torque (N·m)

20
2

10
7.9
8.8
7.0
Continuous duty range
1.8
0
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000
Number of rotation (min-1)

Fig.2-6 Spindle motor Torque characteristic figure

-1
(16000 min High torque type）
100
92

Acc./Dec. range
80
Torque (N·m)

60

40
24
22
20
Continuous duty range
6
0
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000
-1
Number of rotation (min )

Serial Interface
a) Communication method
• RS-232C
• Full duplex, asynchronous system
• Control line/control code system (changing by parameter)

b) Connection
(Note) D-sub 9pin plug is equipped as standard.
The optional conversion cable is available to convert this into D-sub 25pin
receptacle. Refer to “Chapter 11(21) RS232C 9-25 pin Conversion Cable” for
details.

2011/02/02 2 - 11 eTR2BIN2.doc
 Chapter 2 General system description TC-R2B

<Connector>
D-Sub 9pin plug

2
RS-232C (D-Sub 9pin plug)

0208.ai

Control box front

LOCAL PCB

RS-232C

(D-sub 9pin plug)

2-04.ai

Cable side: D-Sub 9pin receptacle

(Pin assignment)
Pin No. Signal Signal direction Note
1 FG Frame ground
3 SD Send data
2 RD Receive data
7 RS Request to send
8 CS Clear to send
6 DR Data set ready
5 SG Signal ground
4 ER Data terminal ready

*The signal directions are referred to the machine.

2011/02/02 2 - 12 eTR2BIN2.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 2 General system description

Typical connection of signal cables

TC PTP/PTR, Computer

FG (1) FG (1)
SD (3) SD (2)
RD (2) RD (3)
RS (7) RS (4)
CS (8) CS (5)
DR (6) DR (6) 2
SG (5) SG (7)
ER (4) ER (20)

*Other combination of signals is also available.

It must be established depending on signal type used and external devices
connected.
*Use the shielded cable.

2011/02/02 2 - 13 eTR2BIN2.doc
 Chapter 2 General system description TC-R2B

2.5 Accessories
2.5.1 Standard accessories
Table 2-4 Standard accessories
Item Number of amount
Manual (Operation, Operation (Data) Installation, 1/1/1/1/1
Programming, NC programming)
Leveling bolt 4
Leveling plate 4
Fuse Set 1
2
2.5.2 Optional Parts
Table2-5 Option
Item
Washing gun
Handle (Manual pulse generator)
Automatic door (Standard)
Automatic door (Area sensor)
Machine light (Single lamp type, Twin lamp type)
Indication lamp
(Single lamp type: yellow)
(Twin lamp type: red and yellow)
(Triple lamp type: red, yellow and green)
Automatic workpiece measurement unit
Tool breakage detection unit
Automatic intermittent lubricating unit (Ball screw, Guide ways)
Automatic grease lubricator (Ball screw, Guide ways)
Extension I/O board
Program memory unit 120Mbyte
Spindle override
B-axis connection unit (for 1 axis, for 2 axes)
Built-in PLC function
Software for PLC programming
Switch panel (6 holes/10 holes)
Tool wash
Color specification
Jig shower valve unit
Coolant unit, 100 liters with chip flow
(Tank: 100 liters, with valves, pump 250W×2)
Coolant unit, 150 liters with chip flow
(Tank: 150 liters, with valves, pump 250W+400W)
Coolant unit, 150 liters with CTS unit and chip flow
(Tank: 150 liters, with valves, pump 250W+400W+CTS pump)
RS232C 9-pin to 25-pin conversion cable
Top cover
Grip cover
Windowed side cover
QT relay box (air port: 6 ports × 2)
Table light
Hydraulic rotary joint (2 ports × 2)
Side door (with lighting window, right side only)
Outside index rotary switch

2011/02/02 2 - 14 eTR2BIN2.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 3 Transport, keeping

CHAPTER 3 3

TRANSPORT, KEEPING

3.1 Relocating the Machine

2009/12/01 3-1 eTR2BIN3.doc

 Chapter 3 Transport, keeping TC-R2B

3.1 Relocating the Machine

WARNING
Turn the main power breaker off before removing the
maintenance cover.

Leveling must be as accurate as possible, because it largely affects machine

accuracy and life.

3
3.1.1 Preparation for relocation
1. Select the manual mode, and move axes to attach the fixtures at 3 places.
(For export : 5 places to be attached)

This operation allows the center of gravity to be set at the machine center.
For manual operation mode, refer to MANUAL OPERATION.

Fig. 3-2 Table position when relocating the machine

Export only Option Option

Export only

2009/12/01 3-2 eTR2BIN3.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 3 Transport, keeping

1.1 Move the column to the X coordinate position -210.

1.2 Move the column to the Y coordinate position –255.
1.3 Move the spindle head to 232 of the Z coordinates and attach the fixture for Z axis.
2. For the export specification, open the front door and attach the door fixture.
3. For the export specification, attach the machine cover fixtures at 2 places.
4. If the machine is to be relocated within a short distance, as a change of layout in the
factory, these fixtures are not necessarily required.
Place Z axis as low as possible (in minus direction) and X and Y axes to the table center.
5. Turn off the power supply and unplug the power supply cord.
6. If accessories are connected to the machine, remove their hoses and cords. Bundle the hoses
and cords with tags to identify their connection.
Fig. 3-3 Bundling the hoses (example)

Hose1 3

Hose2

3.13.ai

7. Insert the claws of the forklift under the machine base and support the machine.
Pay utmost care not to give vibrations and shock to the machine when moving the machine.
Be careful not to damage the hoses and the cords.
Use a forklift with sufficient capacity for the machine weight and with forks long enough to
hold the machine.

Machine weight 2600kg

Required fork length Front view Side view Back view
(Effective length) 2200mm or more 1400mm or more 2800mm or more

2009/12/01 3-3 eTR2BIN3.doc

 Chapter 3 Transport, keeping TC-R2B

Fig.3-4 Forklift insertion position

Claws of the forklift

720

(Measure/mm)

0310-2.ai

2009/12/01 3-4 eTR2BIN3.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 3 Transport, keeping

900 Claws of the forklift

（Measure/mm）

0311-2.ai

3.1.2 Unloading the machine from the forklift

WARNING
When putting your hand under the leveling bolts, you may have
your hand caught, resulting in an injury.
Do not put your hands under the leveling bolt. Use tools to
adjust the level.

1. Carefully place the machine on the installation site.

Be sure to set a leveling plate (standard accessory) beneath each anchor bolt.
For the location of leveling plates, refer to Leveling.
2. Remove the fixture from X, Y, Z axis. (For machines with export specifications, remove
the fixtures from the door .)
3. Plug the power supply cord firmly into the primary power supply receptacle and turn on the
primary power supply.

2009/12/01 3-5 eTR2BIN3.doc

 Chapter 3 Transport, keeping TC-R2B

4. Set the handle of the main breaker on the control unit to ON.
The main power breaker handle is locked when the handle lock key set on lock position
(CURSER UP LOCK).
5. Turn on the power supply to the operation panel.

Fig. 3-5 Handle of the main power breaker

1 ON

3
O OFF

0302-5.ai
Fig. 3-6 POWER switch ON

POWER switch

0101.ai

2009/12/01 3-6 eTR2BIN3.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 4 Installation

CHAPTER 4

INSTALLATION 4

4.1 Environmental Standards for Installation

4.2 Installing the Machine
4.3 Wiring between Primary Power and Machine Power
4.4 Piping
4.5 Air Pressure Adjustment
4.6 Leveling

2010/12/03 4-1 eTR2BIN4.doc

 Chapter 4 Installation TC-R2B

4.1 Environmental Standards for Installation

WARNING
When coolant, oil,or chips are scattered, you may slip and fall
down or hit yourself against something, resulting in an injury.
Turn off the power of the machine, clean inside and the
surroundings of the machine, and then start operation.
Wear a helmet and safety shoes during machine installation.

WARNING
If the power is turn on or workpiece are machined in an explosive
atmosphere, an explosion may occur due to a spark from the
machine.
4 Do not install the machine in an explosive atmosphere.
Do not turn on the power of the machine, or carry out set- up or
machining in an explosive atmosphere.

WARNING
Installing the machine on an unstable surface may cause the
machine to shift or topple during machining, resulting in injury or
damage to the machine.
Install the machine on a solid and level surface.
Check that the floor satisfies the following requirements:
 Placement of a 2.5-ton object of does not cause the floor to
warp or buckle.
 The floor is level, without humps or hollows.
 Floor surface is completely solid and not distorted when
 pressure of 1.0 MPa (10 kgf/cm2) is applied.
 The floor is made of material that will not deteriorate with time.
At most care must be taken to the environmental conditions of the machine when installing the
machine to maintain its accuracy.
The following environmental conditions should be achieved:

4.1.1 Environmental conditions

Table4-1 Environmental conditions
Item Conditions Remarks
Temperature 17C~25C (for machine operation) Allowance: 0 to 40C
-15C ~60C (for storage and transportation)
Temperature 1.1C or less per minute Diurnal change should
change be ideally  2.0C
Humidity About 40 to 75% at 20C No dewing
Vibrations 0.5G or less
Do not expose the machine to radiation, such as microwave, ultraviolet rays, laser beam, or X-rays.
To maintain machining accuracy, minimize ambient temperature difference.
Installation area must be free from:
1. Direct sunlight
2. Excessive humidity
3. Excessive temperature change
4. Vibrations
5. Intense magnetism
6. Dust

2010/12/03 4-2 eTR2BIN4.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 4 Installation

4.1.2 Notes for installation

(1) Shut the CNC unit and moving parts of the machine off dust.
(2) Provide sufficient space behind the machine to allow the control unit door to fully open.
(3) Supply moisture and oil free clean air described below to the air purge unit and the air blast
unit.

Impurities in compressed air Standard value

Solids 5μm and below
Moisture Pressure dew point 10°C
Oil content concentration 1mg / m³ and below (ANR)

(4) Use the special leveling plates attached to the machine.

(5) The machine may be moved when the floor slides easily. In this case, the foundation
work is necessary. For example, the anchor is filled up.
(6) If the machine is susceptible of considerable vibrations caused by nearby street or machine,
it is preferable to relocate the machine or to install a vibration damper.
(7) In the normal conditions, machine can be installed with leveling bolts and require no
4
special foundation work.
If the foundation is not solid enough and that the machine may fall down or inline, perform
proper foundation work before installing the machine.
(8) To maintain the machine static accuracy within the guaranteed specifications, install the
machine where it is not affected by the airflow inside the plant. Although air conditioning
is not necessary, the optimal ambient temperature for the machine is 17C ~ 25C.
(9) To further maintain the machine static accuracy, keep the temperature variation in one day
(24 hours) within  2C and the difference in temperature from that at floor level to that at
5 meters high within 1C.
(10) If the coolant hose is damaged, the hose may be torn from the caulked section or the hose
joint may become loose, causing coolant to leak.
Check that the hose is not damaged and then connect it securely.

2010/12/03 4-3 eTR2BIN4.doc

 Chapter 4 Installation TC-R2B

4.2 Installing the Machine

Install the machine according to the drawing below.
If the floor is not sufficiently strong, axis motion may affect the level of the machine.
In such a case, select a most suitable place for installation taking the machine weight into
consideration. (Foundation strength: 1.0MPa or more)

Fig.4-1 Installation drawing

4
450
2140
1338
513

Leveling plate (4pcs.)

920
1400

(Measure/mm)

0401-1-2.ai

2010/12/03 4-4 eTR2BIN4.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 4 Installation

4.3 Wiring between Primary Power and Machine

Power
DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box. Touching such
parts by mistake may result in serious injury or death.
Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the
electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and
inspect electrical components.
Cut the main power breaker and work on the machine.
Put up a signboard which says "Under maintenance".
When leaving the machine, close the control box door and bolt it.
4
WARNING
To avoid from an electric shock, set the grounding correctly.
When the power PE line wired from outside is too short, the PE
line may come off when the cable is pulled and you may get an
electric shock.
Make the power PE line longer than other lines (L1, L2, L3)
allowing some slack.
This section describes the procedure of wiring between primary power and machine power.
Only people qualified for the electrical work is allowed to:
 Wiring between primary power and machine power.
 Changing the terminal connection for transformer.

Turn off main power breaker for the primary power supply of the plant during
wiring work.
Make sure not to let the cable to contact with the electronic substrate inside of
the control panel, to prevent breakage.

If wiring for the power supply of the plant is not performed correctly,
various troubles may occur.
 Wiring method differs depending on the supply voltage of primary power.
Check the supply voltage and read this chapter thoroughly before wiring.
 The capacity of transformer box can support only this machine and the
BROTHER approved standard option. Do not use for other devices.

Check the followings after wiring work.

 Check the screws on the terminal block for tightness.
 Make sure to close or tighten the cover and cable clamp tightly after wiring to
prevent the trouble caused by oil mist and dust.

4.3.1 Outline
Depends on the factory side power voltage, process is different about power cable connection
procedure and power voltage tap changing.
Mount the transformer box at the outer machine for 400V system.
1. 200V system
Refer to 4.3.5.
2. 400V system (Other than Europe)
Refer to 4.3.6.
3. 400V system (Europe)
Refer to 4.3.7.

2010/12/03 4-5 eTR2BIN4.doc

 Chapter 4 Installation TC-R2B

4.3.2 Opening and closing the door of the CNC unit

(1) Opening the door
Lessen 2 bolts (upper and lower) and push lock, set the handle of the main power breaker on the
Reset Open position and pull the door.
For the location of the bolts, refer to Operation Manual Chapter 2 Machine back.
The handle of the main power breaker does not turn if the handle is locked.

Fig. 4-2 Opening the door

1 ON

4
O OFF

04.09.ai
(2) Closing the door
Set the handle of the main power breaker to the OFF position and push the door.
Then tighten the bolts and the push lock.

Fig. 4-3 Closing the door

1 ON
O OFF

0405-2.doc

2010/12/03 4-6 eTR2BIN4.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 4 Installation

Fig. 4-4 Door lock

Control box (Left side) Control box (Front side)

Control box door

Simple lock Socket head bolt M6

4.3.3 Grounding
Ground the machine with a four-core cab tire cable for example.
Perform wiring according to the grounding standard in your local.
Never perform the grounding as shown on the figure4-5.
Be sure to ground each machine independently.
Set the grounding resistance to 100 or less.
(In Japan, a ground cable should be connected in accordance with the class-D (class-3) grounding
standard.)
For wire diameter of the external protective conductor, refer to the following pages and prepare the
appropriate conductors.

Fig. 4-5 Correct grounding

Correct grounding

TC TC

Improper grounding

TC TC

04.11.ai

2010/12/03 4-7 eTR2BIN4.doc

 Chapter 4 Installation TC-R2B

4.3.4 Transformer box layout

400V system machine added the transformer box.
Mount the transformer box to left side of the machine.
Lock on the caster for unexpectedly moving after mount.
Fig.4-6 Transformer box layout plan

4
Transformer box

0412-1.ai
4.3.5 200 V system type
1 Power specifications for wiring
Table 4-2-1 Power specifications
TC-R2B Conditions
AC200/210/220/230Ｖ±10% Changeover using the transformer
3-phase 50/60±1Hz 2 tap in the control box.
-1 -1
Power 10000min 16000min 10000min-1
capacity type type High torque
type ▪ Value when 200V a.c. is
Continuous 9.5kVA 9.5kVA 10.4kVA
rating (27.5A /phase) (27.5A/phase) (30A/phase） applied.
37.0kVA 34.2kVA 42.7kVA
Max rating (107A/phase) (98.7A/phase) (123.5A/phase）
Recommended value of Nominal Max Nominal Max Nominal Max Based on power source
power source conductor cross wiring cross wiring cross wiring capacity and voltage drop.
area distance area distance area distance PVC insulation cable.
5.5 6m 5.5 6m 5.5 7m Ambient temp.40C or less.
mm2 or less mm2 or less mm2 or less
8 9m or 8 9m or 8 10m
mm2 less mm2 less mm2 or less
14 16ｍ 14 16ｍ 14 17ｍ
mm2 or less mm
2
or less mm
2
or less
External protective Power cable cross-section area or larger Copper conductor
conductor
(1) Use an over current protection unit for over current and short- circuit current of the
machine and power source conductor.
Recommendation: Leakage breaker
Rated current 30A
*The breaker's capacity must be larger than that of the predicted short-
circuit current where the breaker is placed.
(2) Large amount of current flows when the spindle motor is started.
At this time, if power capacity is insufficient and wiring is not correct, input power voltage
drops. This may cause an alarm or degrade machine performance.

2010/12/03 4-8 eTR2BIN4.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 4 Installation

(3) Provide the exclusive wiring for your machine to keep it from electrical interference caused
by nearby machines or equipment.
Never use the switchboard in common with other machines generating much noises such as
welding machine, induction hardening machine, press machine, because such noises may
cause malfunction of the CNC unit.

When multiple units that use an inverter, including our machine, are connected to a single
primary power source, the human body protection leakage breaker (sensitivity:30mA) may
detect leakage.
It is recommended that you prepare another primary power source or use 100mA or 200mA
type leakage breakers.

2 Factory side power cable connection

1. Set up the power cable, referring to power specifications for wiring.
2. Recommendation example for power cable terminal treatment is described below.
Make the earth wire 50mm longer than the other wire..

Fig.4-7 4
L1

L2

L3 Over 50mm

04.17.ai
L1, L2 and L3 ; M5 terminal
; Dimension under 15mm
PE ; M6 terminal

3. Connect to the main power breaker in the terminal box.

Fig.4-8 Main power breaker position

Main power breaker

Cable insert hole

2010/12/03 4-9 eTR2BIN4.doc

 Chapter 4 Installation TC-R2B

Fig.4-9 To connect main power breaker

L1 L2 S

PE

Terminal cover

M6
PE

Main power breaker

0419.ai

4. Fix the power cable without applying force to the main power breaker connection point.
Fix the power cable to two checked places ( parts described below) of left side of the
control box with band.
Tighten it with the cable clamp so that there is no clearance.
5. After wiring, mount the terminal cover of the main power breaker.

Fig.4-10 Power cable fixing

Ｏ part

Cable insert hole

2010/12/03 4 - 10 eTR2BIN4.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 4 Installation

3 Transformer connection terminal change

Turn off the main power breaker and factory side power source before starting transformer wiring.
Change the terminal connected to the transformer according to the factory side power source
voltage.

The drawing below shows the transformers' terminal connection.

Fig.4-11 Position of transformers in the control box

Main power breaker

Transformer T2 4

1. Transformer T2 wiring
Transformer T2
Terminal block
R201
R102

T100

T201

4A S P 1A P P P
100V 0V PE 0V 200V 210V 220V 230V
R202
T201

Switch the Cord R201 only.

Keep connecting the Cord R202 to 200V.

AC200V Transformer T2
Term. block Cord name
1A200V R201
AC210V
Transformer T2
Term. block Cord name
P 210V R201
AC220V
Transformer T2
Term. block Cord name
P 220V R201
AC230V
Transformer T2
Term. block Cord name
P 230V R201

2010/12/03 4 - 11 eTR2BIN4.doc
 Chapter 4 Installation TC-R2B

4.3.6 400 V system (Other than Europe)

1 Specification for wiring
Table 4-2-2 Power specifications
TC-R2B Conditions
AC346/380/400/415/440Ｖ±10% Changeover using the
3-phase 50/60±1Hz transformer box tap.
-1
Power 10000min 16000min-1 10000min-1
capacity type type High torque
type ▪ Value when 400V a.c. is
Continuous 9.5kVA 9.5kVA 10.4kVA
rating (13.7A/phase) (13.7A/phase) (15A/phase） applied.
37.0kVA 34.2kVA 42.7kVA
Max rating (53.5A/phase) (49.4A/phase) (61.8A/phase）
Recommended value of Nominal Max Nominal Max Nominal Max Based on power source
power source conductor cross wiring cross wiring cross wiring capacity and voltage drop.
area distance area distance area distance PVC insulation cable.
5.5 18m 5.5 18m 5.5 19m Ambient temp.40C or less.
4 mm2 or less mm2 or less mm2 or less
8 25m 8 mm2 25m 8 mm2 27m
mm2 or less or less or less
14 mm2 44ｍ 14 44ｍ 14 47ｍ
2 2
or less mm or less mm or less
External protective Power cable cross-section area or larger Copper conductor
conductor
(1) Use an over current protection unit for over current and short- circuit current of the
machine and power source conductor.
Recommendation: Leakage breaker
Rated current 20A
*The breaker's capacity must be larger than that of the predicted short-
circuit current where the breaker is placed.
(2) Large amount of current flows when the spindle motor is started.
At this time, if power capacity is insufficient and wiring is not correct, input power voltage
drops.
This may cause an alarm or degrade machine performance.
(3) Provide the exclusive wiring for your machine to keep it from electrical interference caused
by nearby machines or equipment.
Never use the switchboard in common with other machines generating much noises such as
welding machine, induction hardening machine, press machine, because such noises may
cause malfunction of the CNC unit.
When multiple units that use an inverter, including our machine, are connected to a single
primary power source, the human body protection leakage breaker (sensitivity:30mA) may
detect leakage.
It is recommended that you prepare another primary power source or use 100 mA or
200mA type leakage breakers.

(4) Additional transformer box is not included for peripheral unit.

When adding the hydraulic equipment or large size coolant pump, customer needs to
prepare transformer box by customer’s self.
(5) When preparing the transformer box by customer’s self, check the required capacity and
output power voltage of the transformer.
Required capacity : Transformer capacity for machine (Refer the table in the next page)
+ (plus)
Transformer capacity for peripheral unit.
Secondary output power voltage : 220Vac.
Machine type Transformer capacity Output power voltage
10000/16000min-1 type 9.5kVA 220Vac
10000 High torque type 11.4kVA 220Vac
2 Factory side power cable connection
1. Connect the cable from transformer box to the terminal box.
Connect the TOH connector (two poles nylon connector).
Connector destination is placed near the cable insertion slot.

2010/12/03 4 - 12 eTR2BIN4.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 4 Installation

Fig.4-12

Transformer box

Main power
breaker

TOH connector 4
Attached cables of
transformer box

Cable insertion slot

2. Connect the cable from the transformer box to the main power breaker.
Fig.4-9 To connect main power breaker
L1 L2 L3

PE

Terminal cover

M6
PE

Main power breaker

04.19.ai
(1) Fix the power cable without applying force to the main power breaker connection point.
Fix the power cable to two checked places ( parts described below) of left side of the
control box with band.
Tighten it with the cable clamp so that there is no clearance.
(2) After wiring, mount the terminal cover of the main power breaker.

2010/12/03 4 - 13 eTR2BIN4.doc
 Chapter 4 Installation TC-R2B

Fig.4-10 Power cable fixing

Ｏ part

4
Cable insertion slot

3. Set up the power cable, referring to power specifications for wiring.

4. Recommendation example for power cable terminal treatment is described below.
Make the earth wire 50mm longer than the other wire.

Fig.4-11
300mm
U
V
W Over 50mm

04.17.ai
U, V and W ; M5 terminal
; Dimension under 15mm
PE ; M5 terminal

2010/12/03 4 - 14 eTR2BIN4.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 4 Installation

5. Connect the factory side power cable to the terminal block in the transformer box.

Fig.4-12 Terminal block wiring in the transformer box

Factory side
power cable

Transformer Ｔ１

Primary side terminal block

U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5
440V 415V 400V 380V 346V 440V 415V 400V 380V 346V 440V 415V 400V 380V 346V

U V W PE

Change three cords U, V and W.

(1) Put the factory side power cable into the transformer box through the attached cord lock.
(2) Connect it to the primary terminal block in accordance with the power voltage that you use.
(3) Secure with the cord lock to prevent the factory side power cable pulling out.

Fig.4-13
Factory side power cable

Inside of the transformer box Fasten tight

Two kinds of the cord locks with different outside diameter are supplied.
Outside diameter of compatible cable : 12mm16mm
16mm20mm

2010/12/03 4 - 15 eTR2BIN4.doc
 Chapter 4 Installation TC-R2B

Use the cord lock that matches with the outside diameter of the factory side power cable.

AC346V
Transformer T1
Term. block Cord name
U346 U
V346 V
W346 W

AC380V
Transformer T1
Term. block Cord name
U380 U
V380 V
W380 W

AC400V
Transformer T1
4 Term. block
U400
Cord name
U
V400 V
W400 W

AC415V
Transformer T1
Term. block Cord name
U415 U
V415 V
W415 W

AC440V
Transformer T1
Term. Cord
block name
U440 U
V440 V
W440 W
Note: Changing the transformer 2 in the control box is not necessary.
It is connected to 220V.

2010/12/03 4 - 16 eTR2BIN4.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 4 Installation

4.3.7 400 V system (Europe)

1 Specification for wiring
Table 4-2-3 Power specifications
TC-R2B Conditions
AC380/400/415/440Ｖ±10% Changeover using the transformer
3-phase 50/60±1Hz box tap.
-1 -1
Power 10000min 16000min 10000min-1
capacity type type High torque type
Continuous 9.5kVA 9.5kVA 10.4kVA ▪ Value when 400V a.c. is
rating (13.7A/phase) (13.7A/phase) (15A/phase）
37.0kVA 34.2kVA 42.7kVA applied.
Max rating (53.5A/phase) (49.4A/phase) (61.8A/phase）
Recommended value of Nominal
Max
Nominal Max Nominal Max Based on power source
power source conductor cross
wiring
cross wiring cross wiring capacity and voltage drop.
distanc PVC insulation cable.
area area distance area distance
e
Ambient temp.40C or less.
Under Not Under Not Under Not
6 used 6 used 6 used
mm2 mm2 mm2
6 23m 6 mm2 23m 6 mm2 24m
4
mm2 or or less or less
less
10 mm2 38ｍ 10 38ｍ 10 mm2 40ｍ
2
or mm or less or less
less
External protective Power cable cross-section area or larger Copper conductor
conductor
(1) Use an over current protection unit for over current and short-circuit current of the machine
and power source conductor.
Recommendation: Breaker
Rated current 20A
*The breaker's capacity must be larger than that of the predicted short-
circuit current where the breaker is placed.
(2) Large amount of current flows when the spindle motor is started.
At this time, if power capacity is insufficient and wiring is not correct, input power voltage
drops.
This may cause an alarm or degrade machine performance.
(3) Provide the exclusive wiring for your machine to keep it from electrical interference caused
by nearby machines or equipment.
Never use the switchboard in common with other machines generating much noises such as
welding machine, induction hardening machine, press machine, because such noises may
cause malfunction of the CNC unit.
When multiple units that use an inverter, including our machine, are connected to a single
primary power source, the human body protection leakage breaker (sensitivity:30mA) may
detect leakage.
It is recommended that you prepare another primary power source or use 100 mA or
200mA type leakage breakers.
(4) Additional transformer box is not included for peripheral unit.
When adding the hydraulic equipment or large size coolant pump, customer needs to
prepare transformer box by customer’s self.
(5) When preparing the transformer box by customer’s self, check the required capacity and
output power voltage of the transformer.
Required capacity : Transformer capacity for machine (Refer the table below)
+ (plus)
Transformer capacity for peripheral unit.
Secondary output power voltage : 220Vac.
Machine type Transformer capacity Output power voltage
10000/16000min-1 type 9.5kVA 220Vac
10000 High torque type 11.4kVA 220Vac
2 Factory side power cable connection
1. Set up the power cable, referring to power specifications for wiring.
2. Recommendation example for power cable terminal treatment is described below.
Make the earth wire 50mm longer than the other wire.

2010/12/03 4 - 17 eTR2BIN4.doc
 Chapter 4 Installation TC-R2B

Fig.4-14
R

S
T Over 50mm

04.17-01.ai
R, S, T and PE ; Product by PHOENIX CONTACT “Ferrules with plastic sleeve”
6mm2 ; AI-XL6-12YE
10mm2 ; AI-XL10-12RD

3. Connect the cable from transformer box to the terminal box.

Fig.4-15
Transformer box
4 Control box

Main power breaker

Associated
transformer box cable

(1) (2)

(1) Remove the cover of the most door side of the terminal box left face.
Pull the associated transformer box cable through left side of control box into the control
box.
Fix the board that is attached to the cable to the control box with the screws.

Fig.4-14

(2) Connect the TOH connector (two poles nylon connector).

Connector destination is placed near the cable insertion slot.

4. Connect the cable from the transformer box to the main power breaker.

2010/12/03 4 - 18 eTR2BIN4.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 4 Installation

Fig.4-15 To connect main power breaker

L1 L2 L3

PE

Terminal cover

M6
PE

Main power breaker

04.19.ai

(1) Fix the power cable without applying force to the main power breaker connection point.
Fix the power cable to two checked places ( parts described below) of left side of the
control box with band.
(2) After wiring, mount the terminal cover of the main power breaker.

Fig.4-16 Power cable fixing

Ｏ part

2010/12/03 4 - 19 eTR2BIN4.doc
 Chapter 4 Installation TC-R2B

5. Connect the factory side power cable to the terminal block in the transformer box..

Fig.4-17 Terminal box wiring in the transformer box

Transformer T1

Factory side
power cable

Power cable connection of

terminal box R S T PE

R S T

(1) Put the factory side power cable into the transformer box through the grommet.
(2) Connect it to the primary terminal block.
(3) Secure it to the plate with the band to prevent the factory side power cable pulling out.

Fig.4-18

The factory side

power cable

Bind with band

Inside of the transformer box.

2010/12/03 4 - 20 eTR2BIN4.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 4 Installation

3 Terminal connector of transformer box changing

Fig.4-19 Primary terminal box position

Transformer T1

4
Primary side terminal box

U1 U2 U3 U4 V1 V2 V3 V4 W1 W2 W3 W4
440V 415V 400V 380V 440V 415V 400V 380V 440V 415V 400V 380V

R1 S1 T1

Change three cords R, S and T.

AC380V
Transformer T1
Term. block Cord name
U380 R1
V380 S1
W380 T1
AC400V
Transformer T1
Term. block Cord name
U380 R1
V380 S1
W380 T1
AC415V
Transformer T1
Term. block Cord name
U415 R1
V415 S1
W415 T1
AC440V
Transformer T1
Term. block Cord name
U440 R1
V440 S1
W440 T1
Note: Changing the transformer 2 in the control box is not necessary.
It is connected to 220V.

2010/12/03 4 - 21 eTR2BIN4.doc
 Chapter 4 Installation TC-R2B

4.4 Piping
When conducting piping work, please observe the instructions below.

WARNING
You may hurt your eyes due to high pressure air bursts.
People other than those qualified for high pressure air handling and
who understand the piping of this machine are not allowed to install
or change the high pressur air piping.
To repair the high presure air hose, disconnect the pressure source
and release remaining pressure first. Put up a signboard which
says" Under maintenance".
Using the air source pressure regulating knob, set the pressure to 'zero' and disconnect the pressure
source on the primary side, then, start piping.
4 After piping of the compressed air, air blows out from the spindle head.
This is not a failure but a spindle air purging.

4.5 Air Pressure Adjustment

4.5.1 Setting
Set values on Pressure switch and Lubricator as shown Fig.

[Ref.] The values are set before shipment.

[Note]
The pressure of the quick table regulator is set to 0.4 MPa (4.0kgf/ cm2 )
The pressure of main regular is set to 0.4 ~ 0.6Mpa. Changing these value affects
the machine performance. Never change these values.

2010/12/03 4 - 22 eTR2BIN4.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 4 Installation

Fig.4-21 Pressure switch and Lubricator setting

Pressure switch
Set value 0.35MPa

For Spindle air purge

regulator
Set value 0.07MPa For quick table
regulator
Set value 0.4MPa

Cover
Cover

4
Pressure Pressure
adjusting knob adjusting knob

Manual valve

Main regulator
Set value 0.5MPa

Hose joint

Automatic drain
(Water can also be drained by rotating the knob counterclockwise)

Installation steps
(1) Detach the pipe from the compressed air source and remove the air from the pipe.
(2) Thread the hose band through the hose and insert the hose into the hose nipple.
(3) Tighten the hose band screw.
(4) Close the valve.
(5) Remove the lock plate attaching screw securing the pressure control knob of the main
regulator.
(6) Pull the pressure control knob of the main regulator to release the lock.
(7) Fully turn the pressure control knob to zero pressure.
(8) Follow the same steps as (5) to (7) for the spindle air purge regulator and the quick table
regulator.
(9) Connect the primary compressed air source and hose.
(10) Supply compressed air of 0.5 to 0.7 MPa to the hose.
(11) Open the valve and check that no air is leaking from the pipes installed in (2)-(9).
(12) Remove the lock plate of the main regulator.
(13) Turn the pressure control knob of the main regulator and adjust the black needle of the
pressure gauge to 0.5 MPa. Push the knob to lock it again.
(14) Turn the pressure controls knob of the spindle air purge regulator and adjust the black
needle of the pressure gauge to 0.07 MPa. Push the knob to lock it again.
(15) Turn the pressure control knob of the quick table regulator and adjust the black needle of
the pressure gauge to 0.4Mpa.
(16) Mount the lock plate of the main regulator, the spindle air purge regulator and the quick
table regulator.

2010/12/03 4 - 23 eTR2BIN4.doc
 Chapter 4 Installation TC-R2B

Fig.4-22

AIR Air blasting

AIR Air purging

COOLANT Coolant valve

(optional)

COOLANT Jig shower valve

(optional)
4

QT clamp/unclamp

AIR
(Back washing)

CTS unit
COOLANT (optional)
(CTS)

COOLANT
(Drain)

AIR

COOLANT
(Tool wash) Tool wash
(optional)

COOLANT
AIR
(Drain)
0405-2ai

2010/12/03 4 - 24 eTR2BIN4.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 4 Installation

4.5.2 Quick table overview

Fig.4-23 Quick table overview

Table cap
Table

[Note]
QT table has a penetrated hole of dia. 95 mm (3.1496 in.) for piping and wiring
inside the QT table cap. Refer to Fig. 4-21 for details.

Fig.4-24 Hole position for quick table

Table cap
95 hole

2010/12/03 4 - 25 eTR2BIN4.doc
 Chapter 4 Installation TC-R2B

4.6 Leveling
WARNING
The jack used for leveling the machine comes off and your hand
may be crushed.
Position the jack in the center forward of the bottom of the base
when using it.

WARNING
When putting your hand under the leveling bolts, you may have your
hand caught, resulting in an injury.
4 Do not put your hands under the leveling bolt. Use tools to adjust
the level.
Leveling Tools
 Jack (Max load:2000kg or more, Adjustment :90-120)
 Tool holder with drilling chuck
 Dial gauge (0.002/DIV)
 Level ([0.02mm/m] DIV)  2

1. Move the X-210 and Y-160 axes in manual operation mode so that the spindle is shifted to
the center of the table. For manual operation mode, refer to “MANUAL OPERATION”
in the operation manual.
2. Set the jack to point G to lift the leveling bolts at points A and B off the leveling plate.
3. Place a level on table and adjust the leveling bolts at points C and D until the levelness
from front to back and from side to side is 0.02 mm/m or less.

2010/12/03 4 - 26 eTR2BIN4.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 4 Installation

Fig.4-24

4
Level (Y-axis)

Level (X-axis)

0406-2.ai

Fig.4-25 Adjusting level

04C15.doc

2010/12/03 4 - 27 eTR2BIN4.doc
 Chapter 4 Installation TC-R2B

4. When the levelness has been adjusted to 0.02 mm/m or less, allow the leveling bolts at
points A and B to make contact with the leveling plate and loosen the jack at point G.
5. Adjust the leveling bolts at points A and B until the levelness of each direction (front and
back, left and right) is 0.02 mm/m or less.
6. Remove the level and measure the parallel accuracy at point [1] (reference point) to point
[9] on QT table 1 (Fig. 4-27) using a dial gauge. (Fig. 4-26)
7. Similarly measure the parallel accuracy on QT table 2.
8. When the parallel accuracy for QT tables 1 and 2 is less than the result of the "Inspection
Report 3.Quick Table Accuracy No.1", secure the leveling bolts with lock nuts.

Fig.4-26

4
Drilling chuck

Dial gauge

2010/12/03 4 - 28 eTR2BIN4.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 4 Installation

When the parallel accuracy is larger than the result of the inspection report.
9. Determine the tilting amount of the parallel accuracy from the measurement results in steps
6 and 7.
Adjust the leveling bolts at points C and D with the dial gauge contacting the QT table.
10.
A. When the parallel accuracy is tilted in the negative X direction (see example
1), lower the leveling bolt at point C or raise that at point D.
B. When the parallel accuracy is tilted in the positive X direction (see example
2), raise the leveling bolt at point C or lower that at point D.

Fig.4-27
Example 1 Example 2

Column side Column side

Tilting direction Tilting direction

High Low Low High 4

[1] Reference [1] Reference
point point
②-7 ③-17 ②8 ③16
④-0 ⑤-8 ⑥-15 ④1 ⑤9 ⑥17

⑦-1 ⑧-8 ⑨-16 ⑦0 ⑧8 ⑨16

X X
- + - +

Front door side Front door side

0408.ai

11. After tilting in the X direction has been adjusted, check the parallel accuracy at point [1]
(reference point) to point [9] on QT table 1.

12. When the parallel accuracy is the result of the inspection report or less, secure the leveling
bolts with lock nuts.
Check the parallel accuracy a week after and one month after its installation, and every 6
months thereafter.
When the machine has undergone considerable vibrations such as earthquake, be sure to
check the parallel accuracy.

2010/12/03 4 - 29 eTR2BIN4.doc
 Chapter 4 Installation TC-R2B

(This page is blank.)

2010/12/03 4 - 30 eTR2BIN4.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

CHAPTER 5

EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS

5
5.1 Location of external input/output signal boards
5.2 IO Board, SRQT Board
5.3 Extension I/O board
5.4 Precautions when using external input and output
signals
5.5 External output signal status during memory operation

2010/12/21 5-1 eTR2BIN5-1.doc

 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box. Touching
such parts by mistake may result in serious injury or death.
Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with
the electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain
and inspect electrical components.
Turn off the main power breaker before operation. Put up a
signboard which says “Under maintenance.” When leaving
the machine, close the control box door and bolt it.

WARNING
When the power PE line wired from outside is too short, the
PE line may come off when the cable is pulled and you may
5 get an electric shock.
Make the power PE line longer than other lines (L1, L2, L3)
allowing some slack.

2010/12/21 5-2 eTR2BIN5-1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

5.1 Location of External Input/output Signal

Boards
Inside of the control box on the left side

IO board

SRQT board

5
EXIO board 1,2

2010/12/21 5-3 eTR2BIN5-1.doc

 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

5.2 IO Board, SRQT Board

External input/output signals are provided on the IO board and the SRQT board as follows.
There are two kinds of input/output common (type 1, type 2) to select your needs.
Refer to “5.4 Precautions when using external input and output signals” for more detail.

PWR name Description

IO24 Indicates +power (+24V) of DC24V of the IO board.
IOG Indicates ground (0V) of DC24V of the IO board.

XTI IO boards

52 51
Terminal XTI 54 53
56 Terminal No: Signal name Terminal No: Signal name
External signal input 55
58 52:INCOM 51:INCOM
8 pole (free mapping) 57
60 (IOG) (IOG)
59 54:PI54
62 53:PI53
61 56:PI56 55:PI55
5 58:PI58 57:PI57
60:PI60 59:PI59
62: INCOM 61: INCOM
(IO24) (IO24)
XTO
Terminal XTO 102 Terminal No: Signal name Terminal No: Signal name
104 101 102:OUTCOM 101:OUTCOM
External signal
106 103 (IO24) (IO24)
output
108 105 104:PQ104 103:PQ103
110 107 106:PQ106 105:PQ105
112 109 108:PQ108 107:PQ107
111 110:PQ110 109:PQ109
112: OUTCOM 111: OUTCOM
(IOG) (IOG)

Connector CNXTO
External signal CNXTO
output
1
2 Terminal No: Signal name
3 1:OUTCOM (IO24
4 2:OUTCOM (IOG))
5 3:PO103
6 4:PO104
7 5:PO105
8 6:PO106
9 7:PO107
10 8:PO108
9:PO109
10:PO110

2010/12/21 5-4 eTR2BIN5-1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

IO board

XTIO
Terminal No: Signal name
Terminal XTIO 2 1 1.2. :EXON
External power ON 4 3.4. :EXOFF
External power OFF 3
6 5 5. :EXSTART(input)
External start
Start SW output 8 7 6. :STOUT(output)
External pallet start 10 9 7. :EXOUST(input)
Pallet start SW output 12 11 8. :EXOUST(output)
External stop 14
Automatic centering signal input 13 9. :EXSTOP(input)
External reset 16 15 11., 25 :TOUCH(input)
Automatic door LS input 18 17 13. :EXRESET(input)
Area sensor input 20 19 15. :DROPN(input)
(Not in use) 22 21 17. :ARESEN(input)
Chip conveyer output 24
Chip conveyer 23 23.24 : (Not in use)
Power control 26 25 10,12,14,16,18,20, 22 :INCOM(IOG)
External emergency stop single 28 27 19,21, 26 :OUTCOM(IO24)
connecting point 30 29 27 : CHIP SCREW (output)
Input common 32 31 28 :IOGEM2
Output common
29 :COLPW2
30 :IOG 5
31 :IOGEMI
32 :IOG
Terminal XTPW XTPW
AC /DC24V
Machine light LT24 AC/DC24V
AC/DC selective type
(AC24V is for T24 (See “5.2.3 IO board power
Europe specification LT100 AC100V
output terminal board”)
only) T100
AC 100V 0.6A R103 AC100V
AC 100V1A T100

SRQT board

XTIOA
External emergency stop SW 71 Terminal No: Signal name
double connecting point 72 71, 72 :EXEMG2
73 73 :IOGEM3
74
74 :IOGEM4

2010/12/21 5-5 eTR2BIN5-1.doc

 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

5.2.1 Connection of external input/output terminal on the

IO board

XTIO Terminal block XTIO

1
External power on EXON
2

External power OFF *EXOFF 3

External start input EXSTIN 5

Start SW output STOUT 6

Pallet start input EXOUTSTIN 7

External pallet start output OUTSTOUT 8

5 External stop input EXSTOP 9

Input common INCOM(IOG) 10

Automatic centering signal input or Z axis
measurement signal input TOUCH 11

INCOM(IOG) 12

External reset EXREST 13

INCOM(IOG) 14

Automatic door open signal input 15

INCOM(IOG) 16

Area sensor input AREASNIN 17

Area sensor
INCOM(IOG) 18 receive side

OUTCOM(IO24) 19

INCOM(IOG) 20

OUTCOM(IO24) 21 Area sensor

light side
INCOM(IOG) 22

Not in use (*) 23

Not in use (*) 24

(*) Do not connect to the terminal XTIO 23 and 24.

T32BIN5.03.ai

2010/12/21 5-6 eTR2BIN5-1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

Terminal block XTIO

Automatic centering signal input or Z axis
measurement signal input TOUCH 25
IO24 26
Chip conveyer output 27
Chip conveyer OUT COM (IOGEM2) 28
Chip conveyer control power (COLPW2) 29

IOG 30

IOGEM1 31

IOG 32
T32BIN5.19.ai

5
The following terminals are short-circuited at delivery.
3-4 External power off
5-6 External start
<Terminal block XTIO on IO board>
7-8 External pallet start
17-18 Area sensor input
23-24 (Not in use)
31-32 External emergency stop SW single connecting point
<Terminal block XTIOA on SRQT board>
71-72 External emergency stop SW double connecting point
73-74 External emergency stop SW double connecting point

*There are two kinds of input/output common (type 1, type 2) for input output
signal below.
Refer to “5.4 Precautions when using external input and output signals” for more
detail.

External start input

Start SW output
Pallet start input
External pallet start output
External stop input
External reset input
Automatic centering signal input or measurement signal input

*Automatic centering signal input or measurement signal input has two numbers
11 and 25.

2010/12/21 5-7 eTR2BIN5-1.doc

 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

*1 indicates program edit.

Logic Valid-mode
Signal Symbol a- b- Function
Manual MDI Memory Edit*1
contact contact
External EXON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Power on/off from external place.
power *EXOFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
on/off Signal block

300 msec or more

CLOSE
EXON OPEN
CLOSE
EXOFF OPEN

Power on Power off

(Note)
1.EXOFF is short-circuited as delivered.
2.To use the external power on/off signal,
set the POWER switch on the operation
panel to On.
3. Use NCOK TO check the power turned
5 on (refer to the description of the
external output signal).
Check NCOK85 sec. after EXON is
activated.
(NCOK is activated approximately 90
sec. after EXON activation.)
4.Use individual dry contacts for EXON and
EXOFF. (Transistor Refer to the
description of the external output signal)
(Reference)
Refer to list of external input signals and
the section on function description in the
operation manual.

2010/12/21 5-8 eTR2BIN5-1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

*1 indicates program edit.

Logic Valid-mode
Signal Symbol a- b- Function
Manual MDI Memory Edit*1
contact contact
Start STOUT ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The signal of the start switch on the
switch operation panel is output.
output This signal has to normally be
short-circuited with STOUT and EXSTIN.
When you do not use the start switch on the
operation panel or when you provide
interlock, you can use this signal.
Example:
(1) When you want to use only the external
start switch.
(2) When you do not want to start before
setting the external devices ready.
Type1
IO board

Contact
XTIO for
6 interlock

Operation 5
panel 5
start
switch 10
External
IOG start switch

External
start input
EXST IN
T32BIN5.04.ai

Type2 IO board

XTIO Contact
6 for
interlock
Operation
panel 5
start
switch 26
External
IO24 start switch

External
start input
EXST IN
T32BIN5.04.ai

(Note)
You should normally keep terminal XTIO 5
and 6 short-circuited.

2010/12/21 5-9 eTR2BIN5-1.doc

 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

Logic Valid-mode
Signal Symbol a- b- Function
Manual MDI Memory Edit*1
contact contact
Pallet OUTST ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The signal of the pallet start switch on the
start SW OUT operation panel is output.
output This signal has to normally be
short-circuited with OUTSTOUT and
EXOUTSTIN.
When you do not use the pallet start switch
on the operation panel or when you provide
interlock, you can use this signal.
Example:
(1) When you want to use only the external
pallet start switch.
(2) When you do not want to start before
setting the external devices ready.
Type1
IO board
Operation
panel XTIO
OUTSTOUT Contact
for
8
5 interlock

Pallet
start switch 7
10
External
IOG start switch
External
start input
EX OUT
STIN
T32BIN5.04.ai
Type2
IO board
Operation
panel XTIO
OUTSTOUT Contact
for
8 interlock

Pallet
start switch 7
26
External
External
IO24 start switch
start input
EX OUT
STIN
T32BIN5.04.ai
(Note)
1. You should normally keep terminal XTIO
7 and 8 short-circuited.
2. This signal is ineffective to TC-S2D.

2010/12/21 5 - 10 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

*1 indicates program edit.

Symbols with* normally indicates contact closed.

Logic Valid-mode
Signal Symbol a- b- Function
Manual MDI Memory Edit*1
contact contact
External *EXEMG2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The machine is brought to an emergency
emergency (SRQT stop when the contact of either EXEMG2 or
stop double board) IOGEM3 is closed. To restore the machine,
connecting press RESET key or activate the signal
*IOGEM3
point input EXRESET after closing the contact. This is
short-circuited with terminal XTIOA 71-72
and 73-74 on the SRQT board delivered.
Use the dry contact (contact capacity is 3A
or more)
EXEMG2 CLOSE
IOGEM3 OPEN
Emergency stop

External EXSTIN ○ ○ ○ Operation is started by closing and then

start input opening the contact of the signal EXSTIN.
The signal EXSTIN is ineffective in the
following conditions:
1. In the mode other than MDI operation,
memory operation and in-process edit 5
2. The contact of the external signal
(EXSTOP) is closed
3. The STOP key on the operation panel is
kept pressed
4. The contact of the external reset signal
(EXRESET) is closed
5. The RESET key on the operation panel is
kept pressed
6. The alarm occurs
7. The door is open. Accept to start for the
automatic door system.
8. After closing the door and during
processing the Servo ON.

-Signal block
300 msec or more
EXSTIN
CLOSE
OPEN

Operation start
(Note)
The LED lamp comes on when operation is
started in response to the start input signal.
The signal must be active for 500 msec or
longer in the in-process edit mode.
Sequential operation with the quick table is
not available.
External EXOUTS ○ ○ ○ To perform pallet start externally, set the
pallet start TIN EXOUSTIN signal closed, and then open it.
This signal has the same function as the
external start pallet switch has.
- Signal block 300 msec or more

EXOUSTIN
CLOSE
OPEN

Pallet start is ready

2010/12/21 5 - 11 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

*1 indicates program edit.

Logic Valid-mode
Signal Symbol a- b- Function
Manual MDI Memory Edit*1
contact contact
External EXSTOP ○ ○ ○ ○ To decelerate and stop the joints, set the
stop input EXSTOP signal closed.
When the signal contact is closed, the
EXSTIN signal, start switch, home position
return key are invalid.
However, there are two exceptions:
1. If you input the EXSTOP signal during
spindle turn, the spindle will not stop.
(Same with the feed hold switch).
2. During ATC or tapping cycle, the
EXSTOP signal will not be accepted until
the cycle is completed.
(Same with the feed hold switch)
To restart, set the EXSTOP signal closed,
and then press the start key or input the
EXSTIN signal.
The operation continues in key-input
operation mode or memory operation mode.

5 -Signal block

EXSTOP
100 msec or more

Closed
Open

Operation stop

(Note)
The feed hold switch LED is lit until the
next start input is accepted after the stop
input.
External EXRESET ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ To reset the controller, set the EXRESET
reset input signal closed.
This signal has the same function as the
reset key has.

-Signal block
EXSTOP
100 msec or more

Closed
Open

Reset stop

2010/12/21 5 - 12 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

5.2.2 Connection of free-mapping external input/output

terminal on the IO board.

IO24
XTI

Input common INCOM 52

Input common INCOM 51
External signal input 54
No54 53
No53 56
No56 55
No55 58
No58 57
No57 60
No60 59
No59 62
5
Input common INCOM 61
Input common INCOM
IOG

XTO IO24

Output common OUTCOM 102

Output common OUTCOM 101
External signal output 104
No104 103
No103 106
No106 105
No105 108
No108 107
No107 110
No110 109
No109 112
Output common OUTCOM 111
Output common OUTCOM

T32BIN5.06.ai

2010/12/21 5 - 13 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

Logic Valid-mode
Signal Symbol a- b- Function
Manual MDI Memory Edit*1
contact contact
In put INCOM - - ○ ○ ○ ○ Input common is connecting to IOG on IO
common (IOG) board.
51.52
External PI53～ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Free mapping input signal to IOG on IO
input PI60 board.
53~60 For signal assignment for each terminal
block and signal contents, refer to list of
external input signals and functions and the
section on function description in the
operation manual.
For input characteristics, refer to 5-4
Precautions when using external input and
output signals.

(Note)
Free-mapping input signal is an input signal
that can be set as desired for each terminal
block.
Input INCOM - - ○ ○ ○ ○ Input common is connecting to IO 24V on
5 common (IO24) IO board.
61.62
Output OUT - - ○ ○ ○ ○ Output common is connecting to IO 24V on
common COM IO board.
101.102 (IO24)
External PO103 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Free mapping output signal terminal on IO
output ~PO110 board
103
~110 For signal assignment for each terminal
block and signal contents, refer to list of
external input signals and functions and the
section on function description in the
operation manual.
For input characteristics, refer to 5-4
Precautions when using external input and
output signals.

(Note)
Free-mapping output signal is an input
signal that can be set as desired for each
terminal block.
Output OUT - - ○ ○ ○ ○ Output common is connecting to IOG on IO
common COM board.
111.112 (IOG)

2010/12/21 5 - 14 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

5.2.3 Power output terminal on the IO board

IO board (ICPCB)

Machine light
(selective type)
Terminal board XTPW 1. DC24V 0.85 Amax
or
2. AC24V 3Amax
1 (For Europe specification
DC24V or only)
AC24V * Switched by connecting
2 adjacent connector
“LT24IN”. (Not connected at
shipment)
3
AC100V Machine light： 5
AC100V 1A max
4

R103 5
AC100V Free-mapping AC100V 1A max
T100 6

24V supply
CN100
DC AC

Connector
LT24IN input

T32BIN5.14.ai
*1 indicates program edit.
Logic Valid-mode
Signal Symbol a- b- Function
Manual MDI Memory Edit*1
contact contact
Machine - - ○ ○ ○ ○ Power signals for inside machine lamps.
light LT100 When the power breaker is on, turning on
AC100V the switch for inside machine lamps outputs
these signals.
LT24 AC100V 1Amax
DC/AC24 ２４Ⅴ(selective type)
V DC 0.85Amax
(selective AC 3Amax
type) Shall be 100VA or lower in total.
(Note)
1.A total of 100V and 24V must be
100VA or less.
2. Do not use for other than
lighting apparatus.
3. AC24V is limited to Europe
specification.
AC100V T100 AC100V power 1A max.
R103

2010/12/21 5 - 15 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

5.3 EXIO board

5.3.1 EXIO 1 & 2 boards
1) Optional configuration
EXIO1 NPN ASSY EXIO1 PNP ASSY
EXIO1 board Type 1 (NPN) Type 2 (PNP)
Cable 1.4 m, 2 pcs. 1.4 m, 2 pcs.
Terminal block board 2 pcs. 2 pcs.

(1) Type of EXIO board

EXIO1 board: 32 points each for input and output
EXIO2 board: Additional 32 points each for input and output
Note: An EXIO1 board is required to use an EXIO2 board.

There are two types of each board depending on the output circuits.
Note: The NPN type is the same as that for the A-series machine.

Output circuit
I/O points
5 Type 1 (NPN) Type 2 (PNP)
EXIO1 board 32 / 32 EXIO1 NPN PCB ASSY EXIO1 PNP PCB ASSY
EXIO2 board 32 / 32 EXIO2 NPN PCB ASSY EXIO2 PNP PCB ASSY

Note:
1. Users shall prepare the power supply when 24V / 0.5A or more is necessary.

2010/12/21 5 - 16 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

2) Block diagram
(1) EXIO board and terminal block board

EXIO1 board Terminal block Input

board No. 1 203 ~ 210
XT PCB Input
16 input points CNEXIO2 213 ~ 220
16 output points Output
303 ~ 310
Output
313 ~ 320

Terminal block Input

board No. 2 223 ~ 230
XT PCB Input
16 input points CNEXIO3 233 ~ 240 5
16 output points Output
323 ~ 330
Output
333 ~ 340

EXIO2 board Terminal block Input

board No. 3 403 ~ 410
XT PCB Input
16 input points CNEXIO4 413 ~ 420
16 output points Output
503 ~ 510
Output
513 ~ 520

Terminal block Input

board No. 4 423 ~ 430
XT PCB Input
16 input points CNEXIO5 433 ~ 440
16 output points Output
523 ~ 530
Output
533 ~ 540

2010/12/21 5 - 17 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

(2) NC board, IO board, and EXIO board

EXIO1 board

NC board

CNIO

CNIO
5
IO board CNIO
CNEXIO

CNEXIO

Terminating resistance

CNEX24
CNEX24

CNEXPW

The diagram shows the wiring when using 24V

inside the NC. (Max. 0.5A)
When larger current is necessary,
see 6) Power supply for EXIO1&2 boards.

2010/12/21 5 - 18 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
 TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

3) Terminal block board

No. 1 No. 2

313 333
303 314 323 334
304 315 324 335
Terminal 305 325
block 316 336
306 317 326 337
307 318 327 338
308 319 328 339
309 320 329 340
310 321 330 341
311 322 331 342
312 332
213 233
203 214 223 234
204 215 224 235
205 225
Terminal 206
216
226
236 5
block 217 237
207 218 227 238
208 219 228 239
209 220 229 240
210 221 230 241
211 222 231 242
212 232

No. 3 No. 4

513 533
503 514 523 534
504 515 524 535
505 516 525 536
Attach stickers to the terminal blocks so that
the numbers on the stickers correspond to the 506 517 526 537
terminal blocks. 507 518 527 538
508 519 528 539
509 520 529 540
Manufacturer WAGO 510 530
Model IM-236-40P 521 541
511 522 531 542
512 532
The terminal block board can be attached to 413 433
the DIN rail. 403 414 423 434
404 415 424 435
405 416 425 436
406 417 426 437
407 418 427 438
408 419 428 439
409 420 429 440
410 421 430 441
411 422 431 442
412 432

2010/12/21 5 - 19 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

4) Cable

CNEXIO＊

Attach a marking tube with the appropriate

5 connector number to the cable and secure
it with connection bands.

Terminal block board Marking tube

No.1 CNEXIO2
No.2 CNEXIO3
No.3 CNEXIO4
No.4 CNEXIO5

Connector Insulation displacement connector

Manufacturer 3M
Model 7940-7500FL

Cable AWG28 flat cable

Maximum allowable current value 0.5A/pin

5) Wiring examples
Type 1 (NPN)

Be sure to use the power 24V of OUTCOMD (24V) of the terminal block board for connecting to
the load. If the power 24V is supplied from other than OUTCOMD (24V), all outputs are turned
ON when the power is turned ON.
Maximum allowable current value per power terminal OUTCOMD (24V) is 0.5A/pin.
When larger current is necessary, connect the power 24V to more than two OUTCOM (24V)
terminals.

2010/12/21 5 - 20 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

Terminal block board No. 1

XTI XTO +
203 Input Output 303
204 Input Output 304
205 Input Output 305
206 Input Output 306
207 Input Output 307
208 Input Output 308
209 Input Output 309
210 Input Output 310
211 INCOM(IOG) OUTCOMD(24V) 311
212 INCOM(IOG) OUTCOMD(24V) 312

+
213 Input Output 313
214 Input Output 314
215 Input Output 315
216 Output 316
217
Input
Input Output 317
5
218 Input Output 318
219 Input Output 319
220 Input Output 320
221 INCOM(IOG) OUTCOMD(24V) 321
222 INCOM(IOG) OUTCOMD(24V) 322

Terminal block No.2 Terminal block No.3 Terminal block No.4

Signal Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No.
External input 223 233 403 413 423 433
External input 224 234 404 414 424 434
External input 225 235 405 415 425 435
External input 226 236 406 416 426 436
External input 227 237 407 417 427 437
External input 228 238 408 418 428 438
External input 229 239 409 419 429 439
External input 230 240 410 420 430 440
INCOM(IOG) 231 241 411 421 431 441
INCOM(IOG) 232 242 412 422 432 442

Terminal block No.2 Terminal block No.3 Terminal block No.4

Signal Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No.
External output 323 333 503 513 523 533
External output 324 334 504 514 524 534
External output 325 335 505 515 525 535
External output 326 336 506 516 526 536
External output 327 337 507 517 527 537
External output 328 338 508 518 528 538
External output 329 339 509 519 529 539
External output 330 340 510 520 530 540
OUTCOMD(24V) 331 341 511 521 531 541
OUTCOMD(24V) 332 342 512 522 532 542

2010/12/21 5 - 21 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

Type 2 (PNP)
Maximum allowable current value of the ground terminal OUTCOMD (IOG) is 0.5A/pin.
When larger current is necessary, connect the ground to more than two OUTCOMD (IOG)
terminals.
Terminal block board No. 1
XTI XTO +
203 Input Output 303
204 Input Output 304
205 Input Output 305
206 Input Output 306
207 Input Output 307
208 Input Output 308
209 Input Output 309
210 Input Output 310
211 INCOM(24V) OUTCOMD(IOG) 311
212 INCOM(24V) OUTCOMD(IOG) 312

+
213 Input Output 313
5 214 Input Output 314
215 Input Output 315
216 Input Output 316
217 Input Output 317
218 Input Output 318
219 Input Output 319
220 Input Output 320
221 INCOM(24V) OUTCOMD(IOG) 321
222 INCOM(24V) OUTCOMD(IOG) 322

Terminal block No. 2 Terminal block No.3 Terminal block No. 4

Signal Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No.
External input 223 233 403 413 423 433
External input 224 234 404 414 424 434
External input 225 235 405 415 425 435
External input 226 236 406 416 426 436
External input 227 237 407 417 427 437
External input 228 238 408 418 428 438
External input 229 239 409 419 429 439
External input 230 240 410 420 430 440
INCOM(24V) 231 241 411 421 431 441
INCOM(24V) 232 242 412 422 432 442

Terminal block No.2 Terminal block No.3 Terminal block No.4

Signal Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No.
External output 323 333 503 513 523 533
External output 324 334 504 514 524 534
External output 325 335 505 515 525 535
External output 326 336 506 516 526 536
External output 327 337 507 517 527 537
External output 328 338 508 518 528 538
External output 329 339 509 519 529 539
External output 330 340 510 520 530 540
OUTCOMD(IOG) 331 341 511 521 531 541
OUTCOMD(IOG) 332 342 512 522 532 542

2010/12/21 5 - 22 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

CNEXIO2, CNEXIO3, CNEXIO4, CNEXIO5

Logic Valid-mode
Signal Symbol a- b- Function
Manual MDI Memory Edit*1
contact contact
INCOM 211, 212 - - ○ ○ ○ ○ When Type1 (NPN), INCOM is connecting
221, 222 to IOG.
231, 232 When Type2 (PNP), INCOM is connecting
241, 242 to IO24.
411, 412
421, 422
431, 432
441, 442
XTI 203 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Free-mapping input signal terminal
~210
213 For signal assignment for each terminal
~220 block and signal contents, refer to list of
223 external input signals and functions and the
~230 section on function description in the
233 operation manual.
~240 For input characteristics, refer to 5-4
403 Precautions when using external input and
~410 output signals.
413 5
~420 Note: Free-mapping output signal is an
423 input signal that can be set as desired for
~430 each terminal block.
433 Signals set by default are assigned
~440 respectively before shipment. Refer to
operation manual.
OUTCOMD 311, 312 - - ○ ○ ○ ○ When Type1 (NPN), OUTCOMD is
321, 322 connecting to 24V.
331, 332 OUTCOMD (24V) is turned on after a 0.3
341, 342 seconds delay of pin 2 (IO24) of the
511, 512 connector CNEXPW.
521, 522
531, 532 OUTCOMD
0.3 seconds
541, 542
IO24 (OUTCOM)

When Type2 (PNP), OUTCOMD is

connecting to IOG.

XTO 303 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Free-mapping output signal terminal

~310
313 For signal assignment for each terminal
~320 block and signal contents, refer to list of
323 external input signals and functions and the
~330 section on function description in the
333 operation manual.
~340 For input characteristics, refer to 5-4
503 Precautions when using external input and
~510 output signals.
513 Note: Free-mapping output signal is an input
~520 signal is an input signal that can be set as
523 desired for each terminal block.
~530 Signals set by default are assigned
533 respectively before shipment. Refer to
~540 operation manual.

2010/12/21 5 - 23 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

6) Power supply for EXIO1 & 2 boards

EXIO1 board
External power unit
CNEXPW

1 IOG

2 IO24

3 OUTCOM
+ 24 VDC
4 OUTCOM

Note: Be sure to remove the short cord

5 when using an external power unit.

When using a signal output, input 24 VDC to pin 4 of connector CNEXPW.

Calculate the power capacity by multiplying “Output signal points used simultaneously” by
“current of each signal.”
 0.5 A or less can be taken from pin 2 (IO24) of connector CNEXPW on the EXIO1 board.
A short cord is attached when the machine is shipped.

 Prepare an external power supply (24 VDC  20%) when using more than 0.5A.

 Maximum power capacity is 4A.

 Be sure to remove the short cord when using an external power unit.
Failure to do so may damage the board.

2010/12/21 5 - 24 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

Connector CNEXPW wiring steps

Insert a thin flat screwdriver into the slot (square hole).
Fully insert the wire to the wire port (round hole).
Lightly pull the wire to check that the wire is not pulled out.

Wire stripping

2010/12/21 5 - 25 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

5.4 Precautions when using external input and

output signals
1. Arrangement of external input and output signals from the IO board and the Extend IO
board can be changed. Check the user parameters before operation.
2. Use the crimp-terminals BT1.25-9-1 (NICHIFU) for connection with the terminal block.
Peeled wires can also be used.
One terminal box can be connected up to two tubes. Use mark tubes of 0.75mm2.

T32BIN5.11.ai
3. There are two kinds of input/output common (type 1, type 2) to select your needs.
Type1 Type2
Input common IOG 24V
(INCOM)
INCOM

INCOM

Output common 24V IOG

(OUTCOM,
OUTCOMD)
OUTCOM

OUTCOM

Sink type (NPN type) transistor Source type (PNP type) transistor

(Note1) Use type1 when selecting the input circuit as same as NC of A

series.

(Note2) Misconnecting the common may cause the bungle or machine

breakage. Check common first when use.

2010/12/21 5 - 26 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

Procedure of changing for input output circuit type1and type2.

(1) IO board
Signal Symbol Terminal Changing factory
connector type1 and type2 setting
External start switch EXSTIN XTIO-5
input
Start switch output STOUT XTIO-6
External outside start EXOUTSTIN XTIO-7 Change with SW2.
switch input Type1: PN side
Type2
External start switch OUTSTOUT XTIO-8 Type2: Opposite
output side of NPN.
External stop switch EXSTOP XTIO-9
input
External reset input EXREST XTIO-13
External input signal PI53~PI60 XTI53~60 Change with SW3.
(8 point) Type1: NPN side.
Type2
Type2: Opposite
side of NPN.
External output signal PO103~PO110 XTO103~110 Type1: Use
(8 point) CNXTIO3~10 connector CNXTO
Type2
Type2: Use terminal
XTO. 5
Automatic centering TOUCH XTIO-11,25 Change with SW5.
measurement output Type1: NPN side.
Type1
Type2: Opposite
side of NPN.

IO board

SW5
TOUCH
NPN
Terminal XTI Type2
Type1

Terminal SW3
XTO

Connector
NPN

CNXTO

Type1 Type2
SW2
NPN

Terminal
XTIO

Type1 Type2

(2) Extension IO board

Type 1 and type 2 are available.

2010/12/21 5 - 27 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

5.4.1 Input common type1

(INCOM:IOG, OUTCOM:IO24, OUTCOMD:24V)
*Use type1 when select the circuit as same as NC of A series.

IO24
Input common =
(IO board)

Input
signal

IO24

Input common =
5 (Extension IO
board)
Input
signal

Contact current: 10mA (standard)

Input filter time constant: 1 m sec (standard)

Output common =
(IO board CNXTO) Output
signal

IOG
Output current: 200mA (MAX.)
Residual voltage on transistor activation: 0.5V (MAX.)

Output
Output common = signal
(IO board XTIO,
XTO, Extension
IO board)

IOG

Output current: 300mA (MAX.)

2010/12/21 5 - 28 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

1. When connecting coil load, such as relays, to the output circuit of IO board (CNXTO),
be sure to mount a surge absorber to protect the transistors.

OUTCOM (IO24)

Diode: 1S1886 (TOSHIBA) or equivalent

When the case of Extension IO board, mounting a surge absorber is not necessary.
An Extension IO board contains a surge absorbing diode.

2. Do not apply voltage to the input circuit; otherwise it will be damaged.

Connect the dry contact or open collector of the transistor.

5
INCOM (IOG)

3. Use the connector CNXTO below.

Maker: J.S.T. Mfg. Co.,
Connector type: XHP-10
Contact symbol: SXH-001T-P0.6

Input circuit connection example (Type1)

IO PCB

XTI
Input common
51
52
53
IOG Contact, switch
~

Transistor
60 NPN type

Proximity
IO24V NPN type

61
62

T32BIN5.12.ai

2010/12/21 5 - 29 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

Output circuit connection example (Type1)

IO PCB

IO24 XTO

101
102
Connector XHP-10
CNXTO (J.S.T. Mfg. Co.,)
Output
common
Relay for 24vdc
1 Diode ISI886
Toshiba or equivalent

Solenoid for 24vdc

Diode ISI886
3 Toshiba or equivalent
～

5
10 Programmable Programmable controller
controller inside+24V
input Connect OV inside the
Programmable controller to
the machine IOG

Programmable
2 controller inside OV

111

112 XTIO
IOG

1. The output current per point may not exceed 200mA (maximum) and 0.5A for output
current of all port in total.
But start SW output (XTIO-6 pin) and outside start SW output (XTIO-8 pin) should be
100mA (max.).
2. The output circuit may not be short-circuited with +24V.
Otherwise the output circuit will be damaged.
3. Each common output is connected on the board.

2010/12/21 5 - 30 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

External output input circuit connection example (Type1)

IO PCB
Terminal XTIO

External start input EXSTIN 5

Start SW output STOUT 6

External outside start input EXOUTSTIN 7

External start output OUTSTOUT 8

External stop input EXSTOP 9

INCOM（IOG） 10
5
External reset input EXRESET
13

INCOM（IOG）
14

11
Automatic centering measurement
input TOUCH
25

12
INCOM（IOG）

2010/12/21 5 - 31 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

5.4.2 Input common type2

(INCOM:IO24, OUTCOM and OUTCOMD:IOG）

Input
signal
Input common =
(IO board)

IOG

Input common =
(Extension IO
board)
5
Input
signal

IOG

Contact current: 10mA (standard)

Input filter time constant: 1 m sec (standard)

IO24

Output common =
(IO board, Extension
IO board)

Output signal

Output current: 300mA (MAX.)

2010/12/21 5 - 32 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

1. The output circuit contains a surge absorbing diode.

Mounting a surge absorber to the output circuit is not necessary.

OUTCOM (IOG)

2. Do not apply voltage to the input circuit; otherwise it will be damaged.

Connect the dry contact or open collector of the transistor.

INCOM (IO24) 5

Input circuit connection example (Type2)

XTI
IO PCB

51
52

IOG 53 Contact, switch

～

60 Transistor
PNP type

Proximity
IO24 PNP type

61
62
Input common

2010/12/21 5 - 33 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
 Chapter 5 External input/ output signals TC-R2B

Output circuit connection example (Type2)

IO PCB

IO 24 XTO

101
102

103 Relay for 24vdc

～
110
Solenoid for 24vdc

5 Programmable
controller input

Output
common
111
112

IOG

1. The output current per point may not exceed 300mA (maximum).
But start SW output (XTIO-6 pin) and outside start SW output (XTIO-8 pin) should be
100mA (max.).
2. The output circuit may not be short-circuited with 0V.
3. Each common output is connected on the board.

2010/12/21 5 - 34 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

External output input circuit connection example (Type2)

IO board Terminal XTIO

External start input EXSTIN 5

Start SW output STOUT 6

External outside start input 7

EXOUTSTIN

External start SW output 8

OUTSTOUT

External stop input EXSTOP 9

External reset input EXRESET 13

5
Automatic centering 11
measurement input TOUCH

25

INCOM（IO24） 26

2010/12/21 5 - 35 eTR2BIN5-1.doc
 TC-R2B Chapter 5 External input/ output signals

5.5 External output signal status during memory operation

Machine zero return

return finish
Machine zero
Start

End program

Start

Stop program
Start

Stop

Start invalid

Start
Single stop
Start

Single stop

Start

Reset

Start

stop
Emergency

Reset
Open
External start EXST Closed
External stop EXSTOP
Input
External

External reset EXRESET

External machine zero return EXORG
Program selection PRO1 PRO2 PRO4
PRO8 PRO9900(only Conversation) Single Dry run
Single run, dry run (Operation key)

ON
Memory operation enabled MEMOK OFF
Automatic run AUTO 5
Automatic run start STL
Program end M30
input
External

Program stop M00

NC ready NCOK
Zero position X,Y ZPX､ZPY
Machine zero return finish REFFIN (NC)
ORGFIN (Conversation)
Alarm output ALM a
ALM b

1. The above figure shows a timing chart in memory operation mode.

2. Each "o" on the program selection line (PRO1, PRO2, PRO4, PRO8, and PRO9900 signals) indicates that the NC reads the corresponding signal.
3. Zero position output ZPX and ZPY are examples and they are output when machine zero return is performed during program execution.
ZPZ signal is omitted but same as ZPX and ZPY.
4. There are not external input signals for single run and dry run. So, the above figure gives the status of the operation key for reference.

2009/11/02 5 - 36 eTR2BIN5-2.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/ S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 6 Input output

CHAPTER 6

INPUT OUTPUT

6.1 I/O Status Display

6.2 Input/ Output
6.3 Servo 6
6.4 External I/O signal
6.5 Soft switch
6.6 Machine diagnosis
6.7 PLC
6.8 Running Counters

2011/05/23 6-1 eTCOM2IN6-1.doc

 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 6 Input output R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

6.1 I/O Status Display

This section describes the I/O status monitoring procedure.
This procedure is not directly necessary for machine operation.
Do not output the data. Only referring to input and output status is allowed.

1. Press the [I/O] key to display the <Input and output menu> screen.
2. To monitor machine I/O status, enter [1] and press the [ENT] key.
To monitor servo status, enter [2] and press the [ENT] key.
To monitor external I/O signal, enter [3] and press the [ENT] key.
To monitor soft switch status, enter [4] and press the [ENT] key.
To monitor machine diagnosis status, enter [5] and press the [ENT] key.

[Reference]
On menu screen, move the cursor to a required menu number with CURSOR keys
and press the [ENT] key.

6.2 Input/ Output

How to read the table
1. *is low active
2. Bit is shaded which difference between machine type and specification.

6 Sign explanation
Sign Explanation

[A1] Arm type of ATC (Type 1)

[A2] Turret type of ATC (Type 1)

[A3] Turret type of ATC (Type 2)

[A4] Arm type of ATC (Type 2)

[B1] High pressure CTS

[B2] Middle pressure CTS

[C1] Servo amplifier type 1

[C2] Servo amplifier type 2

Machine type combination

Machine type Combination

TC-22B [A1] [B1] [C1]

TC-31B [A1] [B2] [C2]

TC-32BN [A1] [B1] [C1]

TC-S2D,
TC-S2Dz,
[A3] [B2] [C2]
TC-S2DN
TC-S2DNz
TC-R2B [A3] [B2] [C2]

TC-20B [A4] [B2] [C2]

2011/05/23 6-2 eTCOM2IN6-1.doc

 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 6 Input output

【Input main】
bit
Input F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
THERMAL THERMAL
THERMAL THERMAL THERMAL THERMAL THERMAL THERMAL THERMAL THERMAL THERMAL THERMAL THERMAL
1 SENSO R SIG N
SENSO R
MSBDATA
SENSO R SENSO R SENSO R SENSO R SENSO R SENSO R SENSO R SENSO R SENSO R SENSO R
SENSO R
LSBDATA
0 1 1

TX EMPTY FRAMING PARITY W O RD

2 R T FIFO ENABLE SHUT DO W N
INT
RX DATA INT PARITY INT
ERR INT
IRD A STO P BIT
ENABLE LENG TH
BAUDRATE 3 BAUDRATE2 BAUDRATE 1 BAUDRATE0

3 1 0 0 0 0 FRAMING ERR CTS PARITY RX DATA 7 RX DATA 6 RX DATA 5 RX DATA 4 RX DATA 3 RX DATA 2 RX DATA 1 RX DATA 0

4 CO UNT 15 CO UNT 14 CO UNT 13 CO UNT 12 CO UNT 11 CO UNT 10 CO UNT 09 CO UNT 08 CO UNT 07 CO UNT 06 CO UNT 05 CO UNT 04 CO UNT 03 CO UNT 02 CO UNT 01 CO UNT 00

PO W ER O FF *LO W ERING
*EXIO (THE *BATTERY
5 DIP SW 3 DIP SW 2 DIP SW 1 DIP SW 0 CO MMAND W ARNING
5TH STATIO N) ERRO R
MO NITO R 3.3V

[A1][A4]ZERO
PO INT
SENSO R
CPU ERR CPU ERR CPU ERR INTERRUPT *MS-DPRAM *ML-DPRAM *MLINK *UART DC24V ERR UPS PO W ER PO W ER O FF
6 SERVO ALARM *ALARM
MAIN LO CAL SLAVE [A2][A3]ATC INTERRUPT INTERRUPT INTERRUPT INTERRUPT (EXIO ) AC DO W N CO MMAND
CAM ZERO
PO INT
SENSO R

HANDLE HANDLE HANDLE HANDLE HANDLE HANDLE HANDLE HANDLE O UTSIDE B－ O UTSIDE B＋ O UTSIDE A－ O UTSIDE A＋ AUTO DO O R AUTO DO O R AUTO DO O R
7 CO UNTER 7 CO UNTER 6 CO UNTER 5 CO UNTER 4 CO UNTER 3 CO UNTER 2 CO UNTER 1 CO UNTER 0 SW SW SW SW MO DE SW CLO SE SW O PEN SW

NO T MEMO RY
MANUAL
8 JO G -4 JO G +4 JO G -Z JO G +Z JO G -Y JO G +Y JO G -X JO G +X W RITABLE EDIT MO DE O PERATIO N MDI MO DE
MO DE
SHIFT KEY RESET KEY RELEASE KEY
SW MO DE

KEY MATRIX KEY MATRIX KEY MATRIX KEY MATRIX KEY MATRIX KEY MATRIX KEY MATRIX KEY MATRIX KEY MATRIX KEY MATRIX KEY MATRIX KEY MATRIX
9 KEY_REV１ KEY_REV０ KEY_VER１ KEY_VER0
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
HANDLE
SPINDLE SPINDLE SPINDLE SPINDLE SPINDLE
RAPID O VER RAPID O VER RAPID O VER HANDLE AXIS HANDLE AXIS HANDLE AXIS AXIS MO DE O UTSIDE
10 O VER O VER O VER O VER O VER
RIDE IN RIDE 2 RIDE 1 SELECTIO N 4 SELECTIO N 3 SELECTIO N 2 SELECTIO N CHANG E SW START SW
STO P SW START SW
RIDE IN RIDE 4 RIDE 3 RIDE 2 RIDE 1
1
HANDLE HANDLE
FA KEY INPUT FA KEY INPUT FA KEY INPUT FA KEY FA KEY FA KEY INPUT FA KEY INPUT FA KEY INPUT MAG NIFICATI MAG NIFICATI CUTTING CUTTING CUTTING CUTTING CUTTING CUTTING
11 7/15 6/14 5/13 INPUT 4/12 INPUT 3/11 2/10 1/9 0/8 ON ON O VERRIDE IN O VERRIDE 5 O VERRIDE 4 O VERRIDE 3 O VERRIDE 2 O VERRIDE 1
SELECTIO N 2 SELECTIO N 1

2011/05/23 6-3 eTCOM2IN6-2.doc

 Chapter 6 Input output TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

bit
Input F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
[B1]HIGH
PRESSURE
AIR *TRANS *SPINDLE 100V
SERVO ALARM ATC MOTOR INVERTER EMERGENCY POWER SW AC VOLTAGE UNIT ERROR 3 PHASE CHIP FLOW M COOLANT M
12 2 OVERHEAT ERR STOP
DC24V ERR
OFF
PRESSURE
DECREASE
DECREASE 1(※ POWER ERR OVERHEAT OVERHEAT
MOTOR
OVERHEAT
MOTOR
OVERHEAT
SERVO OFF POWER
FAILURE
[B2]CTS PUMP
THERMAL

SERVO MACHINE AUTOLUBRI-

SERVO RELAY AUTO DOOR CLOSE 2 OUTSIDE
COOLANT SAFETY UNIT RELAY OPTION SELECTION CATION PLATE DOOR EXTERNAL EXTERNAL EXTERNAL
13 POWER 2 ON SW
CONTACT
CHECK 2
CONTACT SIGNAL SERIAL PRESSURE
LUBRICATION
EMPTY
OPEN LS
(QT INNER
DOOR)
DOOR CLOSE DOOR OPEN
RESET STOP
PALLET
START
START
CHECK 1 DATA SW

[A1]COVER [A1]HOLDER [A1][A4] [C1]TOOL [C1]TOOL

[A1]COVER CLAMP ERROR
[A1][A4]RESERV
OPEN (*1) [A1][A4]MAGAZI MAGAZINE [A1][A4] CLAMP
CLOSE (*1) [A2][A3]TOOL E INPUT CLAMP
[A2]MAGAZINE NE ROTATION REVERSE SW RESERVE INPUT ARM ARM CYLINDER 4TH AXIS 4TH AXIS
[A2]DECELERA SIDE DOOR POT UPPER POT LOWER WASH COOLANT [A2]MAGAZINE 4 CYLINDER
14 TING SIGNAL
16
[A3]ALARM2
SW
[A2]MAGAZINE
OPEN END END LEVEL [A3]CLOSING
[A2]MAGAZINE [A2]MAGAZINE 1
2 [A3]OPENING [A2]READY
SHUTTER
CLOSE
SHUTTER
OPEN
(CLAMP END)
(UNCLAMP
END)
UNCLAMP
INPUT
CLAMP
INPUT
[A3][A4]RESERV SENSOR OPERATION
[A4]RESERVE 8 [A3]ALARM1 OPERATION SIGNAL
[C2]RESERVE [C2]*SPINDLE
[A4]RESERVE
E INPUT COMPLETED INPUT
INPUT INPUT COMPLETED FAN OVERHEAT

[B1]*HIGH- [B1]RESERVE [B1]LINE

[B1]RESERVE
PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PRESSURE INPUT FILTER *AREA TOOL
INPUT TOOL ERR
15 MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT
60 59 58 57
MABLE
INPUT 56
MABLE
INPUT 55
MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT
54 53
UNIT ERR 2
[B2]*BACK
[B2]CTS
PRESSURE
CLOGGED
[B2]CTS LINE
SENSOR
INPUT
[B2]TOOL SIGNAL
NORMAL
SIGNAL
WASH FILTER
WASH FILTER SENSOR FILTER

PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAMM PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAMM PROGRAMM
16 MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT ABLE INPUT
220 219 218 217 216
MABLE
INPUT 215
MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT
214 213 210
MABLE INPUT
209
MABLE INPUT
208
MABLE
INPUT 207
MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT ABLE INPUT ABLE INPUT
206 205 204 203

PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAMM PROGRAMM
17 MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT
240 239 238 237
MABLE MABLE
INPUT 236 INPUT 235
MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT
234 233 230
MABLE INPUT
229
MABLE INPUT
228
MABLE
INPUT 227
MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT ABLE INPUT ABLE INPUT
226 225 224 223

PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAMM PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM-
18 MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT ABLE INPUT
420 419 418 417 416
MABLE
INPUT 415
MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT
414 413 410
MABLE INPUT
409
MABLE INPUT
408
MABLE
INPUT 407
MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT
406 405
MABLE
INPUT 404
MABLE
INPUT 403

PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM- PROGRAM-
19 MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT
440 439 438 437
MABLE MABLE
INPUT 436 INPUT 435
MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT
434 433 430
MABLE INPUT
429
MABLE INPUT
428
MABLE
INPUT 427
MABLE INPUT MABLE INPUT
426 425
MABLE
INPUT 424
MABLE
INPUT 423

20 OPSEL15 OPSEL14 OPSEL13 OPSEL12 OPSEL11 OPSEL10 OPSEL09 OPSEL08 OPSEL07 OPSEL06 OPSEL05 OPSEL04 OPSEL03 OPSEL02 OPSEL01 OPSEL00

21 MSEL15 MSEL14 MSEL13 MSEL12 MSEL11 MSEL10 MSEL09 MSEL08 MSEL07 MSEL06 MSEL05 MSEL04 MSEL03 MSEL02 MSEL01 MSEL00

SPPLY RELAY HIGH HP RELAY TOOL *TOOL TOOL

TB REVISION TB REVISION TB VERSION TB VERSION BW FILTER CONNECTION PRESSURE CONNECTION CLEAN TANK BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE
22 01bit 00 bit 01bit 00bit CLOGGED CHECK PUMP CHECK EMPTY DETECTION DETECTION DETECTION
ERROR OVER LOAD ERROR ALM MVFIN ACKS

TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL
BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE GREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE
23 DETECTION DETECTION DETECTION DETECTION DETECTION DETECTION DETECTION DETECTION DETECTION DETECTION DETECTION DETECTION DETECTION DETECTION DETECTION DETECTION
ENCODER 15 ENCODER 14 ENCODER 13 ENCODER 12 ENCODER 11 ENCODER 10 ENCODER 9 ENCODER 8 ENCODER 7 ENCODER 6 ENCODER 5 ENCODER 4 ENCODER 3 ENCODER 2 ENCODER 1 ENCODER 0

(Note) * indicates low active.

(Note 2) Feature of the covers differ depending on the machine type. (32BN: Magazine cover, 22B: Pot shutter)

2011/05/23 6-4 eTCOM2IN6-2.doc

TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 6 Input output

【Output main】
bit
Output F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PROTECT PROTECT PROTECT PROTECT PROTECT PROTECT PROTECT
PROTECT
1 NC_REV3 NC_REV2 NC_REV1 NC_REV0 NC_V3 NC_V2 NC_V1 NC_V0 AREA
0xE0000-
AREA
0xC0000-
AREA
0xA0000-
AREA
0x80000-
AREA
0x60000-
AREA
0x40000-
AREA
0x20000-
AREA 0x00000-

TX EMPTY FRAMING ERR PARITY W ORD

2 1 1 FIFO ENABLE SHUT DOW N
INT
RX DATA INT PARITY INT
INT
IRDA STOP BIT
ENABLE LENGTH
BAUDRATE 3 BAUDRATE 2 BAUDRATE 1 BAUDRATE 0

TRANSMIT
3 1 0 0 0 0
EN
RTS PARITY TX DATA 7 TX DATA 6 TX DATA 5 TX DATA 4 TX DATA 3 TX DATA 2 TX DATA 1 TX DATA 0

4 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1 LED 0 ALARM CLEAR

SLAVE IO SLAVE IO SLAVE IO SLAVE IO SLAVE IO SLAVE IO SLAVE IO SLAVE IO

5 RESERVE 7 RESERVE 6 RESERVE 5 RESERVE 4 RESERVE 3 RESERVE 2 RESERVE 1 RESERVE 0

MASTER B MASTER B MASTER B MASTER B MASTER B MASTER B MASTER B MASTER B MASTER B MASTER B MASTER B
MASTER B
PORT PORT MASTER B PORT PORT PORT PORT MASTER B MASTER B PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT MASTER B
PORT
6 OUTPUT OUTPUT PORT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
OUTPUT
PORT OUTPUT PORT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT PORT OUTPUT
SELECTION SELECTION SELECTION 13 SELECTION SELECTION SELECTION SELECTION SELECTION 07 SELECTION 06 SELECTION SELECTION SELECTION SELECTION SELECTION SELECTION 00
SELECTION 08
15 14 12 11 10 09 05 04 03 02 01

SLAVE 8CRC SLAVE 7CRC SLAVE 6CRC SLAVE 5CRC SLAVE 4CRC SLAVE 3CRC SLAVE 2CRC SLAVE 1CRC
SLAVE 8CRC SLAVE 7CRC SLAVE 6CRC SLAVE 5CRC SLAVE 4CRC SLAVE 3CRC SLAVE 2CRC SLAVE 1CRC
7 RESPONSE
TIME OUT
ERR
RESPONSE
TIME OUT
ERR
RESPONSE
TIME OUT
ERR
RESPONSE
TIMEOUT
ERR
RESPONSE
TIME OUT
ERR
RESPONSE
TIMEOUT
ERR
RESPONSE
TIMEOUT
ERR
RESPONSE
ERR
TIME OUT

*CPU CORE *PLD CORE PLD CORE CPU CORE MLINK 8TH MLINK 7TH MLINK 6TH MLINK 5TH MLINK 4TH MLINK 3RD MLINK 2ND MLINK 1ST
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE BOLTAGE VOLTAGE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE
8 (1.95V) (2.5V) (2.5V) (1.95V) STATION STATION STATION STATION STATION STATION SATION STATION
DECREASE DECREASE INCREASE INCREASE VALID VALID VALID VALID VALID VALID VALID VALID
COMMUNICA
TION ERR
COMMUNICA
9 TION STOP
INTERRUPTI
ON
PROHIBIT
ATC ZERO
SERVO CPU ERR CPU ERR CPU ERR POINT MS-DPRAM ML-DPRAM MLINK UART
INTERRUPTIO EMERGENCY
10 N PERMIT
ALARM
PERMIT
STOP PERMIT
MAIN PERMIT
(W DT)
LOCAL
PERMIT
SLAVE
PERMIT
SENSOR INTERRUPTIO INTERRUPTIO INTERRUPTIO INTERRUPTIO
N PERMIT N PERMIT
INTERRUPTIO N PERMIT N PERMIT
N PERMIT
MLINK MLINK
INTERRUPTIO INTERRUPTIO AUTO W ATCH DOG SERVO SERVO RELAY
11 N SIGNAL N LUTCH POW ER OFF CLEAR RELAY 2 ON 1 ON
CLEAR MODE

LED MATRIX LED MATRIX LED MATRIX LED MATRIX LED MATRIX LED MATRIX LED MATRIX LED MATRIX LED MATRIX LED MATRIX LED MATRIX KEY MATRIX KEY MATRIX KEY MATRIX
12 OUTPUT10 OUTPUT 09 OUTPUT 08 OUTPUT 07 OUTPUT 06 OUTPUT 05 OUTPUT 04 OUTPUT 03 OUTPUT 02 OUTPUT 01 OUTPUT 00
LED SCAN 1 LED SCAN 0
SCAN 2 SCAN 1 SCAN 0

FA OUTPUT FA OUTPUT FA OUTPUT FA OUTPUT FA OUTPUT

13 FA OUTPUT 7
6
FA OUTPUT 5 FA OUTPUT 4 FA OUTPUT 3 FA OUTPUT 2 FA OUTPUT 1 FA OUTPUT 0 FA OUTPUT 15 FA OUTPUT 14
13 12 11 10
FA OUTPUT 9 FA OUTPUT 8

2011/05/23 6-5 eTCOM2IN6-2.doc

Chapter 6 Input output TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

bit
Output F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
LCD
LCD
ILLUMINA INPUT
*LCD BACK ILLUMINA OUTSIDE B OUTSIDE A OUTSIDE
14 LIGHT OFF
TION
ADJUSTMEN
TION
CHANGE FOR
FA
INDEX LED INDEX LED
BUZZER
START LED
STOP LED START LED

INCREMENT
T UP
[A1]ARM
[A1]TOOL
[A1]ARM SHUTTER CLOSE [A1][A4]ARM [A1][A4]ARM [A1]POT
ATTACHMENT AND
[B1]CTS SHUTTER VALVE ROTATION ROTATION [A1][A4]ARM UPPER END [A1]POT
REMOVAL PERMIT
PUMP COOLANT CLOSE [A2]MAGAZINE AUTO SPEED 1 ROTATION [A2][A3] LOW ER END
[A2][A3] (W ATER SPEED 2
CHIP FLOW CHIP FLOW COOLANT SW MACHINE DEC OK
15 AIR BLAST [B2]CTS
PUMP ON
SUPPLY DECOM-
PRESS) ON M400
VALVE ON
M08
SW ON ON LIGHT
VALVE
[A2][A3]RESE
[A3]RESERVE
LUBRICATION [A2]MAGAZINE [A2]MAGAZIN
ON ADDRESS OK E CCW
[A2][A3]
MAGAZINE
RESERVE
INPUT
[A2][A3]RESER
VE INPUT [A4]
INPUT
VALVE B [A3]RESERVE [A3]MAGAZIN
VALVE A RVE INPUT [A4]ARM START [A4]POT Pot movement
[A4]RESERVE INPUT
INPUT
[A4]Pot brake ROTATION E CCW DIRECTION
SPEED

DC24V EC24V ERROR EC24V

16 ERROR 3 2 ERROR 1
IO_REV3 IO_REV2 IO_REV 1 IO REV_0 IO_V2 IO_V1 IO_V0

(W ATER [B1]RESERVE [B1]RESERVE

OPTION OPTION MAGAZINE
AUTO SUPPLY [B1]RESERVE INPUT INPUT AUTO DOOR MAGAZINE *4TH AXIS
SELECTION SELECTION AUTO DOOR COVER SIDE 2 DOOR SIDE DOOR
17 POW ER
OFF
DECOM-
PRESS)
INPUT
[B2]CTS PUMP
MODEL MODEL
*QT INDEX [B2]DRAIN
AIR VALVE
[B2]3 W AY
VALVE
VALVE
CLOSE
VALVE OPEN CLOSE
COVER OPEN
VALVE
LOCK LOCK
DOOR LOCK UNCLAMP
OUTPUT
CLEAR CLOCK VALVE
VALVE B (VALVE C) (VALVE B)
[A1] [A2]
[A4]TOOL
[A1] [A2] [A3]
BREAKAGE
PROGRAMM CHIP
PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM DETECTION INDICATION OUTSIDE START
ABLE CONVEYOR INDICATION INDICATION
18 OUTPUT
ABLE OUTPUT
109
ABLE OUTPUT
108
ABLE
OUTPUT 107
ABLE OUTPUT
106
ABLE
OUTPUT 105
ABLE
OUTPUT 104
ABLE OUTPUT
103
JIG FLOW START (M200)
[A3]ALARM
ON LAMP GREEN
LAMP
YELLOW
LAMP RED
START
OUTPUT
SIGNAL
OUTPUT
110 [A4]ARM
RESET
BRAKE
(ELECTRIC
CYLINDER)
PROGRAMM
PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM
ABLE
19 OUTPUT
ABLE OUTPUT
319
ABLE OUTPUT
318
ABLE
OUTPUT 317
ABLE OUTPUT
316
ABLE
OUTPUT 315
ABLE
OUTPUT 314
ABLE OUTPUT
313
ABLE
OUTPUT 310
ABLE OUTPUT
309
ABLE
OUTPUT 308
ABLE
OUTPUT 307
ABLE
OUTPUT 306
ABLE ABLE
OUTPUT 305 OUTPUT 304
ABLE OUTPUT
303
320

PROGRAMM
PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM
ABLE
20 OUTPUT
ABLE OUTPUT
339
ABLE OUTPUT
338
ABLE
OUTPUT 337
ABLE OUTPUT
336
ABLE
OUTPUT 335
ABLE
OUTPUT 334
ABLE OUTPUT
333
ABLE
OUTPUT 330
ABLE OUTPUT
329
ABLE
OUTPUT 328
ABLE
OUTPUT 327
ABLE
OUTPUT 326
ABLE ABLE
OUTPUT 325 OUTPUT 324
ABLE OUTPUT
323
340
PROGRAMM
PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM
ABLE
21 OUTPUT
ABLE OUTPUT
519
ABLE OUTPUT
518
ABLE
OUTPUT 517
ABLE OUTPUT
516
ABLE
OUTPUT 515
ABLE
OUTPUT 514
ABLE OUTPUT
513
ABLE
OUTPUT 510
ABLE OUTPUT
509
ABLE
OUTPUT 508
ABLE
OUTPUT 507
ABLE
OUTPUT 506
ABLE ABLE
OUTPUT 505 OUTPUT 504
ABLE OUTPUT
503
520
PROGRAMM
PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM PROGRAMM
ABLE
22 OUTPUT
ABLE OUTPUT
539
ABLE OUTPUT
538
ABLE
OUTPUT 537
ABLE OUTPUT
536
ABLE
OUTPUT 535
ABLE
OUTPUT 534
ABLE OUTPUT
533
ABLE
OUTPUT 530
ABLE OUTPUT
529
ABLE
OUTPUT 528
ABLE
OUTPUT 527
ABLE
OUTPUT 526
ABLE ABLE
OUTPUT 525 OUTPUT 524
ABLE OUTPUT
523
540

MLINK ERR MLINK ERR MLINK ERR MLINK ERR MLINK ERR MLINK ERR MLINK ERR MLINK ERR
23 LED
COUNTER 7
LED COUNTER
6
LED
COUNTER 5
LED
COUNTER 4
LED
COUNTER 3
LED
COUNTER 2
LED
COUNTER 1
LED COUNTER
0
TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL
TOOL TOOL
BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE BREAKAGE
BREAKAGE BREAKAGE TRAVEL
24 DETECTION DETECTION
DETECTION
START MV
POSITION
DETECTION
POSITION
DETECTION
POSITION
DETECTION
POSITION
DETECTION
POSITION
DETECTION DETECTION
POSITION POSITION
DETECTION
POSITION
ALMCLR EMG
COMMAND 8 COMMAND 7 COMMAND 6 COMMAND 5 COMMAND 4 COMMAND 3 COMMAND 2 COMMAND 1
CLEAN
HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH
BK FILTER SUPPLY HP RELAY CLEAN TANK TANK HIGH HIGH EMERGENCY
LINE FILTER PRESSURE CLEAN TANK PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE SUPPLY
25 CLOGGED
CLOGGED
SW ITCH
PUMP OVER
LOAD
PUMP OVER
CONNECTION
CHECK
EMPTY
W ATER-LEVEL
HIGH
W ATER-
LEVEL
VALVE 3 VALVE 2 VALVE 1 PUMP ON
PRESSURE
PUMP ON 2
PRESSURE
PUMP ON
STOP
SIGNAL
LOAD OPEN OPEN OPEN
LOW

2011/05/23 6-6 eTCOM2IN6-2.doc

 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 6 Input output

【Input slave】
bit
Input F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
BOARD
SELECTION
1 SVIF_REV3 SVIF_REV2 SVIF_REV1 SVIF_REV0 SVIF_V3 SVIF_V2 SVIF_V1 SVIF_V0
(0:YASUKAW A
DIP SW 3 DIP SW 2 DIP SW 1 DIP SW 0

1:SANYO)

[C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER

[C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER
COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER
COUNTER Z[9] COUNTER Z[8] COUNTER Z[7] COUNTER Z[6] COUNTER Z[5] COUNTER Z[4] COUNTER Z[3] COUNTER Z[2] COUNTER Z[1] COUNTER Z[0]
2 Z[15] Z[14] Z[13] Z[12] Z[11] Z[10]
[C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE
[C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE
INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT
INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT

[C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER

[C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER [C1]ENCODER
COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER
COUNTER Z[9] COUNTER Z[8] COUNTER Z[7] COUNTER Z[6] COUNTER Z[5] COUNTER Z[4] COUNTER Z[3] COUNTER Z[2] COUNTER Z[1] COUNTER Z[0]
3 Z[15] Z[14] Z[13] Z[12] Z[11] Z[10]
[C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE
[C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE [C2]RESERVE
INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT
INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT

INTERRUP INTERRUP
CPU ERROR TION TION CPU ERROR
4 SERVO ALARM *ALM_N
LOCAL PROCESSING DETECTION
TOUCH
MAIN
ERROR ERROR

TOUCH (Z- TOUCH (Y- TOUCH (X-

AXIS AXIS AXIS
5 AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER
INPUT) INPUT) INPUT)

(Note) * indicates low active.

【Output slave】
bit
Output F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1 LED 0

INTERRUPTIO
CPU ERROR
2 N
PROCESSING
SLAVE
NMI GATE

[C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE

[C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE
[C1]RESERVE OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
OUTPUT [C2]LSI2 [C2]LSI2 [C2]LSI2 [C2]LSI1 [C2]LSI1
3 [C2]LSI2 MODE SYNCHRONO SELF
[C2]LSI2 SELF
ADDRESS
SELF
[C2]LSI2 SELF [C2]LSI2 SELF [C2]LSI2 SELF
ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS
[C2]LSI1
MODE
SYNCHRONO
[C2]LSI1 SELF [C2]LSI1 SELF [C2]LSI1 SELF [C2]LSI1 SELF
ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS
SELF
[C2]LSI1 SELF
ADDRESS
CHANGE US FRAME ADDRESS ADDRESS US FRAME ADDRESS
SETTING 4 SETTING 2 SETTING 1 SETTING 0 CHANGE FUNCTION SETTING 4 SETTING 3 SETTING 2 SETTING 0
SELECTION FUNCTION SETTING 3 SELECTION SETTING 1
[C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE
[C1]RESERVE [C1]RESERVE
[C1]RESERVE OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
OUTPUT OUTPUT
OUTPUT [C2]INTER [C2]INTER [C2]INTER [C2]INTER [C2]INTER [C2]INTER [C2]INTER
4 [C2]TRIGGER
[C2]INTER
RUPTION
RUPTION RUPTION RUPTION RUPTION RUPTION RUPTION RUPTION
[C2]INTER
RUPTION
GATE TIMER TIMER TIMER TIMER TIMER TIMER TIMER
START TIMER DATA[0]
DATA[7] DATA[6] DATA[5] DATA[4] DATA[3] DATA[2] DATA[1]

2011/05/23 6-7 eTCOM2IN6-2.doc

 Chapter 6 Input output TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

【Input local】
bit
Input F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 0 0 0 0 PW OFF LO_195_N OPUERS CPUERM DIP SW 3 DIP SW 2 DIP SW 1 DIP SW 0

COMMUNCA
5 TION STOP
KEY

(Note) * indicates low active.

【Output local】
bit
Output F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SHUT PCOFF LCD LCDPW

1 ORSV3L ORSV2L
DOW N
PCOK
OK
CPUERL
BRTSEL ON
LED 3 LED 2 LED 1 LED 0

INTERRUPTION INTERRUPT INTERRUPT INTERRUPT INTERRUPT

INTERRUPT
2 STATUS HARD
ALARM
STATUS STATUS MASK HARD MASK
MASK TIMER
DPRAM TIMER ALARM DPRAM

INTERVAL INTERVAL INTERVAL INTERVAL INTERVAL INTERVAL

3 TIMER 5 TIMER 4 TIMER 3 TIMER 2 TIMER 1 TIMER 0

PROTECT PROTECT PROTECT PROTECT

PROTECT PROTECT PROTECT PROTECT
4 AREA 0xE0000-
AREA AREA
AREA 0x80000 AREA 0x60000-
AREA AREA
AREA 0x00000-
0xC0000- 0xA0000- 0x40000- 0x20000-

2011/05/23 6-8 eTCOM2IN6-2.doc

TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 6 Input output

6.2.1 Other screens

In addition to the I/O signal status display described in section “6.2 Displaying I/O status” the
information of the following items can be displayed in [1.I/O ] on the <I/O > screen.

1. ATC
2. Slave status display 1
3. Slave status display 2
4. Version

1. ATC

6
S06006u1.bmp

2. Slave status display 1

S06007u1.bmp

2011/06/08 6-9 eTCOM2IN6-3.doc

 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 6 Input output R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

3. Slave status display 2

S06008u2.bmp

4. Version

S06009u1.bmp

(Note) Model name and version number for the soft may differ from the figure
above.

2011/06/08 6 - 10 eTCOM2IN6-3.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 6 Input output

6.3 Servo
The <2.Servo>screen, one of the I/O screens, displays the following.

TC-22B, 32BN

S06010u1.bmp

6
TC-31B, S2D, R2B, 20B, S2Dz, S2DNz

S06010u1-1.bmp

The screen changes in the following sequence by pressing the page keys or function keys.

Spindle X-axis Y-axis Z-axis

Magazine 8th-axis 7th-axis 6th-axis 5th-axis 4th-axis

2011/06/08 6 - 11 eTCOM2IN6-3.doc
 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 6 Input output R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

6.4 External I/O Signal

The <3.External I/O signal >screen, one of the I/O screens, displays the following.

S06011u1.bmp

The screen of input signal and output signal changes by pressing the page keys or function keys.

6 6.5 Soft Switch

The <4.Soft switch>screen, one of the I/O screens, displays the following.

S06013u1.bmp

2011/06/08 6 - 12 eTCOM2IN6-3.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 6 Input output

6.6 Machine Diagnosis

The <5.Machine diagnosis>screen, one of the I/O screens, displays the following.
If the machine doesn’t operate even when the [START] key is lit on, you can diagnose the cause.

S06019u1.bmp

6
6.7 PLC
The <6.PLC>screen, one of the I/O screens, displays the following.

S06020u1.bmp

2011/06/08 6 - 13 eTCOM2IN6-3.doc
 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 6 Input output R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

6.8 Running Counters

The <7.Running counters>screen, one of the I/O screens, displays the following.
Total number or amout such as tool change count and total travel amout of each axis after
shipment (or after tool change) are displayed.

S06021u2.bmp
6

2011/06/08 6 - 14 eTCOM2IN6-3.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

CHAPTER 7

MACHINE PARAMETER

7.1 Machine Parameter

7.2 Default Value

2011/05/23 7-1 eTCOM2IN7.doc

 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

7.1 Machine Parameter

The customer is requested not to modify the machine parameter.
If this parameter must be modified , contact in advance our after-service
department.

Machine parameters are write-protected, thus the following operations must be performed to
enable editing. Even if write-protection is released once, it is restored when the machine is reset or
the power is turned off and then on again.
1. Set the [DATA PROTECTION] select switch on the operation panel to OFF.
2. Select the <Input/output> screen.
3. Select [1. Input/output] and the <Version> screen appears.
4. Set [Parameter change] to [1. Yes].

S06009u1.bmp

2011/05/23 7-2 eTCOM2IN7.doc

TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

Machine parameter1 (System 1)

No. Item Setting range Description
5001 Display language 0~4 [0:Japanese 1:English 2:German
3:French 4:Chinese]
Set display language.
(Note) Chinese font style
1）简体字库由北京字研技术开发中心
制作
2）本简体 Bitmap 字库由北京卓绝创新信
息技术有限公司制作
本简体 TrueType 字库由北京字研技术开
发中心制作
5002 X-axis backlash compensation 0~99999 pulse Regularly measures the backlash
5003 Y-axis backlash compensation compensation according to the machine
5004 Z-axis backlash compensation operating conditions, and compensates the
appropriate number of pulses for each axis as
necessary.
5005 Spindle grid shift -999999~999999 Set the shifted value of motor zero point for
pulse the spindle. The zero point signal is
detected during machine zero return, and the
machine moves further in the positive or
negative direction for the shifted value of the
grid. This position is considered the zero
point.
5006 X-axis (-) stroke 1 -9999.999~9999.999 Set the movement range of each axis in
5007 Y-axis (-) stroke 1 mm machine coordinates.
5008 Z-axis (-) stroke 1 The “ Distance to Z-axis zero” is on the Z axis
5009 X-axis (+) stroke 1 positive stroke end.
5010 Y-axis (+) stroke 1 7
5011 X-axis (-) stroke 2 -9999.999~9999.999 Set the prohibited movement range for each
5012 Y-axis (-) stroke 2 mm axis in machine coordinates.
5013 Z-axis (-) stroke 2
5014 X-axis (+) stroke 2
5015 Y-axis (+) stroke 2
5016 Z-axis (+) stroke 2
5017 Distance to Z-axis zero -9999.999~9999.999 Set the dimension between the table top
mm surface when the Z axis is home and the
spindle tip gauge line.
The top surface dimensions do not include
those of the sub table (option).
Gauge line

Distance to Z-axis
zero

Table top surface

X, Y, and Z axes 1 pulse = 0.15 μm (TC-22B, 32BN),

0.12μm (TC- 31B, S2D, S2Dz, S2DNz),
0.09 μm (TC-R2B), 0.08μm (TC-20B)
Spindle 1 pulse = 360°/4096 ≒ 0.088°

2011/05/23 7-3 eTCOM2IN7.doc

 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

Machine parameter1 (System 1)

No. Item Setting range Description
5018 Distance to ATC zero 0~9999.999 mm Set the Z-axis position for tool changing.
Set the distance from [Distance to Z-axis
zero].
5019 X-axis ATC position -9999.999~9999.99 Set the X,Y axis positions where the tool can
5020 Y-axis ATC position 9 mm be changed.
5021 Coolant during tool change 0~1 [0:Stop 1:Continue]
Set whether or not to automatically stop
coolant during tool change.
5022 X-axis ball screw attachment -9999.999~9999.99 Set the each axis ball screw mounting
position 9 mm position in machine coordinates.
5023 Y-axis ball screw attachment
position
5024 Z-axis ball screw attachment
position
5025 Automatic oiling function 0~2 0:Not equipped
1:Type1
Oiling is constantly performed at intervals.
2:Type2
Oiling suspension time is switched depends
on whether the [START] lamp is ON or
OFF.
5026 Automatic oiling pause 1 1~999 min When [Automatic oiling function] is set to
[1:Type1], oiling interval can be set.
When [2.Type2] is set, oiling interval while
the [START] lamp is lit can be set.
5027 Automatic oiling time 1~99 sec Set the oiling time.
7 5028 Automatic oiling monitoring 1~99 sec Set the waiting time after the oiling pump is
time activated until the pressure sensor turns on.
5029 Return distance with servo 0.001~9.999 mm Set the maximum distance the XYZ axes
controller ON move when they are automatically returned
to their original positions when the door is
closed while the door interlock is enabled.
If the current position of the XYZ axes is
larger than this value, the “Return distance
too long” error occurs.
5030 Emergency stop switch change 0~1 [0:Emergency stop 1:Operation
preparation]
Set whether to register the alarm in the alarm
log when the emergency stop signal is input.
When [0: Emergency stop] is set:
The “Emergency button activated” error
occurs and this error is registered in the
alarm log.
When [1: Operation preparation] is set:
The “[MASTER] is off.” error occurs and
this error is not registered in the alarm log.
5031 In-position check 0~1 [0:No 1:Yes]
Set whether or not to execute in-position
check when the commanded operation is
completed.
5032 Skip feed acc./dec. 0~1 [0:No 1:Yes]
Set whether or not to accelerate or decelerate
when performing skip feed.

2011/05/23 7-4 eTCOM2IN7.doc

TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

No. Item Setting range Description

5033 Spindle in-position check 0~9999 msec Set the allowable time of in-position check
timeout period for each axis. When [0] is set, in-position
5034 X-axis in-position check timeout check is not performed.
period
5035 Y-axis in-position check timeout
period
5036 Z-axis in-position check timeout
period
5037 Spindle command timeout 0~99999 msec Set the time for the NC to determine the
period spindle has reached the specified speed.
When [0] is set, this is not checked.
5038 Spindle in-position width 1 0~99999 pulse Set the allowable range of the arrival point
5039 Spindle in-position width 2 for command position of each axis.
5040 X-axis in-position width “Spindle in-position width 1” is for
5041 Y-axis in-position width orientation.
5042 Z-axis in-position width “Spindle in-position width 2” is for tapping.
5043 X-axis positioning end check 0~9.999 mm Set the distance, when positioning is
distance performed continuously, to the position the
5044 Y-axis positioning end check next operation commences by assuming that
distance the axis has reached the target position.
5045 Z-axis positioning end check Increasing the value can shorten non-cutting
distance time. However, increasing it excessively
may cause the axis to interfere with the
workpiece. Take utmost care when
changing the value.

Set this
workpiece
distance.

T32BIN7.01.ai

*Dashed line indicates actual path.

X, Y, and Z axes 1 pulse = 0.15 μm (TC-22B, 32BN),

0.12 μm (TC-31B, S2D, S2Dz, S2DNz),
0.09 μm (TC-R2B),
0.08μm (TC-20B)
Spindle 1 pulse = 360°/4096≒0.088°

2011/05/23 7-5 eTCOM2IN7.doc

 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

Machine parameter 1 (System 1)

No. Item Setting range Description
5046 X-axis rapid feed time const. 1A 0~9999 msec Set the rapid feed acceleration and
5047 X-axis rapid feed time const. 2A deceleration time constant for each axis.
5048 X-axis rapid feed time const. 3A The numerical character at the end of
5049 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 1A [∗-axis rapid feed time const. 1A]
5050 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 2A indicates the type of function and the
5051 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 3A alphabetical character indicates the type
5052 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 1A of change.
5053 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 2A
5054 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 3A <Numerical character>
5055 X-axis rapid feed time const. 1B [1] Time taken until the speed reaches
5056 X-axis rapid feed time const. 2B the specified value.
5057 X-axis rapid feed time const. 3B [2] [3] Time for optimal acceleration and
5058 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 1B deceleration
5059 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 2B
5060 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 3B <Alphabetical character>
5061 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 1B [A] Valid when the formula below is
5062 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 2B satisfied.
5063 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 3B [Travel distance] ≤ [Time const.
5064 X-axis rapid feed time const. 1C change distance A].
5065 X-axis rapid feed time const. 2C [B] Valid when the formula below is
5066 X-axis rapid feed time const. 3C satisfied.
5067 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 1C [Time const. change distance A] <
5068 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 2C [Travel distance] ≤ [Time const.
5069 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 3C change distance B]
5070 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 1C [C] Valid when the formula below is
5071 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 2C satisfied, or in JOG mode.
7 5072 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 3C [Time const. change distance B] <
[Travel distance]
5073 X-axis min. rapid feed time const. 1~100 % Set the minimum rapid feed time
ratio constant for each axis, as a percentage
5074 Y-axis min. rapid feed time const. when calculating the time constant based
ratio on the table loading weight.
5075 X-axis time const. change 0~9999.999 mm Set the distance the rapid feed time
distance A constant changes for each axis.
5076 X-axis time const. change
distance B
5077 Y-axis time const. change
distance A
5078 Y-axis time const. change
distance B
5079 Z-axis time const. change distance
A
5080 Z-axis time const. change distance
B

X , Y and Z axes 1pulse = 0.15 μm (TC-22B, 32BN),

0.12 μm (TC-31B, S2D, S2Dz, S2DNz),
0.09 μm (TC-R2B),
0.08μm (TC-20B)
Spindle 1pulse= 360°/4096≒0.088°

2011/05/23 7-6 eTCOM2IN7.doc

TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

Machine parameter 1 (System 1)

No. Item Setting range Description
5081 Cutting feed time const. 1 0~9999 msec Set the cutting feed acceleration and
5082 Cutting feed time const. 2 deceleration time constant.
5083 Cutting feed time const. 3 [Cutting feed time const. 1] sets the time
taken until the speed reaches the specified
value.
[Cutting feed time const. 2] and [Cutting
feed time const. 3] set time for the optimal
acceleration and deceleration.
5084 Skip feed time const. 1 0~9999 msec Set the skip feed acceleration and
5085 Skip feed time const. 2 deceleration time constant.
5086 Skip feed time const. 3 [Skip feed time const. 1] sets the time
taken until the speed reaches the specified
value.
[Skip feed time const. 2] and [Skip feed
time const.3] set time for the optimal
acceleration and deceleration.
5087 Tapping time const.1 0~9999 msec Set the tapping acceleration and
5088 Tapping time const. 2 deceleration time constant.
5089 Tapping time const. 3 [Tapping time const. 1] sets the time taken
until the speed reaches the specified value.
[Tapping time const. 2] and [Tapping time
const.3] set time for the optimal
acceleration and deceleration.
5090 X-axis lower limit time const. 0~9999 msec Set the minimum value of the each axis
5091 Y-axis lower limit time const. acceleration and deceleration time
5092 Z-axis lower limit time const. constant.
5093 Cutting feed lower limit time 0~9999 Set the minimum value of the each axis 7
constant acceleration and deceleration time
constant when cutting feed.
5094 Max. spindle speed 1~999999 min-1 Set the maximum spindle speed according
to the specifications.
5095 No. of spindle control change 0~999999 min-1 Set the number of rotations to change the
rotations control mode when the status shifts from
spindle rotation to spindle orientation.
5096 Max. tapping speed 1~999999 min-1 Set the maximum tapping speed.
5097 X-axis rapid feedrate 1~999999 mm/ Set the maximum travel speed for each
5098 Y-axis rapid feedrate min-1 axis.
5099 Z-axis rapid feedrate
5100 Z-axis rapid feedrate (ATC) 1~999999 mm/ Set the maximum travel speed for Z axis
min-1 during ATC.

5101 Rapid feedrate (door open) 1~999999 mm/ Set the maximum travel speed for the X,
min-1 Y, and Z axes when the door is open.
5102 X-axis max. cutting feedrate 1~999999 mm/ Set the maximum cutting feed speed for
5103 Y-axis max. cutting feedrate min-1 each axis.
5104 Z-axis max. cutting feedrate
5105 Manual rapid feedrate 1~999999 mm/ Set the maximum speed when each axis
min-1 moves in manual mode.

X , Y and Z axes 1pulse = 0.15 μm (TC-22B, 32BN),

0.12 μm (TC-31B, S2D, S2Dz, S2DNz),
0.09 μm (TC-R2B) ,
0.08μm (TC-20B)
Spindle 1pulse= 360°/4096≒0.088°

2011/05/23 7-7 eTCOM2IN7.doc

 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

Machine parameter 1 (System 1)

No. Item Setting range Description
5106 X-axis ball screw lead(mm) 1~99 mm Set the ball screw lead of each axis.
5107 Y-axis ball screw lead(mm)
5108 Z-axis ball screw lead(mm)
5109 Tapping const. 1 -9999.999~9999.999 Set the tapping constant.
5110 Tapping const. 2
5111 Tapping const. 3
5112 Tapping const. 4
5113 Tapping const. 5
5114 Tapping const. 6
5115 Tapping const. 7
5116 Tapping const. 8
5117 Tapping const. 9
5118 Tapping const. 10
5119 X-axis position loop gain 2 start 0~99999 pulse Set the number of pulse to start changing
pulse position loop gain of each axis.
5120 Y-axis position loop gain 2 start
pulse
5121 Z-axis position loop gain 2 start
pulse
5122 X-axis position loop gain 2 end 0~99999 pulse Set the number of pulse to end changing
pulse position loop gain of each axis.
5123 Y-axis position loop gain 2 end
pulse
5124 Z-axis position loop gain 2 end
pulse
5125 X-axis position loop gain 2 time 0~9999 msec Set the time to end changing position
7 5126 Y-axis position loop gain 2 time loop gain of each axis.
5127 Z-axis position loop gain 2 time
5128 X-axis speed gain change pulse 0~99999 pulse Set the number of pulse to start changing
5129 Y-axis speed gain change pulse speed loop proportional gain of each
5130 Z-axis speed gain change pulse axis.
5131 X-axis speed gain change time 0~9999 msec Set the time to end changing speed loop
5132 Y-axis speed gain change time proportional gain of each axis.
5133 Z-axis speed gain change time
5134 Manual tool change position -50~50 Set the position of the magazine pot
offset where the tool is removed and attached.
Set the number of pots from the spindle
in the direction the pot number increases.
5135 Tool storage capacity 1~50 Set the maximum number of tools that
the magazine can store.
5136 Max. load weight 0~999 kg Set the machine’s unique maximum
loading weight. This is used when
calculating the time constant based on the
table loading weight.
5137 Inertia without workpiece 0~0.099999 kg ㎡ Set the moment of inertia on the motor
side when the table loading weight is 0
kg.
5138 Estimated axis 0~1 [0: X 1: Y]
Set the axis to be used when estimating
the time constant based on the table
loading weight.

X , Y and Z axes 1pulse = 0.15 μm (TC-22B, 32BN),

0.12 μm (TC-31B, S2D, S2Dz, S2DNz),
0.09 μm (TC-R2B),
0.08μm (TC-20B)
Spindle 1pulse= 360°/4096≒0.088°

2011/05/23 7-8 eTCOM2IN7.doc

TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

Machine parameter 1 (System 1)

No. Item Setting range Description
5139 Rated torque 0~99.99 Nm Set the rated torque to be used when
estimating the time constant based on the
table loading weight.
5140 Acceleration to start calculation 0~9.99 G Set the initial acceleration when
estimating the time constant based on the
table loading weight.
5141 Tolerance for mass 0~999 kg Set the tolerance for the difference
between [Table load weight] (user
parameter) and estimate mass.
When [0] is set, the difference is not
checked.
5142 No. of estimated data 0~100% Set the volume of data as a percentage
when estimating the time constant based
on the table loading weight.
The time constant is not estimated unless
the effective data volume exceeds the
setting here.
When [0] is set, the time constant is
estimated regardless of the effective data
volume.
5143 X-axis abso.encoder rotation dir. 0~1 [0: Normal by + command 1: Normal
5144 Y-axis abso.encoder rotation dir. by - command]
5145 Z-axis abso.encoder rotation dir. Set the direction of absolute encoder
rotation of each axis.
5146 CPU temperature compensation -34~34 deg Set the compensation value of
measurement temperature of main CPU.
5147 Center-through-coolant option 0~2 [0:None 1:Type 1 2:Type 2] 7
Set whether the optional center-through
coolant is equipped or not.
5148 Back washing time 1 0.0~9.9 sec Set the filter cleaning time by air for back
washing cycle.
5149 Back washing time 2 0.0~9.9 sec Set the filter cleaning time by coolant for
back washing cycle.
5150 Tool breakage detection position 0.0~99.9 mm Set the tolerance for the position of the tool
tolerance breakage detection unit in the magazine.
When the difference between the specified
position and the encoder position exceeds
the setting here, a "Tool breakage detection
pos. error" occurs.
When [0] is set, the position is not
checked.
5151 Tool breakage detection motor pitch 0.0~99.999 mm Set the travel amount per rotation of the
motor of tool breakage detection unit in the
magazine.
5152 Tool breakage detection motor 0.0~9999 pulse Set the number of pulses per rotation of the
pulses/rotation motor of tool breakage detection unit in the
magazine. Set the value before multiplying
by 4.
5153 Tool breakage detection motor 0.0~999 mm Set the stroke of tool breakage detection
stroke unit in the magazine.
5154 Break detect ref. pos. 0.000~999.999 Set the distance from the pot edge to the
zero point of the tool breakage detection
unit inside the magazine.
5155 Thermal error 1 (control panel) 0~99 Set the control panel temperature which
temperature causes “Thermal error 1 (control panel)”.
5156 Thermal error 2 (control panel) 0~99 Set the control panel temperature which
temperature causes “Thermal error 2 (control panel)”.

2011/05/23 7-9 eTCOM2IN7.doc

 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

No. Item Setting range Description

5157 Tool wash filter check time 0~0.99 msec Set the chattering time of the tool wash
filter. When 0 is set, the check becomes
invalid.
5158 PLC data default 40 0000000000000000 PLC data registration default to set with
5159 PLC data default 41 ~ binary digits.
1111111111111111
5160 PLC data default 42 0~65535 PLC data registration default to set with
5161 PLC data default 43 decimal digits.
5162 PLC data default 44
5163 PLC data default 45 (Note)
5164 PLC data default 46 When a setting value is more than 32768, it
5165 PLC data default 47 is calculated as [Setting value – 65536],
5166 PLC data default 48 and the calculated value is displayed on the
5167 PLC data default 49 PLC data registration screen.
5168 PLC data default 50 Also, the calculated value is used as the
5169 PLC data default 51 initial value for PLC.
5170 PLC data default 52 (Example)
5171 PLC data default 53 When 65535 is set, -1 is displayed on the
5172 PLC data default 54 PLC data registration screen.
5173 PLC data default 55
5174 PLC data default 56
5175 PLC data default 57
5176 PLC data default 58
5177 PLC data default 59
5178 PLC data default 60
5179 PLC data default 61
5180 PLC data default 62
7 5181 PLC data default 63
5182 External input 53PLC input 0~10 [ 0: No 1: X00~X07
5183 External input 203PLC input 2:X08~X0F 3: X10~X17
5184 External input 213PLC input 4:X18~X1F 5: X20~X27
5185 External input 223PLC input 6:X28~X2F 7: X30~X37
5186 External input 233PLC input 8:X38~X3F 9: X40~X47
5187 External input 403PLC input 10 :X48~X4F
5188 External input 413PLC input Allocate the PLC input signal to the
5189 External input 423PLC input external input port.
5190 External input 433PLC input Example:
When set 1:X00~X07 to the external input
53PLC input, allocate the1:X00~X07 to
input 53~60 port.
5191 External output 103PLC output 0~10 [ 0: No 1: Y00~Y07
5192 External output 303PLC output 2:Y08~Y0F 3: Y10~Y17
5193 External output 313PLC output 4:Y18~Y1F 5: Y20~Y27
5194 External output 323PLC output 6:Y28~Y2F 7: Y30~Y37
5195 External output 333PLC output 8:Y38~Y3F 9: Y40~Y47
5196 External output 503PLC output 10 :Y48~Y4F
5197 External output 513PLC output Allocate the PLC output signal to the
5198 External output 523PLC output external output port.
5199 External output 533PLC output Example:
When set 1:X00~X07 to the external
output 103PLC output, allocate the
1:X00~X07 to input 103~110 port.
5200 Spindle tool unclamp function 0~1 [0: Invalid 1: Valid]
Set whether tool unclamp function for
spindle is valid or invalid.
5201 ATC zero tolerance 0~999.999 mm Set the magazine rotatable range of Z-axis
position. This parameter is invalid for 32B,
22B and 31B, 20B.

2011/05/23 7 - 10 eTCOM2IN7.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

No. Item Setting range Description

5202 Door close check time 1~999×10 msec Set the waiting time for checking if door
limit switch is ON.
5203 Automatic oiling pause 2 1~999 min-1 When [Automatic oiling function] is set to
[2:Type2], oiling interval while the
[START] lamp is not lit can be set.
5204 Spindle orientation completion 0~9999 msec Set the check time for completion of
check spindle orientation.
Spindle orientation shall be completed
when the spindle position is within the set
time and range of positioning end.
5205 Spindle orientation tolerance 0~99999 pulse Set the tolerance of position deviation after
the completion of the spindle orientation.
If the position deviation value become over
than the setting range, “Spindle position
shifted” error occurs.
When 0 is set, the check becomes invalid.
5206 Automatic door lock 0~1 Sets whether to lock the automatic door
when the door lock is enabled.
The door is locked when [0: Yes] is set.
The door is not locked when [1: No] is set.
Note: This parameter is effective
only for the front automatic door.
The side door is locked regardless
of the parameter setting.
5207 Center through coolant control 0~1 Sets center through coolant control system.
Set [0:Type1] to “External high pressure
coolant control”
Set [1:Type2] to “Internal high pressure 7
coolant control”.
5208 Change screw type 0~2 Change the screw type on the conversation.
Set [0:Language set] to “screw type to be
for Display language” on machine
parameter 1.
Set [1:For Japan] to “screw type to be for
Japan”.
Set [2:For other than Japan] to “screw type
to be except for Japan”.
5209 Pallet turn restricted distance (Y 0 ~ 9999.999 mm Set the Y-axis pallet turn restricted
axis) distance as a distance from [Y-axis (-)
stroke 1].
5210 Back washing time 3 0 ~ 9.9 sec Set the air removal and coolant supply time
for back washing cycle.
5211 ATC arm turn restricted distance (X 0 ~ 9999.999 mm Set the ATC arm turn restricted range
axis) when in ATC recovery mode as a distance
from [X-axis ATC position].
The arm cannot be turned by pressing the
[RELSE] and [T] keys while the machine
coordinate position of the X-axis is within
the restricted range.
The arm can be turned, however, when the
machine coordinate positions of the
XYZ-axes are at the ATC position.
5212 Automatic greasing function 0~1 [0:Not equipped 1:Equipped]
Constantly greases at regular intervals.
5213 Automatic greasing time 1~999 sec Sets the greasing time.
5214 Automatic greasing monitoring 1~999 sec Sets the waiting time after the grease pump
time is turned on until greasing starts.
5215 Automatic greasing pause 1~9999 min-1 Sets the greasing interval.
5216 Automatic door type 0~1 [0: Air cylinder 1: Electric cylinder]
Set the type of the automatic door.

2011/05/23 7 - 11 eTCOM2IN7.doc
 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

No. Item Setting range Description

5217 Automatic door opening operation 0 ~ 999×10 msec Set the time until automatic door starts
check time opening when [Electric cylinder] is
selected for [Automatic door type].
5218 Air blast/tool wash control method 0: Type 1 Set the timing for the air blast (tool
1: Type 2 washing) to turn on when changing tools.
2: Type 3 0: Type 1
3: Type 4 Turns on when the Z-axis has risen to the
position set for [Distance to Z-axis zero].
1: Type 2
Turns on when the Z-axis begins lowering
from the ATC zero point.
2: Type 3
Turns on when the Z-axis has risen to the
ATC zero point.
3: Type 4
Turns on during tool change only. It turns
on when the Z-axis lowers from the ATC
zero point or after the Z-axis has risen to
the ATC zero point, depending on the
number of magazine rotation pitches in one
tool change operation.
[Notes]
1 This parameter is available only
for turret ATC models.
2 Do not set ‘1’ for models with
optional tool washing.
5219 Z-axis lowering speed when c 1 ~ 999999 mm/min Set the speed that the Z-axis lowers after
hecking tool wash filter the magazine has turned to change tools so
that checking for clogging of the tool wash
7 filter can be completed during this period.
5220 Tool wash start position change 0～50 In the memory run or MDI run, the tool
offset (Type 4) wash ON timing is changed according to
the number of magazine rotation pitches in
one tool change operation.
If the number of magazine rotation pitches
is larger than the set value, the tool wash
turns on after the Z-axis has risen to the
ATC zero point.
If the number of magazine rotation pitches
is less than the set value, the tool wash
turns on after the Z-axis has risen to the
Z-axis zero point.
5221 Tool wash maximum discharge time 0.1～99.9 sec. Set the maximum discharge time for tool
(Type 4) wash.
5222 Tool wash water supply time 0.1～99.9 sec. Set the water supply time for tool wash.
(Type 4)
5223 Tool wash coolant level lower 0.1～99.9 sec. Set the coolant level lower limit
limit monitoring time (Type 4) monitoring time for tool wash.
5224 Tool wash coolant level sensor 0.1～99.9 sec. Set the coolant level sensor water supply
water supply check time (Type 4) check time for tool wash.
5225 Tool wash coolant level sensor 0.1～99.9 sec. Set the coolant level sensor discharge
discharge check time (Type 4) check time for tool wash.
5226 Move Y-axis to safe position when 0～1 「0: No 1: Yes」
turning pallet Set whether the Y axis retracts or not when
the pallet rotates.
5227 CTS line filter alarm check time 0.0～9.9 sec Set the time to check the line filter for
clogging. If “0.0” is set, the alarm will
occur without check time when the line
filter differential pressure switch turns on.

2011/05/23 7 - 12 eTCOM2IN7.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

No. Item Setting range Description

5228 Tapping acceleration 0: Type 1 Select the type of tap acceleration /
/ deceleration 1: Type 2 deceleration control.
method For the software XJ∗∗, the acceleration
constant control is performed regardless of
this parameter setting.
For the software XE∗∗,
0: Type 1
The time-constant constant control is
performed
1: Type 2
The acceleration constant control is
performed
※The software XJ or XE can be confirmed on
the Version screen which is displayed by
pressing the [I/O] key.
5229 X-axis ball screw 0.000～99.999mm Set the ball screw diameter of each axis.
diameter
5230 Y-axis ball screw
diameter
5231 Z-axis ball screw
diameter
5232 X-axis support －9999.999～ Set the support bearing position of each axis.
bearing position 9999.999mm
5233 Y-axis support
bearing position
5234 Z-axis support
bearing position
5235 X-axis motor 0: Fixed side Set the motor mounting side of each axis.
attachment side 1: Support side 7
5236 Y-axis motor
attachment side
5237 Z-axis motor
attachment side
5238 Rounding of 0～1 「0: Type 1, 1 : Type 2」
fractions between Select a rounding processing type of fractions
blocks between blocks in the operation of the cutting
mode.
0: Type 1
Rounding processing is not performed.
1: Type 2
Rounding processing is performed.

X, Y and Z axes 1pulse = 0.15 μm (TC-22B, 32BN),

0.12μm (TC-31B, S2D, S2Dz, S2DNz),
0.09 μm(TC-R2B),
0.08μm (TC-20B)
Spindle 1pulse= 360°/4096≈0.088°

2011/05/23 7 - 13 eTCOM2IN7.doc
 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

Machine parameter 2 (System 2)

No. Item Setting range Description
5501 Optional 4th-axis 0~1 [0:Not equipped 1:Equipped]
5502 Optional 5th-axis Set whether or not to use optional axes.
5503 Optional 6th-axis When an optional axis is not used even if
5504 Optional 7th-axis attached, set [0: NO]. The machines with
5505 Optional 8th-axis QT use 4th axis as the QT (quick table).
5506 5th-axis position 0~2 [0:No pallet 1:Table 1 2:Table 2]
5507 6th-axis position Set the installation position of each axis.
5508 7th-axis position When [0: No pallet] is set, the machine
5509 8th-axis position operates according to the machining
program. [1: Table 1] and [2. Table 2]
are valid for machines equipped with the
QT. The machining program is created
so that the inner pallet axis is activated.
Thus, set the parameter as below.
-Machines without QT:[0: No pallet]
-Machines with QT
[1: Table 1] or [2: Table 2]
5510 4th-axis address 0~2 [0:A 1:B 2:C]
5511 5th-axis address Set the address of each axis. The
5512 6th-axis address machines with QT use [2: C] for the 4th
5513 7th-axis address axis address, thus [2:C] cannot be used for
5514 8th-axis address the 5th, 6th, 7th and 8th axes.
5515 4th-axis zero return order 0~5 [0:2nd 1:3rd 2:4th 3:5th 4:6th
5516 5th-axis zero return order 5:7th]
5517 6th-axis zero return order Set the zero return sequence of each axis.
5518 7th-axis zero return order The Z axis returns to the zero point first, X
7 5519 8th-axis zero return order and Y axes next, and then other axes as
preset.
5520 4th-axis backlash compensation 0~99999 pulse Regularly measures the backlash
5521 5th-axis backlash compensation compensation according to the machine
5522 6th-axis backlash compensation operating conditions, and compensates the
5523 7th-axis backlash compensation appropriate number of pulses for each axis
5524 8th-axis backlash compensation as necessary.
5525 4th-axis zero offset 0~999999 pulse Set the offset value to eliminate delay in
5526 5th-axis zero offset motor origin signal detection due to shift of
5527 6th-axis zero offset the position when the dog has contacted
5528 7th-axis zero offset the limit switch during zero return.
5529 8th-axis zero offset
5530 4th-axis grid shift -999999~999999 Set the shifted value of motor zero point
5531 5th-axis grid shift pulse for each axis. The zero point signal is
5532 6th-axis grid shift detected during machine zero return, and
5533 7th-axis grid shift the machine moves further in the positive
5534 8th-axis grid shift or negative direction for the shifted value
of the grid. This position is considered
the zero point.

2011/05/23 7 - 14 eTCOM2IN7.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

No. Item Setting range Description

5535 Pallet 1 indexing angle -9999.999~9999.999 4th-axis/pallet contact prevention control
deg Set the machine coordinates of 4th-axis
when indexing pallet 1to outside.
A "4th-axis position shifted" error occurs
when the position of the 4th-axis is not
within the value set here +/- [4th-axis
position check pulse].
5536 Pallet 2 indexing angle -9999.999~9999.999 4th-axis/pallet contact prevention control
deg Set the machine coordinates of 4th-axis
when indexing pallet 2 to outside.
A "4th-axis position shifted" error occurs
when the position of the 4th-axis is not
within the value set here +/- [4th-axis
position check pulse].
5537 4th-axis dog zero return distance 0~9999.999 deg Set the distance when the zero limit switch
5538 5th-axis dog zero return distance is turned on when each axis has rotated in
5539 6th-axis dog zero return distance the direction opposite the machine zero
5540 7th-axis dog zero return distance point.
5541 8th-axis dog zero return distance

Amount of return
Zero dog

Direction
opposite the
zero point.

T32BIN7.02.ai

5542 Return angle with servo controller 0.001~9.999 deg Set the maximum angle each axis of the
ON inner pallet moves when it is
automatically returned to its original
position when the door is closed while the
door interlock is enabled. If the current
angle of the additional axis is larger than
this value, the “Return distance too long”
error occurs.
5543 4th-axis overrun angle 0.0~9.999 deg 4th-axis/pallet contact prevention control
Set the 4th-axis overrun angle to prevent
the 4th-axis contacting the pallet.
The value specified during rotation will be
180 degrees plus the setting here.
5544 4th-axis low speed travel angle 0.0~9.999 deg 4th-axis/pallet contact prevention control
Set the 4th-axis low-speed travel angle to
prevent the 4th-axis contacting the pallet.
Exclude the value set for [4th-axis overrun
angle] when setting this value.

2011/05/23 7 - 15 eTCOM2IN7.doc
 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

No. Item Setting range Description

5545 4th-axis in-position check timeout 0~9999 msec Set the allowable time of in-position
period check for each axis. When [0] is set,
5546 5th-axis in-position check timeout in-position check is not performed.
period
5547 6th-axis in-position check timeout
period
5548 7th-axis in-position check timeout
period
5549 8th-axis in-position check timeout
period
5550 4th-axis in-position width 0~99999 pulse Set the allowable range of the arrival
5551 5th-axis in-position width point for each axis command position.
5552 6th-axis in-position width
5553 7th-axis in-position width
5554 8th-axis in-position width
5555 4th-axis positioning end check angle 0~9.999 deg Set the degree, when positioning is
5556 5th-axis positioning end check angle performed continuously, to the position
5557 6th-axis positioning end check angle the next operation commences by
5558 7th-axis positioning end check angle assuming that the axis has reached the
5559 8th-axis positioning end check angle target position.
However, increasing it excessively may
cause the axis to interfere with the
workpiece. Take utmost care when
changing the value.

2011/05/23 7 - 16 eTCOM2IN7.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

No. Item Setting range Description

5560 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 1A 0~9999 msec Set the rapid feed acceleration and
5561 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 2A deceleration time constant for each axis.
5562 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 3A The numerical character at the end of
5563 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 1A [∗-axis rapid feed time const. 1A]
5564 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 2A indicates the type of function and the
5565 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 3A alphabetical character indicates the type of
5566 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 1A change.
5567 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 2A
5568 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 3A <Numerical character>
5569 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 1A [1] Time taken until the speed reaches
5570 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 2A the specified value.
5571 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 3A [2] [3] Time for optimal acceleration and
5572 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 1A deceleration
5573 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 2A
5574 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 3A <Alphabetical character>
5575 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 1B [A] Valid when the formula below is
5576 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 2B satisfied.
5577 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 3B [Travel distance] ≤ [Time const.
5578 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 1B change distance A].
5579 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 2B [B] Valid when the formula below is
5580 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 3B satisfied.
5581 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 1B [Time const. change distance A] <
5582 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 2B [Travel distance] ≤ [Time const.
5583 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 3B change distance B]
5584 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 1B [C] Valid when the formula below is
5585 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 2B satisfied, or in JOG mode.
5586 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 3B [Time const. change distance B] < 7
5587 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 1B [Travel distance]
5588 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 2B
5589 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 3B
5590 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 1C
5591 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 2C
5592 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 3C
5593 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 1C
5594 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 2C
5595 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 3C
5596 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 1C
5597 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 2C
5598 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 3C
5599 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 1C
5600 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 2C
5601 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 3C
5602 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 1C
5603 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 2C
5604 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 3C
5605 4th -axis min. rapid feed time const. 1~100 % Set the minimum rapid feed time constant
ratio for 4th axis, as a percentage when
calculating the time constant based on the
table loading weight.

2011/05/23 7 - 17 eTCOM2IN7.doc
 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

No. Item Setting range Description

5606 4th-axis time const. change distance A 0~9999.999 deg Set the distance to change the raped feed
5607 4th-axis time const. change distance B const. for each axis.
5608 5th-axis time const. change distance A
5609 5th-axis time const. change distance B
5610 6th-axis time const. change distance A
5611 6th-axis time const. change distance B
5612 7th-axis time const. change distance A
5613 7th-axis time const. change distance B
5614 8th-axis time const. change distance A
5615 8th-axis time const. change distance B
5616 4th-axis lower limit time const. 0~9999 msec Set the minimum value of the each axis
5617 5th-axis lower limit time const. acceleration and deceleration time
5618 6th-axis lower limit time const. constant.
5619 7th-axis lower limit time const.
5620 8th-axis lower limit time const.
5621 4th-axis low speed time const. 1 0~9999 msec 4th-axis/ pallet contact prevention
5622 4th-axis low speed time const. 2 control
5623 4th-axis low speed time const. 3 Set the time constant to prevent
4th-axis/pallet contact during low
feedrate.
“4th-axis low speed time const. 1” is the
time until the feedrate becomes the
command speed.
“4th-axis low speed time const. 2” and
“4th-axis low speed time const. 3” is the
time when acceleration and deceleration
7 is optimal.
5624 4th-axis rapid feedrate 0.1~9999.9 min-1 Set the maximum travel speed for each
5625 5th-axis rapid feedrate axis.
5626 6th-axis rapid feedrate
5627 7th-axis rapid feedrate
5628 8th-axis rapid feedrate
5629 4th-axis rapid feedrate(door open) 0.1~9999.9 min-1 Set the maximum travel speed for each
5630 5th-axis rapid feedrate(door open) axis when the door is open.
5631 6th-axis rapid feedrate(door open)
5632 7th-axis rapid feedrate(door open)
5633 8th-axis rapid feedrate(door open)
5634 4th-axis max. cutting rotation speed 0.1~9999.9 min-1 Set the maximum cutting rotation speed
5635 5th-axis max. cutting rotation speed for each axis.
5636 6th-axis max. cutting rotation speed
5637 7th-axis max. cutting rotation speed
5638 8th-axis max. cutting rotation speed
5639 4th-axis high rotation speed during dog 0.1~9999.9 min-1 Set the high rotation speed of dog zero
zero return return for each axis.
5640 5th-axis high rotation speed during dog High speed is maintained until the dog
zero return contacts the zero limit switch.
5641 6th-axis high rotation speed during dog
zero return
5642 7th-axis high rotation speed during dog
zero return
5643 8th-axis high rotation speed during dog
zero return

2011/05/23 7 - 18 eTCOM2IN7.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

No. Item Setting range Description

5644 4th-axis low rotation speed during 0.1~9999.9 min-1 Set the low rotation speed of dog zero return for
dog zero return each axis.
5645 5th-axis low rotation speed during The speed is switched to low when the dog has
dog zero return contacted the zero limit switch.
5646 6th-axis low rotation speed during
dog zero return
5647 7th-axis low rotation speed during
dog zero return
5648 8th-axis low rotation speed during
dog zero return
5649 4th-axis manual rapid feedrate 0.1~5.0 min-1 4th-axis/ pallet contact prevention control
Set the maximum rotation speed in manual (jog,
step) operation.
5650 4th-axis low rotation speed 0.1~9.9 min-1 4th-axis/ pallet contact prevention control
Set the rotation speed to prevent 4th-axis/ pallet
contact when moving at a low feedrate.
5651 4th-axis gear ratio 1~120､180､360 Set the gear ratio for each axis.
5652 5th-axis gear ratio
5653 6th-axis gear ratio
5654 7th-axis gear ratio
5655 8th-axis gear ratio
5656 4th-axis dog zero return dir. 0~1 [0:+ 1:-]
5657 5th-axis dog zero return dir. Set the direction on the coordinate when each
5658 6th-axis dog zero return dir. axis returns to the zero position.
5659 7th-axis dog zero return dir.
5660 8th-axis dog zero return dir.
5661 4th-axis zero dec. input signal 0~1 [0:0=Dec. 1:1=Dec.] 7
5662 5th-axis zero dec. input signal Set the polarity of zero dec. input signal to start
5663 6th-axis zero dec. input signal deceleration during zero point return for each
5664 7th-axis zero dec. input signal axis.
5665 8th-axis zero dec. input signal
5666 4th-axis clamp mechanism 0~2 [0:Type 1 1:Type 2 2:Type 3]
5667 5th-axis clamp mechanism Set the type of clamp mechanism for each axis.
5668 6th-axis clamp mechanism Set [0: Type 1] when clamping mechanism is
5669 7th-axis clamp mechanism not provided.
5670 8th-axis clamp mechanism Set [1: Type 2] when clamping mechanism is
provided and the servo should be turned off
when clamping.
Set [2: Type 3] when clamping mechanism is
provided and the servo should be turned on
when clamping.
5671 4th-axis unclamp check input signal 0~1 [0:0=Check 1:1=Check]
5672 5th-axis unclamp check input signal Set the polarity of unclamp check input signal
5673 6th-axis unclamp check input signal for each axis.
5674 7th-axis unclamp check input signal
5675 8th-axis unclamp check input signal
5676 4th-axis clamp check input signal 0~2 [0:Invalid 1:0=Check 2:1=Check]
5677 5th-axis clamp check input signal Set the polarity of clamp check signal for each
5678 6th-axis clamp check input signal axis. When [0:Invalid] is set, completion of
5679 7th-axis clamp check input signal motion is checked by turning off of
5680 8th-axis clamp check input signal When [0:Invalid] is set, completion of clamping
is confirmed when the unclamp check input
signal is turned off instead of the clamp check
input signal .

2011/05/23 7 - 19 eTCOM2IN7.doc
 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

No. Item Setting range Description

5681 4th-axis unclamp output signal 0~1 [0:0=Unclamp 1:1=Unclamp]
5682 5th-axis unclamp output signal Set the polarity of unclamp output signal for
5683 6th-axis unclamp output signal each axis.
5684 7th-axis unclamp output signal
5685 8th-axis unclamp output signal
5686 Pause after 4th-axis unclamp 0~9999 msec Set the waiting time after each axis unclamp
5687 Pause after 5th-axis unclamp check input signal has turned on until axis
5688 Pause after 6th-axis unclamp rotation commences.
5689 Pause after 7th-axis unclamp
5690 Pause after 8th-axis unclamp
5691 Pause after 4th-axis clamp 0~9999 msec Set the waiting time after each axis clamp
5692 Pause after 5th-axis clamp check input signal has turned on until the next
5693 Pause after 6th-axis clamp operation commences.
5694 Pause after 7th-axis clamp
5695 Pause after 8th-axis clamp
5696 Pause after 4th-axis positioning 0~9999 msec Set the time after rotation of each axis has
5697 Pause after 5th-axis positioning completed until the unclamp output signal is
5698 Pause after 6th-axis positioning turned off.
5699 Pause after 7th-axis positioning
5700 Pause after 8th-axis positioning
5701 4th-axis position check pulse 0~99999 pulse Set the allowable amount for any position shift
5702 5th-axis position check pulse occurring while each axis is clamped.
5703 6th-axis position check pulse
5704 7th-axis position check pulse
5705 8th-axis position check pulse
5706 4th-axis check invalid time 0~9999 msec 4th-axis/pallet contact prevention control
4th-axis stop current detection range is not
7 checked when the current limit of the 4th axis is
switched to “3” until this setting time.
5707 Pause after 4th-axis stop 0~9999 msec 4th-axis/pallet contact prevention control
Set the check time for determining the 4th axis
has contacted the stopper.
5708 Pause until 4th-axis stops 0~9999 sec 4th-axis/pallet contact prevention control
A "C-axis index timeout" error occurs when the
4th-axis does not contact the stopper within the
time set here when moving at low speed.
5709 Pause until 4th-axis stop is 0~9999 msec 4th-axis/pallet contact prevention control
confirmed Set the time for determining the 4th axis has
stopped.
5710 4th-axis stop current detection 0~999 % 4th-axis/pallet contact prevention control
range A "C-axis current error" error occurs when the
specified current is not within [Current limit 3
+/-Setting here] when the 4th-axis has
contacted the stopper.
5711 4th-axis stop position deviation 0~999 pulse 4th-axis/pallet contact prevention control
Set the position deviation for determining the
4th axis has stopped.
The NC determines that the 4th-axis has
stopped when the setting here continues for the
time set for [Pause after 4th-axis stops].
5712 4th-axis stop current ref. value 0~999 % 4th-axis/pallet contact prevention control
Set the current reference value for determining
the 4th-axis has contacted the stopper.
The NC determines that the 4th-axis has
stopped when current exceeding the setting here
continues for the time set for [Pause after
4th-axis stops].

2011/05/23 7 - 20 eTCOM2IN7.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

No. Item Setting range Description

5713 4th-axis current check time 0~99 ×10msec Set the current check time to check whether the
constant calculated from workpiece mass is
correct or not. When 0 is set, the error check
is not performed.
5714 4th-axis current tolerance 0~999 % Set the current allowable value to check
whether the constant calculated from workpiece
mass is correct or not. When 0 is set, the error
check is not performed.
When the value exceeds this setting value for
the “4th-axis current check time”, “*Load
weight setting error” occurs.
5715 Quick table 0~2 [0:None 1:Type 1 2:Type 2]
Set whether QT (quick table) is equipped or
not. Type 1 is the QT of normal clamp
mechanism. Type 2 is the QT of contact
prevention type.
5716 4th-axis gain change start pulse 0~99999 pulse Set the pulse to start changing position loop
gain and speed loop proportional gain for each
5717 5th-axis gain change start pulse 0~99999 pulse axis.
5718 6th-axis gain change start pulse 0~99999 pulse
5719 7th-axis gain change start pulse 0~99999 pulse
5720 8th-axis gain change start pulse 0~99999 pulse
5721 4th-axis gain change end pulse 0~99999 pulse Set the pulse to end changing position loop gain
5722 5th-axis gain change end pulse 0~99999 pulse and speed loop proportional gain for each axis.
5723 6th-axis gain change end pulse 0~99999 pulse
5724 7th-axis gain change end pulse 0~99999 pulse
5725 8th-axis gain change end pulse 0~99999 pulse 7
5726 4th-axis gain change time 0~99999 msec Set the time to end changing position loop gain
5727 5th-axis gain change time 0~99999 msec and speed loop proportional gain for each axis.
5728 6th-axis gain change time 0~99999 msec
5729 7th-axis gain change time 0~99999 msec
5730 8th-axis gain change time 0~99999 msec
5731 4th-axis abso.encoder rotation dir. 0~1 . [0:Normal by + comd. 1:Normal by - comd.]
5732 5th-axis abso.encoder rotation dir. Set the direction of absolute encoder rotation
5733 6th-axis abso.encoder rotation dir. for each axis.
5734 7th-axis abso.encoder rotation dir.
5735 8th-axis abso.encoder rotation dir.

Machine parameter 3 (System 3)

No. Item Setting range Description
6001 Magazine cover interlock 0~1 [0:Invalid 1:Valid]
When set to [Valid], cutting movement is performed
after the magazine cover is closed.
When set to [Invalid], cutting movement is performed
without waiting for the magazine-axis cover to close.
6002 Magazine backlash 0~99999 pulse Regularly measures the backlash compensation
compensation according to the machine operating conditions, and
compensates the appropriate number of pulses for
magazine-axis as necessary.
6003 Magazine zero offset 0~999999 pulse This item is invalid for all machines.
Set the offset value to eliminate delay in motor origin
signal detection due to shift of the position when the
dog has contacted the limit switch during
machine-axis zero return.

2011/05/23 7 - 21 eTCOM2IN7.doc
 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

No. Item Setting range Description

6004 Magazine grid shift -999999~999999 This item is invalid for all machines.
pulse Set the shifted value of motor zero point for
magazine-axis.
The zero point signal is detected and the machine
moves further in the positive or negative direction for
the shifted value of the grid.
6005 Magazine dog zero return 0~9999.999 mm This item is invalid for all machines.
distance Set the distance when the zero limit switch is turned
on when the magazine-axis has rotated in the
direction opposite the machine zero point.
6006 Magazine in-position check 0~9999 msec Set the allowable time of in-position check for the
timeout period magazine-axis.
When [0] is set, in-position check is not performed.
6007 Magazine in-position width 0~99999 pulse Set the allowable range of the arrival point for the
magazine-axis.
6008 Magazine rapid feed time 0~9999 msec Set the rapid feed acceleration and deceleration time
6009 const. 1A constant for the magazine axis.
The numerical character at the end of [Magazine
6010 Magazine rapid feed time rapid feed time const. 1A] indicates the type of
6011 const. 2A function and the alphabetical character indicates the
6012 Magazine rapid feed time type of change.
6013 const. 3A <Numerical character>
6014 Magazine rapid feed time [1] Time taken until the speed reaches the
specified value.
6015 const. 1B [2] [3] Time for optimal acceleration and deceleration
6016 Magazine rapid feed time <Alphabetical character>
const. 2B [A] Valid when the formula below is satisfied.
Magazine rapid feed time [Travel distance] ≤ [Time const. change
const. 3A distance A].
7 Magazine rapid feed time
[B] Valid when the formula below is satisfied.
[Time const. change distance A] < [Travel
const. 1C distance] ≤ [Time const. change distance B]
Magazine rapid feed time [C] Valid when the formula below is satisfied, or
const. 2C in JOG mode.
Magazine rapid feed time [Time const. change distance B] < [Travel
distance]
const. 3C
6017 Magazine time const. change 0~9999.999 mm Set the distance to change the rapid feed time const.
distance A for the magazine axis.
6018 Magazine time const. change
distance B
6019 Magazine lower limit time 0~9999 msec Set the minimum value of acc./dec. const. for
const. magazine-axis.
6020 Magazine rapid feedrate 0.1~9999.9 Set the maximum travel speed of the magazine-axis.
m/ min-1
6021 Magazine rapid feedrate(door 0.1~9999.9 Set the maximum travel speed of the magazine-axis
open) m/ min-1 when the door is open.
6022 Magazine high rotation speed 0.1~9999.9 This item is invalid for all machines.
during dog zero return m/ min-1 Set the high rotation speed of dog zero return for the
magazine-axis. High speed is maintained until the
dog contacts the zero limit switch.
6023 Magazine low rotation speed 0.1~9999.9 This item is invalid for all machines.
during dog zero return m/ min-1 Set the low rotation speed of dog zero return for the
magazine-axis.
The speed is switched to low when the dog has
contacted the zero limit switch.
6024 Magazine gear ratio 1~999 Set the gear ratio of the magazine-axis.
6025 Magazine dog zero return dir. 0~1 This item is invalid for all machines.
[0:+ 1:-]
Set the direction of coordinates of zero return for the
magazine axis.

2011/05/23 7 - 22 eTCOM2IN7.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

No. Item Setting range Description

6026 Magazine zero dec. input 0~1 This item is invalid for all machines.
signal [0:0=Dec. 1:1=Dec.]
Set the polarity of zero dec. input signal to start
deceleration during machine zero return for the
magazine-axis.
6027 Magazine clamp mechanism 0~2 This item is invalid for all machines.
[0:Type 1 1:Type 2 2:Type 3]
Set the type of clamp mechanism for the
magazine-axis.
Set [0: TYPE 1] when clamping mechanism is not
provided.
Set [1: TYPE 2] when clamping mechanism is
provided and the servo should be turned off when
clamping.
Set [2: TYPE 3] when clamping mechanism is
provided and the servo should be turned on when
clamping.
This item is invalid for the TC-32A.
6028 Magazine unclamp check 0~1 This item is invalid for all machines.
input signal [0:0=Check 1:1=Check]
Set the polarity of unclamping check input signal for
the magazine-axis.
6029 Magazine clamp check input 0~2 This item is invalid for all machines.
signal [0:Invalid 1:0=Check 2:1=Check]
Set the polarity of unclamping check input signal for
the magazine-axis.
When [0: Invalid] is set, completion of clamping is
confirmed when the unclamp check input signal is 7
turned off instead of the clamp check input signal .
6030 Magazine unclamp output 0~1 This item is invalid for all machines.
signal [0:0=Unclamp 1:1=Unclamp]
Set the polarity of unclamping check output signal for
the magazine-axis.
6031 Pause after magazine unclamp 0~9999 msec This item is invalid for all machines.
Set the waiting time after the magazine-axis unclamp
check input signal has turned on until axis rotation
commences.
6032 Pause after magazine clamp 0~9999 msec This item is invalid for all machines.
Set the waiting time after the magazine-axis clamp
check input signal has turned on until the next
operation commences.
6033 Pause after magazine 0~9999 msec This item is invalid for all machines.
positioning Set the time after rotation of the magazine-axis has
completed until the unclamp output signal is turned
off.
6034 Pot rising check time 0~9999 msec Set the waiting time after the pot rising operation has
ended until the next operation commences.
6035 Pot lowering check time 0~9999 msec Set the waiting time after the pot lowering operation
has ended until the next operation commences.
6036 Pot operation monitor time 0~9999 msec Set the monitoring time when the pot rising/ lowering
operation does not complete.
6037 Minimum pot operation time 0~9999 msec Set the minimum time for the pot rising/ lowering
operation.
6038 Pause after ATC arm turn 0~9999 msec Set the waiting time after the ATC arm turn has ended
until the next operation commences.

2011/05/23 7 - 23 eTCOM2IN7.doc
 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

No. Item Setting range Description

6039 Magazine current limit check 0~9999 msec This item is invalid for TC-32B.
time Set the waiting time after the magazine operation has
ended until the current limit check is preformed.
6040 Magazine position check pulse 0~99999 pulse Set the allowable range by number of pulse to detect
“Magazine position shifted”.
6041 Magazine tolerance 0~99999 pulse Set the allowable range by number of pulse to detect
“Magazine number error.”
6042 ATC arm turn timeout period 1~9999 msec Set the monitoring time when the ATC turn at speed 1
1 (turning in manual operation mode, turning when the
[RST] key is pressed in the ATC maintenance mode
or when the door is open). If the ATC does not
complete turning even after the preset time has
elapsed, an “ATC arm operation timeout” error
occurs.
The default (5000) applies when no setting is made.
6043 ATC arm turn timeout period 1~9999 msec Set the monitoring time when the ATC turns at speed
2 2 (turning when using a medium tool).
If the ATC does not complete turning even after the
preset time has elapsed, an “ATC arm operation
timeout” error occurs. The default (5000) applies
when no setting is made.
6044 ATC arm turn timeout period 1~9999 msec Set the monitoring time when the ATC turns at speed
3 3 (turning when using a large tool or small tool).
If the ATC does not complete turning even after the
preset time has elapsed, an “ATC arm operation
timeout” error occurs. The default (5000) applies
when no setting is made.
7 6045 ATC arm turn timeout period 1~9999 msec Set the monitoring time when the ATC turns at speed
4 4 (turning when using a standard tool).
If the ATC does not complete turning even after the
preset time has elapsed, an “ATC arm operation
timeout” error occurs. The default (5000) applies
when no setting is made.
6046 Magazine abso. encoder 0~1 [0:Normal by + comd. 1:Normal by - comd.]
rotation dir. Set the direction of the absolute encoder rotation of
the magazine-axis.
6047 Medium tool function 0~1 [0: Not equipped 1: equipped]
Set whether medium tool function is equipped or not
equipped.
6048 Distance between magazine 0.001~999.999 Set the distance between magazine pots.
pots mm
6049 Magazine/pot shutter signal 0~1 Sets whether to enable or disable input/output signals
of the magazine shutter or pot shutter.
Generally set to [0: Valid].
When [1: Invalid] is set, input signals are ignored, and
output signals always indicate “open”.
Remove the shutter to prevent interference during tool
change. Check that chips do not enter the magazine.
6050 ATC arm shutter signal 0~1 Sets whether to enable or disable the input/output
signals of the ATC arm shutter.
Generally set to [0: Valid].
When [1: Invalid] is set, input signals are ignored, and
output signals always indicate “open”.
Remove the shutter to prevent interference during tool
change. Check that chips do not enter the magazine.

2011/05/23 7 - 24 eTCOM2IN7.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

No. Item Setting range Description

6051 High-speed magazine rapid 0~9999 msec Sets the acceleration/deceleration time constant for
feed time constant 1A the magazine axis rapid feed when [1. High] is set for
6052 High-speed magazine rapid 0~9999 msec [Turret type magazine speed] (user parameter 1).
feed time constant 2A The numerical character at the end of [High-speed
6053 High-speed magazine rapid 0~9999 msec magazine rapid feed time const. 1A] indicates the
feed time constant 3A type of function and the alphabetical character
6054 High-speed magazine rapid 0~9999 msec indicates the type of change.
feed time constant 1B <Numerical character>
6055 High-speed magazine rapid 0~9999 msec [1] Time taken until the speed reaches the
feed time constant 2B specified value.
6056 High-speed magazine rapid 0~9999 msec [2] [3] Time for optimal acceleration and deceleration
feed time constant 3B <Alphabetical character>
6057 High-speed magazine rapid 0~9999 msec [A] Valid when the formula below is satisfied.
feed time constant 1C [Travel distance] ≤ [Time const. change
6058 High-speed magazine rapid 0~9999 msec distance A].
feed time constant 2C
[B] Valid when the formula below is satisfied.
6059 High-speed magazine rapid 0~9999 msec [Time const. change distance A] < [Travel
feed time constant 3C
distance] ≤ [Time const. change distance B]
[C] Valid when the formula below is satisfied, or
in JOG mode.
[Time const. change distance B] < [Travel
distance]
6060 High-speed magazine time 0~9999.999 mm Sets the distance to change the magazine axis rapid
constant change distance A feed time constant when [1: High] is set for [Turret
6061 High-speed magazine time 0~9999.999 mm type magazine speed] (user parameter 1).
constant change distance B
6062 High-speed magazine rapid 0.1~9999.9 Sets the magazine of maximum feed speed when [1:
feedrate m/ min High] is set for [Turret type magazine speed] (user 7
parameter 1).
6063 Minimum arm turning time 1 1~9999 msec Set the minimum ATC arm turning time.
If no value is set, ‘300’ is automatically applied. The
time set here corresponds to speed 1 when the ATC
arm turns (turn by manual operation, turn in ATC
maintenance mode, turn when the door opens).
6064 Minimum arm turning time 2 1~9999 msec Set the minimum ATC arm turning time.
If no value is set, ‘300’ is automatically applied. The
time set here corresponds to speed 2 when the ATC
arm turns (middle tool).
6065 Minimum arm turning time 3 1~9999 msec Set the minimum ATC arm turning time.
If no value is set, ‘300’ is automatically applied. The
time set here corresponds to speed 2 when the ATC
arm turns (large tool or small tool).
6066 Minimum arm turning time 4 1~9999 msec Set the minimum ATC arm turning time.
If no value is set, ‘300’ is automatically applied. The
time set here corresponds to speed 2 when the ATC
arm turns (standard tool).
6067 Magazine position deviation 1~100 % Sets the ratio of tolerance for magazine axis position
tolerance ratio deviation when [0: Normal] is set for [Turret type
magazine speed] (user parameter 1).
6068 High-speed magazine position 1~100 % Sets the ratio of tolerance for magazine axis position
deviation tolerance ratio deviation when [1: High] is set for [Turret type
magazine speed] (user parameter 1).
6069 Magazine position deviation 1~100 % Set the ratio of magazine position deviation amount
restriction speed ratio that restricts the magazine speed when [Turret type
magazine speed] is set to [0: Normal].
6070 High-speed magazine position 1~100 % Set the ratio of magazine position deviation amount
deviation restriction speed that restricts the magazine speed when [Turret type
ratio magazine speed] is set to [1: High].

2011/05/23 7 - 25 eTCOM2IN7.doc
 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

No. Item Setting range Description

6071 Magazine rapid feedrate 0.1~9999.9min-1 Set the maximum magazine moving speed if the
(speed restricted) magazine position deviation amount exceeds the set
value of [Magazine position deviation restriction
speed ratio] or [High-speed magazine position
deviation restriction speed ratio].
6072 Pot rising check time 2 0～9999msec Set the check time until the next motion is executed,
after the pot rising motion with a small tool finished.
6073 Pot lowering check time 0～9999msec Set the check time until the next motion is executed,
after the pot lowering motion with a small tool
finished.
6074 Arm turn speed switching time 0～999msec Set the time until the speed is switched after the arm
turn with a standard tool was commanded.
6075 Arm turn speed switching time 0～999msec Set the time until the speed is switched after the arm
2 turn with a small tool was commanded.
6076 ATC arm pre-turn monitor 0～9999msec Set the monitor time from the start of arm turn until
time the home position sensor turns off. If the home
position sensor does not turn off even though the set
time elapsed, “*ATC arm pre-turn timeout” occurs.
When [0] is set, the pre-turn monitoring is not
performed.

Machine parameter 4 (Pitch error compensation)

No. Item Setting range Description
1 X-axis(1~50) Cannot be set.
2 Y-axis(1~50) -
3 Z-axis(1~50)
4 4th axis(1~50) -99999~99999 Checks the pitch accuracy of the rotating axis that
7 5
6
5th axis(1~50)
6th axis(1~50)
pulse moves each axis and compensates it as necessary.
The compensation pitch of the 4th, 5th, and 6th axes
7 7th axis(1~50) is 15 degrees. When the machine is equipped with a
8 8th axis(1~50) QT, the compensation pitch of the 4th axis (QT) is
9 9th axis(1~50) 180 degrees, thus only [Pitch error compensation 1] is
10 10th axis(1~50) valid.

Machine parameter 5 (Servo)

Item Setting range Description
01001~01300(X-axis) -2147483648~ Set the servo control parameters for each axis.
02001~02300(Y-axis) 2147483647
03001~03300(Z-axis)
04001~04300(4th axis)
05001~05300(5th axis)
06001~06300(6th axis)
07001~07300(7th axis)
08001~08300(8th axis)
09001~09300(M-axis)
10001~10300(10th axis)
15001~15400(Spindle)

2011/05/23 7 - 26 eTCOM2IN7.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

Machine parameter 6 (Automatic thermal distortion compensation 1)

No. Item Setting range Description
6501 Z-axis max. displacement const. 1 0.0001~0.9999 This parameter determines the Z-axis
compensation value.
This is used with the [Z-axis max.
displacement const. 2] parameter.

6502 Z-axis max. displacement const. 2 -99.9~99.9 This parameter determines the Z-axis
compensation value.
This is used with the [Z-axis max.
displacement const. 1] parameter.
6503 Z-axis expansion displacement const. 3 0.01~19.99 This parameter determines the Z-axis
expansion time rate.
6504 Z-axis contraction displacement const. 0.01~19.99 This parameter determines the Z-axis
3 contraction time rate.
6505 Spindle max. displacement const. 0.0001~0.9999 This parameter determines the spindle
1(Z-ax) compensation value for Z axis .
This is used with the [Spindle max.
displacement const. 2] parameter.
6506 Spindle max. displacement const. -99.9~99.9 This parameter determines the spindle
2(Z-ax) compensation value for Z axis .
This is used with the [Spindle max.
displacement const. 1] parameter.
6507 Spindle expansion displacement const. 0.01~19.99 This parameter determines the spindle
3(Z-ax) expansion time rate for Z axis .
6508 Spindle contraction displacement const. 0.01~19.99 This parameter determines the spindle
3(Z-ax) contraction time rate for Z axis .
6509 X-axis max. displacement const. 1 -0.9999~0.9999 This parameter determines the X-axis
7
compensation value.
This is used with the [X-axis max.
displacement const. 2] parameter.
6510 X-axis max. displacement const. 2 -99.9~99.9 This parameter determines the X-axis
compensation value.
This is used with the [X-axis max.
displacement const. 1] parameter.
6511 X-axis expansion displacement const. 3 0.01~19.99 This parameter determines the X-axis
expansion time rate.
6512 X-axis contraction displacement const. 0.01~19.99 This parameter determines the X-axis
3 contraction time rate.
6513 Spindle max. displacement const. -0.9999~0.9999 This parameter determines the spindle
1(X-ax) compensation value for X axis .
This is used with the [Spindle max.
displacement const. 2] parameter.
6514 Spindle max. displacement const. -99.9~99.9 This parameter determines the spindle
2(X-ax) compensation value for X axis .
This is used with the [Spindle max.
displacement const. 1] parameter.
6515 Spindle expansion displacement const. 0.01~19.99 This parameter determines the spindle
3(X-ax) expansion time rate for X axis .
6516 Spindle contraction displacement const. 0.01~19.99 This parameter determines the spindle
3(X-ax) contraction time rate for X axis .
6517 Y-axis max. displacement const. 1 -0.9999~0.9999 This parameter determines the Y-axis
compensation value.
This is used with the [Y-axis max.
displacement const. 2] parameter.

2011/05/23 7 - 27 eTCOM2IN7.doc
 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

No. Item Setting range Description

6518 Y-axis max. displacement const. 2 -99.9~99.9 This parameter determines the Y-axis
compensation value.
This is used with the [Y-axis max.
displacement const. 1] parameter.
6519 Y-axis expansion displacement const. 3 0.01~19.99 This parameter determines the Y-axis
expansion time rate.
6520 Spindle contraction displacement const. 0.01~19.99 This parameter determines the Y-axis
3(Y-ax) contraction time rate.
6521 Spindle max. displacement const. -0.9999~0.9999 This parameter determines the spindle
1(Y-ax) compensation value for Y axis .
This is used with the [Spindle max.
displacement const. 2] parameter.
6522 Spindle max. displacement const. -99.9~99.9 This parameter determines the spindle
2(Y-ax) compensation value for Y axis .
This is used with the [Spindle max.
displacement const. 1] parameter.
6523 Spindle expansion displacement const. 0.01~19.99 This parameter determines the spindle
3(Y-ax) elongation time rate for Y axis .
6524 Spindle contraction displacement const. 0.01~19.99 This parameter determines the spindle
3(Y-ax) contraction time rate for Y axis .
Machine parameter 6
(Automatic thermal distortion compensation 2 / Ball screw system)
No. Item Setting Range Description
7501 X-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00 This is the parameter to adjust the
compensation coefficient A1 X-axis compensation value.
7502 X-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient A2
7 7503 X-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient A3
7504 X-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient B
7505 X-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient E
7506 X-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient F1
7507 X-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient F2
7508 X-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient F3
7509 X-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient F4
7510 Y-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00 This is the parameter to adjust the
compensation coefficient A1 Y-axis compensation value.
7511 Y-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient A1
7512 Y-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient A1
7513 Y-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient A1
7514 Y-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient A1
7515 Y-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient A1
7516 Y-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient A1
7517 Y-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient A1
7518 Y-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient A1

2011/05/23 7 - 28 eTCOM2IN7.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

No. Item Setting Range Description

7519 Z-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00 This is the parameter to adjust the Z-axis
compensation coefficient A1 compensation value.
7520 Z-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient A2
7521 Z-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient A3
7522 Z-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient B
7523 Z-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient E
7524 Z-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient F１
7525 Z-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient F2
7526 Z-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient F3
7527 Z-axis thermal distortion 0.00～10.00
compensation coefficient F4

Machine parameter 6
(Automatic thermal distortion compensation 2 / Ball screw system)
No. Item Setting Range Description
8001 X axis thermal distortion constant A1 0.000000～ This is the parameter to adjust the
10.000000 X-axis compensation value.
8002 X axis thermal distortion constant A2 0.000000～
10.000000
8003 X axis thermal distortion constant A3 0.0000～
1000.0000 7
8004 X axis thermal distortion constant A4 0.0000～
100.0000
8005 X axis thermal distortion constant B 0.0000～
100.0000
8006 X axis thermal distortion constant C1 0～999999
8007 X axis thermal distortion constant C2

8008 X axis thermal distortion constant C3

8009 X axis thermal distortion constant C4

8010 X axis thermal distortion constant C5

8011 X axis thermal distortion constant C6

8012 X axis thermal distortion constant C7

8013 X axis thermal distortion constant C8

8014 X axis thermal distortion constant C9

8015 X axis thermal distortion constant

C10

2011/05/23 7 - 29 eTCOM2IN7.doc
 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

No. Item Setting Range Description

8016 X axis thermal distortion constant D1 0.0000000～ This is the parameter to adjust the
1.0000000 X-axis compensation value.
8017 X axis thermal distortion constant D2

8018 X axis thermal distortion constant D3

8019 X axis thermal distortion constant D4

8020 X axis thermal distortion constant D5

8021 X axis thermal distortion constant D6

8022 X axis thermal distortion constant D7

8023 X axis thermal distortion constant D8

8024 X axis thermal distortion constant D9

8025 X axis thermal distortion constant

D10
8026 X axis thermal distortion constant E 0.0000～
100.0000
8027 X axis thermal distortion constant F1 0.000000～
10.000000
8028 X axis thermal distortion constant F2 0.000000～
10.000000
8029 X axis thermal distortion constant F3 0.000000～
1.000000
7 8030 X axis thermal distortion constant F4 －10.00～10.00

8031 Y axis thermal distortion constant A1 0.000000～ This is the parameter to adjust the
10.000000 Y-axis compensation value.
8032 Y axis thermal distortion constant A2 0.000000～
10.000000
8033 Y axis thermal distortion constant A3 0.0000～
1000.0000
8034 Y axis thermal distortion constant A4 0.0000～
100.0000
8035 Y axis thermal distortion constant B 0.0000～
100.0000
8036 Y axis thermal distortion constant C1 0～999999
8037 Y axis thermal distortion constant C2
8038 Y axis thermal distortion constant C3
8039 Y axis thermal distortion constant C4
8040 Y axis thermal distortion constant C5
8041 Y axis thermal distortion constant C6
8042 Y axis thermal distortion constant C7
8043 Y axis thermal distortion constant C8
8044 Y axis thermal distortion constant C9
8045 Y axis thermal distortion constant C10
8046 Y axis thermal distortion constant D1 0.0000000～
8047 Y axis thermal distortion constant D2 1.0000000
8048 Y axis thermal distortion constant D3
8049 Y axis thermal distortion constant D4
8050 Y axis thermal distortion constant D5
8051 Y axis thermal distortion constant D6
8052 Y axis thermal distortion constant D7
8053 Y axis thermal distortion constant D8
8054 Y axis thermal distortion constant D9
8055 Y axis thermal distortion constant D10

2011/05/23 7 - 30 eTCOM2IN7.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

No. Item Setting Range Description

8056 Y axis thermal distortion constant E 0.0000～ This is the parameter to adjust the
100.0000 Y-axis compensation value.
8057 Y axis thermal distortion constant F1 0.000000～
10.000000
8058 Y axis thermal distortion constant F2 0.000000～
10.000000
8059 Y axis thermal distortion constant F3 0.000000～
1.000000
8060 Y axis thermal distortion constant F4 －10.00～10.00
8061 Z axis thermal distortion constant A1 0.000000～ This is the parameter to adjust the
10.000000 Z-axis compensation value.
8062 Z axis thermal distortion constant A2 0.000000～
10.000000
8063 Z axis thermal distortion constant A3 0.0000～
1000.0000
8064 Z axis thermal distortion constant A4 0.0000～
100.0000
8065 Z axis thermal distortion constant B 0.0000～
100.0000
8066 Z axis thermal distortion constant C1 0～999999
8067 Z axis thermal distortion constant C2
8068 Z axis thermal distortion constant C3
8069 Z axis thermal distortion constant C4
8070 Z axis thermal distortion constant C5
8071 Z axis thermal distortion constant C6
8072 Z axis thermal distortion constant C7
8073 Z axis thermal distortion constant C8 7
8074 Z axis thermal distortion constant C9
8075 Z axis thermal distortion constant C10
8076 Z axis thermal distortion constant D1 0.0000000～
8077 Z axis thermal distortion constant D2 1.0000000
8078 Z axis thermal distortion constant D3
8079 Z axis thermal distortion constant D4
8080 Z axis thermal distortion constant D5
8081 Z axis thermal distortion constant D6
8082 Z axis thermal distortion constant D7
8083 Z axis thermal distortion constant D8
8084 Z axis thermal distortion constant D9
8085 Z axis thermal distortion constant D10
8086 Z axis thermal distortion constant E 0.0000～
100.0000
8087 Z axis thermal distortion constant F1 0.000000～
10.000000
8088 Z axis thermal distortion constant 2 0.000000～
10.000000
8089 Z axis thermal distortion constant F3 0.000000～
1.000000
8090 Z axis thermal distortion constant F4 －10.00～10.00

2011/05/23 7 - 31 eTCOM2IN7.doc
 TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
Chapter 7 Machine parameter R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz

Machine parameter 7 (High accuracy)

No. Item Setting range Description
7001 Speed clamp time A 0.000～ Used for speed clamp processing.
0.099 sec Calculated from the minute block
processing capability. For example, if the
processing capability is “1mm pitch
F10000”, set [0.006].
When “0.000” is set, the speed clamp is not
performed.
7002 Max. feedrate A 1～99999 Maximum cutting speed in high accuracy
mm/min mode A.
7003 Tolerance threshold A 1～9999 μm Used when a shape is considered as arc in
the arc approximate processing.
7004 Corner acc. tolerance A 0.001～ Used for corner deceleration processing.
99.999 m/sec2
7005 Arc acc. tolerance A 0.001～ Used when arc passing speed is calculated.
99.999 m/sec2
7006 Arc approx. acc. tolerance A 0.001～ Used when the passing speed is calculated
99.999 m/sec2 in the arc approximate processing.
7007 Corner dec. speed gap A 1～99999 When corner deceleration exceeds the set
mm/min speed gap, it decelerates to lower speed.
7008 Corner dec. time A 0～9999 msec Determine the deceleration time in the
corner deceleration. Based on the set time,
the end point distance and start point
distance are determined.
7009 High accuracy A cutting 0～9999 msec Set the cutting feed acc./dec. time constant
feed time const. 1 (Group 1) in high accuracy mode A.
7 (Group 1) For “Cutting feed time constant 1”, set the
7010 High accuracy A cutting time until the specified speed is reached.
feed time const. 2 For “Cutting feed time constant 2” and
(Group 1) “Cutting feed time constant 3”, set the time
7011 High accuracy A cutting of optimum acc./dec. part.
feed time const. 3 This time constant is used when [0: Group
(Group 1) 1] is selected with the user parameter
(switch 1) “Cutting feed time constant
selection A (M260-M265)”.
7012 Min. arc speed A 1～99999 When the arc passing speed is calculated,
mm/sec the passing speed is not slowed below the
set value.
7013 Reference feedrate A 1～99999 Used to limit the cutting feedrate in high
mm/min accuracy mode A.
The cutting feedrate is limited with the
value calculated using the set value and user
parameter (switch 1) “Smooth override
(M260-M265)” as shown below.

<If smooth override is larger than 100%>

(Reference feedrate A) × (√(Smooth
override)/100)
<If smooth override is less than 100%>
(Reference feedrate A) × ((Smooth
override)/100)

If the limited speed exceeds the machine

parameter (high accuracy) “Max. feedrate
A”, it is clamped to the “Max. feedrate A”.

2011/05/23 7 - 32 eTCOM2IN7.doc
TC-22B/31B/32BN/S2D/
R2B/20B/S2Dz/S2DN/S2DNz Chapter 7 Machine parameter

No. Item Setting range Description

7014 High accuracy A cutting 0～9999 msec Set the cutting feed acc./dec. time constant
feed time const. 1 (Group 2) in high accuracy mode A.
(Group 2) For “Cutting feed time constant 1”, set the
7015 High accuracy A cutting time until the specified speed is reached.
feed time const. 2 For “Cutting feed time constant 2” and
(Group 2) “Cutting feed time constant 3”, set the time
7016 High accuracy A cutting of optimum acc./dec. part.
feed time const. 3 This time constant is used when [1: Group
(Group 2) 2] is selected with the user parameter
(switch 1) “Cutting feed time constant
selection A (M260-M265)”.
7017 High accuracy A cutting 0～9999 msec Set the cutting feed acc./dec. time constant
feed time const. 1 (Group 3) in high accuracy mode A.
(Group 3) For “Cutting feed time constant 1”, set the
7018 High accuracy A cutting time until the specified speed is reached.
feed time const. 2 For “Cutting feed time constant 2” and
(Group 3) “Cutting feed time constant 3”, set the time
7019 High accuracy A cutting of optimum acc./dec. part.
feed time const. 3 This time constant is used when [2: Group
(Group 3) 3] is selected with the user parameter
(switch 1) “Cutting feed time constant
selection A (M260-M265)”.

2011/05/23 7 - 33 eTCOM2IN7.doc
 Chapter 7 Machine parameter TC-R2B

7.2 Default value

Machine parameter (system1)
10K
No. Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
5001 Display language 0
5002 X-axis backlash compensation 0
5003 Y-axis backlash compensation 0
5004 Z-axis backlash compensation 0
5005 Spindle grid shift 0
5006 X-axis (-) stroke 1 -420.000
5007 Y-axis (-) stroke 1 -320.000
5008 Z-axis (-) stroke 1 200.000
5009 X-axis (+) stroke 1 0.000
5010 Y-axis (+) stroke 1 0.000
5011 X-axis (-) stroke 2 0.000
5012 Y-axis (-) stroke 2 0.000
5013 Z-axis (-) stroke 2 0.000
5014 X-axis (+) stroke 2 0.000
5015 Y-axis (+) stroke 2 0.000
5016 Z-axis (+) stroke 2 0.000
5017 Distance to Z-axis zero 505.000
5018 Distance to ATC zero 135.000
5019 X-axis ATC position 0.000
5020 Y-axis ATC position 0.000
5021 Coolant during tool change 0
5022 X-axis ball screw attachment position 114.500
5023 Y-axis ball screw attachment position 114.500
7 5024 Z-axis ball screw attachment position 759.500
5025 Automatic oiling function 0
5026 Automatic oiling pause 1 6
5027 Automatic oiling time 15
5028 Automatic oiling monitoring time 60
5029 Return distance with servo controller
2.000
ON
5030 Emergency stop switch change 0
5031 In-position check 1
5032 Skip feed acc./dec. 1
5033 Spindle in-position check timeout
5000
period
5034 X-axis in-position check timeout period 5000
5035 Y-axis in-position check timeout period 5000
5036 Z-axis in-position check timeout period 5000
5037 Spindle command timeout period 5000
5038 Spindle in-position width 1 0
5039 Spindle in-position width 2 0
5040 X-axis in-position width 165
5041 Y-axis in-position width 165
5042 Z-axis in-position width 165
5043 X-axis positioning end check distance 0.300
5044 Y-axis positioning end check distance 0.300
5045 Z-axis positioning end check distance 0.300
5046 X-axis rapid feed time const. 1A 220
5047 X-axis rapid feed time const. 2A 93
5048 X-axis rapid feed time const. 3A 0
5049 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 1A 177
5050 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 2A 75
5051 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 3A 0
5052 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 1A 80

2011/10/25 7 - 34 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 7 Machine parameter

10K
No. Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
5053 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 2A 20
5054 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 3A 0
5055 X-axis rapid feed time const. 1B 220
5056 X-axis rapid feed time const. 2B 93
5057 X-axis rapid feed time const. 3B 0
5058 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 1B 177
5059 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 2B 75
5060 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 3B 0
5061 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 1B 80
5062 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 2B 20
5063 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 3B 0
5064 X-axis rapid feed time const. 1C 220
5065 X-axis rapid feed time const. 2C 93
5066 X-axis rapid feed time const. 3C 0
5067 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 1C 177
5068 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 2C 75
5069 Y-axis rapid feed time const. 3C 0
5070 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 1C 80
5071 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 2C 20
5072 Z-axis rapid feed time const. 3C 0
5073 X-axis min. rapid feed time const. ratio 100
5074 Y-axis min. rapid feed time const. ratio 100
5075 X-axis time const. change distance A 0.000
5076 X-axis time const. change distance B 0.000
5077 Y-axis time const. change distance A 0.000
5078 Y-axis time const. change distance B 0.000
5079 Z-axis time const. change distance A 0.000 7
5080 Z-axis time const. change distance B 0.000
5081 Cutting feed time const. 1 90
5082 Cutting feed time const. 2 45
5083 Cutting feed time const. 3 0
5084 Skip feed time const. 1 90
5085 Skip feed time const. 2 45
5086 Skip feed time const. 3 0
5087 Tapping time const.1 140 200 140
5088 Tapping time const. 2 21 30 7
5089 Tapping time const. 3 0
5090 X-axis lower limit time const. 20
5091 Y-axis lower limit time const. 20
5092 Z-axis lower limit time const. 20
5093 Cutting feed lower limit time constant 20
5094 Max. spindle speed 10000 16000 10000
5095 No. of spindle control change rotations 10000 16000 10000
5096 Max. tapping speed 6000
5097 X-axis rapid feedrate 50000
5098 Y-axis rapid feedrate 50000
5099 Z-axis rapid feedrate 50000
5100 Z-axis rapid feedrate (ATC) 35000
5101 Rapid feedrate (door open) 4000
5102 X-axis max. cutting feedrate 10000
5103 Y-axis max. cutting feedrate 10000
5104 Z-axis max. cutting feedrate 20000
5105 Manual rapid feedrate 4000
5106 X-axis ball screw lead(mm) 12
5107 Y-axis ball screw lead(mm) 12
5108 Z-axis ball screw lead(mm) 12
5109 Tapping const. 1 0.038

2011/10/25 7 - 35 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
 Chapter 7 Machine parameter TC-R2B

10K
No. Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
5110 Tapping const. 2 -0.200
5111 Tapping const. 3 0.000
5112 Tapping const. 4 30.000
5113 Tapping const. 5 20.000
5114 Tapping const. 6 0.006
5115 Tapping const. 7 0.500
5116 Tapping const. 8 15.000
5117 Tapping const. 9 90.000
5118 Tapping const. 10 0.000
5119 X-axis position loop gain 2 start pulse 0
5120 Y-axis position loop gain 2 start pulse 0
5121 Z-axis position loop gain 2 start pulse 0
5122 X-axis position loop gain 2 end pulse 0
5123 Y-axis position loop gain 2 end pulse 0
5124 Z-axis position loop gain 2 end pulse 0
5125 X-axis position loop gain 2 time 0
5126 Y-axis position loop gain 2 time 0
5127 Z-axis position loop gain 2 time 0
5128 X-axis speed gain change pulse 0
5129 Y-axis speed gain change pulse 0
5130 Z-axis speed gain change pulse 0
5131 X-axis speed gain change time 0
5132 Y-axis speed gain change time 0
5133 Z-axis speed gain change time 0
5134 Manual tool change position offset 3
5135 Tool storage capacity 14
7 5136 Max. load weight 160
5137 Inertia without workpiece 0
5138 Estimated axis 0
5139 Rated torque 0
5140 Acceleration to start calculation 9.99
5141 Tolerance for mass 0
5142 No. of estimated data 100
5143 X-axis abso.encoder rotation dir. 0
5144 Y-axis abso.encoder rotation dir. 0
5145 Z-axis abso.encoder rotation dir. 0
5146 CPU temperature compensation 0
5147 Center-through-coolant option 0
5148 Back washing time 1 0.3
5149 Back washing time 2 1.7
5150 Tool breakage detection position
1.0
tolerance
5151 Tool breakage detection motor pitch 50.265
5152 Tool breakage detection motor
200
pulses/rotation
5153 Tool breakage detection motor stroke 120
5154 Break detect ref. pos. 80.000
5155 Thermal error 1 (control panel)
75
temperature
5156 Thermal error 2 (control panel)
75
temperature
5157 Tool wash filter check time 0.00
5158 PLC data default 40 0000000000000000
5159 PLC data default 41 0000000000000000
5160 PLC data default 42 0
5161 PLC data default 43 0
5162 PLC data default 44 0

2011/10/25 7 - 36 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 7 Machine parameter

10K
No. Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
5163 PLC data default 45 0
5164 PLC data default 46 0
5165 PLC data default 47 0
5166 PLC data default 48 0
5167 PLC data default 49 0
5168 PLC data default 50 0
5169 PLC data default 51 0
5170 PLC data default 52 0
5171 PLC data default 53 0
5172 PLC data default 54 0
5173 PLC data default 55 0
5174 PLC data default 56 0
5175 PLC data default 57 0
5176 PLC data default 58 0
5177 PLC data default 59 0
5178 PLC data default 60 0
5179 PLC data default 61 0
5180 PLC data default 62 0
5181 PLC data default 63 0
5182 External input 53PLC input 0
5183 External input 203PLC input 0
5184 External input 213PLC input 0
5185 External input 223PLC input 0
5186 External input 233PLC input 0
5187 External input 403PLC input 0
5188 External input 413PLC input 0
5189 External input 423PLC input 0 7
5190 External input 433PLC input 0
5191 External output 103PLC output 0
5192 External output 303PLC output 0
5193 External output 313PLC output 0
5194 External output 323PLC output 0
5195 External output 333PLC output 0
5196 External output 503PLC output 0
5197 External output 513PLC output 0
5198 External output 523PLC output 0
5199 External output 533PLC output 0
5200 Tool unclamp function for spindle 0
5201 ATC zero tolerance 4.000
5202 Check time for door close 25
5203 Automatic oiling pause 2 120
5204 Spindle orientation completion check
30
time
5205 Spindle orientation tolerance 0
5206 Automatic door lock 0
5207 Center through coolant control 0
5208 Change screw type 0
5209 Pallet turn restricted distance (Y axis) 90.000
5210 Back washing time 3 1.0
5211 ATC arm turn restricted distance (X
0.000
axis)
5212 Automatic greasing function 0
5213 Automatic greasing time 10
5214 Automatic greasing monitoring time 70
5215 Automatic greasing pause 300
5216 Automatic door type 1

2011/10/25 7 - 37 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
 Chapter 7 Machine parameter TC-R2B

10K
No. Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
5217 Automatic door opening operation
25
check time
5218 Air blast/tool wash control method 1
5219 Z-axis lowering speed when checking
1700
tool wash filter
5220 Tool wash start position change offset
3
(Method 4)
5221 Tool wash maximum discharge time
5.0
(Method 4)
5222 Tool wash water supply time (Method
6.0
4)
5223 Tool wash coolant level lower limit
1.0
monitoring time (Method 4)
5224 Tool wash coolant level sensor water supply check
13.0
time (Method 4)
5225 Tool wash coolant level sensor discharge check
5.0
time (Method 4)
5226 Y axis retraction when pallet rotates 1
5227 CTS line filter alarm check time 0.0
5228 Tap acceleration/deceleration control
0
type
5229 X-axis ball screw diameter 0.000
5230 Y-axis ball screw diameter 0.000
5231 Z-axis ball screw diameter 0.000
5232 X-axis support bearing position 0.000
5233 Y-axis support bearing position 0.000
7 5234 Z-axis support bearing position
5235 X-axis motor mounting side
0.000
0
5236 Y-axis motor mounting side 0
5237 Z-axis motor mounting side 0
5238 Rounding of fractions between blocks 1

Machine parameter2 (sytem2)

10K
No. Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
5501 Optional 4th-axis 1
5502 Optional 5th-axis 0
5503 Optional 6th-axis 0
5504 Optional 7th-axis 0
5505 Optional 8th-axis 0
5506 5th-axis position 1
5507 6th-axis position 2
5508 7th-axis position 1
5509 8th-axis position 2
5510 4th-axis address 2
5511 5th-axis address 1
5512 6th-axis address 1
5513 7th-axis address 0
5514 8th-axis address 0
5515 4th-axis zero return order 1
5516 5th-axis zero return order 2
5517 6th-axis zero return order 2
5518 7th-axis zero return order 2
5519 8th-axis zero return order 2
5520 4th-axis backlash compensation 0
5521 5th-axis backlash compensation 0
5522 6th-axis backlash compensation 0

2011/10/25 7 - 38 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 7 Machine parameter

10K
No. Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
5523 7th-axis backlash compensation 0
5524 8th-axis backlash compensation 0
5525 4th-axis zero offset 0
5526 5th-axis zero offset 0
5527 6th-axis zero offset 0
5528 7th-axis zero offset 0
5529 8th-axis zero offset 0
5530 4th-axis grid shift 0
5531 5th-axis grid shift 0
5532 6th-axis grid shift 0
5533 7th-axis grid shift 0
5534 8th-axis grid shift 0
5535 Pallet 1 indexing angle 0.000
5536 Pallet 2 indexing angle -180.000
5537 4th-axis dog zero return distance 20.000
5538 5th-axis dog zero return distance 20.000
5539 6th-axis dog zero return distance 20.000
5540 7th-axis dog zero return distance 20.000
5541 8th-axis dog zero return distance 20.000
5542 Return angle with servo controller ON 0.300
5543 4th-axis overrun angle 0.150
5544 4th-axis low speed travel angle 0.300
5545 4th-axis in-position check timeout
5000
period
5546 5th-axis in-position check timeout
5000
period
5547 6th-axis in-position check timeout
5000
7
period
5548 7th-axis in-position check timeout
5000
period
5549 8th-axis in-position check timeout
5000
period
5550 4th-axis in-position width 9830
5551 5th-axis in-position width 100
5552 6th-axis in-position width 100
5553 7th-axis in-position width 100
5554 8th-axis in-position width 100
5555 4th-axis positioning end check angle 0.300
5556 5th-axis positioning end check angle 0.300
5557 6th-axis positioning end check angle 0.300
5558 7th-axis positioning end check angle 0.300
5559 8th-axis positioning end check angle 0.300
5560 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 1A 400
5561 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 2A 200
5562 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 3A 0
5563 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 1A 200
5564 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 2A 50
5565 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 3A 0
5566 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 1A 200
5567 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 2A 50
5568 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 3A 0
5569 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 1A 200
5570 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 2A 50
5571 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 3A 0
5572 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 1A 200
5573 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 2A 50
5574 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 3A 0

2011/10/25 7 - 39 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
 Chapter 7 Machine parameter TC-R2B

10K
No. Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
5575 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 1B 400
5576 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 2B 200
5577 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 3B 0
5578 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 1B 200
5579 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 2B 50
5580 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 3B 0
5581 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 1B 200
5582 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 2B 50
5583 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 3B 0
5584 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 1B 200
5585 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 2B 50
5586 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 3B 0
5587 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 1B 200
5588 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 2B 50
5589 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 3B 0
5590 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 1C 400
5591 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 2C 200
5592 4th-axis rapid feed time const. 3C 0
5593 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 1 200
5594 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 2 50
5595 5th-axis rapid feed time const. 3 0
5596 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 1C 200
5597 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 2C 50
5598 6th-axis rapid feed time const. 3C 0
5599 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 1C 200
5600 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 2C 50
7 5601 7th-axis rapid feed time const. 3C 0
5602 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 1C 200
5603 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 2C 50
5604 8th-axis rapid feed time const. 3C 0
5605 4th –axis min. rapid feed time const.
100
Ratio
5606 4th-axis time const. Change distance A 0.000
5607 4th-axis time const. Change distance B 0.000
5608 5th-axis time const. Change distance A 0.000
5609 5th-axis time const. Change distance B 0.000
5610 6th-axis time const. Change distance A 0.000
5611 6th-axis time const. Change distance B 0.000
5612 7th-axis time const. Change distance A 0.000
5613 7th-axis time const. Change distance B 0.000
5614 8th-axis time const. Change distance A 0.000
5615 8th-axis time const. Change distance B 0.000
5616 4th-axis lower limit time const. 20
5617 5th-axis lower limit time const. 20
5618 6th-axis lower limit time const. 20
5619 7th-axis lower limit time const. 20
5620 8th-axis lower limit time const. 20
5621 4th-axis low speed time const. 1 40
5622 4th-axis low speed time const. 2 20
5623 4th-axis low speed time const. 3 0
5624 4th-axis rapid feedrate 15.0
5625 5th-axis rapid feedrate 33.3
5626 6th-axis rapid feedrate 33.3
5627 7th-axis rapid feedrate 33.3
5628 8th-axis rapid feedrate 33.3
5629 4th-axis rapid ٛ ederate(door open) 1.5
5630 5th-axis rapid ٛ ederate(door open) 8.0

2011/10/25 7 - 40 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 7 Machine parameter

10K
No. Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
5631 6th-axis rapid ٛ ederate(door open) 8.0
5632 7th-axis rapid ٛ ederate(door open) 8.0
5633 8th-axis rapid ٛ ederate(door open) 8.0
5634 4th-axis max. cutting rotation speed 15.0
5635 5th-axis max. cutting rotation speed 33.3
5636 6th-axis max. cutting rotation speed 33.3
5637 7th-axis max. cutting rotation speed 33.3
5638 8th-axis max. cutting rotation speed 33.3
5639 4th-axis high rotation speed during dog
10.0
zero return
5640 5th-axis high rotation speed during dog
10.0
zero return
5641 6th-axis high rotation speed during dog
10.0
zero return
5642 7th-axis high rotation speed during dog
10.0
zero return
5643 8th-axis high rotation speed during dog
10.0
zero return
5644 4th-axis low rotation speed during dog
0.5
zero return
5645 5th-axis low rotation speed during dog
0.5
zero return
5646 6th-axis low rotation speed during dog
0.5
zero return
5647 7th-axis low rotation speed during dog
0.5
zero return
5648 8th-axis low rotation speed during dog
zero return
0.5 7
5649 4th-axis manual rapid feedrate 2.0
5650 4th-axis low rotation speed 0.3
5651 4th-axis gear ratio 90
5652 5th-axis gear ratio 90
5653 6th-axis gear ratio 90
5654 7th-axis gear ratio 90
5655 8th-axis gear ratio 90
5656 4th-axis dog zero return dir. 0
5657 5th-axis dog zero return dir. 0
5658 6th-axis dog zero return dir. 0
5659 7th-axis dog zero return dir. 0
5660 8th-axis dog zero return dir. 0
5661 4th-axis zero dec. input signal 0
5662 5th-axis zero dec. input signal 0
5663 6th-axis zero dec. input signal 0
5664 7th-axis zero dec. input signal 0
5665 8th-axis zero dec. input signal 0
5666 4th-axis clamp mechanism 2
5667 5th-axis clamp mechanism 1
5668 6th-axis clamp mechanism 1
5669 7th-axis clamp mechanism 1
5670 8th-axis clamp mechanism 1
5671 4th-axis unclamp check input signal 1
5672 5th-axis unclamp check input signal 0
5673 6th-axis unclamp check input signal 0
5674 7th-axis unclamp check input signal 0
5675 8th-axis unclamp check input signal 0
5676 4th-axis clamp check input signal 2
5677 5th-axis clamp check input signal 0
5678 6th-axis clamp check input signal 0

2011/10/25 7 - 41 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
 Chapter 7 Machine parameter TC-R2B

10K
No. Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
5679 7th-axis clamp check input signal 0
5680 8th-axis clamp check input signal 0
5681 4th-axis unclamp output signal 0
5682 5th-axis unclamp output signal 1
5683 6th-axis unclamp output signal 1
5684 7th-axis unclamp output signal 1
5685 8th-axis unclamp output signal 1
5686 Pause after 4th-axis unclamp 0
5687 Pause after 5th-axis unclamp 200
5688 Pause after 6th-axis unclamp 200
5689 Pause after 7th-axis unclamp 200
5690 Pause after 8th-axis unclamp 200
5691 Pause after 4th-axis clamp 10
5692 Pause after 5th-axis clamp 50
5693 Pause after 6th-axis clamp 50
5694 Pause after 7th-axis clamp 50
5695 Pause after 8th-axis clamp 50
5696 Pause after 4th-axis positioning 0
5697 Pause after 5th-axis positioning 0
5698 Pause after 6th-axis positioning 0
5699 Pause after 7th-axis positioning 0
5700 Pause after 8th-axis positioning 0
5701 4th-axis position check pulse 12000
5702 5th-axis position check pulse 2000
5703 6th-axis position check pulse 2000
5704 7th-axis position check pulse 2000
7 5705 8th-axis position check pulse 2000
5706 4th-axis check invalid time 20
5707 Pause after 4th-axis stop 6
5708 Pause until 4th-axis stops 5
5709 Pause until 4th-axis stop is confirmed 20
5710 4th-axis stop current detection range 6
5711 4th-axis stop position deviation 100
5712 4th-axis stop current ref. Value 45
5713 4th-axis current check time 0
5714 4th-axis current tolerance 300
5715 Quick table 2
5716 4th-axis position loop gain 2 start pulse 0
5717 5th-axis position loop gain 2 start pulse 0
5718 6th-axis position loop gain 2 start pulse 0
5719 7th-axis position loop gain 2 start pulse 0
5720 8th-axis position loop gain 2 start pulse 0
5721 4th-axis position loop gain 2 end pulse 0
5722 5th-axis position loop gain 2 end pulse 0
5723 6th-axis position loop gain 2 end pulse 0
5724 7th-axis position loop gain 2 end pulse 0
5725 8th-axis position loop gain 2 end pulse 0
5726 4th-axis changing time 0
5727 5th-axis changing time 0
5728 6th-axis changing time 0
5729 7th-axis changing time 0
5730 8th-axis changing time 0
5731 4th-axis abso.encoder rotation dir. 1
5732 5th-axis abso.encoder rotation dir. 0
5733 6th-axis abso.encoder rotation dir. 0
5734 7th-axis abso.encoder rotation dir. 0
5735 8th-axis abso.encoder rotation dir. 0

2011/10/25 7 - 42 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 7 Machine parameter

Machine parameter3 (system3)

10K
No. Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
6001 Magazine cover interlock 1
6002 Magazine backlash compensation 0
6003 Magazine zero offset 0
6004 Magazine grid shift 0
6005 Magazine dog zero return distance 0.000
6006 Magazine in-position check timeout
5000
period
6007 Magazine in-position width 800
6008 Magazine rapid feed time const. 1A 140
6009 Magazine rapid feed time const. 2A 35
6010 Magazine rapid feed time const. 3A 0
6011 Magazine rapid feed time const. 1B 140
6012 Magazine rapid feed time const. 2B 35
6013 Magazine rapid feed time const. 3B 0
6014 Magazine rapid feed time const. 1C 140
6015 Magazine rapid feed time const. 2C 35
6016 Magazine rapid feed time const. 3C 0
6017 Magazine time const. Change distance A 0.000
6018 Magazine time const. Change distance B 0.000
6019 Magazine lower limit time const. 20
6020 Magazine rapid feedrate 33.4
6021 Magazine rapid ٛ ederate(door open) 4.0
6022 Magazine high rotation speed during dog
15.0
zero return
6023 Magazine low rotation speed during dog
15.0 7
zero return
6024 Magazine gear ratio 150
6025 Magazine zero dec. input signal 0
6026 Magazine zero dec. input signal 0
6027 Magazine clamp mechanism 0
6028 Magazine unclamp check input signal 0
6029 Magazine clamp check input signal 0
6030 Magazine unclamp output signal 0
6031 Pause after magazine unclamp 0
6032 Pause after magazine clamp 0
6033 Pause after magazine positioning 0
6034 Pot rising check time 200
6035 Pot lowering check time 100
6036 Pot operation monitor time 2000
6037 Minimum pot operation time 250
6038 Pause after ATC arm turn 0
6039 Magazine current limit check time 1000
6040 Magazine position check pulse 1600
6041 Magazine tolerance 6400
6042 ATC arm turn timeout period 1 2400
6043 ATC arm turn timeout period 2 1550
6044 ATC arm turn timeout period 3 1750
6045 ATC arm turn timeout period 4 1150
6046 Magazine abso. Encoder rotation dir. 1
6047 Medium diameter tool function 0
6048 Distance between magazine pots 63.500
6049 Magazine/pot shutter signal 0
6050 ATC arm shutter signal 0

2011/10/25 7 - 43 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
 Chapter 7 Machine parameter TC-R2B

10K
No. Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
6051 High-speed magazine rapid feed time
115
const. 1A
6052 High-speed magazine rapid feed time
29
const. 2A
6053 High-speed magazine rapid feed time
0
const. 3A
6054 High-speed magazine rapid feed time
115
const. 1B
6055 High-speed magazine rapid feed time
29
const. 2B
6056 High-speed magazine rapid feed time
0
const. 3B
6057 High-speed magazine rapid feed time
115
const. 1C
6058 High-speed magazine rapid feed time
29
const. 2C
6059 High-speed magazine rapid feed time
0
const. 3C
6060 High-speed magazine time constant
0.000
change distance A
6061 High-speed magazine time constant
0.000
change distance B
6062 High-speed magazine rapid feedrate 40.0
6063 Minimum arm turning time 1 1136
6064 Minimum arm turning time 2 714
6065 Minimum arm turning time 3 812
6066 Minimum arm turning time 4 534
7 6067 Magazine position deviation tolerance
50
ratio
6068 High-speed magazine position deviation
50
tolerance ratio
6069 Magazine position deviation restriction
25
speed ratio
6070 High-speed magazine position deviation
25
restriction speed ratio
6071 Magazine rapid feedrate (speed
20.0
restricted)
6072 Pot rising check time 2 0
6073 lowering check time 2 0
6074 Arm turn speed switching time 0
6075 Arm turn speed switching time2 0
6076 ATC arm pre-turn monitor time 0

Machine parameter4 (Pitch error compensation)

10K
No. Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
1 X-axis(1~50) －
2 Y-axis(1~50) －
3 Z-axis(1~50) －
4 4-axis(1~50) 0
5 5-axis(1~50) 0
6 6-axis(1~50) 0
7 7-axis(1~50) 0
8 8-axis(1~50) 0
9 9-axis(1~50) 0
10 10-axis(1~50) 0

2011/10/25 7 - 44 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 7 Machine parameter

Machine parameter 5 (Servo parameter)

Servo parameter number :Spindle 15000’s, X-axis 01000’s, Y-axis 02000’s, Z-axis 03000’s
4th-axis 04000’s, 5th-axis 05000’s, 6th-axis 06000’s, 7th-axis 07000’s
8th-axis 08000’s, M-axis 09000’s
Spindle
Servo
Spindle Spindle 16K
parameter X-axis Y-axis Z-axis 4th axis 5678th-axis M-axis
10K 16K (High
No.
torque)
0?001 16412 16411 20483 8216 8216 8225 4129 24 43
0?002 2 2 2 32776 32776 32776 32776 32776 32776
0?003 0 0 0 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024
0?004 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 4
0?005 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6
5th axis
1
6th axis
2
0?006 0 0 0 1 2 3 0 5
7th axis
3
8th axis
4
0?007 750 750 750 750 750 750 1500 1500 1500
0?008 456 456 456 456 456 456 1000 1000 1000
0?009 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
0?010 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?011 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
0?012 33 33 33 33 33 33 49 49 49
0?013 9 9 9 9 9 9 17 17 17
0?014
0?015
90
9
90
9
90
9
90
9
90
9
150
9
150
9
150
9
90
9
7
0?016 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90
0?017 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
0?018 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?019 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
0?020 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
0?021 200 280 110 430 330 250 0 0 300
0?022 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0
0?023 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 0 0
0?024 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 0 0
0?025 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
0?026 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
0?027 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
0?028 600 400 600 1600 1600 1600 200 600 600
0?029 560 650 600 1070 1200 1160 2000 2000 2000
0?030 720 800 820 1700 1700 2000 2000 2000 2000
0?031 1500 1500 1500 800 800 1500 1500 1500 1500
0?032 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
0?033 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
0?034 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
0?035 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
0?036 2000 2000 2000 350 350 2000 2000 2000 2000
0?037 0 0 0 60 60 0 0 0 0
0?038 100 100 100 700 700 100 100 100 100
0?039 28 28 28 26 26 2000 2000 28 28
0?040 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?041 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?042 0 0 0 100 100 0 0 100 100
0?043 0 0 0 6 6 0 0 0 0
0?044 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?045 500 500 500 22 27 500 500 500 25

2011/10/25 7 - 45 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
 Chapter 7 Machine parameter TC-R2B

Spindle
Servo
Spindle Spindle 16K
parameter X-axis Y-axis Z-axis 4th axis 5678th-axis M-axis
10K 16K (High
No.
torque)
0?046 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?047 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?048 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?049 20 20 20 100 100 100 100 100 100
0?050 1000 1000 1000 500 500 500 500 500 500
0?051 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535
0?052 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500
0?053 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
0?054 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
0?055 15 15 15 10 10 10 10 10 10
0?056 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
0?057 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535
0?058 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
0?059 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
0?060 170 170 170 300 300 300 300 300 300
0?061 0 0 0 48 48 0 134 0 180
0?062 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?063 0 0 0 0 0 300 0 0 0
0?064 0 0 0 0 0 25 0 0 0
0?065 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?066 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?067 1500 1300 2000 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?068 0 0 0 1280 1280 1536 0 0 0
0?069 0 0 0 16 16 80 0 0 0
0?070 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 0?071 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?072 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?073 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?074 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0?075 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
0?076 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?077 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?078 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?079 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?080 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?081 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0?082 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
0?083 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
0?084 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?085 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?086 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?087 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0?088 240 240 240 240 240 240 0 0 0
0?089 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 0 0 0
0?090 20 20 20 20 20 20 0 0 0
0?091 0 0 0 100 100 100 0 0 0
0?092 12 15 12 30 30 30 20 20 20
0?093 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?094 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?095 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?096 40 40 40 54 54 54 40 40 40
0?097 0 0 0 90 90 50 50 50 50
0?098 100 180 100 350 350 500 100 100 100
0?099 180 180 180 50 50 40 200 200 100
0?100 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
0?101 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
0?102 1500 1500 1500 247 247 494 1500 1500 10000

2011/10/25 7 - 46 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 7 Machine parameter

Spindle
Servo
Spindle Spindle 16K
parameter X-axis Y-axis Z-axis 4th axis 5678th-axis M-axis
10K 16K (High
No.
torque)
0?103 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?104 40 40 50 54 54 54 40 40 40
0?105 0 0 0 90 90 50 50 50 50
0?106 100 180 100 350 350 500 100 100 300
0?107 180 180 180 50 50 40 200 200 100
0?108 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
0?109 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
0?110 134 214 134 330 330 659 1500 1500 10000
0?111 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?112 30 30 30 54 54 54 40 40 40
0?113 0 0 0 90 90 50 75 75 50
0?114 100 120 100 350 350 500 100 100 300
0?115 180 200 180 50 50 40 200 200 100
0?116 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
0?117 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
0?118 134 214 134 330 330 659 1500 1500 10000
0?119 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?120 70 70 70 54 54 54 40 40 40
0?121 0 0 0 90 90 50 50 50 50
0?122 170 210 120 350 350 500 300 100 300
0?123 50 50 50 50 50 40 500 200 100
0?124 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
0?125 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
0?126 134 214 134 330 330 659 1500 1500 10000
0?127 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?128 70 70 70 54 54 54 40 40 0 7
0?129 0 0 0 75 75 75 50 50 0
0?130 170 210 120 350 350 500 300 100 0
0?131 50 50 50 50 50 40 500 200 0
0?132 500 500 500 500 500 500 150 500 0
0?133 500 500 500 500 500 500 150 500 0
0?134 16 16 16 247 247 494 500 1500 0
0?135 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?136 70 70 70 0 0 40 40 0 0
0?137 0 0 0 0 0 75 50 0 0
0?138 100 120 100 0 0 500 100 0 0
0?139 180 200 180 0 0 40 500 0 0
0?140 500 500 500 0 0 500 20 0 0
0?141 500 500 500 0 0 500 20 0 0
0?142 16 16 16 0 0 659 500 0 0
0?143 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?144 0 0 0 0 0 0 40 0 0
0?145 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 0 0
0?146 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0
0?147 0 0 0 0 0 0 200 0 0
0?148 0 0 0 0 0 0 500 0 0
0?149 0 0 0 0 0 0 500 0 0
0?150 0 0 0 0 0 0 1500 0 0
0?151 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?152 0 0 0 0 0 0 40 0 0
0?153 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 0 0
0?154 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0
0?155 0 0 0 0 0 0 200 0 0
0?156 0 0 0 0 0 0 500 0 0
0?157 0 0 0 0 0 0 500 0 0
0?158 0 0 0 0 0 0 1500 0 0
0?159 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2011/10/25 7 - 47 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
 Chapter 7 Machine parameter TC-R2B

Spindle
Servo
Spindle Spindle 16K
parameter X-axis Y-axis Z-axis 4th axis 5678th-axis M-axis
10K 16K (High
No.
torque)
0?160 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?161 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?162 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?163 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?164 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?165 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?166 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?167 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?168 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?169 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?170 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?171 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?172 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?173 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?174 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?175 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?176 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?177 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?178 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?179 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?180 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?181 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?182 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?183 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?184 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 0?185 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?186 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?187 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?188 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?189 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?190 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?191 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?193 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?194 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?195 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?196 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?197 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?198 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?199 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?201 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?202 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?203 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?204 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?205 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?206 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?207 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?208 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?209 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?210 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?211 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?212 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?213 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?214 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?215 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?216 0 0 0 2 2 2 0 0 0

2011/10/25 7 - 48 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 7 Machine parameter

Spindle
Servo
Spindle Spindle 16K
parameter X-axis Y-axis Z-axis 4th axis 5678th-axis M-axis
10K 16K (High
No.
torque)
0?217 0 0 0 2 3 0 0 0 0
0?218 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?219 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?220 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
0?221 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
0?222 3000 3000 3000 2200 2300 2500 3000 0 0
0?223 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 0 0
0?224~
0?298 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(15398)
0?299
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
(15399)
0?300
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(15400)
0?301~
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0?400

2011/10/25 7 - 49 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
 Chapter 7 Machine parameter TC-R2B

Machine parameter 6 (Automatic thermal distortion compensation 1 )

10K
No. Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
6501 Z-axis max. displacement const. 1 0.0152
6502 Z-axis max. displacement const. 2 0.0
6503 Z-axis expansion displacement const. 3 2.01
6504 Z-axis contraction displacement const. 3 2.48
6505 Spindle max. displacement const. 1
0.0032 0.0029 0.0064
(Z-axis)
6506 Spindle max. displacement const. 2
0.0
(Z-axis)
6507 Spindle expansion displacement const. 3
1.94 0.72
(Z-axis)
6508 Spindle contraction displacement const.
1.12 1.29 0.72
3 (Z-axis)
6509 X-axis max. displacement const. 1 0.0168
6510 X-axis max. displacement const. 2 0.0
6511 X-axis expansion displacement const. 3 2.00
6512 X-axis contraction displacement const.
2.00
3
6513 Spindle max. displacement const. 1
0.0000
(X-axis)
6514 Spindle max. displacement const. 2
0.0
(X-axis)
6515 Spindle expansion displacement const. 3
0.01
(X-axis)
6516 Spindle contraction displacement const.
0.01
3 (X-axis)
7 6517 Y-axis max. displacement const. 1 0.0137
6518 Y-axis max. displacement const. 2 0.0
6519 Y-axis expansion displacement const. 3 2.0
6520 Spindle contraction displacement const.
1.81
3 (Y-axis)
6521 Spindle max. displacement const. 1
0.0017 0.0014 0.0032
(Y-axis)
6522 Spindle max. displacement const. 2
0.0
(Y-axis)
6523 Spindle expansion displacement const. 3
1.90 0.33
(Y-axis)
6524 Spindle contraction displacement const.
0.52 0.56 0.33
3 (Y-axis)

Machine parameter 6
（Automatic thermal distortion compensation 2/Ball screw adjustment）
№ Item 10K 16K 10K
(High torque)
7501 X-axis thermal distortion
1.00
compensation coefficient A1
7502 X-axis thermal distortion
1.00
compensation coefficient A2
7503 X-axis thermal distortion
1.00
compensation coefficient A3
7504 X-axis thermal distortion
1.00
compensation coefficient B
7505 X-axis thermal distortion
1.00
compensation coefficient E
7506 X-axis thermal distortion
1.00
compensation coefficient F1
7507 X-axis thermal distortion
1.00
compensation coefficient F2

2011/10/25 7 - 50 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 7 Machine parameter

№ Item 10K 16K 10K

(High torque)
7508 X-axis thermal distortion
1.00
compensation coefficient F3
X-axis thermal distortion
7509 1.00
compensation coefficient F4
Y-axis thermal distortion
7510 1.00
compensation coefficient A1
Y-axis thermal distortion
7511 1.00
compensation coefficient A2
Y-axis thermal distortion
7512 1.00
compensation coefficient A3
Y-axis thermal distortion
7513 1.00
compensation coefficient B
Y-axis thermal distortion
7514 1.00
compensation coefficient E
Y-axis thermal distortion
7515 1.00
compensation coefficient F1
Y-axis thermal distortion
7516 1.00
compensation coefficient F2
Y-axis thermal distortion
7517 1.00
compensation coefficient F3
Y-axis thermal distortion
7518 1.00
compensation coefficient F4
Z-axis thermal distortion
7519 1.00
compensation coefficient A1
Z-axis thermal distortion
7520 1.00
compensation coefficient A2
Z-axis thermal distortion
7521
compensation coefficient A3
1.00 7
Z-axis thermal distortion
7522 1.00
compensation coefficient B
Z-axis thermal distortion
7523 1.00
compensation coefficient E
Z-axis thermal distortion
7524 1.00
compensation coefficient F1
Z-axis thermal distortion
7525 1.00
compensation coefficient F2
Z-axis thermal distortion
7526 1.00
compensation coefficient F3
Z-axis thermal distortion
7527 1.00
compensation coefficient F4

Machine parameter 6
（Atomatic thermal distortion compensation 2 /ball screw system）
10K
№ Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
8001 X axis thermal distortion
0.000000
constant A1
8002 X axis thermal distortion
0.000000
constant A2
8003 X axis thermal distortion
0.0000
constant A3
8004 X axis thermal distortion
0.0000
constant A4
8005 X axis thermal distortion
0.0000
constant B
8006 X axis thermal distortion
0
constant C1
8007 X axis thermal distortion
0
constant C2

2011/10/25 7 - 51 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
 Chapter 7 Machine parameter TC-R2B

10K
№ Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
8008 X axis thermal distortion
0
constant C3
8009 X axis thermal distortion
0
constant C4
8010 X axis thermal distortion
0
constant C5
8011 X axis thermal distortion
0
constant C6
8012 X axis thermal distortion
0
constant C7
8013 X axis thermal distortion
0
constant C8
8014 X axis thermal distortion
0
constant C9
8015 X axis thermal distortion
0
constant C10
8016 X axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D1
8017 X axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D2
8018 X axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D3
8019 X axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D4
8020 X axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D5
8021 X axis thermal distortion
7 constant D6
0.0000000
8022 X axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D7
8023 X axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D8
8024 X axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D9
8025 X axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D10
8026 X axis thermal distortion
0.0000
constant E
8027 X axis thermal distortion
0.000000
constant F1
8028 X axis thermal distortion
0.000000
constant F2
8029 X axis thermal distortion
0.000000
constant F3
8030 X axis thermal distortion
0.00
constant F4
8031 Y axis thermal distortion
0.000000
constant A1
8032 Y axis thermal distortion
0.000000
constant A2
8033 Y axis thermal distortion
0.0000
constant A3
8034 Y axis thermal distortion
0.0000
constant A4
8035 Y axis thermal distortion
0.0000
constant B
8036 Y axis thermal distortion
0
constant C1

2011/10/25 7 - 52 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 7 Machine parameter

10K
№ Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
8037 Y axis thermal distortion
0
constant C2
8038 Y axis thermal distortion
0
constant C3
8039 Y axis thermal distortion
0
constant C4
8040 Y axis thermal distortion
0
constant C5
8041 Y axis thermal distortion
0
constant C6
8042 Y axis thermal distortion
0
constant C7
8043 Y axis thermal distortion
0
constant C8
8044 Y axis thermal distortion
0
constant C9
8045 Y axis thermal distortion
0
constant C10
8046 Y axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D1
8047 Y axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D2
8048 Y axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D3
8049 Y axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D4
8050 Y axis thermal distortion
constant D5
0.0000000 7
8051 Y axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D6
8052 Y axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D7
8053 Y axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D8
8054 Y axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D9
8055 Y axis thermal distortion
0.0000000
constant D10
8056 Y axis thermal distortion
0.0000
constant E
8057 Y axis thermal distortion
0.000000
constant F1
8058 Y axis thermal distortion
0.000000
constant F2
8059 Y axis thermal distortion
0.000000
constant F3
8060 Y axis thermal distortion
0.00
constant F4
8061 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.000000
A1
8062 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.000000
A2
8063 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.0000
A3
8064 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.0000
A4
8065 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.0000
B

2011/10/25 7 - 53 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
 Chapter 7 Machine parameter TC-R2B

10K
№ Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
8066 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0
C1
8067 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0
C2
8068 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0
C3
8069 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0
C4
8070 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0
C5
8071 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0
C6
8072 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0
C7
8073 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0
C8
8074 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0
C9
8075 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0
C10
8076 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.0000000
D1
8077 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.0000000
D2
8078 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.0000000
D3
8079 Z axis thermal distortion constant
7 D4
0.0000000
8080 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.0000000
D5
8081 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.0000000
D6
8082 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.0000000
D7
8083 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.0000000
D8
8084 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.0000000
D9
8085 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.0000000
D10
8086 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.0000
E
8087 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.000000
F1
8088 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.000000
F2
8089 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.000000
F3
8090 Z axis thermal distortion constant
0.00
F4

2011/10/25 7 - 54 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 7 Machine parameter

Machine parameter 7 (High-accuracy)

10K
№ Item 10K 16K
(High torque)
7001 Speed clamp time A 0.000
7002 Max. feedrate A 20000
7003 Tolerance threshold A 100
7004 Corner acc. tolerance A 0.011
7005 Arc acc. tolerance A 0.060
7006 Arc approx. acc. tolerance A 0.060
7007 Corner dec. speed gap A 200
7008 Corner dec. time A 0
7009 High-accuracy A Cutting feed time
90
const.1(Group 1)
7010 High-accuracy A Cutting feed time
45
const.2(Group 1)
7011 High-accuracy A Cutting feed time
0
const.3((Group 1)
7012 Min. arc speed A 200
7013 Reference feedrate A 10000
7014 High accuracy A Cutting feed time
90
const.1(Group 2)
7015 High accuracy A Cutting feed time
45
const.2(Group 2)
7016 High-accuracy A Cutting feed time
45
const.3(Group 2)
7017 High accuracy A Cutting feed time
90
const.1(Group 3)
7018 High accuracy A Cutting feed time 7
45
const.2(Group 3)
7019 High accuracy A Cutting feed time
22
const. (Group 3)

2011/10/25 7 - 55 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
 Chapter 7 Machine parameter TC-R2B

7 (This page is blank.)

2011/10/25 7 - 56 eTR2BIN7-2.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 8 Adjustment

CHAPTER 8

ADJUSTMENT

8.1 Spindle, X-, Y-, Z- axis and Magazine positioning

check in case of servo error

2010/01/26 8-1 eTR2BIN8.doc

 Chapter 8 Adjustment TC-R2B

8.1 Spindle, X-, Y-, Z- axis and Magazine

Positioning Check in Case of Servo Error
WARNING
You may be caught in the machine during machining, resulting in a
serious injury.
Do not enter within the machine cover during operation.
Visually check that nobody is inside the machine cover before
starting machine operation.
Keep your hands, feet, and body away from moving parts during
operation.
When you have to enter the machine, turn off the main
power breaker and padlock it so that the main power breaker
cannot be turned on.

If a servo motor is overloaded by an interference between tool and work piece or jig or by the
cutting conditions beyond the machine capacity and that the servo error is displayed on the screen,
be sure to check the positioning of the spindle.

(1) Checking the positioning of the spindle

Turn off the power, then turn on and follow the step below.

(1) Press [MANU] key to valid the manual operation mode.

(2) Move axes into the safety area and perform zero point return.
(3) Press once [ATC] key to position the spindle.
8 (4) Set a dial indicator on the table and bring its tip into contact with a side of the key.
(5) Make sure that the line connecting two keys and Y axis are parallel with a deviation of
0.1mm or less, by moving the table in Y axis.

(Reference)
Positioning of the spindle is refereed to as making parallel the line connecting two
keys on both sides of the spindle and Y axis movement.

2010/01/26 8-2 eTR2BIN8.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 8 Adjustment

Fig.8-1 Checking the positioning of the spindle

Y axis

Two keys

Dial indicator

0.1mm or less

Y axis

230E08C01.doc

(2) Checking the positioning of X, Y and Z axes

Turn off the power, then turn on and following the step below.

(1) Press [MANU] key to valid the manual operation mode.

(2) Move axes into the safety area and perform zero point return.
(3)
(4)
Press [MEM] key to validate the memory operation mode.
Press [SINGL] key to validate the single run mode.
8
(5) Execute the program block by block and check the positioning of X, Y and Z axes.

2010/01/26 8-3 eTR2BIN8.doc

 Chapter 8 Adjustment TC-R2B

(This page is blank.)

2010/01/26 8-4 eTR2BIN8.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

CHAPTER 9

INSPECTIONS

9.1 Regular Inspections

9.2 Inspection of Machine Lubricants
9.3 Key Check
9.4 Periodic Machine Cleaning
9.5 Consumable Parts Replacement
9.6 List of Consumable Parts

2010/11/05 9-1 eTR2BIN9-1.doc

 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

9.1 Regular Inspections

This section gives a description of the machine inspections.
The machine must be periodically inspected to prevent its failure and to
maintain its accuracy.

 Do not use compressed air and washing gun to clean and remove cutting chips to the working
part of a machine such as ball screws, guides, magazines, ATC, spindles, control unit and
operation panel. Using compressed air and washing gun to the working part will cause oil,
water and cutting chips to adhere to the machine, which leads to machine defect.
 If the machine gives off unusual noise or vibrations, identify their cause and contact us if
necessary.
 When replacing a part, use the spare part that we specify. Using another type of part may
cause a machine failure.
 Periodically inspect the machine in comply with the check list.

Table 9-1 Check list for regular inspection

Checking
Check item
interval
Daily 1. Check that the safety unit is mounted correctly.
2. Check that the safety unit operates correctly.
3. Check the noise during ATC. *1
4. Check that the CNC unit and the cooling fan function properly.
5. Check that the cooling fan for the spindle motor function properly.
6. Check that the taper on the spindle nose is not dirty or damaged.
7. Check that the spindle does not give off unusual noise.
8. Check that the spindle is properly oriented.
9. Check that no chip is left in the machine cover.
10. Check that no chip is left in the chip pan.
11. Check that the telescopic cover of X and Y axes are not damaged.
12. Check that the connection rubber part (wiper) for the telescopic cover is not
damaged.
13. Check that oil level is within a oil gauge mark of the quick table.
14. Check that Y axis harness cover is not damaged.
15. Check that Z axis apron cover is not damaged.
9 16. Check that magazine rotates smoothly and tool change is performed correctly.
17. Check that coolant discharge rate of tool cleaning system is not small. (*2)
Monthly 1. Check that power supply is 200V±10%.
2. Check that machine level is better than 0.02mm/m on both X- and Y-axes.
3. Check that the safety label is attached to the correct position on the machine.
4. Check that no defect to move the X-, Y- and Z- axes for entire stroke.
5. Clean up chips in the Y axis cover. (Refer to Regular Inspections.)
6. Check that the cooling fan of the control box side face or ceiling regenerative
resistance is not clogged.
7. Check that the fan of the spindle motor is not clogged.
8. Check that the coolant tank is not dirty. (Refer to “11.1 Coolant Unit,
1. Cautions for Handling, Maintenance” to clean the coolant tank.)
Shorter Apply oil to the ball screw parts and the guide parts.
period
about 6
months or
1000 actual
working
hours
*1 Use the [ATC] key in manual mode to check for noise during ATC.
See the Operation Manual “ Manual Operation” Tool Change for details of the [ATC] key
operation.

2010/11/05 9-2 eTR2BIN9-1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

*2 Checking coolant discharge rate of tool cleaning system

1. Set the rapid traverse override to 500 mm/min.
(500 mm/min is factory-set for rapid traverse override switch 2.)
2. Conduct ATC using the [ATC] key in manual mode. Tool cleaning coolant is
discharged within the ATC range. Check the discharge rate.

9.1.1 Check before operation of the quick table

1. Gear oil level check
Check the gear oil level as Figure below.

Plug (Air drain)

Oil window
It is OK when the
oil level is higher
then the center
level.

Oil cap

Plug (Oil drain hole) 0901-1ai

Note:
If the oil level is lower than the window center red marking, supply gear oil.

2. Warming up before operation

If the temperature is lower than 5 degrees Celsius, warm up the machine before operation.
It will reduce the viscosity of the gear oil.

2010/11/05 9-3 eTR2BIN9-1.doc

 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

9.2 Inspection of Machine Lubricants

WARNING
The machine may suddenly move or tools may fall down.
When the emergency stop switch is not pressed, do not put
your hands, feet, and body under the spindle head.
Position the quick table to set-up.
Turn off the main power breaker, padlock the main power
breaker so that it cannot be turned on, and apply grease to the
machine.

Lubrication reduces machine friction in order to avoid machine burnout.

This helps maintain machining accuracy and the machine service life.

9.2.1 Greasing interval

Apply grease to the machine in shorter period about 6 months or 1000 actual working hours after
its installation. Afterwards supply grease as required when the grease gets dirty. The machine is
greased before shipping.

9.2.2 Recommended grease

(1) Use one of the following four greases that we specify for linear motion bearings and ball
screws:
Product name Manufacturer
Multemp LRL3 Kyodo Yushi
Unirex N2 Exxon Mobil
Alvania Grease S No. 2 Shell
Multinoc Grease Nippon Oil
Do not use grease other than those specified, because it may cause machine failure.
If severe machining accuracy is required, it is recommended to use Multemp LRL3 (Kyodo Yushi)
or its equivalent to grease the ball screws. The machine is greased with this product before
shipping.
9
9.2.3 Lubricating points
(1) X- , Y- and Z- axes
Remove the maintenance cover on the machine cover of left face and apply grease.
Open the front door and apply grease.
Supplying amount
Linear motion bearing : 1 to 2g
Ball screw : 5 to 6g

2010/11/05 9-4 eTR2BIN9-1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

Y Ball screw

X linear guide

Y linear guide

X Ball screw 9

Z ball screw

Z linear guide

9-01,02,03,04.ai

2010/11/05 9-5 eTR2BIN9-1.doc

 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

9.2.4 Gear-oil supply and replacement

Remove the oil cap and pour gear oil as the figure below.
Note:
Before pouring, chips and cutting fluid around the oil cap and oil window must be
cleaned out to prevent them from coming in.

(Plug (Air drain)

Oil window
It is OK when the oil
level is higher then
the center level.

Oil cap

Plug (Oil drain hole)

0901-1ai
For better operation of quick table, replace gear oil once a year. (2.5L)
Do not drain hydraulic fluid into the sewage. Make sure to consign its disposal to an authorized
company.

Note:
The BONNOC AX 320(made by Nippon Oil) is used when our quick table is shipped
to the customers. This is a high load gear synthetic lubricating oil for industrial
use and can easily actuate the gear even when the temperature is lower. Further,
this oil has an excellent pressure resistance. The oil film is resistant enough even
when an extreme load or impact is applied, thus this oil is appropriate for the quick
9 table. When replenishing or replacing the oil, do not use other oils. When the
temperature is 5°C or higher, Mobil Gear SHC 320 (made by Exxon Mobil ) may be
used.

9.3 Key Check

To perform a key check, activate the key check mode by following the procedure below:

With the EMERGENCY STOP switch activated, turn on the power supply with
[RELSE] key and the FEED HOLD switch kept pressed.
The version screen of the I/O screen is displayed on the screen.

All key operations does not effective in the key check mode and only key check table can be
performed.
To disactivate the key check mode, press [RST].

2010/11/05 9-6 eTR2BIN9-1.doc

 Chapter 9 Inspections

KEY CODE LIST

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

0 CLT..P CHP.F LIGHT HELP F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0

1 O(A) N(B) G(C) X(U) Y(V) Z(W) 9 8 7 6 5 4

2 F(E) D H(L) P(I) Q(J) R(K) 3 2 1 0(#) .(,) -(+)

3 M(() S()) T(=) ?(]) INS CAN /(*) ([ ) DEL PALLET EOB/ENT

MANU
4 POS PRGRM ATC TOOL MONITR DSP OFF DATA BANK ALARM PALLET Z.RTN GRAPPH I/O
COND

5 ATC MAG.F MAG.R + RPD SP.CW - JOG STEP STOP

6 >> B.SKIP SINGL OP.STP DRY M.LCK

CURSOR CURSOR CURSOR CURSOR PAGE

7
↑ ↓ PAGE UP ← → DOWN

2009/11/02 9-7 eTR2BIN9-2.doc

 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

9.4 Periodic Machine Cleaning

WARNING
When chips scatter and get into the eyes, you may damage your
eyeballs and lose your eyesight.
Wear safety goggles against the chips.
Do not blow the chips by air.

WARNING
If you touch chips with bare hands, you may have your hand cut or
burnt.
Do not touch chips with bare hands.
Do not touch sharp edges of workpieces.
Wear gloves and use a brush when cleaning cutting chips.

WARNING
Touching the heated sections of the motor and the like may cause
you to be burned.
Do not touch such sections.

WARNING
Turn off the main power circuit breaker and then remove the
maintenance covers on the right and left side of the machine. After
cleaning, be sure to attach the maintenance covers and bolt them.
Do not remove the maintenance covers except when performing
cleaning and maintenance.

9 WARNING
When entering the machine, you may slip and fall down or be
caught in the machine.
When entering the machine, be sure to cut the main power
breaker, lock the breaker so that the breaker is not turned on, and
remove any coolant and chips. Also, wear safety shoes and a
helmet. Put up a signboard which says “Under maintenance”
near the operation panel.

9.4.1 Cleaning inside telescopic cover

The telescopic cover protects the ball screw, linear guide, and motor from the coolant and chips.
However, it is impossible to completely prevent chips from getting in.
It is necessary to clean the machine once a month according to the following procedure to maintain
the initial performance.

Note:
1. Make sure you turn off the main power breaker before you put any part of
your body inside it when working on it.
2. Do not remove chips by any method which scatters chips, such as
air-blasting, because it can causes the machine to breakdown.

2011/10/12 9-8 eTR2BIN9-3.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

1. Move the carriage in the positive direction of the X axis by manual operation until it
reaches the stroke end.
2. Turn off the power of the machine.
3. Remove the chips on the telescopic cover.

Telescopic cover
fixing screw

9
Remove the chips on the telescopic cover.

0907-1.ai

4. Remove the screws that are fixing the telescopic cover to the carriage.
5. Draw the telescopic cover toward you. (Refer to the figure in next page)

2011/10/12 9-9 eTR2BIN9-3.doc

 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

Clean up internal of
the telescopic cover.

Draw the telescopic cover

toward you.

9
0907-2.ai

6. Remove the chips in the telescopic cover.

7. Turn on the power of the machine after you move to a safe place.
8. Move the carriage in the minus direction of the X axis by manual operation until it reaches
the stroke end.
9. Turn off the power of the machine. (To adjust the telescopic cover with it not extended.)
10. Fasten the screws for fixing the telescopic cover.
The correct fastening torque for the fixing screws are 118 kgf cm (11.6N m).

9.4.2 Cleaning inside apron cover

The apron cover protects the ball screw and linear guide from the coolant and chips.
However, it is impossible to completely prevent chips from getting in.
It is necessary to clean the machine once a month according to the following procedure to maintain
the initial performance.

(Note)
1. Make sure you turn off the main power breaker before you put any part of
your body inside it when working on it.
2. Do not remove chips by any method which scatters chips, such as
air-blasting, because it can causes the machine to breakdown.

2011/10/12 9 - 10 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

1. Move the column in the positive direction of the X, Y axes by manual operation until it
reaches the stroke end.
2. Turn off the power of the machine.
3. Remove the chips on the apron cover.

Remove the chips

on the apron cover.

Telescopic cover
fixing screw

0907-1.ai
4. Remove the screws that are fixing the apron cover to the column.
5. Take out the apron cover toward you. (Refer to the figure in next page.)

2011/10/12 9 - 11 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

Clean up inside of
the apron cover.

9
0907-2.ai
6. Remove the chips in the apron cover.
7. Fasten the screws for fixing the apron cover.
The correct fastening torque for the fixing screws are 118 kgf cm (11.6N m).

After moving the XY table in the direction to attach the telescopic cover, until it
reaches the stroke end, attach the telescopic cover while it not extended.

2011/10/12 9 - 12 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

9.5 Consumable Parts Replacement

WARNING
When chips scatter and get into the eyes, you may damage your
eyeballs and lose your eyesight.
Wear safety goggles against the chips.
Do not blow the chips by air.

WARNING
If you touch chips with bare hands, you may have your hand cut
or burnt.
Do not touch chips with bare hands. Do not touch sharp edges
of workpieces.
Wear gloves and use a brush when cleaning cutting chips.

WARNING
Touching the heated sections of the motor and the like may cause
you to be burned.
Do not touch such sections.

WARNING
Turn off the main power circuit breaker and then remove the
maintenance covers on the right and left side of the machine.
After cleaning, be sure to attach the maintenance covers and bolt
them.
Do not remove the maintenance covers except when performing
cleaning and maintenance.

WARNING 9
When entering the machine, you may slip and fall down or be
caught in the machine.
When entering the machine, be sure to cut the main power breaker,
lock the breaker so that the breaker is not turn on, and remove any
coolant and chips. Also, wear safety shoes and a helmet.
Put up a signboard which says “Under maintenance” near the
operation panel.

2011/10/12 9 - 13 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

9.5.1 Door parts replacement

9.5.1.1 Door roller replacement
The door roller can become worn after long periods of operation, resulting in poor operation of the
door. Replace the door roller as described in the steps below.

Front door
1. Turn off the power and the main power circuit breaker.
2. Refer to “9.5.1.2 Door Wire Replacement ” for wire attachment.
Wire bracket assembly

F Door upper cover

F Door L F Door R

9-07,08.ai

2011/10/12 9 - 14 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

Upper roller

Lower roller

9-09.ai

3. Four rollers are attached to the top of door R and door L respectively (2 each for upper and
9
lower rows for each door). A slot is provided for the bolts in the lower rollers. Loosen the
roller shafts (hexagon bolts) and nuts of these rollers, and then move these rollers to the
bottom of the slot.
4. Tilt the door into the machine and lift it. Remove the two rollers attached to the bottom of
the door from the rails.
5. Follow steps 4 and 5 to remove door-L from the machine. When loosening the
roller shaft (bolt) and the nut of the lower row, position a wrench from the side to hold the
roller shaft (bolt).

2011/10/12 9 - 15 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

6. When doors R and L have been removed, remove the eight rollers (four each for doors R and
L) from the roller shafts (hexagon bolts), and then replace the rollers. The lower roller to be
secured with a hexagon bolt needs adjustment, so secure it temporarily.

Collar
Bearing injection

Roller shaft
Nut
(Hexagon head bolt)

Door roller (Copper)

Spring washer

Roller shaft
(Hexagon head bolt) Nut

Door roller (Resin)

Flat washer

7. Replace door lower rollers.

The table side roller to be secured in the oblong hole, thus lightly push the lower rollers
against the rails and secure them with bolts.

Door lower rollers

9-11.ai

2011/10/12 9 - 16 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

8. Mount doors-R and -L to the machine in the reverse order of the above procedure.
The table side rollers of doors-R and -L are to be secured in the oblong hole, thus lightly push
the lower rollers against the rails and secure them with bolts.
After mounting doors, check that the doors move smoothly.
9. Mount the rail cover.

9.5.1.2 Door wire replacement

WARNING
You may be caught in the machine, resulting in serious injury.
Turn off the main power breaker and padlock it before
replacement.
Put up a signboard which says “Under maintenance” on the
operation panel.

Manual door type

Wire hook Wire retaining bracket

Door L
Door R
9-07.ai
Automatic door type

9
Wire hook

Wire sheave Wire sheave

bracket R bracket L

Wire sheave

9-13.ai

2011/10/12 9 - 17 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

1) Door wire removal

1. Remove two socket bolts (M612) securing the wire retaining hook stay (AD fitting) and
wire hook, and then separate the wire from the door R.
2. Loosen the hexagon bolt (M6×12) securing the wire sheave bracket, and then move both wire
sheaves inward.
3. Remove the hook on the wire side of the spring from the wire end cup.
4. Remove the wire from the wire sheave.
5. Remove the plastic screw and then remove the wire from the bracket.

Plastic
screw Flat washer Spring

Wire end cup Wire bracket

0923-1.ai
2) Door wire attachment
1. Attach the door wire in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following.
(Note 1)
When fixing the sheave bracket, hook the wire to the sheave bracket to shift the
sheave bracket outward and adjust the wire by the oblong hole to most tighten the
wire (wire should be tightened until the wire end cup touches the wire bracket side).
Then mount the spring.

Wire end cup

Tighten the wire

until wire end cup
9 Wire bracket side touches the wire
bracket side.
0924-1.ai
(Note 2)
When attaching the wire hook to the wire hook stay, adjust the position of the wire
hook within the distance of the bolt-slot on the wire hook so that the wire core is
aligned with the wire sheave groove.

Wire sheave center

Wire hook

Adjust position within

distance of
bolt-slot on wire hook.

Wire hook stay

9-14.ai

2011/10/12 9 - 18 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

(Note3)
After attaching the spring, check that the distance between the wire end cup and
the end face of the wire bracket is 5 mm or less. If the distance is greater than 5
mm, see note 1 and adjust the wire tension using the bolt-slot on the wire hook.

5 mm or less

0926-1.ai
2. After attachment, check that the door moves smoothly.

9.5.1.3 Wire sheave replacement

WARNING
You may be caught in the machine, resulting in serious injury.
Turn off the main power breaker and padlock it before
replacement.
Put up a signboard which says “Under Maintenance”.

1) Wire sheave removal

Wire hook

Wire sheave
bracket R Wire sheave
bracket L

Wire sheave

0992-2.ai

2011/10/12 9 - 19 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

Roller shaft (Hexagon head bolt)

Wire sheave

Flat washer
Wire sheave bracket

Spring washer

Nut

1. Refer to “9.5.1.2 Door wire replacement; 1) Door wire removal” in the installation manual to
remove the door wire.
2. Remove the 4 socket bolts (M612), and then remove the door pulley plate.
3. Remove the sheave of the door pulley plate from the roller shaft, and then replace it.

2) Wire sheave attachment

1. Attach the wire sheave in the reverse order of removal.
2. Refer to “9.5.1.2 Door wire replacement; 2) Door wire attachment” in the installation manual
to attach the door wire.
3. After attachment, check that the door moves smoothly.

9 9.5.2 Telescopic cover cushion replacement

WARNING
You may get caught in the machine, be injured, or get an electric
shock.
Turn off the main circuit breaker and padlock the machine before
replacement.
Put up a signboard which says “Under maintenance” during
replacement.
When replace the telescopic cover cushion ,we recommend that you clean the inside of the
telescopic cover (refer to 9.4.1) and the table front cover.

2011/10/12 9 - 20 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

1) Telescopic cover replacement

1-1 Y axis
・ Select manual mode, and move the column to the stroke end in the positive Y
direction (the direction in which telescopic cover expands).

Washer bolt
(M612)

Telescopic cover Y
assembly

Washer bolt
(M616)

9-15.ai 9
・ Turn off the power and the circuit breaker.
・ Remove the socket bolts (M612) securing the column side of telescopic cover Y assembly
R2B.
・ Remove the washer bolt (M616) securing the side of telescopic cover Y.
・ Lift telescopic cover Y to remove it.

2011/10/12 9 - 21 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

1-2 X axis
・ Select manual mode, and move the column to the stroke end in the direction the telescopic
cover to be removed expands.

Washer bolt
(M612)

Telescopic
cover X
assembly

9 Washer bolt
(M616)

9-16.ai
・ Turn off the power and the circuit breaker.
・ Remove the socket bolts (M612) securing the column side of telescopic cover assembly.
・ Remove the washer bolt (M616) securing the side of telescopic cover.
・ Lift telescopic cover to remove it.

2) Telescopic cover cleaning

Clean the removed telescopic cover using a cloth.

3) Old cushion replacement

・ The CUSHION 228 ASSY is stick with double sided tape. Completely remove this tape.

2011/10/12 9 - 22 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

4) Old removal from cushion area

・ The CUSHION 228 ASSY is stick with double sided tape.
・ Remove any oil from the area where tape is to be stuck to the telescopic cover, using a
washing agent.

Cushion
sponge ASSY
C-30-CS-2

Cushion 228 ASSY

Before pasting "the Cushion 228
When pasting the cushion ASSY ", remove any oil from the
(Enlarged drawing) area where it is to be pasted and
Washer plain L 3 , Pan head screw M38 allow it to dry completely.

After installation Before installation

Separating sheet

5) Cushion Installation
・ After the area of the telescopic cover where the oil has been removed is completely dry, paste
the “CUSHION 228ASSY”on, and then secure it with the screws.
9
・ Once the “CUSHION 228 ASSY” as been pasted, the position cannot be changed.
Place it carefully by referring to the Figure above.

2011/10/12 9 - 23 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

The “Cushion 228 ASSY” should not protrude.

Align the "Cushion 228 ASSY"

and telescopic cover upper plane.


6) Telescopic cover attachment
6-1 Y-axis
1. Attach the side of the telescopic cover with the socket bolt (M612).
2. Turn the power on and select manual mode, and move the column to the rear to contract the
9 telescopic cover.
3. Turn the power off.
4. Attach the column side of telescopic cover with the spring washer bolts (M6).
Tightening torque: 11.6 N·m (118 kgf/cm)
5. Check that the telescopic cover moves smoothly.

2011/10/12 9 - 24 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

Y axis telescopic cover ASSY

Y telescopic Telescopic
support YL support Y R

9-17-1.ai

6-2 X-axis
1. Attach the side of the telescopic cover to the telescopic cover bracket with the socket bolt
(M612).
2. Turn the power on and select manual mode, and move the column to the telescopic cover to
be attached so as to contract the telescopic cover.
3. Turn the power off.
4. Secure the column side of telescopic cover with the bolts. (M612).
Tightening torque: 11.6 N·m (118 kgf/cm)
5. Check that the telescopic cover moves smoothly.

X axis telescopic cover ASSY

X telescopic X telescopic X telescopic

support X1 support X2 support X3

9-17-2.ai

2011/10/12 9 - 25 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

7) After telescopic cover attachment

 When all telescopic covers have been attached, check that no tools have been left in the
machine.
 Stand in a safe position and turn the power on.
 Enter manual mode (press [MANU]). Move the XY table in the X and Y directions to
verify that the telescopic covers run correctly.
 When any abnormal sound is heard, or the machine motion is not appropriate, check the
cushion installation again.

9.5.3 Telescopic cover wiper replacement

WARNING
You may get caught in the machine, be injured, or get an electric
shock.
Turn off the main circuit breaker and padlock the machine before
replacement.
Put up a signboard which says “Under maintenance” during
replacement.
If the telescopic cover wiper has fallen or be torn, replace it with a new one immediately.

1. Loosen the flat head screws, M34.5 securing the wiper to be removed.
Numbers of the screws are different between the upper surface and the side surface.
2. Pull and remove the wiper.

3. Remove the pressure plate from the wiper.

4. Assemble a new pressure plate, spacer and a wiper and insert them into the telescopic cover,
indexing screw positions.
5. Tighten the flat head screws M34.5, applying adhesives to the screws.
6. Lubricate Alvania Grease No.2 to the sliding surface of the wiper for fitting them.
7. Check the motion, turning on the power and move the telescopic cover.
9
Flat head screws M34.5

Spacer
Wiper When tight the flat head
screws, apply adhesives.

Pressure plate

09-18.ai

2011/10/12 9 - 26 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

9.5.4 Y rear cover roller replacement

WARNING
You may get caught in the machine, be injured, or get an electric
shock.
Turn off the main circuit breaker and padlock the machine before
replacement.
Put up a signboard which says “Under maintenance” during
replacement.

1. Select manual mode and move the column to the vicinity of stroke end in negative Y direction
in advance.
2. Turn off the main power breaker, and lock the breaker with a padlock.
3. Remove three socket bolts (M616), and remove one end of apron cover from the column.
4. Remove chips on the carriage with a brush.
5. Tighten three socket bolts (M616) to install the apron cover on the column.

Socket bolt
(M86)

Apron cover

Front view Right side view

2011/10/12 9 - 27 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

9.5.5 Battery Replacement

WARNING
High voltage parts are present in the control box.
Touching such parts by mistake may result in serious injury or
death.
Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the
electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and
inspect electrical components.
When entering the machine, be sure to cut the main power
breaker, lock the breaker so that the breaker is not turned on.
Put up a signboard which says “Under maintenance” near the
operation panel.
When leaving the machine, close the control box and secure it.

9.5.5.1 Battery alarm

In tapping center, the data in the memory and absolute encoder data is retained by batteries.
If the voltage becomes low, the battery alarm mark as shown below appears on the right bottom of
the screen. If this mark appears, replace the batteries.
Use the alkaline battery size AA 1.5V.

S00013e.png

 Displays the battery alarm mark NC .

 Replace the two battery of BAT１(retaining memory data).

 Displays the battery alarm mark AMP .

 Replace three batteries of BAT2 (retaining absolute encoder data).

2011/10/12 9 - 28 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

Control box

BAT2 (holding absolute

encoder)

BAT1 (holding memory

data)

9-21.ai

BAT1 (holding memory data) BAT2 (holding absolute encoder)

Pull the boss to remove the cover Pull the boss to remove the cover
and replace two batteries. and replace three batteries.

(Note)
Turn off the main power breaker before replacing the battery. Be sure to put
batteries in the direction as described on the battery box cover.
Replace the batteries within 30 minutes otherwise all absolute encoder data is
cleared.

2011/10/12 9 - 29 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

9.5.5.2 “Battery is dead (local)” alarm

If the alarm “*Battery is dead (local)” appears when turning on the power, change the connection
of the battery on the LOCAL PCB.

 Local boards (FB5UM): Unit 111616 and before

1. Remove the connector of the battery connected to the CN 32 on LOCAL PCB.
2. Cut the band bundling the cords of connector CN32 of BAT 1.
3. Connect the connector CN32 of BAT1 to the CN32 on the LOCAL PCB.

Control box

BAT1

LOCAL PCB
9
9-21,22.ai

LOCAL PCB CN32

Battery in LOCAL PCB

Connector CN 32 of BAT1

Remove the
bundling band.

SVIF PCB

NC PCB BAT1

0932-2.ai

2011/10/12 9 - 30 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

 Local boards (ICE-DB-BIL-R10): Unit 111617 and after

1. Change connection of LOCAL board jumper JP11 from pin 1-2 to 2-3..
2. Cut the band bundling the cords of connector CN32 of BAT 1.
3. Connect the connector CN32 of BAT1 to the CN32 on the LOCAL PCB.

Control box

BAT1

LOCAL PCB

LOCAL PCB CN32

9
JP11

Battery in LOCAL PCB

Connector CN 32 of BAT1

Remove the
bundling band.

SVIF PCB

NC PCB BAT1

4. Set the date.

(1) Press the [I/O] key.
(2) Press the [F4] (User parameters) key.
(3) Press the [F1] (Switch 1) key.
(4) Place the cursor to the “Current date” or “Current time” by using the [PAGE] key or
the [CURSOR] key and set the date and time.

2011/10/12 9 - 31 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

9.5.6 Replacement procedure for tool cleaning system

filter element
1. Turn off the machine power supply.
2. Loosen the drain bolt of the line filter and drain the coolant.
3. Loosen the thumbscrew and remove the lower section of the filter.
4. Replace the element.
5. Assemble in the reverse order.

Thumb screw

Element

O ring

Drain

Standard replacement period : 3 months

2011/10/12 9 - 32 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 9 Inspections

9.6 List of consumable parts

The list below contains consumable parts whose unique characteristics deteriorate depending on
operating conditions.
Please place an order to the dealer where you purchased the machine.
When placing an order, please specify the part code and name.
“Qty.” in the list below indicates the number of the parts used in one machine. For the collation of
part name, refer to the Parts List at the end of this manual. Also, the supply of service parts will be
discontinued 13 years after discontinuation of the production.
Refer to “9.5 Consumable parts replacement” in the installation manual for replacement procedure.

Chapter Name Name Parts code Qty. Remarks

ローラ 16 ROLLER 16 6B1160001 4
9.5.1.1
ドアローラ S2C クミ DOOR ROLLER ASSY S2C 6A7473001 4
9.5.1.2 トビラレンドウクミ R2A FRONT DOOR WIRE ASSY R2A 653710001 1
9.5.1.3 ワイヤーシーブＤ50 クミ WIRE SHEVE D50 ASSY 653719001 2
クツシヨンゴム 228 クミ CUSHION RUBBER 228 ASSY 622189001 16
9.5.2
クツシヨン C-30-CS-2 CUSHION C-30-CS-2 636109001 9
ワイパ- X-340.5 R WIPER X-340.5 R 6B3133001 1
ワイパ- X-340.5 L WIPER X-340.5 L 6B3134001 1
ワイパ- X-55 R WIPER X-55 R 6B3131001 1
ワイパ- X-55 L WIPER X-55 L 6B3132001 1
ワイパ- X-345.5 R WIPER X-345.5 R 6B3135001 1
X axis
ワイパ- X-345.5 L WIPER X-345.5 L 6B3136001 1
9.5.3
ワイパ-Y-61R FR WIPER Y-61R FR 6B1228001 1
ワイパ-Y-61L FR WIPER Y-61L FR 6B1229001 1
ワイパ- X-350.5 R WIPER X-350.5 R 6B3138001 1
ワイパ- X-350.5 L WIPER X-350.5 L 6B3137001 1
ワイパ- X-67 R WIPER X-67 R 6B3140001 1
ワイパ- X-67 L WIPER X-67 L 6B3139001 1
クツシヨンゴム 228 クミ CUSHION RUBBER 228 ASSY 622189001 4
9.5.2
クツシヨン C-30-CS-2 CUSHION C-30-CS-2 636109001 4 9
ワイパ- Y-492 WIPER Y-492 6B3108001 1
ワイパ-X-73R FR WIPER X-73R FR 6B1073001 1
Y axis
ワイパ-X-73L FR WIPER X-73L FR 6B1074001 1
9.5.3
ワイパ- Y-482 WIPER Y-482 6B3111001 1
ワイパ-X-66R FR WIPER X-66R FR 6B1070001 1
ワイパ-X-66L FR WIPER X-66L FR 6B1071001 1
9.5.4 エプロンカバーR2B APRON COVER R2B 6Ｂ3032001 1
9.5.5.1 アルカリ電池 単３ 1.5V 5 Commercial type possible

フィルタエレメント FILTER ELEMENT

9.5.6 EHM15R10AX 652860001 1 For tool washing

9.5.6 ラインフィルタエレメント ST LINE FILTER ELEMENT ST 618491001 1 For line filter

9.5.6 ギャクセンエレメント BACK WASH ELEMENT 618497001 1 For backwashing filter

2011/10/12 9 - 33 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
 Chapter 9 Inspections TC-R2B

(This page is blank.)

2011/10/12 9 - 34 eTR2BIN9-3.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 10 Disposal

CHAPTER 10

DISPOSAL
10.1 Disposal Precautions

10

2011/10/12 10 - 1 eTR2BIN10.doc
 Chapter 10 Disposal TC-R2B

10.1 Disposal Precautions

DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box.
Touching such parts by mistake may result in serious injury or
death.
Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the
electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and
inspect electrical components.
Turn off the main power breaker before operation.
Put up a signboard which says "Under maintenance".
When leaving the machine, close the control box door and bolt it.

WARNING
You may hurt your eyes due to high pressure air bursts.
People other than those qualified in high pressure air handling
who understand the piping of this machine are not allowed to
install or change the high pressure air piping.
To repair the high pressure air hose , disconnect the pressure
source and release remaining pressure first. Put up a signboard
which says “Under maintenance.”
When disposing of the machine, please observe the instructions below.

 Turn off the main power breaker and the breaker of the power supplied to the machine.
Remove the primary wiring.
 Using the air source pressure regulating knob , set the pressure to “zero” to disconnect the
pressure source of the primary side and remove the pipes.
 Carefully handle the machine because it is heavy.
 Consign disposal of machines to a company specialized for handling such items.
 Do not drain coolant.
 Do not drain used lubricant oil.
10  Consign disposal of coolant and lubricating oil to a company specialized for handling such
items.
 Also,appropriately dispose of other items by confirming corresponding laws and regulations
stipulated by the government and local authorities.

2011/10/12 10 - 2 eTR2BIN10.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 10 Disposal

Battery installation position on the control box

Right inside Front

[1] Lithium battery

[2] Alkaline
battery
(BAT2)

[3] Alkaline
battery
(BAT1)

1001-1.ai

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

10
Note: Marking is in compliance with EU Directive 2006/66/EC and EN61429.

This battery is marked with the above recycling symbol. It means that at the end of
the life of the battery, you must dispose of it separately at an appropriate collection
point, and not place it in the normal domestic unsorted waste stream. This will
benefit the environment for all.
The chemical symbol for the metal concerned: Hg, Cd or Pb beneath the symbol
indicates that battery contains more than 0.0005% mercury, more than 0.002%
cadmium or more than 0.004% lead.

EU Directive 2006/66/EC - Removing or Replacing the Battery

This product incorporates a battery that is designed to last for the lifetime of the
product. It is not to be replaced by the user. It should be removed as part of the
machine recycling process at end of life and appropriate precautions taken by the
recycler.

(For Alkaline battery)

The alkaline battery is designed so that it can be replaced by the user.
For replacement instructions, refer to “9.5.6 Battery Replacement”.

2011/10/12 10 - 3 eTR2BIN10.doc
 Chapter 10 Disposal TC-R2B

End of Life Batteries (Switzerland Only)

Please return it to the seller after use

(German) Gebrauchte Batterien (Nur für die Schweiz)

Nach Gebrauch der Verkaufsstelle zurückgeben.
(French) Batteries usagées (Seulement pour la suisse)
Rapportez au point de vente après utilisation.
(Italian) Batterie consumate (Solamente per la svizzera)
Consegnare le vostre vecchie batterie ad uno dei punti vendita.

How to dispose of the batteries

[1] Lithium battery
 Local boards (FB5UM)
Connector Disconnect the connector

Dispose of the
battery.

Screw Remove the screw.

 Local boards (ICE-DB-BIL-R10)

Dispose of the
battery.

10
Remove the presser

[2]Alkaline battery (BAT1)

Battery box cover

Remove the battery

box cover and
dispose of the
batteries.

2011/10/12 10 - 4 eTR2BIN10.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 10 Disposal

[3]Alkaline battery (BAT2)

Battery box cover

Remove the
battery box cover
and dispose of the
batteries.

10

2011/10/12 10 - 5 eTR2BIN10.doc
 Chapter 10 Disposal TC-R2B

(This page is blank.)

10

2011/10/12 10 - 6 eTR2BIN10.doc
TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (1)

COOLANT UNIT

Coolant is used to cool the tools and workpiece, and to remove the
machining chips. The coolant unit supplies coolant to the machining
section and chip flow.

1 Cautions for Handling

2 Sketch Drawing
3 Specifications
4 Cable Connection
5 Motor Protection Unit
6 Coolant Unit Installation Check
7 Tool Washing System (with Air Assist Function)

11
Machine model
TC-22B Option
TC-31B Option
TC-32BN Option
TC-S2D Option
TC-S2Dz Option
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B Option
TC-S2DN Option
TC-S2DNz Option

2011/06/30 11-1 - 1 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1 Cautions for Handling

DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box.
Touching such parts by mistake may result in serious injury or
death. Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with
the electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and
inspect electrical components.
Cut the main power breaker and work on the machine.
Put up a signboard which says "Under maintenance".
When leaving the machine, close the control box door and tighten
the screws.

WARNING
Because the coolant tank is heavy, you may suffer from
a herniated vertebral disk or drop the tank on your feet when
lifting the tank.
Do not lift the coolant tank even when removing chips.

WARNING
When adjusting the direction of the coolant nozzle, you may cut
your hand on the edge of a tool or hit your hand against the
machine. Wear leather gloves.

WARNING
If the power PE cable is too short, the cable may be disconnected
when pulled, resulting in an electric shock.
Make sure the length of the power PE cable is longer than other
cables (L2, L2, L3) when laying them all.

WARNING
When machining workpiece using an oil type coolant, the machined
11 part may heat up and catch fire.
Do not use oil type coolant when a fire alarm and automatic fire
extinguisher are not installed.
When machining the workpiece, an operator must attend the
machine.

WARNING
Touching sections where heat is generated such as the motor may
cause you to be burned. Do not touch such sections.

2011/06/30 11-1 - 2 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

WARNING
Chips and coolant scattered around the coolant tank may cause
you to slip over, resulting in injuries. Always keep around it
clean.

WARNING
If you ride on the machine or coolant tank, you could fall down,
resulting in injury.
Do not ride on the machine or coolant tank.

WARNING
An object placed on the coolant tank may fall on your feet due to
vibration resulting in injuries. Do not place any object on the
coolant tank.

WARNING
Giving a shock to the piping causes a coolant leakage, which has a
risk of blindness if entering your eye. Take care not to give a shock
when handling the piping.

WARNING
For the machine equipped with the tool washing unit, when the
parts or piping is removed for replacement, the coolant could fly
and cause your eye to be injured.
Exhaust residual pressure before starting the work.
Wear protective glasses.
a) Air source
(1) Use an air source with a capacity of 60 L/min. (ANR) or more.
(2) Use moisture and oil -free clean air.

b) Coolant
(1) To select the proper coolant, ask the coolant dealer about the coolant’s lubrication quality, 11
corrosion prevention, bubbling prevention and safety.
Do not use the chemical solution type coolant (synthetic type). This type has poor
lubrication and will strip the machine’s coating, possibly leading to machine damage.
(2) Depending on the type of coolant and its method of use, bubbles may be generated in the
coolant within the tank. In this case, use deforming agent or reduce the amount of
discharge.
(3) For the chip flow, use water soluble oil only. If non water soluble oil is used, sufficient
coolant is not supplied due to large adhesive resistance.
When using such a coolant, turn off the [CHP. F] key on the keyboard so that the chip flow
is not activated even if the program instruction is given.
(4) Do not drain coolant oil. Consign disposal of coolant oil to a company specialized for
handling.

2011/06/30 11-1 - 3 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

(5) Some types of coolant may cause rust in parts within the guide section due to their material.
Please check with the coolant manufacturer for coolant characteristics before use.
Move each axis one full stroke at least once a day to lubricate the guide and ball screw and
prevent rust.
Performing this before and after operation is the most effective.
(6) Foul water soluble coolant causes a bad smell and environmental deterioration.
It may also cause rusting which leads to machine damage.
When coolant goes bad, stop using it and replace all of the coolant with new coolant.

c) Maintenance
(1) Chip tray cleaning
Remove chips accumulated in the chip tray as needed.
Accumulated chips may cause coolant to leak from the tank.

(2) Filter cleaning

A clogged filter will affect the coolant discharge amount.
Regularly clean the coolant tank filter.

<Cleaning procedures>
1. Remove the filter on the dirty tank side first, and then clean it. (Fig.A)
2. Insert (Return) the cleaned filter to the clean tank side. (Fig.B)
3. Repeat the same steps for the other filter.
*If the filters are attached on both sides of the tank (left and right), clean both filters.

[Note] Removing both filters simultaneously allows foreign matter to flow into
the pump, resulting in nozzle clogging or pump failure.

Fig.A Fig.B

Filter

11
11-0021-1.ai
(3) Total replacement of the coolant and tank cleaning
To maintain the quality of coolant for the best use of coolant, coolant tank and chip conveyor,
check the concentration and PH to agree with the coolant manufacturer’s standard once a week.
And also check the smell. If necessary, replace the coolant regularly. When you replace the
coolant, remove the pump and the cover as shown bellow, and then clean inside the tank (bottom
of dirty tank and clean tank).

2011/06/30 11-1 - 4 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Filter Clean tank

Dirty tank

Cover

Cover

Filter

11-0022-1.ai
*Shape of the tank and the attached parts may be different depending on the machine model and
specification.
(The figure above is the 150L tank for TC-R2B.)

d) Handling precautions
(1) Depending on the coolant application method or cutting conditions, the coolant may splash
outside of the machine from the top of the machine cover. In such a case, use an optional
ceiling cover.

Weight of coolant tank

Specifications Weight (Except coolant) : Kg
100L Nozzle only 80
150L Nozzle, Shower 110
150L Nozzle, Shower, CTS 130

11

2011/06/30 11-1 - 5 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

2 Sketch Drawing
100L Coolant tank
Coolant pump Chip basket

Coolant tank
Filter
Oil pot

12.1.2-3.ai
150L Coolant tank
Chip basket
Chip flow pump

Coolant pump

Coolant tank
Oil pot
Filter

12-1-2-4.ai
150L Coolant tank with CTS system
Chip flow pump Chip basket
11
Coolant pump

Coolant tank
Filter
Oil pot

12-1-03.ai

2011/06/30 11-1 - 6 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Sketch drawing of attached tank

12-1-05.ai

11

2011/06/30 11-1 - 7 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

12-1-06.ai

3 Specifications
The coolant unit to be installed differs depending on the TC model.
Please contact the dealer for details.

4 Cable Connection
1. Connect the coolant motor cable and chip flow motor cable to the terminal block of the
coolant protective unit.
While doing this, check that the name on the making tube coincides with the name on the
terminal block.
Connect the grounding terminal to the grounding tapped hole directly in front of the coolant
protection unit.
2. Connect the coolant valve cable to the connector CNYVC on the IO PCB.
11 3. Connect the coolant motor cable to the coolant motor, chip flow motor cable to the chip flow
motor, and the coolant valve cable to the coolant valve respectively.

IO PCB

Coolant protection unit

2011/06/30 11-1 - 8 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

External view of the coolant protection unit

Reset
Cover button
Rated current
setting dial

2 4 6 2 4 6
Terminal
block

Tapped hole
UC1 VC1 WC1 UC2 VC2 WC2 for grounding

For coolant motor For chip flow pump motor

5 Motor Protection Unit

(1) Rated current setting

Rated current setting values differ depending on the power voltage, frequency,
and pump capacity.
If the setting value is incorrect, an overload
cannot be detected correctly, resulting in pump motor damage. Set the values
correctly.

Table of Rated Current Settings

Pump Without power transformer T1 With power
Frequency
capacity 200 V ac 220 V ac 230 V ac transformer T1
50HZ 1.5A 1.5A 1.5A 1.2A
250W
60HZ 1.5A 1.5A 1.6A 1.5A
50Hz 2.4A 2.5A - 2.5A
400W
60Hz 2.5A 2.4A 2.4A 2.4A 11
Confirm the existence of the power transformer T1 referring to "Installation manual. Installation".
Check the pump capacity with the plate attached to the pump.

(2) Solution when protection unit was actuated

When the coolant pump motor and the chip flow pump motor are overloaded, the alarm
'**Thermal (coolant)', '**Thermal (chip flow)' occurs.
Possible causes are that the coolant viscosity is too high or the power voltage is not appropriate.
To recover the state, eliminate the cause and press the [RST] key of the tripped protection unit.

2011/06/30 11-1 - 9 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

6 Coolant Unit Installation Check

Check that the piping and cable connections are completed, and then supply coolant to the coolant
tank and chip conveyor.

6.1 NC language
(1) Coolant pump motor check
1. Turn the power on.
2. Turn on the [CLT .P] key on the keyboard. The key lamp will light and the motor will
rotate. If not, check the cable connection to the motor terminal block.
3. Turn off the [CLT .P] key .
4. The motor keeps rotating for a while by inertia. During this period, check, from the fan
cover window of the motor, that the rotating direction of the disk in the motor coincides
with the direction of the arrow marked.
If not, turn off the main power and breaker, then switch the U phase and V phase cable
connections on the motor terminal block and check the rotating direction again.

(2) Coolant valve check

1. Turn the power on.
2. Press the [MDI] key to validate MDI mode.
3. Press the [CAN] key to clear the edit area.
Enter [M], [8] and press the [ENT] key. Check that the operation door is fully open/close.
4. Press the [START] switch.
5. Press the [RST] key. Check the sound of the valve motion.

(3) Chip flow motor check

1. Turn the power on.
2. Turn on the [CHP.F] key on the keyboard. The key lamp will light.
3. Press the [MDI] key to validate MDI mode.
4. Press the [CAN] key to clear the edit area.
Enter [M], [4], [0], [0] and press the [ENT] key.
5. Press the [START] switch and the motor will rotate. If not, check the cable connections to
the motor terminal block.
6. Turn off the [CHP.F] key.
The motor keeps rotating for a while by inertia. During this period, check, from the fan
cover window of the motor, that the rotating direction of the disk in the motor coincides
with the direction of the arrow marked.
If the rotating direction of the disk does not coincide with the direction of the arrow, turn
off the main power and breaker, then switch the U phase and V phase cable connections of
the motor terminal block, and check the rotating direction again.

11

2011/06/30 11-1 - 10 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

6.2 Conversation
(1) Coolant pump motor check
1. Turn the power on.
2. Turn on the [CLT.P] key on the keyboard. the key lamp will light and the motor will rotate.
If not, check the cable connection to the motor terminal block.
3. Turn off the [CLT.P] key.
4. The motor keeps rotating for a while by inertia. During this period, check, from the fan
cover window of the motor, that the rotating direction of the disk in the motor coincides
with the direction of the arrow marked.
If not, turn off the main power and breaker, then switch the U phase and V phase cable
connections on the motor terminal block and check the rotating direction again.

(2) Coolant valve check

1. Turn the power on.
2. Press the [MDI] key to display the <Block operation> screen of the MDI operation.
3. Using the cursor keys, move the cursor to Coolant.
Using the numeric keys, enter [1] (1: on) and press the [ENT] key. Check that the DOOR
INTERLOCK is invalid or the operation door is fully open/close.
4. Press the [START] switch. Check the sound of the valve motion.
5. Press the [RST] key and check the valve releasing sound.

(3) Chip flow motor check

1. Turn the power on.
2. Turn on the [CHP.F] key on the keyboard.
The key lamp will light.
3. Press the [MDI] key to display the <Block operation> screen of the MDI operation.
4. Using the cursor keys, move the cursor to External signal.
Using the numeric keys, enter [400] and press the [ENT] key.
5. Press the [START] switch and the motor will rotate.
If not, check the cable connections to the motor terminal block.
6. Turn off the [CHP.F] key.
The motor keeps rotating for a while by inertia. During this period, check, from the fan
cover window of the motor, that the rotating direction of the disk in the motor coincides
with the direction of the arrow marked.
If the rotating direction of the disk does not coincide with the direction of the arrow, turn
off the main power and breaker, then switch the U phase and V phase cable connections of
the motor terminal block, and check the rotating direction again.

11

2011/06/30 11-1 - 11 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

7 Tool Washing System

(with Air Assist Function)
7.1 Handling Precautions
WARNING
If you ride on the machine or coolant tank, you could fall down,
resulting in injury.
Do not ride on the machine or coolant tank.

WARNING
Giving a shock to the piping causes a coolant leakage, which has a
risk of blindness if entering your eye. Take care not to give a shock
when handling the piping.

WARNING
For the machine equipped with the tool washing unit, when the
parts or piping is removed for replacement, the coolant could fly
and cause your eye to be injured.
Exhaust residual pressure before starting the work.
Wear protective glasses.

1. The tool washing system does not operate unless the [CLT.P] key on the operation panel turns
on (the key lamp lights).
Be sure to turn on the [CLT.P] key.
2. In the tool washing system, the coolant level sensor monitors the coolant level in the coolant
chamber, and the coolant is not discharged unless the coolant level sensor turns on (red) during
ATC operation.

[Note]
The coolant level sensor detects the level by means of capacitance of coolant.
Since the capacitance varies depending on the coolant type, be sure to check if
11 the coolant level sensor operates normally by using the coolant actually used,
following the description in “operation check” (see 11-8.5).

7.2 System Outline

This system cleans the spindle end face and the tool holder contact face by discharging the coolant
filtrated through the line filter from nearby the spindle end face while the ATC is operating.

[Note]
1. Chips stuck to the spindle end face or tool holder may not be removed under
some operating conditions. The tool washing system cannot ensure complete
prevention of chip entry between spindle end face and tool holder.
2. As the line filter element becomes dirty, the amount of coolant supply to the
coolant chamber decreases, and if the coolant supply does not reach the
height of coolant level sensor in the coolant chamber, the alarm is output. The
line filter clogging state can be monitored by means of coolant level in the
coolant chamber by setting the user parameter.
（See 11-8.4）

2011/06/30 11-1 - 12 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Coolant

12-1-07.ai

External view

Coolant chamber

Coolant level sensor

Line filter
11

2011/06/30 11-1 - 13 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

System

Coolant
chamber
Air source

Line filter

Coolant tank

7.3 Piping Method

1. Connect the hose coming out from the rear left side of the machine to the coolant pump.

11

Coolant hose
(already
attached)

11.1-01.ai

2011/06/30 11-1 - 14 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Wiring method
1. Turn off the main power breaker.
2. Insert the cords of drain valve assembly and coolant level sensor assembly from the bottom of
control box.
3. Connect the relay connector YVB.
4. Connect the connectors SUB2 and SQRNG to the IO board.
5. Secure the connected cords with the fastening bands as shown below.

Connector
SUB2

SUB2 cord
Connector
YVB
Connector
Enlarged SQRNG

Drain valve
assembly

Using the holes in IO chassis,

secure the cords with fastening
bands.

Coolant level sensor ass’y

11

2011/06/30 11-1 - 15 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

7.4 Parameter Setting

User parameter 1
Default
No. Item name Description
value
0139 Faulty tool wash coolant When the tool wash is turned on, the tool wash coolant 1
level alarm stop level level sensor is checked, and if abnormal, the tool wash
(Method 4) coolant level alarm occurs. Set the alarm stop level in
such a case.
If “0” is set, the tool wash does not turn off when the
tool wash coolant level alarm occurred. (Operation
does not stop.)
If “1” is set, the tool wash turns off when the tool wash
coolant level alarm occurred. (Operation stops.)
0140 Tool wash filter clogging Set the alarm stop level for the tool wash filter 0
warning alarm stop level clogging warning alarm.
(Method 4) If “0” is set, the operation does not stop.
If “1” is set, the operation stops after one cycle
operation.
0141 No. of tool wash filter When the tool wash is turned off, the filter clogging is 1 times
clogging warning checks checked by means of tool wash coolant level sensor.
(Method 4) The filter clogging warming alarm occurs if the tool
wash coolant level sensor is abnormal continuously by
the set number of check times.
If “0” is set, the clogging warning check is not
executed.

0142 Faulty tool wash coolant Set the interval of faulty tool wash coolant level sensor 200 times
level sensor check interval check (M295).
(Method 4)
When M295 is executed by the set number of times,
the tool wash coolant level sensor is checked for
abnormality in the memory operation.
If “0” is set, the tool wash coolant level sensor is not
checked for abnormality in the memory operation.

7.5 Operation Check

・Operation check of coolant level sensor
1. Turn on the [CLT.P] key.
11 2. Observing the coolant level gauge on the coolant chamber, check that the coolant is
supplied into the chamber and its level reached the height above the coolant level sensor.
3. LED of the coolant level sensor
4. In the MDI mode, execute [M295].
If “tool wash coolant level sensor normal” occurred, the coolant level sensor is normal.
If “tool wash coolant level sensor error” alarm occurred, the coolant level sensor needs to
be adjusted.

[Note] For the adjustment of coolant level sensor, see “8.6”.

・Operation check of entire system

1. Turn on the [CLT.P] key.
2. In the MDI mode, execute [G100T101].
(At this time, the pots other than No.1 must be already indexed)
3. During the tool change, check that the tool wash coolant is discharged.

2011/06/30 11-1 - 16 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

7.6 Coolant Level Sensor Adjustment Procedure

Adjustment of coolant level sensor
1. Turn on the [CLT.P] key.
2. Observing the coolant level gauge on the coolant chamber, check that the coolant is supplied
into the chamber and its level reached the height above the coolant level sensor.
3. Rotate counterclockwise the coolant level sensor gain adjusting screw with a small cross-tip
(+) screwdriver to check that the LED lights in green (sensor OFF).
Then, slowly rotate clockwise the screw and stop when the LED changes to red (sensor ON).
4. In the MDI mode, execute [M295].
If “tool wash coolant level sensor normal” occurs, the coolant level sensor adjustment is
completed.
If “tool wash coolant level sensor error” alarm occurs, readjust the sensor.

With coolant: Red LED ON

Coolant chamber Without coolant: Green LED ON
Sensor gain adjusting screw

Coolant
level gauge

Coolant level sensor

7.7 Maintenance
As the line filter element becomes dirty, the amount of coolant supply to the coolant chamber
decreases, resulting in alarm.
In general, replace the element every three months.
(The interval of element replacement varies depending on the dirtiness of coolant.)

[Note] 11
When the parts or piping of the tool washing unit is removed for replacement,
the coolant could fly and cause your eye to be injured. Be sure to exhaust
residual pressure in the coolant chamber and wear protective glasses before
starting the work.

How to exhaust residual pressure from coolant chamber

・ Turn off the main power of the machine. Or press the Emergency Stop button on
the front side of the machine.
(By the power off or Emergency Stop button, the drain valve opens to exhaust the
residual pressure)
* If there is possibility of drain valve breakage, remove slowly the socket head plug
PT1/2 at the top of coolant chamber to exhaust the residual pressure.
When the socket head plug was removed, be sure to wind a new seal tape around
the screw when reinserting the plug after the pressure was exhausted.

2011/06/30 11-1 - 17 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

7.8 Line Filter Element Replacement Procedure

1. Turn off the machine power supply.
2. Loosen the drain bolt of the line filter and drain the coolant.
3. Loosen the thumbscrew and remove the lower section of the filter.
4. Replace the element.
5. Assemble in the reverse order.

Thumbscrew

Element

O-ring

Drain bolt

TC32BIN11.1.8.ai

7.9 Consumable Parts

Standard
Manufacturer Part No. replacement Brother Part No.
interval
Filter element SMC EHM15R10A 3 months 652860-001
11

2011/06/30 11-1 - 18 eTR2BIN11.1.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (2)

CTS UNIT
(COOLANT THROUGH SPINDLE)
1 Precautions for Handling
2 Sketch Drawing
3 Specifications
4 Piping
5 Cable Connection
6 Installation Check
7 Inspection and Consumable Parts
8 Pull-stud bolt sketch
9 Parameter setting

Machine model
11
TC-22B Option
TC-31B Option
TC-32BN Option
TC-S2D Option
TC-S2Dz Option
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B No setting
TC-S2DN Option
TC-S2DNz Option

2011/06/30 11-2 - 1 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1 Precautions for Handling

DANGER
Using oil based coolant for machines equipped with coolant
through spindle (hereafter called CTS) may cause fire.
Be sure to use water soluble coolant.

DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box .
Touching such parts by mistake may result in serious injury or
death.
Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the
electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and
inspect electrical components.
Turn off the main power breaker before operation.
Put up a signboard which says 'Under maintenance.'
Close the control box door and secure it with screws before
leaving the machine.

WARNING
Scattered coolant may hurt your eyes.
Be sure to remove residual pressure before filter cleaning or
replacement, or other maintenance.

WARNING
If the power PE cable is too short, the cable may be disconnected
when pulled, resulting in an electric shock.
Make sure the length of the power PE cable is longer than other
cables (L2, L2, L3) when laying them all.

11
WARNING
The coolant tank is heavy. Attempting to lift it may strain your
back or you may drop it on your feet, resulting in injuries.
Do not lift the coolant tank even when cleaning out the chips.

WARNING
If you touch the motor, you may be burned because the motor is
heated during operation.
Do not touch the motor for 30 minutes after operation is finished.

2011/06/30 11-2 - 2 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

WARNING
Coolant, oil, and chips scattered around the tank may cause you
to slip over, resulting in injuries.
Turn off the power of the machine, clean inside and the
surroundings of the machine, and then start operation.
Wear a helmet and safety shoes during machine installation.

WARNING
You may fall down and be injured when climbing on the
machine or the coolant tank.
Do not climb on the machine or the coolant tank.

WARNING
An object placed on the control box or the machine may
fall on your feet due to vibration resulting in injuries.
Do not place any object on them.

WARNING
As a large amount of mist is generated, the operator may feel sick
when replacing the workpiece.
Attach a mist collector.

WARNING
Subjecting the pipes to impact may result in leakage and the entry
of coolant into your eyes may result in loss of eyesight.
Do not subject the pipes to any impact.

a) Air supply source

(1) Use an air supply source of 60 L/min (ANR) or more.
(2) Use a clean air without moisture and oil.

b)
(1)
Coolant
Bubbles may be formed in the coolant in the tank depending on the coolant type and usage.
11
If this happens, add a deforming agent or reduce the flow rate.
(2) Do not drain coolant into the sewage. Consign disposal of coolant to a company
specialized for handling.
(3) Some types of coolant may cause rust in parts within the guide section due to their material.
Check with the coolant manufacturer for coolant characteristics before use.
Move each axis to its stroke end to prevent the guides and ball screw from rusting.
Performing this before and after operation is more effective.
(4) Do not use the chemical solution type (synthetic type). There are problems with exfoliated
painting and lubricating may cause of machine damage.

2011/06/30 11-2 - 3 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

c) System
(1) The system supplies coolant from the spindle motor, inside the spindle, through to the tool
holder and tools.
(2) The system is designed exclusively for use with water soluble coolant.
Do not use the oil type coolant.
(3) The system is composed of a 150L tank and dispensing amount control pipes.
When replacing with or connecting to units other than those specified by BROTHER,
contact BROTHER.

d) Tool and tool holder

(1) Use the specified pull stud bolt described in the pull bolt stud sketch for the through spindle
holder.
And the tools must be with internal coolant piping.
(Refer to “3.8.2 Limitation of tool holder” in operation manual.)

Do not use the tool holder to supply coolant that is not for the coolant through spindle,
otherwise CTS error may occur after dispensing and also the machine may be damaged.

e) Installation
(1) Check that the CTS pump rotates in the direction of the arrow upon installation.

Rotation direction

11

(2) Chips and water splash a great deal. Do not remove the ceiling cover.
(3) Replenish coolant until the oil gauge indicates the upper limit for the 150L tank before
operation.

2011/06/30 11-2 - 4 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

150L tank

Oil level
gauge

Upper limit

(4) Refer to the sketch drawing, lay the hoses of the 150 L tank so that they are not entangled
with cables.

f) Operational precautions
(1) The maximum pressure may not be obtained when using the tool with large discharging
holes.
(2) Do not idle the CTS pump or operate the pump with coolant that contains air.
Doing so may damage the pump.
(3) Connect the filter piping correctly during operation.

g) Maintenance
(1) Chip tray cleaning
Remove chips accumulated in the chip tray as needed.
Accumulated chips may cause coolant to leak from the tank.

(2) Filter cleaning

A clogged filter will affect the coolant discharge amount.
Regularly clean the coolant tank filter.

11
<Cleaning procedures>
1. Remove the filter on the dirty tank side first, and then clean it. (Fig.A)
2. Insert (Return) the cleaned filter to the clean tank side (Fig.B)
3. Repeat the same steps for the other filter.
*If the filters are attached on both sides of the tank (left and right), clean both filters.

Note:
Removing both filters simultaneously allows foreign matter to flow into the
pump, resulting in nozzle clogging or pump failure.

2011/06/30 11-2 - 5 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Fig.A Fig.B

Filter

11-0021-1.ai
(3) Total replacement of the coolant and tank cleaning
To maintain the quality of coolant for the best use of coolant, coolant tank and chip conveyor,
check the concentration and PH to agree with the coolant manufacturer’s standard once a
week.
And also check the smell. If necessary, replace the coolant regularly. When you replace the
coolant, remove the pump and the cover as shown below, and then clean inside the tank
(bottom of dirty tank and clean tank).

Filter Clean tank

Dirty tank

Cover

Cover

Filter

11 *Shape of the tank and the attached parts may be different depending on the machine model and
11-0022-1.ai

specification.
(The figure above is the 150L tank for TC-R2B.)

(4) Replacement frequency differs depending on conditions of use.

(5) Replenish coolant until the oil gauge indicates the upper limit for the 150 L tank.

2011/06/30 11-2 - 6 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

2 Sketch Drawing
Through spindle motor

Back wash filter

Line filter

Pressure gauge

CTS coolant pump

150L Tank

11

2011/06/30 11-2 - 7 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

The following CTS coolant system configuration is provided.

Tank side Machine side

Back wash filter Line filter

Pressure
CTS pump gauge

M
Through
spindle

150L tank

Air

* Inside the broken line square : Back wash system

3 Specifications
Manufacturer Type No. SPEC
CTS pump Teral Inc. TRP-MHG10-DBT-65FKC- 650W 10L/min 1.5MPa
CVS 200/220V 50Hz
200/220/230V 60Hz
Line filter Taisei Kogyo Co., T-UL-03A-20U-DK-L Filtering accuracy 20μm
Ltd. Material Filter paper
Exchange element Withstand pressure 3.5MPa
P-T-UL-03A-20U Differential pressure switch
Starting operation at 0.3MPa
Pressure Sanwa Electric Co., SPS-8WP-PA20 Operation pressure 0.5~0.7MPa
switch Withstand pressure 21MPa
Back wash Taisei Kogyo Co., Z-BP08100-40UW-DK-L Filtering accuracy 40μm
filter Material SUS
(When back Exchange element
11 wash system is P-AP03804-40UW
Withstand pressure 3.5MPa
Differential pressure switch
equipped) Starting operation at 0.3MPa
Coolant Water soluble coolant
Pull stud bolt Nikken Kosakusho Special pull stud bolt for Brother
Works, Ltd. Tapping Center.
Dai Showa Seiki (See 8.Pull stud bolt sketch for
Co., Ltd. (BIG) shape)
Yukiwa Seiko Co.,
NT tool Co.,
etc.

2011/06/30 11-2 - 8 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Filter system
System outline

2.Back
3.Line filter wash filter

Valve
2.Back 3.Line filter
wash filter

Valve
Pump
Valve Motor
spindle

1.Suction filter

Tools
* Inside the broken line square : Back wash system

1. Suction filter
To protect the pump, the suction filter prevents large chips from entering the pipes. 11
2. Back wash filter
The filter element can be automatically back-washed.
The timing of back washing after the end of each program can be set as desired.
Since the filter has a built-in differential pressure switch to detect clogging, an alarm message is
displayed when the filter is clogged.
(Refer to the Operation Manual for operation details.)
Note: When not install the back wash filter, need to set the filter that depending on
the machining condition.

3. Line filter
Since the filter has a built-in differential pressure switch to detect clogging, an alarm message is
displayed when the filter is clogged.
See 7.1 b) Replacement steps of line filter element.
Note: The back wash filter and the line filter are not maintenance-free.
Filters may need to be replaced depending on the operating time and
the chip condition.

2011/06/30 11-2 - 9 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

4 Piping Method
<When the back wash filter is equipped>

1. From CTS pump to back wash filter.

2. From back wash filter to 150 L tank.

Connect the hoses correctly or coolant may leak.

Line filter
Back wash filter

CTS pump (2) (1)

11

2011/06/30 11-2 - 10 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

5 Cable connection
Turn off the main circuit breaker and the machine power supply circuit
breaker before operation.

The following work must to be performed by qualified electricians.

1. Connect the CTS motor cable to the terminal block of the CTS protective unit (KP3).
While doing this, check that the name on the marking tube of the cable coincides with the
name on the terminal block. Connect the grounding terminal to the grounding tapped hole
directly in front of the CTS protection unit.
2. Connect the motor cable to the terminal block of the CTS pump. While doing this, check the
name on the marking tube of the cable coincides with the name on the terminal block.

5.1 Motor protection unit

(1) Rated current setting

Rated current setting values differ depending on the power voltage and
frequency.
If the setting value is incorrect, an overload cannot be detected correctly,
resulting in pump motor damage.
Set the values correctly.

Rated current setting value

Without power transformer T1
With power
Destination Frequency AC200V AC220V AC230V
transformer T1
Input Input Input
Except 50Hz 3.4A 3.4A － 3.4A
750W USA 60Hz 3.2A 3.0A － 3.0A
KP3 50Hz － － － －
USA
60Hz － 3.1A 3.1A －

Confirm the existence of the power transformer T1 referring to " INSTALLATION" of Installation
manual.

(2) Check pump rotation direction

Check that the CTS pump rotation direction matches the direction indicated on the pump.
If the rotation direction is not correct, turn off the main power and breaker. Replace the U and V
phase cords on the terminal block of motor, and then check the rotation direction again. 11
Note: Make sure the CTS pump rotates in the direction indicated.
Rotating it in the reverse direction will damage the oil seal.

(3) Solution when thermal relay was actuated

When the coolant pump motor is overloaded, the alarm '*THERMAL (CTS coolant)' occurs.
Possible causes are that the coolant viscosity is too high or the power voltage is not appropriate.
To recover the state, eliminate the cause and press the [RST] key of the tripped thermal relay.

2011/06/30 11-2 - 11 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Coolant protection unit

CTS protection unit

Sketch drawing of CTS protection unit

Rated current Cover
setting dial

Terminal block Reset

2 4 6
button

Grounding
tapped hole

11 UC3 VC3 WC3

For CTS pump motor

6 Installation Check
Check that piping and wiring are completed, and then supply coolant to the coolant tank.

(1) CTS pump motor check

1. Turn on the power of the tapping center.
Check that the front door and the side cover are completely closed.
2 Press the [CTL.P] key on the operation panel. The key lamp lights and coolant flows.
3. Press the [MDI] key to display the <MDI Operation Mode> screen.
(For NC type)
4. Press [CAN] key to clear the editing area.
Enter [494] using the numerical keys.

2011/06/30 11-2 - 12 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

(For Conversation)
4. Move the cursor to the desired external signal using the cursor keys.
Enter [494] using the numerical keys and press [ENT/EOB] key.
5. Press the [START] switch.
The CTS pump motor rotates, and coolant flows from the spindle. If the motor does not
rotate, check the wiring of the motor terminal block and connection of the motor terminal
block.

Note: When not equipped the back wash filter, change the user parameter of “0095
Back washing at end of program” to “0”. Refer to “Data manual, Chapter2
Data Bank”.
If setting is still “1”, CTS pump will start when programming is finished.

(2) Piping check

1. Operate the CTS pump according to the above steps.
2. Check that no coolant leaks from the sections where pipes are connected.

Note: This system is keeping inside pressure as coolant in the pipe that for coolant
flows immediately when commanded.
The error “*CTS pressure has not increased (2225)” will occur for the initial
two to four start-ups immediately after piping since there is no coolant in the
pipe.
Press the [RST] key to reset the error, and repeat the start-up operation until
the error does not occur.

7 Inspection and Consumable Parts

7.1 Points of the Inspection
a) Supply coolant.
The appropriate coolant level is when the 150L tank level has reached upper end of the oil level
gauge. Regularly check the level and replenish coolant if necessary.

Oil level gauge 11

Upper end

11.2.06-1.ai

2011/06/30 11-2 - 13 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

WARNING
Scattered coolant may hurt your eyes.
Be sure to remove residual pressure before filter cleaning
or replacement, or other maintenance.

Be sure to remove residual pressure before filter cleaning or replacement.

How to remove residual pressure

Press the black buttons of the lowest

valve two or three times.

Pressure gauge

11

11.2.06-2.ai11.2.07.ai
Check that the pressure gauge reads 0 MPa.

2011/06/30 11-2 - 14 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

b) Line filter
The line filter detects the differential pressure between the in and out ports of the filter. When the
filter is clogged, the "LINE FILTER ERROR " alarm message is displayed. Clean the filter before
it clogged as the machine sops operation.
As the line filter becomes clogged, the line filter indicator gradually becomes red.

Indicator

Replacement steps of line filter element

It is recommended to replace the filter when it is clogged.

Hexagonal socket head bolt

Indicator

11

2011/06/30 11-2 - 15 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1. Check the pump of pressure gage reads 0 MPa before replacement.

2. Loosen the indicator screws (2 pcs.).

3. Lift the top section of the indicator straight up to remove it.

11

2011/06/30 11-2 - 16 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

4. Slowly loosen the hexagon socket head bolts (4 pcs.) evenly.

It is hazardous if there is any residual pressure inside the filter, because the coolant may
spray and enter your eyes. Little by little make a slight opening between the lid and the
filter unit to check that there is no residual pressure, then open the lid.

5. Lift the lid straight up to remove it.

11

2011/06/30 11-2 - 17 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

6. Pull the element downward. Coolant inside the filter may spray out when the element is
pulled out. Be extremely careful.

7. Push a new element completely into the filter as shown in the photo below

11

2011/06/30 11-2 - 18 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

8. Check that there are no chips adhered to the inside of the lid or the top surface of the filter
unit, and that the O-ring is attached firmly. Then insert the lid, making sure that it is
straight.
9. Tighten the hexagon socket head bolts evenly.
Be sure to use the specified torque (50 N/m).

10. Check that the direction of the arrow indicating the coolant flow on the filter lid is as shown
in the photo below. (From right to left)

11

11. Dispense CTS coolant for several seconds, and check that the coolant does not leak from the
filter lid.

c) Cleaning of back wash filter

“BACK WASH FILTER ERROR” alarm message is displayed when inner pressure to be 0.3MPa.
Check indicator on a routine basis to avoid the block stopping.
Generally, the filter will not clogged to the extent that an error occurs as long as back washing is
performed regularly.

2011/06/30 11-2 - 19 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

How to wash the back washing filter

Cleaning tank

Vibration
Element generator
Soft oil
To power supply
Vibrator

See “Line Filter Replacement Procedure” for filter replacement.

d) How to wash the relief valve

If small granular chips pass through the suction filter and enter the medium pressure pump, of if
the medium pressure pump has not been operated for a certain period of time, sediments may be
generated in a sliding part of the relief valve and the relief valve may malfunction, causing large
pressure to be generated in the CTS piping, depending on the coolant condition. Since the system
including a pump, pressure gauge, etc. may be damaged, periodic maintenance every one to three
months is required following the procedure mentioned below.

1. Start the work after confirming that the residual pressure of the pump is 0MPa by referring
to a).
2. Disconnect the return pipe of the relief valve.

11 3. With the cap attached, disconnect the connector.

※Do not loosen the cap and the adjusting bolt in the cap so as not to change the set
pressure.

Cap Connector

2011/06/30 11-2 - 20 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

4. Remove the spring from the valve case.

5. Remove the poppet from the valve case.

6. Remove four relief valve mounting bolts M6, and then remove the valve case.

11

2011/06/30 11-2 - 21 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

7. After disassembling the relief valve, clean the spring, poppet, inside of valve case, and
inside of connector by air blow or washing. Confirm that no chips or foreign matters remain
in the valve case.
※Use clean kerosene such as white kerosene for washing the parts.

6B4087001
SHEET PACKING TRP-HG-75B

8. Insert the poppet into the valve case. At this time, confirm that the poppet slides smoothly.
9. Insert the spring into the poppet inside diameter in the valve case.
10. Screw the connector lightly in the valve case for tentative assembling.
※Check the O-ring at the connector thread for integrity (replace if damaged), and the
spring retainer for existence.
※Screw in the connector so that a convex portion of spring retainer is fitted in the spring
11 inside diameter.

6B4085001 6B4086001
O RING P18 4D O RING P10A 4D

2011/06/30 11-2 - 22 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

11. Mount the sub-plate and tentatively assembled valve case on the pump casing in this order,
and fix them as they were with four M6 bolts. (Recommended tightening torque 4.1 - 5.3
Ｎ・ｍ)
※Confirm that the direction of relief valve and the arrow direction of sub-plate face
downward.
※Confirm that each sheet packing is present in original position. (One sheet each on the
top and bottom surfaces of sub-plate)
12. Tighten the connector fully. (Recommended tightening torque 35 - 48Ｎ・ｍ）

Note: ・Preparing for oil leakage, take care of the surrounding of the pump with
oil pan, oil absorbing pads, or waste clothes.
・Protect the disassembled and cleaned relief valve parts and pump from
dust or foreign matters until they are reassembled.

Reference: Brother’s part numbers of replacement packing for the relief valve are listed below.

Parent part Child parts Quantity

6B4088001 6B4085001
1
RELIEF VALVE PACKING ASSY O RING P18 4D
6B4086001
1
O RING P10A 4D
6B4087001
2
SHEET PACKING TRP-HG-75B

7.2 Consumable parts

The following parts are consumable parts. Replace them regularly.
Maintenance and replacement of the parts marked by * in the following table must be done by
Brother maintenance staff or people who have been given Brother maintenance education.

When to BROTHER
Manufacturer Type No.
change part No.
Line filter Element Taisei Kogyo P-T-UL-03A-20U Appropriate 618491001
Co., time
*CTS Single Teral Kyokuto Appropriate 618492001
pump piece Ltd. time
pump
Back-Wash Element Taiseikogyo P-AP03804-40UW Appropriate 618497001
element time

11

2011/06/30 11-2 - 23 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

8 Pull-stud bolt Sketch

Only a tool holder with a coolant through hole and conforming to BT30 can be used for the
machine.
Use the pull-stud bolt such as following sketch and also with internal coolant piping.

This circle is a part different from

TH MASⅡ.(4 places)

Reference: Pull-stud bolt

manufacturers conforming to
Brother’s specifications

Nikken PS-130E
Yukiwa P30TB-101
Daishowa P30T-2H3
NT tool S/PSB-OA-CH
(as of February 2003)

S2BCTS-41.tif

11

2011/06/30 11-2 - 24 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

9 Parameter Setting
Machine parameter 1
Default
No. Item name Description
value
5147 Center-through coolant option [0:None 1:1.5MPa 2:7MPa] 1
Set whether the optional center-through
coolant is equipped or not.
5148 *1 Back washing time 1 Set the filter washing time by air for back 0.3
washing cycle. sec.
5149 *1 Back washing time 2 Set the filter washing time by coolant for 1.7
back washing cycle. sec.
5210*1 Back washing time 3 Set the air removal and coolant supply time 1.0
for back washing cycle. sec.
*1 mark indicates that the parameter is effective only when the back wash system is equipped.

User parameter 1
Default
No. Item name Description
value
95 Back washing at end of Set whether the back washing cycle is 1
program performed when the program is completed.
When [1:Yes] is selected with a CTS
command included in the program, the back
washing cycle is performed at the end of the
program.
96 CTS pressurize check delay Set the time after the center-through coolant 1.0
time is turned on by output signal M494 until the sec.
pump pressure check starts.
When [0] is set, pressure check is not
performed.
97 CTS depressurize check delay Set the time after the center-through coolant 1.0
time is turned off until the pump pressure check sec.
starts.
When [0] is set, pressure check is not
performed.
98 CTS pressure bleed time Set the time to bleed the pressure in the pump 0.0
when the center-through coolant is turned off. sec.

11

2011/06/30 11-2 - 25 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

(This page is blank.)

11

2011/06/30 11-2 - 26 eTR2BIN11.2.doc

 TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (3)

HANDLE
(MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR)

1 Precautions for Handling

2 Overall View
3 Mounting
4 Motion check

Machine model
11 11
TC-22B Option
TC-31B Option
TC-32BN Option
TC-S2D Option
TC-S2Dz Option
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B Option
TC-S2DN Option
TC-S2DNz Option

2011/06/30 11-3 - 1 eTR2BIN11.3.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1 Precautions for Handling

DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box.
Touching such parts by mistake may result in serious injury or
death.
Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the
electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and
inspect electrical components.
Turn off the main power breaker before operation.
Put up a signboard which says “Under maintenance.” When
leaving the machine, close the control box door and bolt it.

2 Overall View

HANDY PULSER

Increment selector Axis selection switch

Pulse generator handle

11

3 Mounting
Follow the procedure below when installing the manual pulse generator on the machine.

1. Turn off the power supply switch for operation panel.

2. Set the main power breaker of the operation box to the off position.
3. Unscrew eleven bolts on the operation panel and six bolts on the SW panel plate.
4. Remove the blind cover.
5. Mount the machine cover side connector from inside.
6. Connect the operation panel side connector and the machine cover side connector CNPUL.
7. Close the operation panel and tighten eleven bolts and fix the SW panel plate with six bolts.
8. Plug the manual pulse generator side connector into the machine cover side connector.

2011/06/30 11-3 - 2 eTR2BIN11.3.doc

 TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Operation panel side

connector CNPUL

Stud boss for grounding

Operation panel
SW panel plate side connector

Splash
Machine cover

Manual pulse
Blind cover generator side
connector

Operation panel

Handle

Handle holder

11 11

11.3.03-1.ai

9. Hook the manual pulse generator on the holder.

2011/06/30 11-3 - 3 eTR2BIN11.3.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

4 Motion check
Follow the procedure below when moving axis by the handle.

1. Turn on the power.

2. Press the [MANU] key to change to the manual operation mode.
3. Press the [I/O] key.
4. Enter [1] with the numerical key and press the [ENT] key.
5. Check if increment selector and axis selection switch settings coincide with the values in
the table below by turning the increment selector and axis selection switch.

Input 10 **** **** **** ****

Input 11 **** **** **** ****

Axis selection Increment

0000 : X axis 00 : ×1
0010 : Y axis 10 : ×10
0001 : Z axis 01 : ×100
0111 : 4th axis
0011 : OFF

6. Check if an selected axis is indeed fed and the travel direction by turning the handle of the
manual pulse generator.

(i) Set the handle to 0.

(ii) Set the axis selection switch to off.
(iii) Perform a zero point return in the manual operation mode to display the current position on
the screen.
(iv) Set the axis selection switch to X and the increment selector to ×100.
(v) Rotate the handle in the - direction (CCW) for one turn. Check if the X coordinates in the
machine coordinate system on the screen passes from 0.000 to –0.100.

11

S00014e.png

2011/06/30 11-3 - 4 eTR2BIN11.3.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (4)

MACHINE LIGHT

1 Cautions
2 External View
3 Mounting Method
4 Motion Check

Machine model
TC-22B Option (Fluorescent tube) 11
TC-31B Option (Fluorescent tube)
TC-32BN Option (Fluorescent tube)
TC-S2D Option (Fluorescent tube)
TC-S2Dz 1Set: Standard equipment (LED)
2Set: Option (LED)
TC-R2B Option (LED)
TC-20B Option (LED)
TC-S2DN Option (LED)
TC-S2DNz 1Set: Standard equipment (LED)

2011/06/30 11- 4 - 1 eTR2BIN11.4.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1 Cautions
DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box. Touching such
parts by mistake may result in serious injury or death.
Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the
electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and
inspect electrical components.
Turn off the main power breaker before operation.
Put up a signboard which says “Under maintenance.” When
leaving the machine, close the control box door and bolt it.

WARNING
The cover (transparent glass) of machine light and table light
may break if excessive force is applied, causing you to cut your
hands.
Do not hit the cover (transparent glass) of the machine light and
table light with any object or apply excessive force.
Be sure to wear gloves when replacing the fluorescent light.

WARNING
When entering the machine, you may slip and fall down or be
caught in the machine.
When entering the machine, be sure to turn off the main circuit
power breaker, padlock the breaker so that the breaker is not
turned on, and remove any coolant and chips.
Also, wear safety shoes and a helmet. Put up a signboard which
says “Under maintenance” near the machine.

11

2011/06/30 11- 4 - 2 eTR2BIN11.4.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

2 External View

Machine light

110401-1.ai

11

2011/06/30 11- 4 - 3 eTR2BIN11.4.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

3 Mounting Method
1. Set the main power breaker handle to the OFF position.
2. Mount the machine light to the tapped hole on the side of the machine cover.
3. Let the cord of the machine light pass under each side of the control box and insert the cord
from the base.
4. The connector LT24IN is located adjacent to the terminal board XTPW of IO board.
Connect the DC connector.
5. Connect the cord to the IO PCB terminal block XTPW(LT24,T24).

Control box

Connector
LT24iN: AC (Do not use)
Connector
LT24IN: DC IO PCB
(Connect)
XTPW
Connector
LT24IN
(Input)

Cable clamp

110404-1.ai

4 Motion Check
11 1.
2.
Set the mainpower breaker to the ON position.
Turn on the [LIGHT] key on the keyboard.
The [LIGHT] LED comes on and so does the switch lamp and machine light.
3. When the [LIGHT] key is turned off, the machine light goes out.

2011/06/30 11- 4 - 4 eTR2BIN11.4.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (5)

INDICATION LAMP

1 Cautions
2 External View
3 Mounting the indication lamp

Machine model 11
TC-22B Option
TC-31B Option
TC-32BN Option
TC-S2D Option
TC-S2Dz Option
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B Option
TC-S2DN Option
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/06/30 11-5 - 1 eTR2BIN11.5.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1 Cautions
DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box.
Touching such parts by mistake may result in serious injury or
death.
Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the
electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and
inspect electrical components.
Turn off the main power breaker before operation.
Put up a signboard which says “Under maintenance.”
When leaving the machine, close the control box door and bolt it.

2 External View
(Single -lamp type)

(Yellow)

(Twin -lamp type)

(Red)

(Yellow)

11

(Three -lamp type)

(Red)

(Yellow)

(Green)

2011/06/30 11-5 - 2 eTR2BIN11.5.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

3 Mounting the indication lamp

Indication lamp

9-08.ai

Cable C Indication lamp A

M4 screw Packing B
(4places) 11
M4 screw (4places) M4 screw (1 place)

M6 screw
BOX D
M6 spring washer

M6 flat washer
(3places)

11.5.01.ai

2011/06/30 11-5 - 3 eTR2BIN11.5.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Control box

IO PCB

Cable clamp

110404-1.ai

For preventing oil, put the cable clamp back where they were after the wiring is finished.
Turn off the main power breaker before opening the control box.

1. Assemble the box D and the cable C.

Pass the connector and grounding wire of the cable C through the hole, and fix them with
four M4 screws.
2. Assemble the indication lamp A, packing B and box D.
• Fix the connector of the indication lamp A and that of the cable C one into another.
• Fix the grounding wire of the indication lamp A and cable C with screws onto the
boss of the box D for fixing the grounding wire.
• Fix the indication lamp A onto the box D with four M4 screws.
3. Attach the assembled indication lamp with three M6 screws.
4. Let the cable pass throughout the upper-left side of the machine cover to reach below
11 the left side of the control panel.
Put the cable inside the control panel from the base.
5. Connect the cable to the connector CNPAT2 of the IO PCB.

2011/06/30 11-5 - 4 eTR2BIN11.5.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (6)

AUTOMATIC CENTERING UNIT

1 Precautions For Handling

2 Connection
3 Motion Check

Machine model
TC-22B Option 11
TC-31B Option
TC-32BN Option
TC-S2D Option
TC-S2Dz No setting
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B Option
TC-S2DN Option
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/06/30 11- 6 - 1 eTR2BIN11.6.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1 Precautions For Handling

DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box. Touching such
parts by mistake may result in serious injury or death.
Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the
electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and
inspect electrical components.
Turn off the main power breaker before operation.
Put up a signboard which says "Under maintenance".
When leaving the machine, close the control box door and bolt it.

Automatic centering is available by adding the automatic workpiece measurement system

(optional).

We don’t provide the touch probe and the relay box, so please prepare them by yourself.
Input contact signal of the touch probe to the dedicated terminal on the IO PCB.

11

2011/06/30 11- 6 - 2 eTR2BIN11.6.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

2 Connection
Connect contact signal of the touch probe which you prepared to the dedicated terminal block on
the IO PCB.
Input COM of the dedicated terminal block on the IO PCB responds to two type; 0V (for transistor
NPN) and 24V (transistor PNP)
Two types can be switched by switch 5 on the IO PCB. Default input COM is 0V (for transistor
NPN).

Input COM Transistor

Type 1 0V NPN …Default
Type 2 24V PNP

Swith Input COM shown as below as necessary.

Control box IO PCB

SW5
…Type 2 Input COM 24V
Transistor PNP
●
TOUCH
NPN

…Type 1 Input COM 0V

Transistor NPN
Default

11
IO PCB

2011/06/30 11- 6 - 3 eTR2BIN11.6.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1.Connecting type 1 (Input COM : 0V Transistor NPN)

Connect contact signal of the touch probe to the 11 pin and 12 pin (Input COM) of the
terminal block XTIO on the IO PCB.

IO PCB

Terminal block
XTIO
11
〇 Contact signal

12
〇

0V

2.Connecting type2 (Input COM : 24V transistor PNP)

Connect contact signal of the touch probe to 11pin and 26pin (Input COM) of the terminal
block XTIO on the IO PCB.

IO PCB

Terminal block
XTIO 24V
26
〇

11
〇 Contact signal

11
(Note) Both connecting type1 and 2 are available to use for connection point input.

2011/06/30 11- 6 - 4 eTR2BIN11.6.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

3 Motion Check
Contact the touch probe to a jig or a workpiece by using the [JOG] key and check that the probe
functions properly.

• Check on the <I/O> screen

Press the [I/O], [1], [ENT] and [↓ PAGE] keys and display the following screen.

SLAVE
FEDC BA98 7654 3210
IN4 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
0: not contacted
1: contacted

• Check on the <Automatic centering> screen

When the touch probe and a jig or a workpiece are in contact, the message “Detection signal ON”
appears on the screen.
If they are not in contact, no message appears.

11

2011/06/30 11- 6 - 5 eTR2BIN11.6.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

(This page is blank.)

11

2011/06/30 11- 6 - 6 eTR2BIN11.6.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (7)

SIMPLIFIED ROTARY JOINT

Machine model 11
TC-22B No setting
TC-31B Option
TC-32BN Option
TC-S2D No setting
TC-S2Dz No setting
TC-R2B No setting
TC-20B No setting
TC-S2DN No setting
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/06/30 11-7 - 1 eTR2BIN11.7.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Since the simplified rotary joint function is not available for this machine,
the details in this chapter are omitted.

11

2011/06/30 11-7 - 2 eTR2BIN11.7.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (8)
AUTOMATIC INTERMITTENT
LUBRICATING UNIT

1 Cautions
2 Overall View
3 Specifications
4 Wiring

Machine model
TC-22B Option 11
TC-31B Option
TC-32BN Option
TC-S2D Option
TC-S2Dz Option
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B Option
TC-S2DN Option
TC-S2DNz Option

2011/06/30 11- 8 - 1 eTR2BIN11.8.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1 Cautions
DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box.
Touching such parts by mistake may result in serious injury or
death.
Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the
electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and
inspect electrical components.
Turn off the main power breaker before maintenance.
Put up a sign board which says “Under maintenance”.
Close the control box and bolt it when leaving the machine.

2 Overall view
The automatic intermittent lubricating unit serves to automatically supply oil to ball screws of X,
Y, Z axes and the slide guides regularly.

(Note)
The ball screws and guides are basically lubricated with grease.
This machine does not have a lubricating oil collector for collecting oil from the
automatic intermittent lubricating unit, so lubricating oil will be mixed into the
coolant.

Lubricating unit
11

11.8.01.ai

2011/06/30 11- 8 - 2 eTR2BIN11.8.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

3 Specifications
Lubricating unit (VOGEL JAPAN)
Model MKU1-BW3-SPN2
Delivery 100ml/min
Pump
Pressure 1.6±0.1MPa
Total capacity 2.7L
Tank
Effective capacity 1.7L

Delivery port
M10P1.0
forφ 6 tube

Cap (yellow)

Wiring port

4-φ7 hole

11

11.8.03.ai

2011/06/30 11- 8 - 3 eTR2BIN11.8.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Oil pressure circuit

Pressure E Delivery port DS Pressure

gauge P switch

Pump motor

Float switch

E Residual
pressure relief
valve

Safety valve

Permissible Motor
Delivery
Type Pressure 3 viscosity Current
cm /min output（Ｗ）
(cSt)
MKU1- 200V50Hz 200V60Hz
BW3- 1.6MPa 100 50~70 about 20
0.8A 0.7A
SPN2

Electrical connection

SW FS PS

11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

M: Pump motor
SW: Inching switch
FS : Flow proving switch
PS : Pressure switch

2011/06/30 11- 8 - 4 eTR2BIN11.8.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

X, Y and Z axes Distributor (VOGEL JAPAN)

Engraved
mark

6 6 16 6 6
2-φ4.5

M10×P1
(φ6 Tube)

11.7.04.ai

Branch pipe (Engraved mark)

Item Unit Main pipe
6 16
Size of connection M10P1.0
Operating pressure MPa 1.0
Return pressure MPa 0.3
Delivery m1 0.06 0.16

11

2011/06/30 11- 8 - 5 eTR2BIN11.8.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

4 Wiring
Wiring of lubricating unit side
1. Remove the cover of lubricating unit and put the cable through the wiring hole to connect
wires to the terminals as shown below.
2. Screw the code lock into the unit plate firmly and tighten the cable clamping nut of code
lock to fix the cable.
3. Turn off the main power circuit breaker.

To frame
ground of
lubricating unit

Lubricating unit

Lubricator cord Cord lock

To control box

11.8.05.ai

Wiring of control box side

4. Attach the KLUB relay assembly to the center chassis.
Attach the spark killer Z2 to the lower face of the control box.
5. Connect it to the LUBPW connector near transformer 2.
Also connect the LUB connector of the I/O board.
11 6. Thread the cord of the oil supply unit through the cable clamp on the bottom of the control
box to inside the control box.
7. Connect the cord of the oil supply unit to the LUB2 connector of the KLUB relay assembly.
Connect the grounding cord to the tapped hole on the lower face of the control box.

(Note) Return the cable clamp to its original state to prevent oil from entering
the control box.

Parameter setting
8. Change the machine parameter (system 1) of “Automatic oiling function” to [2.Type2].

(Note) See 7.1 Machine Parameters for details.

2011/06/30 11- 8 - 6 eTR2BIN11.8.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Transformer 2
R201, T201

Connector
LUBPW

IO board

Connector Relay
LUB KLUB assy

Lubricator cord

Ground Spark killer Z2

Connector LUB2

11.8.02.ai

Lubricating unit side Control Box side

Ground

2 11
Connector LUB2

11.8.07.ai

2011/06/30 11- 8 - 7 eTR2BIN11.8.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

(This page is blank.)

11

2011/06/30 11- 8 - 8 eTR2BIN11.8.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (9)

CEILING COVER

1 Cautions for Handling

2 Sketch Drawing and Installation

Machine model
11
TC-22B No setting
TC-31B Option
TC-32BN Option
TC-S2D Option
TC-S2Dz Option
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B Option
TC-S2DN Option
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/06/30 11-9 - 1 eTR2BIN11.9.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1 Cautions for Handling

Use a mist collector when a ceiling cover is attached, particularly when the machine is equipped
with CTS (Coolant Through Spindle). If not used, grease applied to the guide and ball screw will
seep into the coolant, resulting in damage to the machine.
A window for attaching a mist collector is provided in the ceiling cover.
The specifications of the recommended mist collector are:
Amount of air: 500 m3 per hour
Generator: 750 W or higher

2 Sketch Drawing and Installation

Ceiling cover
Install the ceiling cover with 16 socket head bolts (M6×12).

Ceiling cover
Window for attaching a
mist collector

11-09-01.ai
Attaching a mist collector dimension
4-M6P1.0 welded nut (1A type),
Prepared hole Ø9, Weld on
back side
11

2011/06/30 11-9 - 2 eTR2BIN11.9.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (10)
AUTOMATIC THERMAL DISTORTION
COMPENSATION SYSTEM

Machine model 11
TC-22B Standard equipment
TC-31B Standard equipment
TC-32BN Standard equipment
TC-S2D Standard equipment
TC-S2Dz Standard equipment
TC-R2B Standard equipment
TC-20B Standard equipment (II)
TC-S2DN Standard equipment (II)
TC-S2DNz Standard equipment (II)

2011/06/30 11-10 - 1 eTR2BIN11.10.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Since this model includes the automatic thermal distortion compensation

system as standard equipment and doesn’t require installation operation,
the details in this chapter are omitted.

11

2011/06/30 11-10 - 2 eTR2BIN11.10.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (11)

EXTENDED IO BOARD Z

Machine model 11
TC-22B Option
TC-31B No setting
TC-32BN No setting
TC-S2D No setting
TC-S2Dz No setting
TC-R2B No setting
TC-20B No setting
TC-S2DN No setting
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/07/01 11-11 - 1 eTR2BIN11.11.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Since the extended IO board Z function is not available for this model,
the details in this chapter are omitted.

11

2011/07/01 11-11 - 2 eTR2BIN11.11.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (12)

TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTOR

1 Handling Precautions
2 External View
3 Attachment Procedure
4 Connection Check

Machine model 11
TC-22B Option
TC-31B Option
TC-32BN Option
TC-S2D Option
TC-S2Dz Option
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B Option
TC-S2DN Option
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/07/01 11-12 - 1 eTR2BIN11.12.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

The tool breakage detector detects tool breakage by contacting the tool with the tool detection
sensor that is secured within the X/Y strokes on the table surface.
Tool breakage detection is performed after machining by moving the table or the spindle.
The user is required to prepare an appropriate bracket for the tool detection sensor if the provided
bracket cannot be used due to interference with the workpiece or jig, splashing machining chips,
and so on.

1 Handling Precautions
1. Do not overload the tool detection sensor.
2. Do not pull the tool detection sensor cable with excessive force. [Max. 20N (2 kg)]
Secure at least 7R for the cable bending radius.
3. Secure the tool detection sensor so that the actuator faces up.
4. Carefully consider the sensor securing position and cable routing to prevent the sensor and
the cable being affected by machining chips, or provide a cover to protect the sensor and the
cable.
5. When machining chips are entangled in the tool, the chips may contact the tool detection
sensor, leading to incorrect detection. When using the tool breakage detection unit, be sure
to start machining under conditions that do not allow chips to entangle the tool.
6. Clean as necessary when operation of the tool detention sensor’s actuator is affected by
machining chips or sludge.

2 External View
Fig. 11.12-1

Tool detection sensor

11

1208.ai

2011/07/01 11-12 - 2 eTR2BIN11.12.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

3 Attachment Procedure
1. Turn off the power.
2. Secure the tool detection sensor within XY stroke range on the table surface.
3. Pass the tool detection sensor cable through the through-hole (φ95) in the middle of the
table.

To control panel

Relay Through-hole (φ95)

connector
Tool detection sensor cable

Make sure it doesn’t contact

with the upper surface of the base.
11.12.01.ai
4. Run the tool detection sensor cable up, making sure it doesn’t contact with the upper surface
of the base. Fix it to the machine cover on the left side with the banding strap.
5. Relay the tool detection sensor cable to the sensor relay cable (control panel side) in the upper
left side of the machine cover.

To Cable cover

11

Sensor relay cable

11.12.03.ai

2011/07/01 11-12 - 3 eTR2BIN11.12.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Sensor relay cable

Control panel

11.12.02.ai

6. Pull the sensor relay cable from the cable cover on the side of the control box.

Terminal block
(XTIO)

IO board

Sensor relay cable

11
Control panel

7. Connect the sensor relay cable to the dedicated terminal block on the IO PCB.
Input COM of the dedicated terminal block on the IO PCB responds to two type; 0V (for
transistor NPN) and 24V (transistor PNP)
Two types can be switched by switch 5 on the IO PCB. Default input COM is 0V (for
transistor NPN).

Input COM Transistor

Type 1 0V NPN …Default
Type 2 24V PNP

2011/07/01 11-12 - 4 eTR2BIN11.12.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Switch Input COM shown as below as necessary.

IO PCB

SW5
…Type 2 Input COM 24V
●

Transistor PNP
TOUCH
NPN

…Type 1 Input COM 0V

Transistor NPN
Default

IO PCB

1.Connecting type 1 (Input COM : 0V Transistor NPN)

Connect the sensor relay cable to the 11 pin and 12 pin (Input COM) of the terminal block
XTIO on the IO PCB.
When using two tool detection sensors, connect the other cable to the 25 pin and
30 pin (Input COM) of the terminal block XTIO on the IO PCB. 11
Terminal block (XTIO)
Relay connector Touch sensor 1
SQTS
12 COM (IOG)
1
Signal（＋side）
11 3

IOboard Touch sensor 2

Relay connector
SQTS2
30 COM (IOG)
1

25 Signal（＋side）
3

2011/07/01 11-12 - 5 eTR2BIN11.12.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

2.Connecting type2 (Input COM : 24V transistor PNP)

Connect contact signal of the touch probe to 11pin and 26pin (Input COM) of the terminal
block XTIO on the IO PCB.
When using two tool detection sensors, connect the other cable to the 25 pin and
26 pin (Input COM) of the terminal block XTIO on the IO PCB.

Terminal block (XTIO)

Relay connector Touch sensor 1
SQTS
26 COM (IO24)
1
Signal（－side）
11 3

IO board Touch sensor 2

Relay connector
SQTS2
26 COM (IO24)
1
Signal（－side）
25 3

＊Both connecting type1 and 2 are available to use for connection point input.

4 Connection Check
(1) Parameter setting
To enable the tool breakage detector option, set [3: Type 3] for [Tool breakage detection option]
(user parameter/switch 1).

(2) Cable connection check

Press the [I/O], [1], [ENT] and [↓PAGE] keys to display the following screen.
Press the top of the tool detection sensor and check the value change on the screen.
When using two touch sensors, check both.

SLAVE
FEDC BA98 7654 3210
IN4 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
0: not pressed
1: pressed

11

2011/07/01 11-12 - 6 eTR2BIN11.12.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (13)

AUTOMATIC DOOR

1 Cautions
2 Sketch Drawing
3 Wiring of Automatic Door
4 Stroke Study
5 Signal Input Check
6 Operation Check
7 Area Sensor

Machine model 11
TC-22B Option (Air type)
TC-31B Option (Air type)
TC-32BN Option (Air type)
TC-S2D Option (Electric type)
TC-S2Dz No setting
TC-R2B Option (Electric type)
TC-20B Option (Air type)
TC-S2DN Option (Electric type)
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/07/01 11-13 - 1 eTR2BIN11.13.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1 Cautions
DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box.
Touching such parts by mistake may result in serious injury or
death.
Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the
electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and
inspect electrical components.
Cut the main power breaker and work on the machine. Put up a
signboard which says "Under maintenance".
When leaving the machine, close the control box door and
tighten the screws.

2 Sketch Drawing
Encoder cable, Motor cable Electric cylinder Door open end limit switch

Door close end

limit switch

To control
Box

11 Relay

ADC controller assembly

Controller

24V power supply

Layout drawing inside control panel

11.13-01.ai 11.12.09.ai
Increased operation speed of the automatic door could damage the automatic door.
Do not change the operation speed of the automatic door

2011/07/01 11-13 - 2 eTR2BIN11.13.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

3 Wiring of Automatic Door

Operation panel internal wiring
1. Connect the EMS cord assembly to the Emergency Stop switch in the operation panel.

Control panel internal wiring

1. Secure the ADC controller assembly to the control panel with 3 screws (M5).
2. Connect the cords coming out of the ADC controller assembly to the following connectors:
1) Connect to the relay connector ELCPW in the duct.
2) Connect to the connectors TOOL, YVD, and MSEN on the IO board.
3. Connect the EMS cord, ELCM cord, and ELCE cord led in from the outside of control
panel to the following connectors respectively:
1) Connect to the relay connectors ELCM and ELCE near the ADC controller.
2) Connect to the relay connector EMS in the duct near the IO board.
4. Connect the AD cylinder switch assembly to the terminal board XTIO No. 15 and 16 on the
IO board.

Wiring on actuator side

1. Connect the ELCE cords (4 poles) and ELCM cords (6 poles) to the motor box.

Block Diagram

IO Board ADC Controller Assembly Operation Panel

Relay Connector EMS SW

EMS
CNMSEN
Relay Connector
Door

Relay Connector ELCM Motor

ELCS ADC /Encoder
KEC1A Controller Relay Connector
/KEC2B ELCE
CNYVD

CNTOOL
Relay Connector
XTPOW ELC AVR11
PW
11
XTIO
15/16 AD cylinder
switch assembly

2011/07/01 11-13 - 3 eTR2BIN11.13.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Connector
TOOL
Relay
connector
EMS
Connector Relay connector
YVD ELCE, ELCM

ADC Controller
Connector Ass’y
MSEN

Relay CNI
connector
ELCPW

AD Cylinder Switch Ass’y

← To Auto Switch
EMS Cord Ass’y
← To Operation Panel
(Emergency Stop SW)

Operation Panel

11

EMS Cord Ass’y

To Control Panel →

Emergency Stop SW

2011/07/01 11-13 - 4 eTR2BIN11.13.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

3. Install the desired switch and name plate to the SW panel that is under the operation panel.

Name Connector marking tube name

MANU/AUTO selection swtch MODE
Automatic door OPEN/CLOSE switch ATDR

Automatic Automatic
door door
OPEN CLOSE MANU AUTO

11.12.03.ai

4. Connect the relay code CNDOOR to the connector CNDOOR on the key boad PCB.
Connect MANU/AUTO selection switch and OPEN/CLOSE switch to the relay code
CNDOOR.

5. Set the user parameter (switch 1) to validate the automatic door.

User parameter (Switch 1)
Automatic door [0:Not equipped 1:Equipped]---------------1

4 Stroke Study
Stroke study is executed to register zero point information for door stroke ends to the controller
when installing the automatic door (electric type).
1. Press the button (1) shown below for more than 3 seconds, and the Stroke Study mode is
activated and the operation will start.
2. Check that the MOTOR indicator lamp and END indicator lamp are blinking. The actuator
is driven automatically to study the stroke.
3. After the stroke study finished, the MOTOR indicator lamp lights up at the door closed end.

11
(1)

Controller

2011/07/01 11-13 - 5 eTR2BIN11.13.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

5 Signal Input Check

Press the [I/O],[1],[ENTER] key to display the input output screen (Main1) and check the signal
input.

MAIN 1
INPUT7 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

Door open manual switch 1-Pressed

Door close manual switch 1-Pressed
MANU/AUTO selection switch 1-MANU
0-AUTO

INPUT7 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Cylinder open Limit switch
1-Switcch ON
Cylinder close Limit switch
1-Switch ON

6 Operation Check
1. Select MANU mode, with MANU/AUTO selection switch.

2. Turn the automatic door OPEN/CLOSE switch to CLOSE and press the center button.
The automatic door is closed.
When the door alarm is occurred, adjust the position of the door closed limit switch.

3. Turn the automatic door OPEN/CLOSE switch to OPEN and press the center button.
The automatic door opens.
When the door alarm is occurred, adjust the position of the limit switch on the cylinder left
side.

4. After adjusting the limit switches, open and close the automatic door several times and
check the limit switch operation.

11

2011/07/01 11-13 - 6 eTR2BIN11.13.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

7 Area sensor
The area sensor is used in conjunction with the automatic door. It cannot be used independently. If
there is an object obstructing the area sensor before the automatic door closes, the door stops
immediately.

(1) External view

Area sensor Area sensor

(receiver) (emitter)

Compatible cable

Relay connector

11.13-02.ai
(2) Mounting
To protect the machine from the oils, be sure to return the cable cover and the cable clamp to their
original positions.
1. Turn off the power switch of the operation panel and set the main power breaker handle to
the OFF position.
2. Install the bracket (area sensor bracket SF2B) on the area sensor.

Socket bolt
(M3 (length 5mm))

Compatible bracket
MS-SF2B-7 11
Light curtain
Sensing surface
Sensing surface
受光側上部 受光側下部
Compatible bracket
MS-SF2B-7

Socket bolt
(M3 (length 5mm))

Receiver upper side Receiver lower side

※The bracket for emitter is left-right reversed.

2011/07/01 11-13 - 7 eTR2BIN11.13.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

3. Install the area sensor receiver (left) and emitter (right) on the machine cover.
4. Connect the sensor cables to the area sensor.
(Receiver: SF2B-CB05(D)-B, Emitter: SF2B-CB05(E)-B)
5. Connect the sensor cables and the relay cables. (Meet the connector colors (gray and black).)
6. Route the cables within the duct at the lower right of the machine cover.
7. Lead the cables into the control box through cable clamp.
8. Connect the cables to the terminal block XTIO of the IO board.
Light emitting side : No. 21, 22.
Light receiving side : No. 17, 18, 19.
(Remove the short codes No. 17 and No. 18.)
9. Return the cable cover to the home position.

(3) Motion check

1.Operation status check
(1)Set the main power breaker handle to ON position, and turn on the power switch on the
operation panel.
(2)Check the operation status of area sensor from the indication lamps on the receiver and
emitter.
Operation of detection Operation of indication lamp
output Optical axis alignment OSSD indication Light receiving
indication lamp lamp amount indication
lamp
Receiving Light receiving Green ON Green ON Green ON
side
Light intercepted Red ON Red ON OFF

Operation of detection Operation of indication lamp

output
Optical axis alignment Operation indication Emitter stop
indication lamp lamp indication lamp
Emitting Light receiving OFF Green ON OFF
side
Light intercepted OFF Green ON OFF

Uppermost end
Emitter

Optical axis alignment

indication lamp

Operation indication lamp

11 Emitter stop indication lamp
Alarm indication lamp
Optical axis alignment
indication lamp
RECEPTION Setting indication lamp

Receiver

Optical axis alignment

indication lamp

OSSD indication lamp

Light receiving amount indication lamp
Alarm indication lamp
Lowermost
end
Digital error indication lamp

2011/07/01 11-13 - 8 eTR2BIN11.13.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

2.Check on the screen

(1) Press [I/O] [1] [SET] [↓] keys to display the I/O screen (main 2).
Confirm that the 4 bit of input 15 is “1” when the light is fully received, or “0” when the light is
intercepted.

Main 2 4 bit
INPUT15 ****************
1:When light is fully received
0:When light is intercepted

11

2011/07/01 11-13 - 9 eTR2BIN11.13.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

(This page is blank.)

11

2011/07/01 11-13 - 10 eTR2BIN11.13.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (14)

SPINDLE OVERRIDE

1 Cautions
2 Overall Views
3 Mounting
4 Connection Check

Machine model 11
TC-22B Option
TC-31B Option
TC-32BN Option
TC-S2D Option
TC-S2Dz No setting
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B Option
TC-S2DN Option
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/07/01 11-14 - 1 eTR2BIN11.14.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1 Cautions
DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box. Touching such
parts by mistake may result in serious injury or death.
Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the
electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and
inspect electrical components.
Turn off the main power switch before maintenance.
Put up a signboard which says “Under maintenance.”
When leaving the machine, close the control box and bolt it.

2 Overall view
SPINDLE OVERRIDE SW

SPINDLE OVERRIDE
100 120
%

50

11

0304-2.doc

2011/07/01 11-14 - 2 eTR2BIN11.14.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

3 Mounting
1. Turn off the <POWER> switch on the operation panel and the main power circuit breaker
inside the control box.
2. Remove the screws from the operation panel, and attach the switch to the operation panel as
shown in the illustration below.

Operation panel

Switch

111403-1.ai

3. Attach the dial to the switch with the set screw and turn the dial fully counterclockwise.
Then, loosen the set screw and align the notch in the dial to 50% of the scale and retighten
the set screw.

SPINDLE OVERRIDE
100 120
% 11
50

Notch in the dial

2011/07/01 11-14 - 3 eTR2BIN11.14.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

4. Remove the short connector of the connector CNSPOV on the key board to connect
the connector of the spindle override switch.
After connection, close the door of the operation panel and then attach the screw.

LCD Unit

Key board

Connector CNSPOV

Remove the short

connector

Spindle override
switch

Switch panel

Operation panel inside

11.14.05.ai

11

2011/07/01 11-14 - 4 eTR2BIN11.14.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

4 Connection check
1. Turn the machine power on.
2. Press the [POS] key.
3. Set the spindle override switch to 50% ~120%, and check that the present display of the
spindle override is collect.

(e.g. <Current position> screen for NC language programming)

Spindle override display

S00015e.png

11

2011/07/01 11-14 - 5 eTR2BIN11.14.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

(This page is blank.)

11

2011/07/01 11-14 - 6 eTR2BIN11.14.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (15)

CHIP CONVEYOR

Machine model 11
TC-22B Option
TC-31B No setting
TC-32BN Option
TC-S2D No setting
TC-S2Dz No setting
TC-R2B No setting
TC-20B No setting
TC-S2DN No setting
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/07/01 11-15 - 1 eTR2BIN11.15.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Since the chip conveyor function is not available for this model,
the details in this chapter are omitted.

11

2011/07/01 11-15 - 2 eTR2BIN11.15.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (16)

FLOPPY DISK DEVICE

Machine model 11
TC-22B Option
TC-31B No setting
TC-32BN No setting
TC-S2D No setting
TC-S2Dz No setting
TC-R2B No setting
TC-20B No setting
TC-S2DN No setting
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/07/01 11-16 - 1 eTR2BIN11.16.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Since the floppy disk device function is not available for this model,
the details in this chapter are omitted.

11

2011/07/01 11-16 - 2 eTR2BIN11.16.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (17)

EXIO1 & 2 BOARDS

1 Handling Precautions
2 Outline
3 Configuration
4 Attachment Procedure

Machine model 11
TC-22B Option
TC-31B Option
TC-32BN Option
TC-S2D Option
TC-S2Dz Option
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B Option
TC-S2DN Option
TC-S2DNz Option

2011/07/01 11-17 - 1 eTR2BIN11.17.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1 Handling Precautions
DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box. Touching
these parts by mistake may result in serious injury or death.
Only personnel qualified for electrical work and familiar with
the electrical circuits of this machine are permitted to perform
electrical maintenance and inspection.
Turn the main power circuit breaker off before maintenance
and inspection.
Post a signboard that indicates that the machine is “Under
maintenance.”
When leaving the machine, close the control box door and bolt it.

2 Outline
Using the EXIO board allows you to extend the terminal blocks for external input/output signals
for up to 64 input points and 64 output points. (Standard IO board: 8 points each)
Similar to a standard IO board, you can assign the external input/output signals to the desired
input/output terminal blocks.
Refer to the Installation Manual "External Input/Output Signals" and the Operation Manual "Data
bank" for details.

11

2011/07/01 11-17 - 2 eTR2BIN11.17.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

3 Configuration
Fig.1 EXIO1 board

Connector Connector
CNIO CNEXIO

Connector
CNEXIO6

Connector
CNEXIO2

Switch 1

Connector
CNEXIO3

Connector
CNEX24
11
Connector
CNEXPW

Switch 1 setting

1
2
3
4

2011/07/01 11-17 - 3 eTR2BIN11.17.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Fig.2 EXIO2 board

Connector
CNEXIO6

Connector
CNEXIO4

Connector
CNEXIO5

11

2011/07/01 11-17 - 4 eTR2BIN11.17.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Fig.3 XT board

Terminal blocks

Fig.4 Cable

11

CNEXIO∗

2011/07/01 11-17 - 5 eTR2BIN11.17.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

4 Attachment Procedure
1) EXIO board attachment
Attach the EXIO1 board to the left side of the control box.
When also attaching the EXIO2 board, put together the EXIO2 board and the EXIO1 board in
advance.
Plastic spacers are attached to the chassis. Push the board until it is locked definitely.
Attach the EXIO1 and 2 boards so that the 40-pin connector is on the downside.
Fig.5 Inside the control box (left side)

IO board

EXIO1 board

EXIO2board

11.15-1.ai
2) Mounting stay (bracket) and DIN rail attachment
Attach the DIN rails to the metal spacer that bottom of control box by the screws. When only
EXIO 1 board is mounted, attach the DIN rail to the left. (Fig.6)

3) XT board attachment
Attach the XT boards to the DIN rails so that the terminal blocks are in front.
Fig.6 Attachment position (Bottom of control box)

IO board DIN rail

11

XT board XT board XT board XT board

No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4

Cable inlet

11.15-6.ai

2011/07/01 11-17 - 6 eTR2BIN11.17.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Fig.7 Wiring 1

EXIO2 board
CNEXIO4

EXIO1 board
CNEXIO5

CNEXIO2
CNEXIO3

EXIO1 board XT board

CNEXIO2 No.1
CNEXIO3 No.2

No.1

No.2
XT board

11

No.3 EXIO2 board XT board

CNEXIO4 No.3
No.4 CNEXIO5 No.4

11.15-3.ai

2011/07/01 11-17 - 7 eTR2BIN11.17.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Disconnect the terminating resistance from the connector CNEXIO on the IO board, and connect
this to the connector CNEXIO on the EXIO board.
Connect the connector CNEXIO on the IO board and the connector CNIO on the EXIO1 board.

Fig.8 Wiring 2

CNEX24

Connector CNIO
Connector CNEXIO
(Terminating resistance)

IO board

Additional cable
EXIO1 board

CNIO

CNEXIO
Terminating resistance
(The one being disconnected from the
11 connector CNEXIO on the IO board.)

11.15-4.ai

EXIO1 board connector Mating connector

CNEXIO Terminating resistance
CNIO CNEXIO on IO board

2011/07/01 11-17 - 8 eTR2BIN11.17.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Connect one end of cord CNEX24 to connector CNEX24 on the EXIO1 board and the other end to
connector CNEX24 on the IO board.
Check that a short cord is attached to connector CNEXPW on the EXIO1 board.

(Note) Wiring differs when using 0.5 A or more for the 24V power supply.
Refer to Chapter 5 External Input/Output Signals.

Fig.9 Wiring 3

Cord CNEX24

CNEX24

IO board

EXIO1 board

CNIO

CNEXIO
CNEXPW short cord CNEXPW

11.15-5.ai 11
EXIO1 board connector Mating connector
CNEX24 CNEX24 on IO board
CNEXPW Extension for 24V power
supply

2011/07/01 11-17 - 9 eTR2BIN11.17.doc

 11

2011/07/01
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 1
Pin 2

0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V
Chapter 11 Accessories

440 430 420 410 240 230 220 210

1) Type 1 (NPN)

439 429 419 409 239 229 219 209

438 428 418 408 238 228 218 208
437 427 417 407 237 227 217 207

• EXIO2 NPN PCB ASSY B00

• EXIO1 NPN PCB ASSY B00

436 426 416 406 236 226 216 206

435 425 415 405 235 225 215 205
434 424 414 404 234 224 214 204
433 423 413 403 233 223 213 203
24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V

11-17 - 10
Pin assignment of connector CNEXIO5
Pin assignment of connector CNEXIO4
Pin assignment of connector CNEXIO3
Pin assignment of connector CNEXIO2

24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V

540 530 520 510 340 330 320 310
539 529 519 509 339 329 319 309
Material 1. Connector pin assignment

538 528 518 508 338 328 318 308

537 527 517 507 337 327 317 307
536 526 516 506 336 326 316 306
535 525 515 505 335 325 315 305
534 524 514 504 334 324 314 304
533 523 513 503 333 323 313 303
Pin 39
Pin 40
Pin 39
Pin 40
Pin 39
Pin 40
Pin 39
Pin 40
TC-R2B

eTR2BIN11.17.doc
2011/07/01
TC-R2B

Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 1
Pin 2

24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V

24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V
440 430 420 410 240 230 220 210
2) Type 2 (PNP)

439 429 419 409 239 229 219 209

438 428 418 408 238 228 218 208
437 427 417 407 237 227 217 207

• EXIO2 PNP PCB ASSY B00

• EXIO1 PNP PCB ASSY B00

436 426 416 406 236 226 216 206

435 425 415 405 235 225 215 205
434 424 414 404 234 224 214 204
433 423 413 403 233 223 213 203
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V

11-17 - 11
Pin assignment of connector CNEXIO5
Pin assignment of connector CNEXIO4
Pin assignment of connector CNEXIO3
Pin assignment of connector CNEXIO2

0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V
540 530 520 510 340 330 320 310
539 529 519 509 339 329 319 309
538 528 518 508 338 328 318 308
537 527 517 507 337 327 317 307
536 526 516 506 336 326 316 306
535 525 515 505 335 325 315 305
534 524 514 504 334 324 314 304
533 523 513 503 333 323 313 303
Pin 39
Pin 40
Pin 39
Pin 40
Pin 39
Pin 40
Pin 39
Pin 40
Chapter 11 Accessories

eTR2BIN11.17.doc
11
 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

(This page is blank.)

11

2011/07/01 11-17 - 12 eTR2BIN11.17.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (18)

MEMORY CARD INTERFACE

Machine model
TC-22B Option 11
TC-31B Standard equipment
TC-32BN Standard equipment
TC-S2D Standard equipment
TC-S2Dz Standard equipment
TC-R2B Standard equipment
TC-20B Standard equipment
TC-S2DN Standard equipment
TC-S2DNz Standard equipment

2011/07/05 11-18 - 1 eTR2BIN11.18.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Since this model includes the memory card interface system as

standard equipment and doesn’t require installation operation,
the details in this chapter are omitted.

11

2011/07/05 11-18 - 2 eTR2BIN11.18.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (19)

MANUAL UNCLAMP DEVICE

Machine model 11
TC-22B Option
TC-31B No setting
TC-32BN No setting
TC-S2D No setting
TC-S2Dz No setting
TC-R2B No setting
TC-20B No setting
TC-S2DN No setting
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/07/06 11-19 - 1 eTR2BIN11.19.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Since the manual unclamp device function is not available for this model,
the details in this chapter are omitted.

11

2011/07/06 11-19 - 2 eTR2BIN11.19.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (20)

MANUAL GREASE LUBRICATOR

Machine model
TC-22B No setting 11
TC-31B No setting
TC-32BN No setting
TC-S2D No setting
TC-S2Dz No setting
TC-R2B No setting
TC-20B No setting
TC-S2DN No setting
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/07/06 11-20 - 1 eTR2BIN11.20.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Since the manual grease lubricator is not available for this model,
the details in this chapter are omitted.

11

2011/07/06 11-20 - 2 eTR2BIN11.20.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (21)

RS232C 9-25PIN
CONVERSION CABLE

1 Handling Precautions
2 Outline Drawing
3 Specifications
4 Wiring
5 Accessory

Machine model 11
TC-22B No setting
TC-31B Option
TC-32BN Option
TC-S2D Option
TC-S2Dz No setting
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B Option
TC-S2DN Option
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/07/06 11-21 - 1 eTR2BIN11.21.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1 Handling Precautions
DANGER
There are high voltage sections inside the control box.
Touching these sections may result in serious injury or death.
Only personnel familiar with the machine’s electrical circuits and
qualified for electrical work are permitted to perform electrical
maintenance and inspection.
Be sure to turn the main circuit breaker off before starting
maintenance.
Be sure to post a signboard indicating "Under Maintenance".
Close the control box door and fasten the door before leaving the
machine.

2 Outline Drawing
By utilizing a conversion cable assembly, the connector of RS232C can be changed from D-sub9
pin to D-sub25 pin.

(Note) D-sub 9pin plug is equipped as standard.

Refer to “Chapter 2 General system description” for details.

Ground wire

Mounting plate

D-sub25 pin connector

11 RS232C Communication cable

+12V Power cable

Fuse

Complementary fuse

2011/07/06 11-21 - 2 eTR2BIN11.21.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

3 Specifications
Serial Interface
a) Communication method
• RS-232C
• Full duplex, asynchronous system
• Control line/control code system (changing by parameter)

b) Connection
<Connector>
D-Sub 25pin receptacle

Cable side: D-Sub 25pin plug

(Pin assignment)
Pin No. Signal Signal direction Note
1 FG Frame ground
2 SD Send data
3 RD Receive data
4 RS Request to send
5 CS Clear to send
6 DR Data set ready
7 SG Signal ground
20 ER Data terminal ready
25 DC12V DC12V 500mA max
The arrow to the right (→) indicates output from TC and the arrow to the left (←) indicates input
from TC.

*DC12V of 25pin must be used correctly, or the connected equipment may be

damaged.
Do not use it if it does not meet the product specifications.

Typical connection of signal cables

PTR/PTR, Computer
11
TC
FG (1) FG (1)
SD (2) SD (2)
RD (3) RD (3)
RS (4) RS (4)
CS (5) CS (5)
DR (6) DR (6)
SG (7) SG (7)
ER (20) ER (20)
*Other combination of signals is also available.
It must be established depending on signal type used and external devices
connected.
*Use the shielded cable.

2011/07/06 11-21 - 3 eTR2BIN11.21.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

4 Wiring
1. Turn the power breaker handle OFF.
2. Remove the cover at the back of the left side of the control box when viewed from the door.
3. Pull the cables of RS232C 9pin to 25pin conversion cable assembly (hereinafter referred to
as “Conversion cable assy”) into the control box from outer left side, then secure the
mounting plate attached to the conversion cable assy with the screws from outer side of the
control box.
4. Connect the ground wire of the conversion cable assy to the tapped hole of side face plate.
5. Connect the RS-232C communication cable (D-sub9 pin receptacle) of the conversion
cable assy to the LOCAL PCB.
Tighten the two screws of the connector.
6. Connect the +12V power cable of the conversion cable assy to the AVR1 output power
connector.

Position of the mounting plate

Layout of LOCAL PCB connector

RS-232C (D-sub 9pin plug)

0208.ai

11

2011/07/06 11-21 - 4 eTR2BIN11.21.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Control box front

AVR1

+12V power
cable

RS232C Screws of the

communication cable connector LOCAL PCB

11

2011/07/06 11-21 - 5 eTR2BIN11.21.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Left side of the control box

Ground wire

RS232C 9-25pin
conversion cable assy

1121-2ai

5 Accessory
The complementary fuse (1A type) for protecting excess current of +12V power is attached to the
plate of the conversion cable assy. If the fuse blows out, replace it with the complementary fuse.

11

2011/07/06 11-21 - 6 eTR2BIN11.21.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (22)

SIDE DOOR

1 Cautions
2 External View
3 Mounting Method
4 Motion Check

Machine model 11
TC-22B No setting
TC-31B Option
TC-32BN No setting
TC-S2D No setting
TC-S2Dz No setting
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B No setting
TC-S2DN No setting
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/07/06 11- 22 - 1 eTR2BIN11.22.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1 Cautions
DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box.
Touching such parts by mistake may result in serious injury or
death.
Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the
electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and
inspect electrical components.
Turn off the main power breaker before operation.
Put up a signboard which says “Under maintenance.”
When leaving the machine, close the control box door and bolt it.

2 External View
Cord for the door limit switch
Fix the cord at A, B point
by the saddle.

Control
box

11 Door limit
switch cover

1122-01.ai

2011/07/06 11- 22 - 2 eTR2BIN11.22.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

3 Mounting Method
Securely close the cable clamp to make them oiltight.
1. Set the main power breaker handle to the OFF position.
2. Tap the door limit switch mount hole (3⋅φ5) to the figure referring position.
3. Mount the door limit switch to the machine cover with screw and nut.
(Apply calking agent, and check that it is not wetted)
4. Remove the maintenance cover then mount the side cover.
5. Remove the door limit switch cover.
Adjust the adjustment plate for the key smoothly input to the door limit switch.
6. Set the door limit switch cover.
7. Set the door limit switch cord as the figure (Refer to external view.).
8. Connect the cord to the SRQT PCB XSQD3A.

Key

Adjustment plate

11

1122-02.ai. 1122-03.ai

2011/07/06 11- 22 - 3 eTR2BIN11.22.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

SRQT PCB

Cable clamp

1104-2.ai

４ Motion Check
Before starting machine operation, be sure to inspect the door interlock.

Inspection steps
1. Turn the power on to validate the door interlock function switch.
2. Move the C axis to a non-indexed position.
3. Open the side door.
4. The “Door is open” alarm should occur. If not, there is a problem in the unit. Repair it.
If the alarm does occur, proceed to the next step.
11 5. Close the side door.
6. Rotate the spindle.
7. Try to open the side door. The doors should be locked. If the side door is not locked, there
is a problem in the unit. Repair it. If the side door is locked, the door interlock unit is
functioning correctly.

2011/07/06 11- 22 - 4 eTR2BIN11.22.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (23)

COOLANT TANK WITH CHUTE

Machine model 11
TC-22B No setting
TC-31B No setting
TC-32BN Option
TC-S2D No setting
TC-S2Dz No setting
TC-R2B No setting
TC-20B No setting
TC-S2DN No setting
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/07/06 11-23- 1 eTR2BIN11.23.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

Since the coolant tank with chute is not equipped to this machine,
the details in this chapter are omitted.

11

2011/07/06 11-23- 2 eTR2BIN11.23.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (24)

OUTSIDE INDEX ROTATION SWITCH

1 Handling precautions
2 Attachment Procedure
3 Operation Check

Machine model
TC-22B No setting 11
TC-31B Option
TC-32BN Option
TC-S2D No setting
TC-S2Dz No setting
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B No setting
TC-S2DN No setting
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/07/06 11-24 - 1 eTR2BIN11.24.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

１ Handling precautions
DANGER
High voltage parts exist in the control box, and an accidental
touch to them may result in a serious injury or death. Only the
persons who have knowledge of electric circuits of this machine
and are qualified as an electrician must perform electrical
maintenance and checking work.
Turn off the main power breaker before starting the work.
Post a warning sign indicating “AT WORK”.

２ Attachment Procedure
Go through the following steps to attach the outside index SW.

1. Detach the switch panel on the machine front to remove the lid for attaching the switch.
2. Install the outside index rotary switch together with the nameplate at a place where
the cover was removed.
Switch with [A+] [A-] marked to the mark tube on the terminal block → Outside index A
Switch with [B+] [B-] marked to the mark tube on the terminal block → Outside index B
3. Connect the connector CNAB to the connector CNAB on the key PC board.
4. Return the switch panel to the home position.

Operation panel

11

Outside index B

Outside index A

T32BIN11.3.01ai,T32BIN11.3.02.ai

2011/07/06 11-24 - 2 eTR2BIN11.24.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Connector CNAB
on key PC board

T32BIN11.3.03.ai

３ Operation Check
Check the outside index rotation switch input on the input/output screen.

1. Turn the breaker handle ON, then turn ON the power switch on the operation panel.
2. Press [I/O] [1] [ENT] and [↓] to display the Input/Output screen (Main).
3. Check the signal input of (Main INPUT7).
See below for the display bit of each input.

4 bit : Outside index A+

5 bit : Outside index A-
6 bit : Outside index B+
7 bit : Outside index B-

11

2011/07/06 11-24 - 3 eTR2BIN11.24.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

(This page is blank.)

11

2011/07/06 11-24 - 4 eTR2BIN11.24.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (25)

AUTOMATIC GREASE LUBRICATOR

1 Handling Precautions
2 Outline View of the Pump
3 Specifications
4 Replenishing Grease

Machine model 11
TC-22B No setting
TC-31B No setting
TC-32BN No setting
TC-S2D Option
TC-S2Dz Option
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B No setting
TC-S2DN Option
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/07/06 11-25 - 1 eTR2BIN11.25.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

1 Handling Precautions
DANGER
High voltage parts are present in the control box.
Touching such parts by mistake may result in serious injury or
death.
Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the
electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and
inspect electrical components.
Cut the main power breaker and work on the machine. Put up a
signboard which says "Under maintenance".
When leaving the machine, close the control box door and tighten
the screws.

(Note) *Be sure to use the grease mentioned below.

Use the grease LUBE LHL-300 only, otherwise the system defective may
occur.
Grease used：LUBE LHL-300-7
*Operating guaranteed temperature of this system is 5°C to 40°C.
* When the ambient temperature is below 5°C, warm up the machine for 10
to 15 minutes before the start of operation. This is required to lower the
grease viscosity of automatic grease lubrication.

2 Outline View of the Pump

Cover

11

Grease cartridge

Inching button

Air removal plug

11.25-01.ai

2011/07/06 11-25 - 2 eTR2BIN11.25.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

3 Specifications
1. Pump Unit
Model type EGME-8S-4-7C-PB
Discharge pressure 8MPa
Discharge amount 10mℓ / min
Grease used LUBE LHL300 (Exclusive: Cartridge replaceable type)
2. Distributor (Constant rate valve）
Model type MG2C-10 MG2C-20
Discharge
0.1mℓ / 1 time 0.2mℓ / 1 time
amount
Working
2.5Mpa
pressure
Return
1.4Mpa
pressure
Parts applied X, Y, Z axes guide X, Y, Z axes ball screw
3. Pressure switch
Model type GPL-55-D
Working pressure 5.5±0.4MPa
Purpose Checking defects for pressor or depressurization inside the piping

4 Replenishing Grease
When the amount of grease inside the cartridge becomes small, [Oil level low (Automatic oiling)]
alarm occurs and the machine operation stops. Replenish grease to the automatic grease lubricator
by replacing the grease cartridge. Grease cannot be replenished into the cartridge to prevent
foreign matter to be mixed in the grease.

4.1 Replacement Procedures

1. Remove the cover.
2. Unscrew the empty cartridge to remove.
3. Attach the new cartridge to the pump, and then screw it to fix.
4. Loosen the air removal plug, and then press the inching button to push grease out from the
gap of the plug, to remove air.
5. Attach the cover.

Cover

11

Grease cartridge

Attachment
Inching button Removal

Air removal plug

2011/07/06 11-25 - 3 eTR2BIN11.25.doc

 Chapter 11 Accessories TC-R2B

4.2 Purchasing Method

Grease for replenishing
Be sure to use the grease mentioned below.
(Note)
Do not use grease other than one specified, otherwise the system defective may
occur.
LUBE LHL – 300 – 7
When you purchase the grease, please get in touch with the following:
Overseas subsidiary
Country Company name Phone number FAX number
864-297-3950
U.S.A
LUBE USA, INC. (800-326-3765) 864-242-1652
Canada
toll free
1-864-297-3950
Mexico LUBE USA, INC. (1-800-326-3765) 1-864-242-1652
toll free
LUBELUBRICATING
China SYSTEM (SHANGHAI) 021-5868-3818 021-5868-3880
CO.LTD
LUBE AUTOMATIC
India SYSTEMS PRIVATE 022-2880-9056 022-2880-9056
LIMITED.
Overseas agent
Country Company name Phone number FAX number
France CODAITEC 01 64 26 18 88 01 60 20 41 35
Belgium CODAITEC 33 1 64 26 18 88 33 1 60 20 41 35
Sweden AC Maskin Service AB 0587-151 00 0587-151 25
Finland AC Maskin Service AB 46-587-151 00 46-587-151 25
Norway AC Maskin Service AB 46-587-151 00 46-587-151 25
Spain LAUTECNIC CNC. S.L 093 504 1689 093 504 1051
Portugal LAUTECNIC CNC. S.L 34 93 504 1689 34 93 504 1051
Italy Mallardi S.r.l 055-8877767 055-882163
World Pumps (Thailand) Co., 02 993-6835
Thailand 02 993-6278
Ltd. 02 993-5858
Gangfa International Trading 02806-3220
Hong Kong 02510-7978
Co.,Ltd. 02806-3226
Taiwan Jian Yang International Corp. 02-8712-7066 02-8712-7062
Korea Dong In C&T Corporation 02-2163-8670 02-2163-8679
11 Singapore Adex Zonex Pte. Ltd. 06-558-7789 06-558-7977
INNOMOTION INDUSTRIES 03-8961-3079
Malaysia 03-8961-3081
(M) SDN BHD 03-8961-3080
Australia Alltek Machine Tool Service 03-9588-1870 03-9588-1851
New Zealand CNC Service. Ltd 09-5216366 09-5216367
South Africa ITS Service 041-401-7700 041-453-1686
Other countries LUBE Corporation (81) 3-3204-8431 (81) 3-3204-8520

You can also purchase the grease from BROTHER.

Item number Item name
6B1382001 CARTRIDGE GREASE LUBE

2011/07/06 11-25 - 4 eTR2BIN11.25.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (26)

PNEUMATIC RELAY BOX

1 How to install pneumatic relay box

2 Cautions

Machine model
TC-22B No setting 11
TC-31B No setting
TC-32BN No setting
TC-S2D No setting
TC-S2Dz No setting
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B No setting
TC-S2DN No setting
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/07/06 11-26-1 eTR2BIN11.26.doc

 TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

1 How to install pneumatic relay box

Follow the steps from Fig.1 to Fig. 2.

• This pneumatic relay box is specialized for air pressure only. (It cannot be
used for hydraulic pressure)

Fig1

QT partition OP

QT partition OPC

Relay box cover

Corner ring A

Relay box

Through-hole
（Φ95）
Pass the air
tubes and flexible
hose through the
hole. Air tube（6x2 pieces）
11

Flexible hose（2 pieces）

Pallet-side 6 pieces: White “Pan Tie” binding band
Pallet-side 2 pieces: Red “Pan Tie” binding band Run the flexible hose up the
left side of the machine cover
Bind six tubes on the outside of machine and to avoid contact with the
coming out from both ends of QT at a place about base.
100mm from the end using specific colored “Pan Fix it to the machine cover
Tie” binding band. with the banding strap.

1126-01.ai

2011/07/06 11-26- 2 eTR2BIN11.26.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Fig2

To air plate

Pass the air tube through the duct on the

upper left side of the machine cover.
Utilizing a hole in the duct, secure the air
tube with a binding band.

1126-02.ai

11

2011/07/06 11-26-3 eTR2BIN11.26.doc

 TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Reference:
The colors of air tubes in the pneumatic relay box correspond to the port numbers as
follows.
Part No. 1: White 2: Black 3: Red 4: Blue 5: Yellow 6: Green

Fig3

The colors of air tubes

in the pneumatic relay
box correspond to the
port numbers as shown
in the following figure.

1. White
4. Blue

2. Black
5. Yellow

3. Red 6. Green

11

1126-03.ai

2011/07/06 11-26- 4 eTR2BIN11.26.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

2 Caution
Interference between air joint in pneumatic relay box and tool

When an air joint is attached in the pneumatic relay box, the joint may interfere with the tool
depending on the diameter of tool used (larger than φ80).
Be careful when operating the machine in manual or program mode.

420 (X stroke)

320 (Y stroke)
φ80

φ80
Tool path

Pneumatic
relay box

11

1107-04.ai

2011/07/06 11-26-5 eTR2BIN11.26.doc

 TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

(This page is blank.)

11

2011/07/06 11-26- 6 eTR2BIN11.26.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

CHAPTER 11 (27)

HYDRAULIC ROTARY JOINT

1 How to install hydraulic rotary joint

2 Cautions

Machine model
11
TC-22B No setting
TC-31B No setting
TC-32BN No setting
TC-S2D No setting
TC-S2Dz No setting
TC-R2B Option
TC-20B No setting
TC-S2DN No setting
TC-S2DNz No setting

2011/07/06 11-27 - 1 eTR2BIN11.27.doc

 TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

1 How to install hydraulic rotary joint

Follow the steps from Fig.1 to Fig. 2.

（Note）Hydraulic rotary joint is expressed as rotary joint in the figures and text.

Fig1

QT partition
OP

Hydraulic rotary joint

11
Pneumatic
relay box

2011/07/06 11-27 - 2 eTR2BIN11.27.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Manufacturer PASCAL
Model WRA4-MWVB1330
Fluids used General mineral-based
hydraulic oil or air
Number of circuits 4
Pipe connection port Rc1/4
size
Max. operating 7MPa
pressure
Allowable speed 25rpm
Operating 0～70C°
temperature range
Weight 7.8Kg

1. Install the rotary joint and tighten it tentatively with four bolts (6×20).
2. Set a dial gauge having accuracy 1/100 to the rotary joint, and rotate QT to measure the
concentricity, which should be 0.5 or less per half turn.
3. After the accuracy has been established, tighten fully the four bolts (6×20).

Bolt (6×20) 4 pieces

Piping example

Fig2

11

2011/07/06 11-27 - 3 eTR2BIN11.27.doc

 TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Hydraulic piping Installation side (prepared by the customer)

Fig3

Hose joint
High pressure (4 pieces)
hose (4 pieces)

Attaching
angle 30°

High pressure hose

Manufacturer Adapter type Hose type Max. Min. burst Min.
operating pressure bending
pressure radius
Togawa 6-05 K-210-06 20.5MPa 103.0MPa 100nn
Rubber
Yokohama AMR1005-0405 WSR5Z-05 20.7MPa 82.7MPa 85nn
Rubber

Hose joint
11 Manufacturer Type
Togawa 6-20
Rubber
Yokohama 1034-6
Rubber

2011/07/06 11-27 - 4 eTR2BIN11.27.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Fig4

To air plate

Pass high pressure hose

through the duct at the
upper left of the machine
cover.

1107-02.ai

11

2011/07/06 11-27 - 5 eTR2BIN11.27.doc

 TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

2 Caution
The fluid used is general mineral-based hydraulic oil or air
Use the lubricator if the air is used.

For the piping on the stop side, do not use a steel pipe but use a flexible hose.

An oil film leak to adjacent circuit will occur, if general mineral-based hydraulic oil is used.
Do not use a mixture of hydraulic oil and air.
(However, for the air port that allows an oil film leak, a mixture of them may be used.)

Each pipe connection port is stamped with the symbol 1A to 2B.

Direction of rotary joint installation

Pallet 1: 1A and 1B ports
Pallet 2: 2A and 2B ports

Change of Y stroke parameter

Be sure to change the following parameters when installing the rotary joint.
(The machine will interfere with the rotary joint if the machine is moved without changing the
parameters.)

・Machine parameter 1 No.5007 Stroke 1 for Y-axis (-) -320. ⇒ -270

・User parameter 1 No.145 Y-axis position when changing tool in manual mode
-320. ⇒ -270.
・User parameter 2 No.517 Stroke limit 1 for Y-axis (-) -320. ⇒ -270.
（For the user parameters, inch data must also be changed -12.5984 → -10.6299）

11

2011/07/06 11-27 - 6 eTR2BIN11.27.doc

TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

Interference of the rotary joint air coupler and tool

When the air coupler is attached to the rotary joint, the air coupler may interfere with the tool
depending on the tool diameter. Be careful when operating the machine in manual or program
mode.

420 (X stroke)

270 (Y stroke)
φ80

Air Coupler Rotary joint

11

2011/07/06 11-27 - 7 eTR2BIN11.27.doc

 TC-R2B Chapter 11 Accessories

(This page is blank.)

11

2011/07/06 11-27 - 8 eTR2BIN11.27.doc

CNC TAPPING CENTER

TC-R2B

パーツリスト
PARTS LIST

ブラザー工業株式会社
マシナリー・アンド・ソリューション カンパニー
BROTHER INDUSTRIES, LTD.
MACHINERY & SOLUTION COMPANY
注意
1. 本書の内容の一部もしくは全部を無断で複写することは法律で禁止されています。
2. 本書の内容については予告なしに変更する場合があります。
3. 本書は万全を期して作成いたしましたが、万一ご不審な点や誤りにお気づきのおりには、
お買い上げの店舗までご連絡下さい。

Notes to Users

1. Plagiarism from this document either fully or partially is prohibited.

2. The contents of this document are subject to change without prior notice.
3. This document has been complied for user’s easier comprehension.
If any questions arise please contact your agent.
目次 (CONTENTS)
機械関係（MECHANICAL）

1 スピンドルヘッド関係
SPINDLE HEAD

2-1 ATCサドル・マガジン14関係
ATC SADDLE・MAGAZINE 14

3-1 グリップ14関係
GRIP 14

4 X軸関係
X AXIS

5 Y軸関係
Y AXIS

6 Z軸関係
Z AXIS

7 クイックテーブル関係
QUICK TABLE

8 Xテレスコカバー関係
TELESCOPIC COVER X

9 Yテレスコカバー関係
TELESCOPIC COVER Y

10 本体カバー関係
COVER

11 カバー関係
COVER

12 正面扉関係
FRONT DOOR

13 中扉関係
INNER COVER

14 正面扉連動関係
FRONT DOOR WIRE

15 正面扉LS関係
FRONT DOOR LS

16 中扉LS関係
INNER DOOR LS

17 サイドカバー関係
SIDE COVER

18 エアユニット関係
AIR UNIT

19 クーラント配管関係
COOLANT PIPING

20 チップシャワー配管関係
CHIP FLOW PIPING
21 洗浄ガン関係
COOLANT GUN

22 ツール洗浄関係
TOOL CLEANING

23-1 クーラントタンク 100L関係

COOLANT TANK 100L

23-2 クーラントタンク 150L関係

COOLANT TANK 150L

23-3 クーラントタンク 150L CTS関係

COOLANT TANK 150L CTS

24 自動扉関係
AUTOMATIC DOOR

25 工具折損検出装置関係
TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION UNIT

26-1 クイックテーブル中継箱関係
QUICK TABLE RELAY BOX

26-2 クイックテーブルロータリージョイント関係
QUICK TABLE ROTARY JOINT

27 機内灯.表示灯.手パルス発生器関係
MACHINE LIGHT, INDICATION LAMP, MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR

28 間欠給油装置関係
INTERMITTENT LUBRICATING UNIT

29 自動グリス給脂装置関係
AUTOMATIC GREASE SUPPLY UNIT

30 中継箱関係
RELAY BOX

電気関係（ＥＬＥＣＴＲＩＣＡＬ）

100-1 制御箱関係（10K/16K）
CONTROL BOX (10K/16K)

100-2 制御箱関係（10K高トルク）
CONTROL BOX (10K HIGH TORQUE)

101 操作箱関係
OPERATION BOX

102-1 ケーブル関係(10K/16K)
CABLE (10K/16K)

102-2 ケーブル関係(10K高トルク)
CABLE (10K HIGH TORQUE)
（この頁は空白です。）
(This page is blank.)
 1.スピンドルヘッド関係
SPINDLE HEAD

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
-1
1 6A7278001 1 SPモータS2C 10K SPINDLE MOTOR S2C 10K 10000min C
-1
6A7279001 1 SPモータS2C 16K SPINDLE MOTOR S2C 16K 16000min C
-1
6B5156001 1 SPモ-タHT SPINDLE MOTOR HT 10000min (High Torque) C
-1
6A7280201 1 SPモータS2C 10K-C SPINDLE MOTOR S2C 10K-C 10000min ,CTS C
-1
6A7281301 1 SPモータS2C 16K-C SPINDLE MOTOR S2C 16K-C 16000min ,CTS C
-1
6B5010001 1 SPモ-タ HT-C SPINDLE MOTOR HT-C 10000min (High Torque),CTS C
-1 -1
2 6B1067001 1 カツプリング28-40 S2D COUPLING 28-40 S2D 10000min ,16000min
6B5011001 1 カツプリング28-40 HT COUPLING 28-40 HT 10000min-1(High Torque)
3 6B3045001 1 アンクランプア-ムクミ R2B UNCLAMP ARM ASSY R2B
3-1 6B3024001 1 アンクランプア-ム R2B UNCLAMP ARM R2B
3-2 645124001 1 アンクランプア-ムストツパ UNCLAMP ARM STOPPER
3-3 6B3046001 1 アンクランプカムR2B UNCLAMP CAM R2B
3-4 620067002 1 ストレ-トピン8X26XM5 STRAIGHT PIN 8X26XM5
4 6A7740001 2 ピンM8X34 PIN M8X34
5 622071001 2 アンクランプバネ228 UNCLAMP SPRING 228
6 626175000 1 ジク 25X216 SHAFT 25X216
7 626177001 1 ボルト 10X100トク BOLT 10X100
8 021100102 1 1シュナット10 NUT 1 M10
9 6B1733001 1 BRGオサエクミ S2D-N2 BEARING RETAINER ASSY S2D-N2
10 081085770 1 OリングG85 O RING G85
11 652101001 1 カラ-D75 COLLAR D75 t5.05
652101002 1 カラ-D75 COLLAR D75 t4.85
652101003 1 カラ-D75 COLLAR D75 t4.90
652101004 1 カラ-D75 COLLAR D75 t4.95
652101005 1 カラ-D75 COLLAR D75 t5.00
12 6B1079001 1 シフトカム S2Dクミ SHIFT CAM ASSY S2D
12-1 645126001 1 シフトカムDP2ブラケツト SHIFT CAM DP 2 BRACKET
12-2 155914001 1 ジク6X31.8 STUD 6X31.8
12-3 6B1080001 1 シフトカムDP S2D SHIFT CAM DP S2D
13 6B1081001 1 オサエイタDP S2D DP PLATE S2D
14 640137000 1 コイルバネSWM10X25 COIL SPRING DM10X25
15 641405000 1 コイルバネSWH10-25 COIL SPRING SWH10-25
16 6B1082001 1 DPカム S2D DP CAM S2D
17 6B1637001 1 タンメンカバ-S2D-N SPINDLE EDGE COVER S2D-N
18 018400831 4 アナボルト4X8 BOLT SOCKET M4X8
19 6B3047001 1 UCLカバ-L R2B UCL COVER L R2B
20 6B3048001 1 UCLカバ-R R2B UCL COVER R R2B
21 6B3049001 1 SPヘッドカバ-1 R2B SP HEAD COVER 1 R2B
22 6B3050001 1 SPヘッドカバ-2 R2B SP HEAD COVER 2 R2B
23 6A7236001 1 SPヘッドシタカバ- SP HEAD UNDER COVER
24 018061231 2 アナボルト6X12 BOLT SOCKET M6X12
25 6B3051001 2 ヘッドサイドカバ- R2B HEAD SIDE COVER R2B
26 018061231 4 アナボルト6X12 BOLT SOCKET M6X12
27 6B1084001 1 SPクミS2D 10K SP ASSY S2D 10K 10000min-1
6B1085001 1 SPクミS2D 16K SP ASSY S2D 16K 16000min-1
6B1086001 1 SPクミS2D 10K-C SP ASSY S2D 10K-C 10000min-1,CTS
6B1087001 1 SPクミS2D 16K-C SP ASSY S2D 16K-C 16000min-1,CTS
28 653176001 1 クランプジククミ250 CLAMP SHAFT ASSY 250 10000min-1
-1
16000min
-1
618803001 1 クランプジククミ251C CLAMP SHAFT ASSY 251C 10000min ,CTS
-1
16000min ,CTS
29 048250142 2 トメワジクヨウC25 RETAINING RING EXTERNAL C25
30 6B3033001 1 Zジクカバ- R2B Z AXIS COVER R2B
31 6A7675001 1 ホキュウSファンS2C 3ソウ S FAN 3PH S2C SUPPLY PARTS
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 2-1.ATCサドル・マガジン14関係
ATC SADDLE・MAGAZINE 14

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B1121001 1 MGモ-タ-カバ-14S2DN MAGAZINE MOTOR COVER 14 S2D N
2 6B3151001 1 MGモ-タR2B MAGAZINE MOTOR R2B C
3 6B1453001 1 OリングS55 4D O RING S55 4D
4 6B1104001 1 サイクロゲンソクキ S2D CYCLO TRANSMISSION S2D
5 6B1108001 1 MGスペ-サ S2D MAGAZINE SPACER S2D t0.1
6B1108002 1 MGスペ-サ S2D MAGAZINE SPACER S2D t0.2
6B1108003 1 MGスペ-サ S2D MAGAZINE SPACER S2D t0.3
6B1108004 1 MGスペ-サ S2D MAGAZINE SPACER S2D t0.4
6B1108005 1 MGスペ-サ S2D MAGAZINE SPACER S2D t0.5
6B1108006 1 MGスペ-サ S2D MAGAZINE SPACER S2D t0.8
6B1108007 1 MGスペ-サ S2D MAGAZINE SPACER S2D t1.0
6B1108008 1 MGスペ-サ S2D MAGAZINE SPACER S2D t1.2
6 6B1127001 1 アドレスメイバン14 S2D ADDRESS NAME PLATE 14 S2D
7 6B1109001 1 ツ-ルマガジン14クミ S2D TOOL MAGAZINE 14 ASSY S2D
7-1 6B1124001 1 Gサポ-トS2D VER3 GRIP SUPPORT S2D VER3
7-2 018063531 28 アナボルト6X35 BOLT SOCKET M6X35
7-3 6B1113001 14 グリツプクミ14 S2D GRIP ASSY 14 S2D
8 6B1112001 14 グリツプカバ-14S2DN GRIP COVER 14 S2D N
9 018400831 28 アナボルト4X8 BOLT SOCKET M4X8
10 6B1691001 1 ゲンソクキカップリングS2D TRANSMISSION COUPLING S2D
11 607327001 1 アナプラグPT1/8 GJ PLUG SCREW PT1/8
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 3-1.グリップ14関係
GRIP 14

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B1113001 1 グリツプクミ14 S2D GRIP ASSY 14 S2D
1-1 640150001 1 キ-DP2 KEY DP2
1-2 002401605 1 +ナベコ4X16 SCREW PAN M4X16
1-3 640115000 1 UナツトM4X0.7 U NUT M4X0.7
1-4 6B1216001 2 ピンホルダクミ S2D PIN HOLDER ASSY S2D
1-5 048140142 2 トメワジクヨウC14 RETAINING RING EXTERNAL C14
1-6 6B1208001 1 Gシテンダイ14S2DVER2 GRIP FULCULUM 14 S2D VER2
1-7 071127050 1 コウキユウ1/2 BEARING BALL, 1/2
1-8 610122001 1 スプリングDP4 SPRING DP4
1-9 610121001 1 ボールシャフトDP4 BALL SHAFT DP4
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 4.X軸関係
X AXIS

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B1357001 1 XYジクモ-タ S2D XY AXIS MOTOR S2D C
2 6B3015001 1 ボ-ルネジXクミ R2B BALL SCREW ASSY X R2B
2-1 622019001 1 ジクウケナツトHLB-20 BEARING NUT HLB-20
2-2 626016000 1 カラ- Z20 COLLAR Z20
2-3 618218001 2 ジクウケ20TAC47C9 BEARING, 20TAC47C9
2-4 618151001 1 オイルシ-ルVC28-40 OIL SEAL, VC28-40
2-5 6B1062001 1 ストッパD88T12 STOPPER D88T12
2-6 533676001 2 ダンネジ SHOULDER SCREW
2-7 6B3016001 1 ボ-ルネジX R2B BALL SCREW X R2B
2-8 076202602 1 Rタマジクウケ6202VV BALL BEARING, RADIAL 6202VV
2-9 048150142 1 トメワジクヨウC15 RETAINING RING EXTERNAL C15
3 6B3148001 1 カップリングXY R2B COUPLING XY R2B
4 6B3422001 1 ストッパ D80T24 STOPPER D80T24
5 533676001 2 ダンネジ SHOULDER SCREW
6 081006070 1 OリングP6 O RING P6
7 6A7428001 1 ジザイエルボM6XM6 FREE ELBOW M6XM6
8 6A3022001 10 グリスツギテ GREASE TUBE JOINT
9 6A6157001 5 グリ-スニップル6P0.75 GREESE NIPPLE 6P0.75
10 641340000 2 レイロンチユ-ブ470 TUBE 470
11 637435001 2 レイロンチユ-ブ1050 TUBE, LYLON 1050
12 650524001 1 レイロンチユ-ブ700 TUBE, LYLON 700
13 6B3012001 1 ガイドXクミ R2B GUIDE ASSY X R2B
14 610576001 22 ガイドキャップ M8 GUIDE CAP M8
15 018082531 22 アナボルト8X25 BOLT SOCKET M8X25
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 5.Y軸関係
Y AXIS

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B1357001 1 XYジクモ-タ S2D XY AXIS MOTOR S2D C
2 6B3017001 1 ボ-ルネジYクミ R2B BALL SCREW ASSY Y R2B
2-1 622019001 1 ジクウケナツトHLB-20 BEARING NUT HLB-20
2-2 626016000 1 カラ- Z20 COLLAR Z20
2-3 618218001 2 ジクウケ20TAC47C9 BEARING, 20TAC47C9
2-4 618151001 1 オイルシ-ルVC28-40 OIL SEAL, VC28-40
2-5 6B1062001 1 ストッパD88T12 STOPPER D88T12
2-6 533676001 2 ダンネジ SHOULDER SCREW
2-7 6B3018001 1 ボ-ルネジY R2B BALL SCREW X R2B
2-8 076202602 1 Rタマジクウケ6202VV BALL BEARING, RADIAL 6202VV
2-9 048150142 1 トメワジクヨウC15 RETAINING RING EXTERNAL C15
3 6B3148001 1 カップリングXY R2B COUPLING XY R2B
4 6B3422001 1 ストッパ D80T24 STOPPER D80T24
5 533676001 2 ダンネジ SHOULDER SCREW
6 081006070 1 OリングP6 O RING P6
7 6A7428001 1 ジザイエルボM6XM6 FREE ELBOW M6XM6
8 6A3022001 10 グリスツギテ GREASE TUBE JOINT
9 6A6157001 5 グリ-スニップル6P0.75 GREESE NIPPLE 6P0.75
10 641342000 2 レイロンチユ-ブ550 TUBE 550
11 641337000 3 レイロンチユ-ブ4X300 TUBE 300
12 6B3013001 1 ガイドYクミ R2B GUIDE ASSY Y R2B
13 610576001 18 ガイドキャップ M8 GUIDE CAP M8
14 018082531 18 アナボルト8X25 BOLT SOCKET M8X25
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 6.Z軸関係
Z AXIS

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3011001 1 Zジクモ-タ R2B Z AXIS MOTOR R2B C
2 6B3019001 1 ボ-ルネジZクミ R2B BALL SCREW ASSY Z R2B
2-1 645162000 1 ロ-ラ- NART17UUR ROLLER NART17UUR
2-2 622019001 1 ジクウケナツトHLB-20 BEARING NUT HLB-20
2-3 626016000 1 カラ- Z20 COLLAR Z20
2-4 618218001 2 ジクウケ20TAC47C9 BEARING, 20TAC47C9
2-5 646237000 2 ストツパZ 311 STOPPER Z 311
2-6 533676001 2 ダンネジ SHOULDER SCREW
2-7 6B3020001 1 ボ-ルネジZ R2B BALL SCREW Z R2B
2-8 076202602 1 Rタマジクウケ6202VV BALL BEARING, RADIAL 6202VV
2-9 048150142 1 トメワジクヨウC15 RETAINING RING EXTERNAL C15
3 6B1066001 1 カツプリング18-22 S2D COUPLING 18-22 S2D
4 6B3422001 1 ストッパ D80T24 STOPPER D80T24
5 533676001 2 ダンネジ SHOULDER SCREW
6 081006070 1 OリングP6 O RING P6
7 6A7428001 1 ジザイエルボM6XM6 FREE ELBOW M6XM6
8 6A3022001 10 グリスツギテ GREASE TUBE JOINT
9 6A6157001 5 グリ-スニップル6P0.75 GREESE NIPPLE 6P0.75
10 641344000 5 レイロンチユ-ブ800 TUBE 800
11 6B3014001 1 ガイドZクミ R2B GUIDE ASSY Z R2B
12 018062031 22 アナボルト6X20 BOLT SOCKET M6X20
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 7.クイックテーブル関係1-2
QUICK TABLE

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6A8037001 1 Cジクモ-タ 31B C AXIS MOTOR 31B C
2 646265000 1 QTヒラハグルマ90-M SPUR GEAR QT 90-M
3 646266000 2 パワ-ロツク16X20 POWER LOCK 16X20
4 646267001 1 QTカアツフランジ-M PRESSURE FLANGE QT-M
5 6A8128001 1 QTクランプシリンダ 31B QT CLAMP CYLINDER 31B
6 6A0077001 1 QTシリンダジヨイント QUICK TABLE CYLINDER JOINT
7 6A0082001 1 QTリンクジク QT LINK SHAFT
8 6A0278001 1 ブツシユ2420 BUSH 2420
9 6A0285001 2 スラストワツシヤ26 WASHER THRUST 26
10 6A3421001 1 ヒラザガネコガタ24 WASHER, PLAIN S 24
11 6A0062001 1 QTクレビス QT CLEVIS
12 6A0078001 1 QTクレビスジク _QTKUREBISUZIKU
13 6A0279001 1 ブツシユ1620 BUSH 1620
14 6A0280001 2 スラストワツシヤ18 WASHER THRUST 18
15 6B3384001 1 QTクランプセンサクミ D4F QT CLAMP SENSOR ASSY D4F
16 610894001 1 オイルマドKMH-6 OIL GAUGE KMH-6
17 6A9156001 1 プラグR3/4 PLUG R3/4
18-1 6A8525001 4 QTベ-ススペ-サ QT BASE SPACER T1.00
18-2 6A8525002 4 QTベ-ススペ-サ QT BASE SPACER T1.01
18-3 6A8525003 4 QTベ-ススペ-サ QT BASE SPACER T1.02
18-4 6A8525004 4 QTベ-ススペ-サ QT BASE SPACER T1.03
18-5 6A8525005 4 QTベ-ススペ-サ QT BASE SPACER T1.04
18-6 6A8525006 4 QTベ-ススペ-サ QT BASE SPACER T1.05
18-7 6A8525007 4 QTベ-ススペ-サ QT BASE SPACER T1.06
18-8 6A8525008 4 QTベ-ススペ-サ QT BASE SPACER T1.07
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 7.クイックテーブル関係2-2
QUICK TABLE

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
19 6A8115001 1 パレットセンサBKT 31B PALLET SENSOR BRACKET 31B
20 6A0333001 1 パレット1センサ31B PALLET1 SENSOR 31B
21 6A0334001 1 パレット2センサ31B PALLET2 SENSOR 31B
22 6A3685001 1 PLT1 ケーブル PLT1 CABLE
23 6A3686001 1 PLT2 ケーブル PLT1 CABLE
24 018403531 2 アナボルト4X35 BOLT SOCKET M4X35
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 8.Xテレスコカバー関係
TELESCOPIC COVER X

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3091001 1 テレスコカバ-Xクミ R2B TELESCOPIC COVER ASSY X R2B
1-1 622189001 16 クツシヨンゴム228クミ CUSHION RUBBER 228 ASSY
1-2 062300806 16 ナベコ3X8 SCREW PAN M3X8
1-3 025030335 16 ヒラザガネダイ3 WASHER PLAIN L 3
1-4 636109001 9 クツシヨンC-30-CS-2 CUSHION C-30-CS-2
1-5 6B3133001 1 ワイパ- X-340.5 R WIPER X-340.5 R
1-6 6B3134001 1 ワイパ- X-340.5 L WIPER X-340.5 L
1-7 6B3120001 2 ワイパ-オサエイタ X-330 WIPER FIXING BASE X-330
1-8 6B3131001 1 ワイパ- X-55 R WIPER X-55 R
1-9 6B3132001 1 ワイパ- X-55 L WIPER X-55 L
1-10 6B3119001 2 ワイパ-オサエイタ X-50 WIPER FIXING BASE X-50
1-11 6B3135001 1 ワイパ- X-345.5 R WIPER X-345.5 R
1-12 6B3136001 1 ワイパ- X-345.5 L WIPER X-345.5 L
1-13 6B3120001 2 ワイパ-オサエイタ X-330 WIPER FIXING BASE X-330
1-14 6B1228001 1 ワイパ-Y-61R FR WIPER Y-61R FR
1-15 6B1229001 1 ワイパ-Y-61L FR WIPER Y-61L FR
1-16 645048000 2 ワイパ-オサエイタ6X55 WIPER FIXING BASE 6X55
1-17 6B3138001 1 ワイパ- X-350.5 R WIPER X-350.5 R
1-18 6B3137001 1 ワイパ- X-350.5 L WIPER X-350.5 L
1-19 6B3120001 2 ワイパ-オサエイタ X-330 WIPER FIXING BASE X-330
1-20 6B3140001 1 ワイパ- X-67 R WIPER X-67 R
1-21 6B3139001 1 ワイパ- X-67 L WIPER X-67 L
1-22 6B3121001 2 ワイパ-オサエイタ X-62 WIPER FIXING BASE X-62
1-23 653440001 42 サラコネジM3X4.5 MACHINE SCREW M3X4.5
1-24 655977001 42 カラー6-4-1 COLLAR 6-4-1
1-25 693178001 1 アシノセキンシラベル40 CAUTION LAVEL 40
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 9.Yテレスコカバー関係
TELESCOPIC COVER Y

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3100001 1 テレスコカバ-Yクミ R2B TELESCOPIC COVER ASSY Y R2B
1-1 622189001 4 クツシヨンゴム228クミ CUSHION RUBBER 228 ASSY
1-2 062300806 4 ナベコ3X8 SCREW PAN M3X8
1-3 025030335 4 ヒラザガネダイ3 WASHER PLAIN L 3
1-4 636109001 4 クツシヨンC-30-CS-2 CUSHION C-30-CS-2
1-5 6B3108001 1 ワイパ- Y-492 WIPER Y-492
1-6 6B3107001 1 ワイパ-オサエイタ 6X475 WIPER FIXING BASE 6X475
1-7 6B1073001 1 ワイパ-X-73R FR WIPER X-73R FR
1-8 6B1074001 1 ワイパ-X-73L FR WIPER X-73L FR
1-9 652825001 2 オサエイタX-3S-22A PRESSURE PLATE X-3S-22A
1-10 6B3111001 1 ワイパ- Y-482 WIPER Y-482
1-11 6B3107001 1 ワイパ-オサエイタ 6X475 WIPER FIXING BASE 6X475
1-12 6B1070001 1 ワイパ-X-66R FR WIPER X-66R FR
1-13 6B1071001 1 ワイパ-X-66L FR WIPER X-66L FR
1-14 652848001 2 オサエイタY-3S-22A PRESSURE PLATE Y-3S-22A
1-15 653440001 20 サラコネジM3X4.5 MACHINE SCREW M3X4.5
1-16 655977001 20 カラー6-4-1 COLLAR 6-4-1
1-17 693178001 1 アシノセキンシラベル40 CAUTION LAVEL 40
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 10.本体カバー関係
COVER

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

1 6B3091001 2 テレスコカバ-Xクミ R2B TELESCOPIC COVER ASSY X R2B

2 6B3025001 2 テレスコサポ-ト X1 R2B TELESCOPIC SUPPORT X1 R2B
3 6B3026001 1 テレスコサポ-ト X2 R2B TELESCOPIC SUPPORT X2 R2B
4 6B3027001 1 テレスコサポ-ト X3 R2B TELESCOPIC SUPPORT X3 R2B
5 6B3032001 1 エプロンカバ- R2B APRON COVER R2B
6 6B3100001 1 テレスコカバ-Yクミ R2B TELESCOPIC COVER ASSY Y R2B
7 6B3041001 1 テレスコサポ-トY R R2B TELESCOPIC SUPPORT Y R R2B
8 6B3042001 1 テレスコサポ-トY L R2B TELESCOPIC SUPPORT Y L R2B
9 6B3037001 1 キャリッジカバ-R R2B CARRIAGE COVER R R2B
10 6B3038001 1 キャリッジカバ-L R2B CARRIAGE COVER L R2B
11 653690001 2 スライドプレ-ト R2A SLIDE PLATE, R2A
12 6A8049001 4 カラ-6-15-42L COLLAR 6-15-42L
13 018065531 4 アナボルト6X55 BOLT SOCKET 6X55
14 653689001 2 ロ-ラ 60 ROLLER 60
15 628194001 2 ロ-ラジク 30 ROLLER SHAFT 30
16 025100232 6 ヒラザガネチュウ10 WASHER PLAIN M 10
17 025080232 2 ヒラザガネチュウ8 WASHER PLAIN M 8
18 028080242 2 バネザガネ2-8 WASHER SPRING 2-8
19 021080102 2 1シュナット8 NUT 1 M8
20 6B3040001 1 キャリッジマエカバ- R2B CARRIAGE FRONT COVER R2B
21 018061231 3 アナボルト6X12 BOLT SOCKET M6X12
22 650746001 1 エプロンスライドプレ-ト APRON SLIDE PLATE
23 6A8524001 2 スペ-サ 8-6-5 SPACER 8-6-5
24 622959001 2 アナボルトバネヒラ6X16 SOCKET HEAD BOLT 6X16
25 6B3029001 1 コラムカバ-R R2B COLUMN COVER R R2B
26 6B3030001 1 コラムカバ-L R2B COLUMN COVER L R2B
27 6B3043001 1 Yガイドカバ-R R2B Y GUIDE COVER R R2B
28 6B3044001 1 Yガイドカバ-L R2B Y GUIDE COVER L R2B
29 6B3033001 1 Zジクカバ- R2B Z AXIS COVER R2B
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 11.カバー関係
COVER

注記*1 部品の選定に際し、機械の号機に注意してください。
Note*1 Please check the SER.No. of the machine to decide the Part Code.
参照NO.5, 6, 7, 8
Ref. NO.5, 6, 7, 8

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3058001 1 FドアRクミ R2B FRONT DOOR R ASSY R2B
2 6B3061001 1 FドアLクミ R2B FRONT DOOR L ASSY R2B
3 6B3072001 1 ナカトビラRクミ R2B PARTITION DOOR R ASSY R2B
4 6B3077001 1 ナカトビラLクミ R2B PARTITION DOOR L ASSY R2B
5 6B3079001 1 マドツキサイドカバ-クミR2B WINDOW SIDE COVER ASSY R2B ～111126号機
～SER.No.111126
6B3491001 1 マドツキサイドカバ-クミR2BCE WINDOW SIDE COVER ASSY R2BCE 111127号機～
SER.No.111127～
(ヨーロッパ機のみ EU Only)
6 6B3081001 1 メンテカバ-Rクミ R2B MAINTENANCE COVER R ASSY R2B ～111126号機
～SER.No.111126
6B3493001 1 メンテカバ-Rクミ R2BCE MAINTENANCE COVER R ASSY R2BCE 111127号機～
SER.No.111127～
(ヨーロッパ機のみ EU Only)
7 6B3128001 1 サイドカバ-クミR2B SIDE COVER ASSY R2B ～111126号機
～SER.No.111126
6B3497001 1 サイドカバ-クミR2BCE SIDE COVER ASSY R2BCE 111127号機～
SER.No.111127～
(ヨーロッパ機のみ EU Only)
8 6B3083001 1 メンテカバ-Lクミ R2B MAINTENANCE COVER L ASSY R2B ～111126号機
～SER.No.111126
6B3495001 1 メンテカバ-Lクミ R2BCE MAINTENANCE COVER L ASSY R2BCE 111127号機～
SER.No.111127～
(ヨーロッパ機のみ EU Only)
9 6B3057001 2 スプラッシュパッキン R2B SPLASH GUARD PACKING R2B
10 690723001 1 TCマエPSラベルJCE TC PS LABEL JCE
691042001 1 TCマエPSラベルEGF TC PS LABEL EGF
690843001 1 TCマエPSラベルEIS TC PS LABEL EIS
11 618210001 1 TダツチヤクL JCE TOOL REMOVAL LABEL JCE S2
1 TダツチヤクL EGF TOOL REMOVAL LABEL EGF S2
1 TダツチヤクL EIS TOOL REMOVAL LABEL EIS S2
12 690731001 2 TCメンテマドラベルJCE TC MAINTE-WINDOW LABEL JCE
690732001 2 TCメンテマドラベルEGF TC MAINTE-WINDOW LABEL EGF
690842001 2 TCメンテマドラベルEIS TC MAINTE-WINDOW LABEL EIS
13 690730001 1 TCウシロPSラベルJCE TC REAR PS-LABEL JCE
691045001 1 TCウシロPSラベルEGF TC REAR PS-LABEL EGF
690840001 1 TCウシロPSラベルEIS TC REAR PS-LABEL EIS
14 690729001 1 TCカイセイRラベルJCE TC RESISTOR LABEL JCE
691058001 1 TCカイセイRラベルEGF TC RESISTOR LABEL EGF
690841001 1 TCカイセイRラベルEIS TC RESISTOR LABEL EIS
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 12.正面扉関係1-2
FRONT DOOR

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

1 6B3060001 1 ドアマド R2B DOOR WINDOW R2B

2 655381001 10 マドパツキン WINDOW PACKING
3 655368001 10 マドブツシユ WINDOW BUSH
4 021060102 10 1シュナット6 NUT 1 M6
5 025060232 10 ヒラザガネチュウ6 WASHER PLAIN M 6
6 653705001 1 トツテ12X150X50 HANDLE 12X150X50
7 6A7264001 1 トッテブラケットS2C-2 HANDLE BRACKT S2C-2
8 646237000 2 ストツパZ 311 STOPPER Z 311
9 533676001 2 ダンネジ SHOULDER SCREW
10 640313000 1 キヤツチ C-100-B-2 CATCH C-100-B-2
11 655184001 2 ストツパ32A STOPPER, 32A
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 12.正面扉関係2-2
FRONT DOOR

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
12 653698001 4 Fトビラレ-ル R2A FRONT DOOR RAIL, R2A
13 645117001 3 スペ-サ 36 SPACER 36
14 646410001 4 スペ-サ 19.5 SPACER 19.5
15 017061202 4 ボルト6X12 BOLT M6X12
16 6A7473001 2 ドアロ-ラ S2Cクミ DOOR ROLLER ASSY,S2C
16-1 6A7474001 1 ドアロ-ラ S2C DOOR ROLLER S2C
16-2 076000800 1 Rタマジクウケ6000ZZ BALL BEARING RADIAL 6000ZZ
17 6A7475001 2 ドアスペ-サ S2C DOOR SPACER S2C
18 628194001 2 ロ-ラジク 30 ROLLER SHAFT 30
19 025080232 2 ヒラザガネチュウ8 WASHER PLAIN M 8
20 028080242 2 バネザガネ2-8 WASHER SPRING 2-8
21 021080102 2 1シュナット8 NUT 1 M8
22 6B1160001 2 ロ-ラ 16 ROLLER 16
23 645027000 2 ジクウケDR19B1-14 BEARING DR19B1-14
24 028060242 2 バネザガネ2-6 WASHER SPRING 2-6
25 025060232 4 ヒラザガネチュウ6 WASHER PLAIN M 6
26 021060102 2 1シュナット6 NUT 1 M6
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 13.中扉関係
INNER COVER

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

1 6B3064001 1 ナカシキリR R2B PARTITION COVER R R2B

2 6B3065001 1 ナカシキリL R2B PARTITION COVER L R2B
3 6B3066001 1 ナカシキリウエカバ- R2B UPPER PARTITION COVER R2B
4 6B3067001 1 ナカシキリシタカバ-R R2B LOWER PARTITION COVER R R2B
5 6B3068001 1 ナカシキリシタカバ-L R2B LOWER PARTITION COVER L R2B
6 6B3070001 1 ナカシキリシタカバ- R2B LOWER PARTITION COVER R2B
7 610130001 1 ストッパ N STOPPER N
8 533676001 2 ダンネジ SHOULDER SCREW
9 6B3071001 1 ク-ラントヨケカバ- R2B COOLANT ISOLATION COVER R2B
10 6B3125001 2 ナカシキリゴムシ-ト R2B PARTITION RUBBER SHEET R2B
11 6B3126001 2 ゴムシ-トオサエ R2B RUBBER SHEET FIXTURE PLATE R2B
12 6B3074001 1 ナカトビラマド R2B PARTITION DOOR WINDOW R2B
13 655381001 10 マドパツキン WINDOW PACKING
14 655368001 10 マドブツシユ WINDOW BUSH
15 021060102 10 1シュナット6 NUT 1 M6
16 025060232 10 ヒラザガネチュウ6 WASHER PLAIN M 6
17 646385000 2 ハンドル A-75-3 HANDLE A-75-3
18 640313000 1 キヤツチ C-100-B-2 CATCH C-100-B-2
19 6B3075001 2 ナカトビラシタカバ- R2B PARTITION DOOR LOWER COVER R2B
20 6B3076001 2 ガスケット15 565 GASKET 15 565
21 6B3149001 1 ナカトビラドグ R R2B PARTITION DOOR DOG R R2B
22 6B3150001 1 ナカトビラドグ L R2B PARTITION DOOR DOG L R2B
23 6B3127001 1 ナカシキリレ-ルカバ- R2B PARTITION RAIL COVER R2B
24 6B3162001 2 ナカトビラLSブラケットR2B PARTITION DOOR LS BRACKET R2B
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 14.正面扉連動関係
FRONT DOOR WIRE

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 653712001 1 ワイヤフツククミ WIRE HOOK ASSY
2 653713001 1 ワイヤコテイブラケツト WIRE BRACKET
3 653714001 1 ワイヤコテイフツクステイ WIRE HOOK STAY
4 653715001 1 シ-ブブラケツトRクミ SHEAVE BRACKET ASSY, R
4-1 653716001 1 シ-ブブラケツトR SHEAVE BRACKET,R
4-2 653720001 1 ワイヤ-シ-ブD50 WIRE SHEAVE D50
4-3 076000800 1 Rタマジクウケ6000ZZ BALL BEARING RADIAL 6000ZZ
4-4 628194001 1 ロ-ラジク 30 ROLLER SHAFT 30
4-5 025080232 2 ヒラザガネチュウ8 WASHER PLAIN M 8
4-6 028080242 1 バネザガネ2-8 WASHER SPRING 2-8
4-7 021080102 1 1シュナット8 NUT 1 M8
5 653717001 1 シ-ブブラケツトLクミ SHEAVE BRACKET ASSY L
5-1 653718001 1 シ-ブブラケツトL SHEAVE BRACKET,L
5-2 653720001 1 ワイヤ-シ-ブD50 WIRE SHEAVE D50
5-3 076000800 1 Rタマジクウケ6000ZZ BALL BEARING RADIAL 6000ZZ
5-4 628194001 1 ロ-ラジク 30 ROLLER SHAFT 30
5-5 025080232 2 ヒラザガネチュウ8 WASHER PLAIN M 8
5-6 028080242 1 バネザガネ2-8 WASHER SPRING 2-8
5-7 021080102 1 1シュナット8 NUT 1 M8
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 15.正面扉LS関係
FRONT DOOR LS

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3160001 1 ドアロックLSクミR2B DOOR LOCK LS ASSY R2B
2 6B1562001 1 ドアロックLSコ-ドS2D DOOR LOCK LS CORD S2D
3 018403531 3 アナボルト4X35 BOLT SOCKET M4X35
4 6A7102001 1 ドア-ロックLSイタ S2C DOOR LOCK LS PLATE S2C
5 622959001 3 アナボルトバネヒラ6X16 SOCKET HEAD BOLT 6X16
6 651281001 1 Rロツクキ-トリツケイタ32N DOOR LOCK KEY, PLATE 32N
7 0A5401205 2 +ナベザクミ4X12DB SCREW PAN (S/P WASHER) M4X12
8 618412001 1 ロツクキ-チヨウセイイタ251 _ROTUKUKI-TIYOUSEIITA251
9 650826001 1 ドアロツクキ-D4DS-K1 DOOR LOCK KEY D4DS-K1
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 16.中扉LS関係
INNER DOOR LS

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3368001 1 ナカシキリLSクミ R2B INNER COVER LS ASSY R2B
1-1 6B3369001 2 スイッチD4N-2F20 SWITCH D4N-2F20
2 6A4908001 2 コ-ドロックE2OG0816 CORD LOCK E2OG0816BK
3 0A5403005 4 +ナベザクミ4X30DB SCREW PAN (S/P WASHER) M4X30
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 17.サイドカバー関係1-5
SIDE COVER

注記*1 部品の選定に際し、機械の号機に注意してください。
Note*1 Please check the SER.No. of the machine to decide the Part Code.
参照NO.1, 1-1
Ref. NO.1, 1-1

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3079001 1 マドツキサイドカバ-クミR2B WINDOW SIDE COVER ASSY R2B ～111126号機
～SER.No.111126
6B3491001 1 マドツキサイドカバ-クミR2BCE WINDOW SIDE COVER ASSY R2BCE 111127号機～
SER.No.111127～
(ヨーロッパ機のみ EU Only)
1-1 6B3080001 1 マドツキサイドカバ-R2B WINDOW SIDE COVER R2B ～111126号機
～SER.No.111126
6B3492001 1 マドツキサイドカバ-R2BCE WINDOW SIDE COVER R2BCE 111127号機～
SER.No.111127～
(ヨーロッパ機のみ EU Only)
1-2 653408001 2 マドパツキン1 WINDOW PACKING 1
1-3 653409001 2 マドパツキン2 WINDOW PACKING 2
1-4 653410001 2 マドパツキン3 WINDOW PACKING 3
1-5 653411001 2 マドパツキン4 WINDOW PACKING 4
1-6 6B1168001 1 トビラマド 628X268 DOOR WINDOW 628X268
1-7 653412001 2 マドオサエ1 HOLDER 1
1-8 653413001 2 マドオサエ2 HOLDER 2
1-9 021060102 20 1シュナット6 NUT 1 M6
1-10 025060232 20 ヒラザガネチュウ6 WASHER PLAIN M 6
1-11 622627001 2 トツテ8X100 HANDLE 8X100
1-12 018500831 4 アナボルト5X8 BOLT SOCKET M5X8
1-13 025050232 4 ヒラザガネチュウ5 WASHER PLAIN M 5
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 17.サイドカバー関係2-5
SIDE COVER

注記*1 部品の選定に際し、機械の号機に注意してください。
Note*1 Please check the SER.No. of the machine to decide the Part Code.
参照NO.1, 1-1
Ref. NO.1, 1-1

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3081001 1 メンテカバ-Rクミ R2B MAINTENANCE COVER R ASSY R2B ～111126号機
～SER.No.111126
6B3493001 1 メンテカバ-Rクミ R2BCE MAINTENANCE COVER R ASSY R2BCE 111127号機～
SER.No.111127～
(ヨーロッパ機のみ EU Only)
1-1 6B3082001 1 メンテカバ-R R2B MAINTENANCE COVER R R2B ～111126号機
～SER.No.111126
6B3494001 1 メンテカバ-R R2BCE MAINTENANCE COVER R R2BCE 111127号機～
SER.No.111127～
(ヨーロッパ機のみ EU Only)
1-2 622627001 2 トツテ8X100 HANDLE 8X100
1-3 638787001 4 アナボルトバネヒラ5X12 SOCKET HEAD BOLT 5X12
1-4 632173000 2 シ-ルワツシヤWFM5 SUS SEAL WASHER WFM5SUS
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 17.サイドカバー関係3-5
SIDE COVER

注記*1 部品の選定に際し、機械の号機に注意してください。
Note*1 Please check the SER.No. of the machine to decide the Part Code.
参照NO.1, 1-1
Ref. NO.1, 1-1

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3128001 1 サイドカバ-クミR2B SIDE COVER ASSY R2B ～111126号機
～SER.No.111126
6B3497001 1 サイドカバ-クミR2BCE SIDE COVER ASSY R2BCE 111127号機～
SER.No.111127～
(ヨーロッパ機のみ EU Only)
1-1 6B3129001 1 サイドカバ-R2B SIDE COVER R2B ～111126号機
～SER.No.111126
6B3498001 1 サイドカバ-R2BCE SIDE COVER R2BCE 111127号機～
SER.No.111127～
(ヨーロッパ機のみ EU Only)
1-2 622627001 2 トツテ8X100 HANDLE 8X100
1-3 018500831 4 アナボルト5X8 BOLT SOCKET M5X8
1-4 025050232 4 ヒラザガネチュウ5 WASHER PLAIN M 5
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 17.サイドカバー関係4-5
SIDE COVER

注記*1 部品の選定に際し、機械の号機に注意してください。
Note*1 Please check the SER.No. of the machine to decide the Part Code.
参照NO.1, 1-1
Ref. NO.1, 1-1

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
6B3083001 1 メンテカバ-Lクミ R2B MAINTENANCE COVER L ASSY R2B ～111126号機
1 ～SER.No.111126
6B3495001 1 メンテカバ-Lクミ R2BCE MAINTENANCE COVER L ASSY R2BCE 111127号機～
SER.No.111127～
(ヨーロッパ機のみ EU Only)
6B3084001 1 メンテカバ-L R2B MAINTENANCE COVER L R2B ～111126号機
1-1 ～SER.No.111126
6B3496001 1 メンテカバ-L R2BCE MAINTENANCE COVER L R2BCE 111127号機～
SER.No.111127～
(ヨーロッパ機のみ EU Only)
1-2 622627001 2 トツテ8X100 HANDLE 8X100
1-3 638787001 4 アナボルトバネヒラ5X12 SOCKET HEAD BOLT 5X12
1-4 632173000 2 シ-ルワツシヤWFM5 SUS SEAL WASHER WFM5SUS
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 17.サイドカバー関係5-5
SIDE COVER

注記*1 部品の選定に際し、機械の号機に注意してください。
Note*1 Please check the SER.No. of the machine to decide the Part Code.
参照NO.1, 1-1
Ref. NO.1, 1-1

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3512001 1 ドアツキサイドドアクミR2Bキユウ SIDE DOOR ASSY WITH DOOR R2BOLD ～111126号機
～SER.No.111126
6B3158001 1 ドアツキサイドドアクミR2B SIDE DOOR ASSY WITH DOOR R2B 111127号機～
SER.No.111127～
(ヨーロッパ機のみ EU Only)
1-1 6B3511001 1 ドアツキサイドカバ-R2Bキユウ SIDE COVER WITH DOOR R2B OLD ～111126号機
～SER.No.111126
6B3228001 1 ドアツキサイドカバ-R2B SIDE COVER WITH DOOR R2B 111127号機～
SER.No.111127～
(ヨーロッパ機のみ EU Only)
1-2 622627001 2 トツテ8X100 HANDLE 8X100
1-3 638787001 4 アナボルトバネヒラ5X12 SOCKET HEAD BOLT 5X12
1-4 6B3229001 1 サイドドアクミR2B SIDE DOOR ASSY R2B
1-5 6B3230001 1 サイドドアR2B SIDE DOOR R2B
1-6 646385000 1 ハンドル A-75-3 HANDLE A-75-3
1-7 025060232 2 ヒラザガネチュウ6 WASHER PLAIN M 6
1-8 021060102 2 1シュナット6 NUT 1 M6
1-9 640313000 1 キヤツチ C-100-B-2 CATCH C-100-B-2
1-10 0A5300608 2 +ナベザクミ3X6DB SCREW PAN (S/P WASHER) M3X6
1-11 6A8632001 1 Sドアキャッチカバ- 31B SIDE DOOR CATCH COVER 31B
1-12 0A5300608 2 +ナベザクミ3X6DB SCREW PAN (S/P WASHER) M3X6
1-13 6B3231001 1 トビラマド 449X264 DOOR WINDOW 449X264
1-14 655359001 2 SドアLマドパツキン1 SIDE DOOR L WINDOW PACKING 1
1-15 655360001 2 SドアLマドパツキン2 SIDE DOOR L WINDOW PACKING 2
1-16 655361001 2 SドアLマドパツキン3 SIDE DOOR L WINDOW PACKING 3
1-17 655362001 2 SドアLマドパツキン4 SIDE DOOR L WINDOW PACKING 4
1-18 655357001 2 SドアLマドオサエ1 SIDE DOOR L WINDOW PRESSER 1
1-19 655358001 2 SドアLマドオサエ2 SIDE DOOR L WINDOW PRESSER 2
1-20 025060232 16 ヒラザガネチュウ6 WASHER PLAIN M 6
1-21 021060102 16 1シュナット6 NUT 1 M6
1-22 6B3415001 1 ドアロックキ-イタR2B1 DOOR LOCK KEY PLATE R2B1
1-23 6B3416001 1 ドアロックキ-イタR2B2 DOOR LOCK KEY PLATE R2B2
1-24 650826001 1 ドアロツクキ-D4DS-K1 DOOR LOCK KEY D4DS-K1
1-25 0A5400805 6 +ナベザクミ4X8DB SCREW PAN (S/P WASHER) M4X8
1-26 646237000 1 ストツパZ 311 STOPPER Z 311
1-27 533676001 1 ダンネジ SHOULDER SCREW
1-28 6B3232001 1 サイドドアレ-ルカバ-R2B SIDE DOOR RAIL COVER R2B
1-29 025060232 4 ヒラザガネチュウ6 WASHER PLAIN M 6
1-30 021060102 4 1シュナット6 NUT 1 M6
2 6B3233001 1 Sドアロックキ-カバ-R2B SIDE DOOR LOCK KEY COVER R2B
3 653742001 2 アナボタンボルトヒラ6X8 SCREW, PAN(S/P WASHER) M6X8
4 6B3234001 1 SドアRロックLSクミR2B SIDE DOOR R LOCK LS ASSY R2B
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 18.エアユニット関係1-2
AIR UNIT

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3142001 1 エアユニットクミ R2B AIR UNIT ASSY R2B
1-1 6A9145001 1 アツリョクスイッチIS PRESSURE SWITCH IS
1-2 655613001 1 エアブラストコ-ド32A AIR BLAST CODE 32A
1-3 655614001 1 クーラントVコ-ド32A COOLANT VALVE CABLE 32A
1-4 6A6593001 1 ジグシャワ-Vコ-ド22B JIG SHOWER VALVE CORD 22B
1-5 6B1766001 1 ドレインバルブコ-ドS2D DRAIN VALVE CORD S2D
1-6 6A3166001 1 QTコ-ドUCL QT CORD UCL
1-7 610885001 2 サイレンサ AN203-02 SILENCER AN203-02
1-8 6B3263001 1 レギュレ-タ AR20-1R REGURATOR AR20-1R
1-9 635921001 1 FRユニツトAW30 FR UNIT AW30
1-10 6B1269001 1 ミストセパレ-タ MIST SEPARATOR AFM30-02D-6
1-11 6A0362001 1 レギユレタAR20-02BG REGULATOR, AR20-02BG
1-12 6B3414001 1 QTクランプバルブR2B QT CLAMP VALVE R2B
1-13 6A9141001 4 エアブラストバルブVQZ AIR BR VALVE VQZ
1-14 6A9146001 1 アツリョクSWコ-ド32BN PRESSURE SW CORD 32BN
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 18.エアユニット関係2-2
AIR UNIT

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
2 6B3123001 1 エアユニットR2B アジア AIR UNIT R2B ASIA
2-1 6A9145001 1 アツリョクスイッチIS PRESSURE SWITCH IS
2-2 655613001 1 エアブラストコ-ド32A AIR BLAST CODE 32A
2-3 655614001 1 クーラントVコ-ド32A COOLANT VALVE CABLE 32A
2-4 6A6593001 1 ジグシャワ-Vコ-ド22B JIG SHOWER VALVE CORD 22B
2-5 6B1766001 1 ドレインバルブコ-ドS2D DRAIN VALVE CORD S2D
2-6 6A3166001 1 QTコ-ドUCL QT CORD UCL
2-7 610885001 2 サイレンサ AN203-02 SILENCER AN203-02
2-8 6B3263001 1 レギュレ-タ AR20-1R REGURATOR AR20-1R
2-9 635921001 1 FRユニツトAW30 FR UNIT AW30
2-10 6B1269001 1 ミストセパレ-タ MIST SEPARATOR AFM30-02D-6
2-11 6A0362001 1 レギユレタAR20-02BG REGULATOR, AR20-02BG
2-12 6B3414001 1 QTクランプバルブR2B QT CLAMP VALVE R2B
2-13 6A9141001 4 エアブラストバルブVQZ AIR BR VALVE VQZ
2-14 6A9146001 1 アツリョクSWコ-ド32BN PRESSURE SW CORD 32BN
2-15 6B3296001 1 エアミズトリクミR2B AIR DRIER ASSY R2B
2-15-1 6A8620001 1 ドレンキャッチ2 DRAIN CATCH 2
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 19.クーラント配管関係1-2
COOLANT PIPING

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 653598001 2 ノズルVツキ18P NOZZLE V 18P
2 6A8742001 2 マニホ-ルド1/2X3 MANIFOLD 1/2X3
3 626373000 2 アナプラグ PT1/2 PLUG PT1/2
4 653509001 4 ホ-スニツプル1/2トク HOSE NIPPLE 1/2
5 6A9119001 2 ゴムホ-ス19X800 RUBBER HOSE 19X800
6 620420000 2 ホ-スバンド33 HOSE BAND CLAMP 33
7 651334001 1 ゴムホ-ス25X1800 RUBBER HOSE, 25X1800
8 618287001 2 ホ-スバンド38 HOSE CLAMP 38
9 6A8518001 1 ROHSエルボ3/4 ROHS ELBOW 3/4
10 651337001 2 ホ-スニツプル3/4トク HOSE NIPPLE 3/4
11 6A8519001 1 ROHSネジコミティPT3/4 ROHS SCREW COMMITY PT3/4
12 644307001 1 アナプラグPT3/4 PLUG, SOCKET PT3/4
13 6A4991001 1 ROHSブッシング3/41/2 ROHS BUSH 3/4-1/2
14 653509001 2 ホ-スニツプル1/2トク HOSE NIPPLE 1/2
15-1 6B3278001 1 ク-ラントバルブクミR2B COOLANT VALVE ASSY R2B
15-2 655614001 1 ク-ラントVコ-ド32A COOLANT VALVE CABLE 32A
16 6A9141001 1 エアブラストバルブVQZ AIR BR VALVE VQZ
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 19.クーラント配管関係2-2
COOLANT PIPING

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

17 653502001 1 ゴムホ-ス19X1500 RUBBER HOSE 19X1500

18 620420000 2 ホ-スバンド33 HOSE BAND CLAMP 33
19 6B1317001 1 バルブSGCA221B-15 VALVE SGCA221B-15
20 6A3357001 1 パイプ1/2 135L PIPE 1/2,135L
21 6A9013001 3 ROHSエルボ1/2 ROHS ELBOW 1/2
22 653509001 3 ホ-スニツプル1/2トク HOSE NIPPLE 1/2
23 6A8146001 4 ROHSニップルPT1/2 ROHS NIPPLE PT1/2
24 645253000 1 マニホ-ルド1/2 MANIFOLD 1/2
25 6A9014001 1 ROHSネジコミティ-1/2 ROHS SCREW COMMITY PT1/2
26 646276000 2 エルボGSL8-6 ELBOW GSL8-6
27 647520001 1 チユ-ブ8X3000 TUBE 8X3000
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 20.チップシャワー下側配管関係1-2
CHIP FLOW PIPING

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

1 6B3488001 1 ゴムホ-ス25X1300 RUBBER HOSE 25X1300

2 6A5095001 1 ゴムホ-ス25X1200 RUBBER HOSE 25X1200
3 618287001 4 ホ-スバンド38 HOSE CLAMP 38
4 626321002 1 サドルCH-25-M6 SADDLE CH-25-M6
5 6A8522001 3 ROHSニップルPT3/4 ROHS NIPPLE PT3/4
6 644396001 2 ボ-ルバルブ3/4 BALL VALVE 3/4
7 651337001 2 ホ-スニツプル3/4トク HOSE NIPPLE 3/4
8 6A8519001 1 ROHSネジコミティPT3/4 ROHS SCREW COMMITY PT3/4
9 644307001 1 アナプラグPT3/4 PLUG, SOCKET PT3/4
10 6A4991001 2 ROHSブッシング3/41/2 ROHS BUSH 3/4-1/2
11 6A9013001 2 ROHSエルボ1/2 ROHS ELBOW 1/2
12 640090001 2 パイプ1 _PAIPU1
13 653598001 2 ノズルVツキ18P NOZZLE V 18P
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 20.チップシャワー下側配管関係2-2
CHIP FLOW PIPING

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

14 6B3245001 2 キリコナガシシタS R2B CHIP SHOWER LOW PIPE S R2B

15 6B3246001 2 キリコナガシシタF R2B CHIP SHOWER LOW PIPE F R2B
16 640086000 4 サドル CD-22 SADDLE CD-22
17 018061231 4 アナボルト6X12 BOLT SOCKET M6X12
18 6A8518001 2 ROHSエルボ3/4 ROHS ELBOW 3/4
19 6A9103001 2 ROHSキャップ3/4 ROHS CAP3/4
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 20.チップシャワー上側配管関係
SHIP FLOW PIPING

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

1 6B3268001 1 ゴムホ-ス25X3000 RUBBER HOSE 25X3000

2 651333001 1 ゴムホ-ス25X1600 RUBBER HOSE 25X1600
3 6A5095001 1 ゴムホ-ス25X1200 RUBBER HOSE 25X1200
4 618287001 6 ホ-スバンド38 HOSE CLAMP 38
5 6B3251001 2 キリコナガシウエクミR2B CHIP SHOWER HIGH PIPE ASSY R2B
6 6B3254001 1 キリコナガシウエF R2B CHIP SHOWER HIGH PIPE F R2B
7 644396001 3 ボ-ルバルブ3/4 BALL VALVE 3/4
8 651337001 4 ホ-スニツプル3/4トク HOSE NIPPLE 3/4
9 610776001 3 ROHSメスオスエルボ3/4 ROHS STREET ELBOW 3/4
10 610870001 1 ROHSニップル3/4 ROHS NIPPLE 3/4
11 6A8522001 4 ROHSニップルPT3/4 ROHS NIPPLE PT3/4
12 6A8518001 2 ROHSエルボ3/4 ROHS ELBOW 3/4
13 6A8519001 2 ROHSネジコミティPT3/4 ROHS SCREW COMMITY PT3/4
14 6A9156001 2 プラグR3/4 PLUG R3/4
15 640086000 4 サドル CD-22 SADDLE CD-22
16 018061231 8 アナボルト6X12 BOLT SOCKET M6X12
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 21.洗浄ガン関係
COOLANT GUN

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

1 6A8752001 1 ROHSブッシング3/41/4 ROHS BUSH 3/4-1/4

2 610869001 1 ROHSバレルニップル1/4 ROHS BARREL NIPPLE 1/4
3 610800001 2 ROHSエルボ1/4 ROHS ELBOW 1/4
4 651338001 2 ホ-スニツプル1/4トク HOSE NIPPLE 1/4
5 610938001 1 ゴムホ-ス12X1900 RUBBER HOSE 12X1900
6 607254001 2 ホ-スバンド 18 HOSE BAND CLAMP 18
7 6A7476001 2 ツギテKQ2H-12 JOINT KQ2H-12
8 6A6760001 1 コイルチュ-ブ12X1360 COIL TUBE 12X1360
9 6A8520001 1 ROHSソケットPT1/4 ROHS SOCKET PT1/4
10 6A4332001 1 センジョウガンツギテ1 COOLANT GUN JOINT 1
11 628602000 1 レバ-ノズル N52 LEVER NOZZLE N52
12 6A5079001 1 センジョウガンステイ CLEANING GUN STAY
13 638786001 2 アナボルトバネヒラ6X12 SOCKEET HEAD BOLT 6X12
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 22.ツール洗浄関係1-2
TOOL CLEANING

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3241001 1 TセンジョウクミR2B T CLEANING ASSY R2B
2 6B3426001 1 ク-ラントチャンバ-クミR2B COOLANT CHAMBER ASSY R2B
3 6B1762001 1 ドレインボックス DRAIN BOX
4 6B1779001 1 ドレインボックスパッキン DRAIN BOX PACKING
5 6B1782001 1 ハ-フユニオン10-04 HALF UNION KQ2H10-04S
6 6B1766001 1 ドレインバルブコ-ドS2D DRAIN VALVE CORD S2D
7 6A9141001 1 エアブラストバルブVQZ AIR BR VALVE VQZ
8 6A9013001 2 ROHSエルボ1/2 ROHS ELBOW 1/2
9 653509001 2 ホ-スニツプル1/2トク HOSE NIPPLE 1/2
10 651332001 1 ゴムホ-ス25X900 RUBBER HOSE 25X900
11 6A3670001 1 ゴムホ-ス19X600 RUBBER HOSE 19X600
12 651323001 1 ゴムホ-ス19X180 RUBBER HOSE 19X180
13 618287001 2 ホ-スバンド38 HOSE CLAMP 38
14 620420000 4 ホ-スバンド33 HOSE BAND CLAMP 33
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 22.ツール洗浄関係2-2
TOOL CLEANING

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

15 6B1713001 1 バルブSGCA221B-15B VALVE SGCA221B-15B

16 6B3431001 1 エルボブラケット1/2 ELBOW BRACKET 1/2
17 6A8146001 3 ROHSニップルPT1/2 ROHS NIPPLE PT1/2
18 6A9013001 3 ROHSエルボ1/2 ROHS ELBOW 1/2
19 653509001 3 ホ-スニツプル1/2トク HOSE NIPPLE 1/2
20 6A9181001 1 ROHSブッシング1/21/4 ROHS BUSH 1/2-1/4
21 610869001 1 ROHSバレルニップル1/4 ROHS BARREL NIPPLE 1/4
22 610800001 2 ROHSエルボ1/4 ROHS ELBOW 1/4
23 651338001 2 ホ-スニツプル1/4トク HOSE NIPPLE 1/4
24 652726001 1 HPニツプル1/4 HP NIPPLE, 1/4
25 653502001 1 ゴムホ-ス19X1500 RUBBER HOSE 19X1500
26 6A6822001 1 ゴムホ-ス19X1630 RUBBER HOSE 19X1630
27 6A6662001 1 ゴムホ-ス12X370 RUBBER HOSE 12X370
28 620420000 4 ホ-スバンド33 HOSE BAND CLAMP 33
29 607254001 2 ホ-スバンド 18 HOSE BAND CLAMP 18
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 23-1.クーラントタンク 100L関係
COOLANT TANK 100L

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3266001 1 Cタンク100Lクミ R2B COOLANT TANK 100L ASSY R2B
1-1 626422000 1 タンク オイルゲ-ジ TANK OIL GAUGE
1-2 6B3270001 1 キリコウケ100Lクミ R2B CHIP BUCKET 100L ASSY R2B
1-3 622123001 4 キヤスタ- 57YSB CASTER 57YSB
1-4 6B1285001 2 タンクフィルタ-S2D TANK FILTER S2D
1-5 6B3419001 1 ク-ラントポンプ250TAKU COOLANT PUMP 250W TAKU
1-6 638240001 1 ク-ラントMコ-ド229 COOLANT M CORD 229
1-7 6B3166001 1 キリコウケエプロン R2B CHIP BUCKET APRON R2B
2 6B1603001 1 Cホゴ250Wクミ S2D C PROTECTION 250W ASSY S2D
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 23-2.クーラントタンク 150L関係
COOLANT TANK 150L

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3159001 1 Cタンク150Lクミ R2B COOLANT TANK 150L ASSY R2B
1-1 626422000 1 タンク オイルゲ-ジ TANK OIL GAUGE
1-2 6B3164001 1 キリコウケ150Lクミ R2B CHIP BUCKET 150L ASSY R2B
1-3 622123001 4 キヤスタ- 57YSB CASTER 57YSB
1-4 6B1285001 4 タンクフィルタ-S2D TANK FILTER S2D
1-5 6B3419001 1 ク-ラントポンプ250TAKU COOLANT PUMP 250W TAKU
1-6 638240001 1 ク-ラントMコ-ド229 COOLANT M CORD 229
1-7 651044001 1 ク-ラントポンプ400W COOLANT PUMP 400W
1-8 638241001 1 チツプシヤワMコ-ド229 CHIP SHOWER M CORD 229
1-9 6B1290001 1 キリコウケカバ-150LS2D CHIP PAN COVER 150L S2D
1-10 6B3166001 1 キリコウケエプロン R2B CHIP BUCKET APRON R2B
2 6B1603001 1 Cホゴ250Wクミ S2D C PROTECTION 250W ASSY S2D
3 6B1604001 1 Cホゴ400Wクミ S2D C PROTECTION 400W ASSY S2D
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
23-3. ク－ラントタンク 150L CTS関係 1/2
COOLANT TANK 150L CTS

1-10 1-9 1-11 1-12 1-13

1-5
1-6

1-7
1-8

1-3 1-1 1-4 1-2 1-4

2 3 4
 23-3.クーラントタンク150L CTS関係1-2
COOLANT TANK 150L CTS

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3161001 1 CタンクCTSクミ R2B C-TANK 150L CTS ASSY R2B
1-1 626422000 1 タンク オイルゲ-ジ TANK OIL GAUGE
1-2 6B3164001 1 キリコウケ150Lクミ R2B CHIP BUCKET 150L ASSY R2B
1-3 622123001 4 キヤスタ- 57YSB CASTER 57YSB
1-4 6B1285001 4 タンクフィルタ-S2D TANK FILTER S2D
1-5 6B3419001 1 ク-ラントポンプ250TAKU COOLANT PUMP 250W TAKU
1-6 638240001 1 ク-ラントMコ-ド229 COOLANT M CORD 229
1-7 651044001 1 ク-ラントポンプ400W COOLANT PUMP 400W
1-8 638241001 1 チツプシヤワMコ-ド229 CHIP SHOWER M CORD 229
1-9 6B1290001 1 キリコウケカバ-150LS2D CHIP PAN COVER 150L S2D
1-10 6B3166001 1 キリコウケエプロン R2B CHIP BUCKET APRON R2B
1-11 6B4406001 1 チユウアツポンプ650W MP PUMP 650W with No.1-13
1-12 618755001 1 CTSポンプコ-ドEP CTS PUMP CORD EP
1-13 6B4084001 1 リリーフバルブTR-H-DB RELIEF VALVE TR-H-DB
2 6B1603001 1 Cホゴ250Wクミ S2D C PROTECTION 250W ASSY S2D
3 6B1604001 1 Cホゴ400Wクミ S2D C PROTECTION 400W ASSY S2D
4 6A7454001 1 チユウアツホゴS2Cクミ CTS PROTECTION UINT S2C ASSY
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 23-3.クーラントタンク150L CTS関係2-2
COOLANT TANK 150L CTS

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

5 6B3257001 1 F/VトリツケイタクミR2B F/V MOUNTING PLATE ASSY R2B

5-1 618294001 1 ギヤクセンフイルタクミ BACK WASH FILTER ASSY
5-2 618422001 1 チエツクバルブ3/8 CHECK VALVE, 3/8
5-3 618308001 1 ラインフイルタクミMP LINE FILTER ASSY MP
5-4 618314001 1 MPバルブAクミ MP VALVE A ASSY
5-5 618315001 1 MPバルブBCクミ MP VALVE BC ASSY
5-6 618313001 1 ク-ラントバルブMP COOLANT VALVE MP
5-7 693003001 1 CTS ラベル 2 CTS LABEL 2
5-8 618357001 1 スピコン8-3/8I SPEED CONTROL8-3/8I
5-9 618358001 1 エアバルブMP AIR VALVE MP
6 618491001 1 ラインフイルタエレメントST LINE FILTER ELEMENT ST
7 618497001 1 ギャクセンエレメント BACK WASH ELEMENT
8 693001001 1 CTS ラベル 1 JCE CTS LABEL 1 JCE
693002001 1 CTS ラベル 1 EGF CTS LABEL 1 EGF
9 6B3259001 1 MPバルブクミR2B MP VALVE ASSY R2B
9-1 618419001 1 アツリヨクスイツチMP PRESSURE SWITCH MP
9-2 618313001 1 ク-ラントバルブMP COOLANT VALVE MP
9-3 647429000 2 エルボ-TL6-01 ELBOW TL6-01
9-4 638784001 1 チ-3/8-H TEE, 3/8-H
9-5 652426001 4 HPニツプル3/8 HP NIPPLE, 3/8
9-6 6A8732001 1 HPユニオンアダプタ3/8 HP UNION ADAPTER 3/8
9-7 652423001 1 HPホ-スニツプル 3/8 HP HOSE NIPPLE, 3/8
10 6B3260001 1 HPソケットプレ-ト3/8 HP SOCKET PLATE 3/8
11 652428001 2 HPホ-スエルボ3/8 HP HOSE ELBOW, 3/8
12 6A7522001 1 MPホ-スL950 MP HOSE L950
13 618578001 1 MPホ-スL2200 MP HOSE L2200
14 618521001 1 MPホ-スL1700 MP HOSE L1700
15 618521001 1 MPホ-スL1700 MP HOSE L1700
16 6A3670001 1 ゴムホ－ス 19X600 RUBBER HOSE 19X600
17 620420000 2 ホ－スバンド33 HOSE BAND CLAMP 33
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 24.自動扉関係
AUTOMATIC DOOR

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

1 6B1649001 1 ADシリンダ S2D-1 AD CYLINDER S2D-1

1-1 6B1654001 1 ADシリンダモ-タ AD CYLINDER MOTOR
1-2 6B1655001 1 ADクドウブ S2D-1 AD ACTUATOR S2D-1
1-3 6B1648001 1 ADシリンダスイッチクミS2D AD CYLINDER SWITCH ASSY S2D
2 6B1340001 1 シリンダブラケット S2D CYLINDER BRACKET S2D
3 6B1339001 1 シリンダステイ S2D CYLINDER STAY S2D
4 6B3240001 1 シリンダステイ R2B CYLINDER STAY R2B
5 6B3238001 1 ADカナグ R2B AD BRACKET R2B
6 6B3239001 1 スプリングウケ R2B SPRING STAY R2B
7 653165001 1 スプリングシヤフト SPRING SHAFT
8 651075001 1 スプリング 2.3X32 SPRING 2.3X32
9 618416001 1 ジクホジカナグ2 251 _ZIKUHOZIKANAGU2 251
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 25.工具折損検出装置関係
TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION UNIT

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

1 6A7488001 1 タッチセンサS2C TOUCH SENSOR S2C

2 6A8288001 1 タッチセンサコ-ド31B 1 TOUCH SENSOR CORD 31B 1
3 6A8289001 1 タッチセンサコ-ド31B 2 TOUCH SENSOR CORD 31B 2
4 6A8488001 1 タッチセンサブラケット 31B TOUCH SENSOR BRACKET 31B
5 018102031 1 アナボルト10X20 BOLT SOCKET M10X20
6 025100232 1 ヒラザガネチュウ10 WASHER PLAIN M 10
7 6A8364001 1 Tミゾナット12 T SLOT NUT 12
8 610172001 1 カミシ-ト40X100 SHEET 40X100
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 26-1.クイックテーブル中継箱関係
QUICK TABLE RELAY BOX

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

1 6B3173001 1 QTチュウケイハコクミ R2B QT RERAY BOX ASSY R2B

1-1 6B3181001 1 チュウケイハコシタ R2B LOWER RELAY BOX R2B
1-2 6B3177001 1 エアチュウケイハコ R2B AIR RELAY BOX R2B
1-3 6B3178001 2 チュウケイハコフタA R2B RELAY BOX COVER A R2B
1-4 6B3179001 2 チュウケイハコフタB R2B RELAY BOX COVER B R2B
1-5 6B3176001 12 カクヘキユニオン6 BULKHEAD UNION 6
1-6 618481001 12 プラグ6 PLUG 6
1-7 6B3185001 1 コ-ナ-リングA R2B CORNER RING A R2B
2 6B3187001 1 QTベ-スソコイタ R2B QT BASE BOTTOM PLATE R2B
3 6B3186001 1 コ-ナ-リングB R2B CORNER RING B R2B
4 610393001 1 QT-RJ エアチュ-ブクミ QT-RJ AIR TUBE ASSY
5 646468001 1 フレキ 29BX3000 FLEXIBLE TUBE, 29BX3000
6 6B3183001 1 QTナカシキリOPR R2B QT PARTITION OPR R2B
7 6B3184001 1 QTナカシキリOPL R2B QT PARTITION OPL R2B
8 6B3202001 2 QTゴムシ-トOP R2B QT RUBBER SHEET OP R2B
9 6B3203001 2 QTゴムオサエOP R2B QT RUBBER PLATE OP R2B
10 6B3182001 1 QTナカシキリOPC R2B QT PARTITION OPC R2B
11 6B3180001 1 チュウケイハコフタC R2B RELAY BOX COVER C R2B
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 26-2.クイックテーブルロータリージョイント関係
QUICK TABLE ROTARY JOINT

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

1 6B3173001 1 QTチュウケイハコクミ R2B QT RERAY BOX ASSY R2B

2 6B3187001 1 QTベ-スソコイタ R2B QT BASE BOTTOM PLATE R2B
3 6B3186001 1 コ-ナ-リングB R2B CORNER RING B R2B
4 610393001 1 QT-RJ エアチュ-ブクミ QT-RJ AIR TUBE ASSY
5 646468001 1 フレキ 29BX3000 FLEXIBLE TUBE, 29BX3000
6 6B3183001 1 QTナカシキリOPR R2B QT PARTITION OPR R2B
7 6B3184001 1 QTナカシキリOPL R2B QT PARTITION OPL R2B
8 6B3202001 2 QTゴムシ-トOP R2B QT RUBBER SHEET OP R2B
9 6B3203001 2 QTゴムオサエOP R2B QT RUBBER PLATE OP R2B
10 6B3207001 1 ロ-タリ-ジョイント R2B ROTARY JOINT R2B
11 6B3200001 1 RJコテイカナグ R2B RJ FIXING PLATE R2B
12 6B3188001 1 ナカシキリシタOPR R2B LOWER PARTITION OPR R2B
13 6B3204001 1 RJゴムシ-トA R2B RJ RUBBER SHEET A R2B
14 6B3205001 1 RJゴムオサエA R2B RJ RUBBER PLATE A R2B
15 6B3189001 1 ナカシキリシタOPL R2B LOWER PARTITION OPL R2B
16 6B3204001 1 RJゴムシ-トA R2B RJ RUBBER SHEET A R2B
17 6B3205001 1 RJゴムオサエA R2B RJ RUBBER PLATE A R2B
18 6B3199001 1 ナカシキリシタOPC R2B LOWER PARTITION OPC R2B
19 6B3201001 1 RJマワリドメイタ R2B RJ STOPPER PLATE R2B
20 6B3208001 2 RJゴムシ-トB R2B RJ RUBBER SHEET B R2B
21 6B3209001 2 RJゴムオサエB R2B RJ RUBBER PLATE B R2B
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 27.機内灯.表示灯.手パルス発生器関係
MACHINE LIGHT,INDICATION LAMP,MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification
1 6B3275001 1 LEDキナイトウ LED WORK LIGHT
2 6A7595001 1 ヒョウジトウ1トウクミS2C INDICATOR LIGHT 1 ASSY S2C
6A7596001 1 ヒョウジトウ2トウクミS2C INDICATOR LIGHT 2 ASSY S2C
6A7477001 1 ヒョウジトウ3トウクミS2C INDICATOR LIGHT 3 ASSY S2C
3 6A6754001 1 パルサHP-V01-34クミ PULSER HP-V01-34 ASSY
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 28.間欠給油装置関係1-3
INTERMITTENT LUBRICATING UNIT

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

1 6B3221001 1 キュウユポンプPL R2B LUBRICATOR PUMP PLATE R2B

2 655697001 1 キュウユポンプ LUBRICATION PUMP
3 6B3219001 1 ホ-ス6X1800 HOSE 6X1800
4 6A7569001 1 ホ-ス6X3400 HOSE 6X3400
5 6B3219001 1 ホ-ス6X1800 HOSE 6X1800
6 6A7570001 1 ホ-ス6X1150 HOSE 6X1150
7 6B3220001 1 ホ-ス6X1400 HOSE 6X1400
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 28.間欠給油装置関係2-3
INTERMITTENT LUBRICATING UNIT

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

8 6A6172001 1 ブンパイキ 22B DISTRIBUTOR 22B

9 6A7418001 1 ワンタッチエルボ6-M10 QUICK CONNECTOR ELBOW 6-M10
10 653952001 1 シ-ルパツキンM10 SEAL PACKING M10
11 653953001 1 ザツキプラグM10 PLUG M10
12 641340000 2 レイロンチユ-ブ470 TUBE 470
13 637435001 2 レイロンチユ-ブ1050 TUBE, LYLON 1050
14 650524001 1 レイロンチユ-ブ700 TUBE, LYLON 700
15 6A6172001 1 ブンパイキ 22B DISTRIBUTOR 22B
16 6A7418001 1 ワンタッチエルボ6-M10 QUICK CONNECTOR ELBOW 6-M10
17 653952001 1 シ-ルパツキンM10 SEAL PACKING M10
18 653953001 1 ザツキプラグM10 PLUG M10
19 641342000 2 レイロンチユ-ブ550 TUBE 550
20 641337000 3 レイロンチユ-ブ4X300 TUBE 300
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
28. 間欠給油装置 関係 3/3
INTERMITTENT LUBRICATING UNIT

22 21 23 24

25 25

25

25 25
 28.間欠給油装置関係3-3
INTERMITTENT LUBRICATING UNIT

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

21 6A6172001 1 ブンパイキ 22B DISTRIBUTOR 22B

22 6A7418001 1 ワンタッチエルボ6-M10 QUICK CONNECTOR ELBOW 6-M10
23 653952001 1 シ-ルパツキンM10 SEAL PACKING M10
24 653953001 1 ザツキプラグM10 PLUG M10
25 641344000 5 レイロンチュ－ブ800 TUBE 800
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 29.自動グリス給脂装置関係1-3
AUTOMATIC GREASE SUPPLY UNIT

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

1 6B3221001 1 キュウユポンプPL R2B LUBRICATOR PUMP PLATE R2B

2 6A7914001 1 ジドウキュウシポンプ AUTOMATIC GREASE PUMP
3 6B1382001 1 カ-トリッジグリ-ス LUBE CARTRIDGE GREASE LUBE
4 6B1384001 1 コウアツフレキL400 HIGH PRESSURE FLEX TUBE L400
5 6B3222001 1 コウアツフレキL1800 HIGH PRESSURE FLEX TUBE L1800
6 6B3224001 1 コウアツフレキL2800 HIGH PRESSURE FLEX TUBE L2800
7 6B3223001 1 コウアツフレキL1400 HIGH PRESSURE FLEX TUBE L1400
8 6B1466001 1 コウアツフレキL1100 HIGH PRESSURE FLEX TUBE L1100
9 6B3223001 1 コウアツフレキL1400 HIGH PRESSURE FLEX TUBE L1400
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 29.自動グリス給脂装置関係2-3
AUTOMATIC GREASE SUPPLY UNIT

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

10 6B1388001 1 グリスブンパイキクミ 5P GREASE DISTRIBUTOR ASSY 5P

11 6A8371001 1 グリスヨウエルボ GREASE ELBOW
12 607327001 1 アナプラグPT1/8 GJ PLUG SCREW PT1/8
13 641340000 2 レイロンチユ-ブ470 TUBE 470
14 637435001 2 レイロンチユ-ブ1050 TUBE, LYLON 1050
15 650524001 1 レイロンチユ-ブ700 TUBE, LYLON 700
16 6B1388001 1 グリスブンパイキクミ 5P GREASE DISTRIBUTOR ASSY 5P
17 6A8371001 1 グリスヨウエルボ GREASE ELBOW
18 607327001 1 アナプラグPT1/8 GJ PLUG SCREW PT1/8
19 641342000 2 レイロンチユ-ブ550 TUBE 550
20 641337000 3 レイロンチユ-ブ4X300 TUBE 300
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
29. 自動グリス給脂装置関係 3/3
AUTOMATIC GREASE SUPPLY UNIT

21 23

24

24

22

24
24

24
 29.自動グリス給脂装置関係3-3
AUTOMATIC GREASE SUPPLY UNIT

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

21 6B1388001 1 グリスブンパイキクミ 5P GREASE DISTRIBUTOR ASSY 5P

22 6A8371001 1 グリスヨウエルボ GREASE ELBOW
23 607327001 1 アナプラグPT1/8 GJ PLUG SCREW PT1/8
24 641344000 5 レイロンチュ－ブ800 TUBE 800
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
 30.中継箱関係
RELAY BOX

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 個数 品名 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Q'ty Part Name Remark Classification

1 6B3035001 1 フレキSMブラケット R2B FLEXIBLE TUBE SM BRACKET R2B

2 018061231 4 アナボルト6X12 BOLT SOCKET M6X12
3 6B3036001 1 チュウケイハコカバ- R2B RELAY BOX COVER R2B
4 018061231 3 アナボルト6X12 BOLT SOCKET M6X12
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
100-1. 制御箱関係(10K/16K) 1/3
CONTROL BOX(10K/16K) 1/3

TC-R2B PART LIST

 100-1.制御箱関係(10K16K) 1-3
CONTROL BOX(10K/16K)

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 ﾊﾟｰﾂｼﾝﾎﾞﾙ 備考 分類

Ref.No Part Code Part Name Q'ty Part Symbol Remark Classification
5 6A4280*01 IOキバンB00ホキュウ IO PCB B00 SUPPLY 1 IO PCB ｢*｣=6 or Higher (6以上) C
6 6B3484*01 SRQTキバンB00ホキュウ SRQT PCB B00 SUPPLY 1 SRQT PCB ｢*｣=0 or Higher (0以上) C
6A8847001 ブレ-カEW32EAG30B4 BREAKER EW32EAG-3P030B 4B 1 QF1 EXCEPT EU C
8 6A9319001 ブレ-カEW32EAM024B BREAKER EW32EAM-3P024B 1 QF1 EU C
6B4276001 カバ- BW9BTAA-L3 COVER BW9BTAA-L3 1 for QF1 C
9 655629001 バリスタ 200V クミ VARISTOR 200V ASSY 1 VRSTR C
6A3891001 トランス2 0.6K 200V TRANSFORMER 2 0.6K 200V 1 T2 EXCEPT EU C
10
6A6368001 トランス2 432VA EU TRANSFORMER 2 432VA EU 1 T2 EU C
11 6A8546001 ATXパワ-ユニットクミ31B ATX POWER UNIT ASSY 31B 1 AVR1 C
12 6B3330001 AVR OZP120-24 C AVR OZP-120-24-J03 COAT 1 AVR2 C
13 618630001 リレ-LC1 32A 24V RELAY LC1 32A 24V 1 KS1A, KS1B C
618648001 リレ-LP1-K06 RELAY LP1-K06 1 KC1 C
14
618670001 ヘツドオンLP-4P HEAD ON LP-4P 1 KC1 ADD-ON C
15 618579001 ブレ-カBW32AAG005 BREAKER BW32AAG-2P005 1 Q2 C
16 618644001 フイルタ デンゲン 30A FILTER POWER 30A 1 Z1, Z3 EU ONLY C
17 653838001 スイツチAM50024C5 SWITCH AM50024C5 2 SQBOXU, SQBOXD C
18 6A7166001 クリップC-1007-2 CLIP C-1007-2 2 C
6B4273001 ハンドルBZ6V10D HANDLE BZ6V10D 1 C
19
626986000 ナンキンジヨウ1000-30 PADLOCK 1000-30 1 C
20 6A7347001 トリムシ-ル 89B0-F1 TRIM SEAL 89B0-F1 1 C
21 6B1551001 モ-タブレ-カGV2-ME04 MOTOR BREAKER GV2-ME04 1 Q9 C
10K/16K
6A7173701 アンプQS1V15A AMPLIFIER QS1V15A 1 S AMP
｢*｣=7 or Higher (7以上) C
22
6A7674001 Q15アンプファンホキュウ Q15 AMPLIFIER FAN SUPPLY 1 AMP FAN C
6A7172501 アンプQS1W05A AMPLIFIER QS1W05A 3 XYZ AMP ｢*｣=5 or Higher (5以上) C
23
6A7673001 Q05アンプファンホキュウ Q05 AMPLIFIER FAN SUPPLY 3 AMP FAN C
24 6A8443201 アンプQS1W01A AMPLIFIER QS1W01A 1 MAG AMP ｢*｣=2 or Higher (2以上) C
25 6A8442001 アンプQS1W03A AMPLIFIER QS1W03A 1 C AMP ｢*｣=0 or Higher (0以上) C
26 618711001 タンシダイBT 15A12P TERMINAL BT 15A12P 1 XTPOW C
27 6B3329001 タンシダイ600V30A 6P TERMINAL 600V30A 6P 1 XTHP C
28 655734001 Sアブソ-バCR50500 S ABSORBER, CR50500 1 Z2 OIL SUPPLY(OP) C
655718001 リレーHC2-DC24V-D RELAY HC2-DC24V-D 1 KLUB OIL SUPPLY(OP) C
29
653925001 リレ-LP4K09106BW3 RELAY LP4K09106BW3 1 KLUB GREASE SUPPLY(OP) C
30 654261101 AVR LDA100W-24X AVR LDA100W-24X 1 AVR10 GREASE SUPPLY(OP) C
6A4524*01 EXIO1 N B00ホキュウ EXIO1 NPN B00 SUPPLY 1 EXIO1 NPN(OP) C
31
6A4525*01 EXIO1 P B00ホキュウ EXIO1 PNP B00 SUPPLY 1 EXIO1 PNP(OP) C
6A4507*01 EXIO2 N BOOホキュウ EXIO2 NPN BOO SUPPLY 1 EXIO2 NPN(OP) C
32
6A4508*01 EXIO2 P BOOホキュウ EXIO2 PNP BOO SUPPLY 1 EXIO2 PNP(OP) C
34 622484001 フアン4715PS10TB30 FAN 4715PS10TB30 1 FAN2 C
39 6A4284012 OPSELキバンB01ホキユウ OPSEL PCB B01 SUPPLY 1 OPSEL PCB PLC (OP) C
40 6A7665001 RS OPユニットS2C RS OPTION UNIT S2C 1 CNRS RS-232C (OP) C
41 6A4374001 XTキバンクミ XT PCB ASSY 1 XT PCB C
42 6A8440001 SSR AQJ216V SSR AQJ216V 1 VC1 C
43 654379001 コンセント2P OUTLET 2P 1 100V C
44 6B3445001 ヘッドオンAU-2M-20 HEAD ON AU-2M-20 2 KS5,KS6 OP C
45 6B3446001 リレ-GMD12MDC24 RELAY:GMD-12M DC24 4 KS5,KS6,KS7,KS8 OP C
46 6A7164001 ナイロンワツシヤ- WASHER M6PA TM-147 2 C
47 6B3565001 GFUSE1A GLASS FUSE1A 1 FU1 SPARE FUSE C
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
100-1. 制御箱関係(10K/16K) 2/3
CONTROL BOX(10K/16K) 2/3
～111616号機 ローカル基板（FB5UM）
～Ser.No.111616 Local PCB(FB5UM)

111617号機～ ローカル基板（ICE-DB-BIL-R10）
Ser.No.111617～ Local PCB（ICE-DB-BIL-R10）

TC-R2B PART LIST

 100-1.制御箱関係(10K16K)2-3
CONTROL BOX(10K/16K)

～111616号機 ローカル基板（FB5UM）
～Ser.No.111616 Local PCB（FB5UM）
参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 ﾊﾟｰﾂｼﾝﾎﾞﾙ 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Part Name Q'ty Part Symbol Remark Classification
1 6A4277*01 NCキバンB00ホキュウ NC PCB B00 SUPPLY 1 NC PCB ｢*｣=2 or Higher (2以上) C
2 6A7672*01 SVIF-Sキバン ホキユウ SVIF-S PCB SUPPLY 1 SVIF PCB ｢*｣=2 or Higher (2以上) C
3 6A7679*01 LOCALキバンB00ホキユウ LOCAL PCB B00 SUPPLY 1 LOCAL PCB ｢*｣=1 or Higher (1以上) C
4 6A7680*01 DVOキバンB00 ホキユウ DVO PCB B00 SUPPLY 1 DVO PCB ｢*｣=0 or Higher (0以上) C
6A3538*01 CFクミXJ CF ASSY XJ 1 CFSYS (JAPAN) ｢*｣=F or Higher (F以上) C
7
6A3539*01 CFクミXE CF ASSY XE 1 CFSYS (Except JAPAN) ｢*｣=F or Higher (F以上) C
33 649557101 CPUファン：ホキュウクミ PC PCB CPU FAN ASSY 1 LOCAL PCB FAN C

111617号機～ ローカル基板（ICE-DB-BIL-R10）
Ser.No.111617～ Local PCB（ICE-DB-BIL-R10）
参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 ﾊﾟｰﾂｼﾝﾎﾞﾙ 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Part Name Q'ty Part Symbol Remark Classification
1 6A4277*01 NCキバンB00ホキュウ NC PCB B00 SUPPLY 1 NC PCB ｢*｣=2 or Higher (2以上) C
2 6A7672*01 SVIF-Sキバン ホキユウ SVIF-S PCB SUPPLY 1 SVIF PCB ｢*｣=2 or Higher (2以上) C
6B4449*01 LOCALキバンホキュウクミＮJ LOCAL PCB SUPPLY ASSY ＮJ
3 1 LOCAL PCB ｢*｣=0 or Higher (0以上) C
6B4450*01 LOCALキバンホキュウクミＮE LOCAL PCB SUPPLY ASSY ＮE
6B5373*01 CFクミWJ CF ASSY WJ 1 CFSYS (JAPAN) ｢*｣=0 or Higher (0以上) C
7
6B5374*01 CFクミWE CF ASSY WE 1 CFSYS (Except JAPAN) ｢*｣=0 or Higher (0以上) C

*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
100-1. 制御箱関係(10K/16K) 3/3
CONTROL BOX(10K/16K) 3/3

TC-R2B PART LIST

 100-1.制御箱関係(10K16K) 3-3
CONTROL BOX(10K/16K)

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 ﾊﾟｰﾂｼﾝﾎﾞﾙ 備考 分類

Ref.No Part Code Part Name Q'ty Part Symbol Remark Classification
34 622484001 フアン4715PS10TB30 FAN 4715PS10TB30 2 FAN1,3 C
35 6B1529001 バッテリホルダ3Pクミ S2D BATTERY HOLDER 3P ASSY S2D 1 BAT2 for Motor C
36 6B1530001 バッテリホルダ2Pクミ S2D BATTERY HOLDER 2P ASSY S2D 1 BAT1 for NC C
37 610579001 テイコウ50015ホキュウクミ RESISTOR ASSY 500W15YB 1 RSP1,2,3
38 6A7621001 タンシダイBT 15A6P TERMINAL BT 15A6P 1 XTR1 C
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
100-2. 制御箱関係(10K高トルク) 1/3
CONTROL BOX(10K HIGH TORQUE) 1/3
 100-2.制御箱関係(10K高トルク) 1-3
CONTROL BOX(10K HIGH TORQUE)

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 ﾊﾟｰﾂｼﾝﾎﾞﾙ 備考 分類

Ref.No Part Code Part Name Q'ty Part Symbol Remark Classification
5 6A4280*01 IOキバンB00ホキュウ IO PCB B00 SUPPLY 1 IO PCB ｢*｣=6 or Higher (6以上) C
6 6B3484*01 SRQTキバンB00ホキュウ SRQT PCB B00 SUPPLY 1 SRQT PCB ｢*｣=0 or Higher (0以上) C
6A8847001 ブレ-カEW32EAG30B4 BREAKER EW32EAG-3P030B 4B 1 QF1 EXCEPT EU C
8 6A9320001 ブレ-カEW32EAG30B BREAKER EW32EAG-3P030B 1 QF1 EU C
6B4276001 カバ- BW9BTAA-L3 COVER BW9BTAA-L3 1 for QF1 C
9 655629001 バリスタ 200V クミ VARISTOR 200V ASSY 1 VRSTR C
6A3891001 トランス2 0.6K 200V TRANSFORMER 2 0.6K 200V 1 T2 EXCEPT EU C
10
6A6368001 トランス2 432VA EU TRANSFORMER 2 432VA EU 1 T2 EU C
11 6A8546001 ATXパワ-ユニットクミ31B ATX POWER UNIT ASSY 31B 1 AVR1 C
12 6B3330001 AVR OZP120-24 C AVR OZP-120-24-J03 COAT 1 AVR2 C
13 618630001 リレ-LC1 32A 24V RELAY LC1 32A 24V 1 KS1A, KS1B C
618648001 リレ-LP1-K06 RELAY LP1-K06 1 KC1 C
14
618670001 ヘツドオンLP-4P HEAD ON LP-4P 1 KC1 ADD-ON C
15 618579001 ブレ-カBW32AAG005 BREAKER BW32AAG-2P005 1 Q2 C
16 6B5157001 フィルタ3SUPF-BH50 FILTER 3SUPF-BH50-ER-6-Q-SW 1 Z4 EU ONLY C
17 6B5155001 ACL300A ACL 300A 1 ACL C
18 6A7166001 クリップC-1007-2 CLIP C-1007-2 2 C
6B4273001 ハンドルBZ6V10D HANDLE BZ6V10D 1 C
19
626986000 ナンキンジヨウ1000-30 PADLOCK 1000-30 1 C
20 6A7347001 トリムシ-ル 89B0-F1 TRIM SEAL 89B0-F1 1 C
21 6B1551001 モ-タブレ-カGV2-ME04 MOTOR BREAKER GV2-ME04 1 Q9 C
22 6B5154001 アンプQS1X30 AMPLIFER QS1X30 1 S AMP 10K HIGH TORQUE C
6A7172501 アンプQS1W05A AMPLIFIER QS1W05A 3 XYZ AMP ｢*｣=5 or Higher (5以上) C
23
6A7673001 Q05アンプファンホキュウ Q05 AMPLIFIER FAN SUPPLY 3 AMP FAN C
24 6A8443201 アンプQS1W01A AMPLIFIER QS1W01A 1 MAG AMP ｢*｣=2 or Higher (2以上) C
25 6A8442001 アンプQS1W03A AMPLIFIER QS1W03A 1 C AMP ｢*｣=0 or Higher (0以上) C
26 618711001 タンシダイBT 15A12P TERMINAL BT 15A12P 1 XTPOW C
27 6B3329001 タンシダイ600V30A 6P TERMINAL 600V30A 6P 1 XTHP C
28 655734001 Sアブソ-バCR50500 S ABSORBER, CR50500 1 Z2 OIL SUPPLY(OP) C
655718001 リレーHC2-DC24V-D RELAY HC2-DC24V-D 1 KLUB OIL SUPPLY(OP) C
29
653925001 リレ-LP4K09106BW3 RELAY LP4K09106BW3 1 KLUB GREASE SUPPLY(OP) C
30 654261101 AVR LDA100W-24X AVR LDA100W-24X 1 AVR10 GREASE SUPPLY(OP) C
6A4524*01 EXIO1 N B00ホキュウ EXIO1 NPN B00 SUPPLY 1 EXIO1 NPN(OP) C
31
6A4525*01 EXIO1 P B00ホキュウ EXIO1 PNP B00 SUPPLY 1 EXIO1 PNP(OP) C
6A4507*01 EXIO2 N BOOホキュウ EXIO2 NPN BOO SUPPLY 1 EXIO2 NPN(OP) C
32
6A4508*01 EXIO2 P BOOホキュウ EXIO2 PNP BOO SUPPLY 1 EXIO2 PNP(OP) C
34 622484001 フアン4715PS10TB30 FAN 4715PS10TB30 1 FAN2 C
39 6A4284012 OPSELキバンB01ホキユウ OPSEL PCB B01 SUPPLY 1 OPSEL PCB PLC (OP) C
40 6A7665001 RS OPユニットS2C RS OPTION UNIT S2C 1 CNRS RS-232C (OP) C
41 6A4374001 XTキバンクミ XT PCB ASSY 1 XT PCB C
42 6A8440001 SSR AQJ216V SSR AQJ216V 1 VC1 C
43 654379001 コンセント2P OUTLET 2P 1 100V C
44 6B3445001 ヘッドオンAU-2M-20 HEAD ON AU-2M-20 2 KS5,KS6 OP C
45 6B3446001 リレ-GMD12MDC24 RELAY:GMD-12M DC24 4 KS5,KS6,KS7,KS8 OP C
46 6A7164001 ナイロンワツシヤ- WASHER M6PA TM-147 2 C
47 6B3565001 GFUSE1A GLASS FUSE1A 1 FU1 SPARE FUSE C
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
100-2. 制御箱関係(10K高トルク) 2/3
CONTROL BOX(10K HIGH TORQUE) 2/3
～111616号機 ローカル基板（FB5UM）
～Ser.No.111616 Local PCB(FB5UM)

111617号機～ ローカル基板（ICE-DB-BIL-R10）
Ser.No.111617～ Local PCB（ICE-DB-BIL-R10）

TC-R2B PART LIST

 100-2.制御箱関係(10K高トルク) 2-3
CONTROL BOX(10K HIGH TORQUE)

～111616号機 ローカル基板（FB5UM）
～Ser.No.111616号機 Local PCB（FB5UM）
参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 ﾊﾟｰﾂｼﾝﾎﾞﾙ 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Part Name Q'ty Part Symbol Remark Classification
1 6A4277*01 NCキバンB00ホキュウ NC PCB B00 SUPPLY 1 NC PCB ｢*｣=2 or Higher (2以上) C
2 6A7672*01 SVIF-Sキバン ホキユウ SVIF-S PCB SUPPLY 1 SVIF PCB ｢*｣=2 or Higher (2以上) C
3 6A7679*01 LOCALキバンB00ホキユウ LOCAL PCB B00 SUPPLY 1 LOCAL PCB ｢*｣=1 or Higher (1以上) C
4 6A7680*01 DVOキバンB00 ホキユウ DVO PCB B00 SUPPLY 1 DVO PCB ｢*｣=0 or Higher (0以上) C
6A3538*01 CFクミXJ CF ASSY XJ 1 CFSYS (JAPAN) ｢*｣=F or Higher (F以上) C
7
6A3539*01 CFクミXE CF ASSY XE 1 CFSYS (Except JAPAN) ｢*｣=F or Higher (F以上) C
33 649557101 CPUファン：ホキュウクミ PC PCB CPU FAN ASSY 1 LOCAL PCB FAN C

111617号機～ ローカル基板（ICE-DB-BIL-R10）
Ser.No.111617号機～ Local PCB（ICE-DB-BIL-R10）
参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 ﾊﾟｰﾂｼﾝﾎﾞﾙ 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Part Name Q'ty Part Symbol Remark Classification
1 6A4277*01 NCキバンB00ホキュウ NC PCB B00 SUPPLY 1 NC PCB ｢*｣=2 or Higher (2以上) C
2 6A7672*01 SVIF-Sキバン ホキユウ SVIF-S PCB SUPPLY 1 SVIF PCB ｢*｣=2 or Higher (2以上) C
6B4449*01 LOCALキバンホキュウクミＮJ LOCAL PCB SUPPLY ASSY ＮJ
3 1 LOCAL PCB ｢*｣=0 or Higher (0以上) C
6B4450*01 LOCALキバンホキュウクミＮE LOCAL PCB SUPPLY ASSY ＮE
6B5373*01 CFクミWJ CF ASSY WJ 1 CFSYS (JAPAN) ｢*｣=0 or Higher (0以上) C
7
6B5374*01 CFクミWE CF ASSY WE 1 CFSYS (Except JAPAN) ｢*｣=0 or Higher (0以上) C

*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
100-2. 制御箱関係(10K高トルク) 3/3
CONTROL BOX(10K HIGH TORQUE) 3/3

TC-R2B PART LIST

 100-2.制御箱関係(10K高トルク) 3-3
CONTROL BOX(10K HIGH TORQUE)

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 ﾊﾟｰﾂｼﾝﾎﾞﾙ 備考 分類

Ref.No Part Code Part Name Q'ty Part Symbol Remark Classification
34 622484001 フアン4715PS10TB30 FAN 4715PS10TB30 2 FAN1,3 C
35 6B1529001 バッテリホルダ3Pクミ S2D BATTERY HOLDER 3P ASSY S2D 1 BAT2 for Motor C
36 6B1530001 バッテリホルダ2Pクミ S2D BATTERY HOLDER 2P ASSY S2D 1 BAT1 for NC C
37 6A6386001 タンシダイTSU-625C-3 TERMINAL TSU-625C-3P 1 XTPN C
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
101. 操作箱関係
OPERATION BOX

TC-R2B PART LIST

 101.操作箱関係
OPERATION BOX

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 ﾊﾟｰﾂｼﾝﾎﾞﾙ 備考 分類

Ref.No Part Code Part Name Q'ty Part Symbol Remark Classification
1 654567001 SW デンゲン１Ａ１Ｂ SWITCH POWER 1A1B 1 SWPW C
2 6B1555001 SW ヒジヨウ2B SW EMERGENCY 2B 1 SWEM C
3 6A4056001 SW HW1L-M110Q1G SW HW1L-M110Q1G 1 SWST C
654103001 カバ- AR9E COVER AR9E760 1 C
4 6A4298001 SW HW1L-M110Q1R SW NW1L-M110Q1R 1 SWSTP C
5 6A4295001 スイッチFOVクミ B00 SW FOV ASSY B00 1 RSFOV C
636844001 ツマミ B30 NIPPLE B30 1 C
6 6A4296001 スイッチMOVクミ B00 SW MOV ASSY B00 1 RSMOV C
636844001 ツマミ B30 NIPPLE B30 1 C
7 654444001 SWAR22JCR3B174A SW AR22JCR3B174A 1 SWPRT C
616340001 キ-AR9C022-A KEY AR9C022-A 1 C
8 6B3462001 SW AR22JR2D05B- SWITCH AR22JR2D05B-KEY 1 SWSEC C
616341001 キ-AR9C022-B KEY AR9C022-B 1 C
9 6B3407001 ソウサパネルクミR2B J OPERATION PANEL ASSY R2B J 1 Japanese C
6B3408001 ソウサパネルクミR2B E OPERATION PANEL ASSY R2B E 1 English C
6B3409001 ソウサパネルクミR2B C OPERATION PANEL ASSY R2B C 1 Chinese C
10 6B1680001 LCDホキュウクミ-42G SUPPLY LCD NL8060BC-42G 1 LCD C
11 6B1681001 バックライトホキュウLHS22 SUPPLY LAMP HOLDER 121LHS22 1 C
12 6A4534001 インバータ121PW181 INVERTER:121PW181 1 INV C
13 6A4287001 キ-シ-トB00 J KEY SHEET B00 J 1 Japanese C
6A4288001 キ-シ-トB00 E KEY SHEET B00 E 1 English C
6A7714001 キ-シ-トB00 C KEY SHEET B00 C 1 Chinese C
15 649549*01 キ-コントロ-ルキバンホキユウ KEY CONTROL PCB SUPPLY 1 KEYC PCB 「*」 = 3 or higher C
16 6A3919001 ヒュ-ズ LM10 FUSE LM10 1 on KEYC PCB C
17 654509001 プラグAHX622-GY PLUG AHX622-GY 1 C
654508001 スイツチSPOVクミ SWITCH SPOV ASSY 1 SPOV OPTION C
18 6A7681*01 USBキバンB00 ホキユウ USB IF PCB B00 SUPPLY 1 USB I/F PCB C
19 6A7481001 USBキャップクミS2C USB CAP ASSY S2C 1 C
20 6A6680001 OP SWパネル 22B OPSW PANEL PLATE 22B 1 C
21 654485001 プラグAHX725-H PLUG AHX725-H 10 OPTION C
640915001 リングAHX750 RING AHX750 10 C
22 6A4056001 SW HW1L-M110Q1G SW HW1L-M110Q1G 1 C
23 6A8415001 メイバンソトガワキドウJ NAME PLATE PALLET START J 1 Japanese C
6A8416001 メイバンソトガワキドウE NAME PLATE PALLET START E 1 English C
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
102-1. ケーブル関係（10K/16K） 1/4
CABLE (10K/16K) 1/4

2
MX
X AMP X ENC CORD
X MOTOR CORD
3
MY
Y AMP
Y ENC CORD
Y MOTOR CORD

IO CNSFOH
PCB CNSPOH
SFAN
KC1
1
MS
S AMP S ENC CORD
ASSY
S MOTOR CORD

MZ
Z AMP Z ENC CORD
Z MOTOR CORD
YBZ
6 YB CORD Z BRAKE CORD
IO
PCB 5
YBM
MAGM

MAG
MAG MAGAZINE ENC CORD
AMP
MAGAZINE MORTOR CORD

4
MC
C AMP C ENC CORD
C MOTOR CORD
CNSQUCL
QT CORD QT UNCLAMP
IO PCB CYLINDER SENSOR

SR QT CL CABLE
PCB QT CLAMP SENSOR

TC-R2B PART LIST

 102-1.ケーブル関係(10K16K) 1-4
CABLE(10K/16K)

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Part Name Q'ty Remark Classification
1 6B3360001 SZフレキクミR2B SZ FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY R2B 1 C
2 6B3356001 XフレキクミR2B X FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY R2B 1 C
3 6B3357001 YフレキクミR2B Y FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY R2B 1 C
6B3358001 CフレキクミR2B C FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY R2B 1 EXCEPT EU C
4
6B3459001 CフレキクミR2BEU C FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY R2B EU 1 EU C
6B3361001 MAGフレキクミR2B MAG FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY R2B 1 EXCEPT EU C
5
6B3460001 MAGフレキクミR2BEU MAG FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY R2B EU 1 EU C
6 6B3471001 YBコ-ドR2B YB CORD R2B 1 C
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
102-1. ケーブル関係（10K/16K） 2/4
CABLE (10K/16K) 2/4

～111616号機 ローカル基板（FB5UM）
～Ser.No.111616 Local PCB(FB5UM)

10
OPERATION
AVR1 KPW12 CORD PANEL

CNSW 7 SW CORD SWITCH

IO PCB

DVO CNDVO 8
DVO CORD KEYC PCB
PCB
9
LOCAL USB CORD USB I/F
PCB PCB

111617号機～ ローカル基板（ICE-DB-BIL-R10）
Ser.No.111617～ Local PCB（ICE-DB-BIL-R10）

10
OPERATION
AVR1 KPW12 CORD PANEL

CNSW 7
IO PCB SW CORD SWITCH

LOCAL CNDVO 8
DVO CORD KEYC PCB
PCB
9
USB CORD USB I/F
PCB

TC-R2B PART LIST

 102-1.ケーブル関係(10K16K) 2-4
CABLE(10K/16K)

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Part Name Q'ty Remark Classification
7 6B3450001 SWコ-ドR2B SW CORD R2B 1 Include FU1(Fuse) C
8 6A7359001 DVOコ-ドS2C DVO CORD S2C 1 C
9 6A7526001 USBコ-ドS2C USB CORD S2C 1 C
10 6B3398001 KPW12コ-ドR2B KPW12 CORD R2B 1 C
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
102-1. ケーブル関係 (10K/16K) 3/4
CABLE (10K/16K) 3/4

*その他のパーツシンボルは100-1制御箱関係(10K/16K)を参照してください。
* Please refer to “100-1 Control Box(10K/16K)” for any other parts symbol.

TC-R2B PART LIST

 102-1.ケーブル関係(10K_16K) 3-4
CABLE(10K/16K)

部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 接続先1 接続先2 備考 分類

Part Code Part Name Q'ty Connection 1 Connection 2 Remark Classification
6A4170001 IOコ-ド32B IO CORD 32B 1 IO PCB CNIO NC PCB CNIO C
6A7195001 AVR1コ-ドS2C AVR1 CORD S2C 1 AVR1 CN1 KC1 C
6B3464001 AVR2コ-ドR2B AVR2 CORD R2B 1 AVR2 CN1 KC1 C
6B3465001 CN200コ-ド R2B CN200 CORD R2B 1 IO PCB CN200 Q9 C
6B3370001 BOXIOコ-ドR2B BOXIO CORD R2B 1 IO PCB CNBIO KP1 CNKP1 C
KP2 CNKP2
6B3372001 CNCLMコ-ドR2B CNCLM CORD R2B 1 XTHP KP1 CNCLM C
KP2
6B3466001 R1コ-ドR2B R1 CORD R2B 1 SAMP XTR1 C
6A7361001 R2コ-ドS2C R2 CORD S2C 1 SAMP XTR1 C
6B3467001 RFANコ-ドR2B RFAN CORD R2B 1 XTPOW FAN3 C
6A8563001 FANコ-ド5 31B FAN CORD 5 31B 1 XTPOW FAN1 C
6B3463001 FAN2コ-ド R2B FAN CORD 2 R2B 1 XTPOW FAN2 C
6B1548001 SFAN2コ-ドS2D SFAN2 CORD S2D 1 KC1 SFAN C
6B3371001 SVPコ-ドR2B SVP CORD R2B 1 IO PCB CNSVP SRQT PCB XKS C
AVR2 CN8
KS1B
KC1
XTPOW
6A7624001 IDEコ-ド S2C IDE CORD S2C 1 LOCAL PCB CN12 SVIF-S PCB CNIDE caseA C
ONLY
6B3468001 MLINKコ-ド R2B MLINK CORD R2B 1 DVO PCB CNMLINK2 NC PCB CNMLINK caseA C
1 LOCAL PCB CNMLINK2 NC PCB CNMLINK caseB C
6A3861001 MLINKタ-ミネ-タ- MLINK TERMINATOR 1 IO PCB CNEXIO C
6B3429001 ELCPWコ-ドSTDR2B ELCPW CABLE STD R2B 1 KC1 R203 AVR11 CN1 C
T203
655722001 LUBPWコ-ドSTD32A LUBPW CABLE STD32A 1 T2 LUBPW C
6A7364001 BOXU コ-ド S2C BOXU CORD S2C 1 IO PCB CNBOXU SQBOXU C
6A7365001 BOXD コ-ド S2C BOXD CORD S2C 1 IO PCB CNBOXD SQBOXD C
6A8515001 SV1コ-ド31B SV1 CORD 31B 2 SVIF-S PCB CNSV SAMP CN3 C
S AMP CN4 X AMP CN3
6A8342001 SV2コ-ド31B SV2 CORD 31B 1 SVIF-S PCB CNSV2 C AMP CN3 C
6A7208001 SVAMPコ-ドS2C SVAMP CORD S2C 3 XAMP CN4 XAMP CN3 C
YAMP YAMP
CAMP MAGAMP
6B3378001 SVBATコ-ドR2B SV BAT CORD R2B 2 Z AMP CN4 CNBAT2 C
MAG AMP
6B3469001 SVBRKコ-ドR2B SVBRK CORD R2B 1 Z AMP CN1 SVIF-S PCB CNBRK C
MAG AMP
6B3373001 SQDコ-ドR2B SQD CORD R2B 1 IO PCB CNSQD3 SRQT PCB XSQD C
CNSQD4
CNDR
6B3377001 SRコ-ドR2B SR CORD R2B 1 IO PCB CNSQD2 SRQT PCB XSR C
6B3374001 ショ-トコ-ドSQD3A SHORT CORD SQD3A 1 SRQT PCB XSQD3A C
6B3375001 ショ-トコ-ドSQD4A SHORT CORD SQD4A 1 SRQT PCB XSQD4A C
6B3470001 ショ-トコ-ドSVIO R2B SHORT CORD SVIO R2B 1 IO PCB CNSVIO IO PCB CNLT24IN C
6B1553001 ショ-トコ-ドSQA2 S2D SHORT CORD SQA2 S2D 1 IO PCB CNSQA2 C
622429001 シヨ-トコ-ドT0H SHORT CORD T0H 1 IO PCB CNTOH IO PCB CNBIO C
6B3471001 YBコ-ドR2B YB CORD R2B 1 IO PCB CNYB CNYBZ C
CNYBM
6B3376001 CN100コ-ドR2B CN100 CORD R2B 1 IO PCB CN100 KC1 C
XTPOW
6B3440001 ショ-トコ-ドKSAB SHORT CORD KSAB 1 SRQT PCB XKS SRQT PCB CNKSAB C
6B3402001 ショ-トコ-ドKS3/4A SHORT CORD KS3/4A 1 SRQT PCB XKS3/4A EXCEPT C
EU
6B3383101 ショートコードKS2 SHORT CORD KS2 14 SRQT PCB CNKS2 EU C
6B3382001 AC24コ-ドR2B EU AC24 CORD R2B EU 1 T2 R241 IO PCB CNLT24IN EU C
T24
6B3379001 PLTAコ-ド R2B PLTA CORD R2B 1 SRQT PCB XPLTA SQPLT1 CNPLT1 EU C
CNKS2 SQPLT2 CNPLT2
6B3380001 KS5/6コ-ドR2B KS5/6 CORD R2B 1 SRQT PCB XKS3/4A SRQT PCB CNKS5 EU C
CNKS6
6B3381001 ショ-トコ-ドKS256R2B SHORT CORD KS2/5/6 R2B 1 SRQT PCB CNKS2 EU C
CNKS5
CNKS6
6B1640001 SVAMPコ-ドS2D SVAMP CORD S2D 1 MAG AMP CN4 5-AXIS AMP CN3 OPTION C
6A7208001 SVAMPコ-ドS2C SVAMP CORD S2C 1 5-AXIS AMP CN4 6-AXIS AMP CN3 OPTION C
6-AXIS AMP 7-AXIS AMP
7-AXIS AMP 8-AXIS AMP
*caseA・･Local PCB（FB5UM）
*caseB・･Local PCB（ICE-DB-BIL-R10）
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
102-1. ケーブル関係（10K/16K） 4/4
CABLE (10K/16K) 4/4

TC-R2B PART LIST

 102-1.ケーブル関係（10K_16K）4-4
CABLE(10K_16K)

部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 接続先1 接続先2 備考 分類

Part Code Part Name Q'ty Connection 1 Connection 2 Remark Classification
6A4473001 CNFOVケ-ブル32B CABLE OPERATION CNFOV 32B 1 KEYC PCB CNFOV RSFOV C
6A4474001 CNMOVケ-ブル32B CABLE OPERATION CNMOV 32B 1 KEYC PCB CNMOV RSMOV C
6A4470101 ソウサLCDケ-ブル32B CABLE OPERATION LCD 32B 1 KEYC PCB CNLCD LCD CN1 C
6A4467001 インバ-タケ-ブル32B CABLE OPERATION INVERTER 32B 1 KEYC PCB CNLCDINV INV CN1 C
6B3451001 CNSEC3ケ-ブルR2B CABLE OPERATION CNSEC3 R2B 1 SWSEC CNSEC3 C
6B1554001 CNSWケ-ブルS2D CABLE OPERATION CNSW S2D 1 CNSW SWPW C
6A4472001 CNPRTケ-ブル32B CABLE OPERATION CNPRT 32B 1 KEYC PCB CNPRT CNPWAL
SWPRT C
6A4475001 CNKSWケ-ブル32B CABLE OPERATION CNKSW 32B 1 KEYC PCB CNKSW SW ST C
6A8516001 CNPULケ-ブル31B CABLE OPERATION CNPUL 31B 1 CNPULSER SW STP
CNPUL C
6A8418001 CNQTコ-ド31B CNQT CORD 31B 1 KEYC PCB CNQT SWOUT C
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
102-2. ケーブル関係（10K高トルク） 1/4
CABLE (10K HIGH TORQUE) 1/4

2
MX
X AMP X ENC CORD
X MOTOR CORD
3
MY
Y AMP
Y ENC CORD
Y MOTOR CORD

IO CNSFOH
PCB CNSPOH
SFAN
KC1
1
MS
S AMP S ENC CORD ASSY
S MOTOR CORD

MZ
Z AMP Z ENC CORD
Z MOTOR
YBZ
6 YB CORD Z BRAKE CORD
IO
PCB 5
YBM
MAGM

MAG
MAG MAGAZINE ENC CORD
AMP
MAGAZINE MORTOR CORD

4
MC
C AMP C ENC CORD
C MOTOR CORD
CNSQUCL
QT CORD QT UNCLAMP
IO PCB CYLINDER SENSOR

SR QT CL CABLE
PCB QT CLAMP SENSOR

TC-R2B PART LIST

 102-2.ケーブル関係(10K高トルク) 1-4
CABLE(10K HIGH TORQUE)

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Part Name Q'ty Remark Classification
6B5150001 SZフレキクミR2BH SZ FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY R2BH 1 EXCEPT EU C
1
6B3535001 SZフレキクミR2BHEU SZ FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY R2BH EU 1 EU C
6B3356001 XフレキクミR2B X FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY R2B 1 EXCEPT EU C
2
6B3538001 XフレキクミR2BHEU X FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY R2BH EU 1 EU C
3 6B3357001 YフレキクミR2B Y FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY R2B 1 C
4 6B3358001 CフレキクミR2B C FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY R2B 1 C
6B3361001 MAGフレキクミR2B MAG FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY R2B 1 EXCEPT EU C
5
6B3536001 MAGフレキクミR2BHEU MAG FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY R2BH EU 1 EU C
6 6B3471001 YBコ-ドR2B YB CORD R2B 1 C
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
102-2. ケーブル関係（10K高トルク） 2/4
CABLE (10K HIGH TORQUE) 2/4

～111616号機 ローカル基板（FB5UM）
～SerNo111616 Local PCB(FB5UM)

10
OPERATION PANEL
AVR1 KPW12 CORD

IO PCB CNSW 7 SW CORD SWITCH

DVO CNDVO 8 DVO CORD KEYC PCB

PCB
9 USB CORD
LOCAL USB I/F
PCB PCB

111617号機～ ローカル基板（ICE-DB-BIL-R10）
SerNo111617～ Local PCB（ICE-DB-BIL-R10）

10
OPERATION PANEL
AVR1 KPW12 CORD

IO PCB CNSW 7 SW CORD SWITCH

LOCAL CNDVO 8 DVO CORD KEYC PCB

PCB
9 USB CORD USB I/F
PCB

TC-R2B PART LIST

 102-2.ケーブル関係(10K高トルク) 2-4
CABLE(10K HIGH TORQUE)

参照No 部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 備考 分類
Ref.No Part Code Part Name Q'ty Remark Classification
7 6B3450001 SWコ-ドR2B SW CORD R2B 1 Include FU1(Fuse) C
8 6A7359001 DVOコ-ドS2C DVO CORD S2C 1 C
9 6A7526001 USBコ-ドS2C USB CORD S2C 1 C
10 6B3398001 KPW12コ-ドR2B KPW12 CORD R2B 1 C
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
102-2. ケーブル関係 (10K高トルク) 3/4
CABLE (10K HIGH TORQUE) 3/4

TC-R2B PART LIST

 102-2.ケーブル関係(10K高トルク) 3-4
CABLE(10K HIGH TORQUE)

部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 接続先1 接続先2 備考 分類

Part Code Part Name Q'ty Connection 1 Connection 2 Remark Classification
6A4170001 IOコ-ド32B IO CORD 32B 1 IO PCB CNIO NC PCB CNIO C
6A7195001 AVR1コ-ドS2C AVR1 CORD S2C 1 AVR1 CN1 KC1 C
6B3464001 AVR2コ-ドR2B AVR2 CORD R2B 1 AVR2 CN1 KC1 C
6B3465001 CN200コ-ド R2B CN200 CORD R2B 1 IO PCB CN200 Q9 C
6B3370001 BOXIOコ-ドR2B BOXIO CORD R2B 1 IO PCB CNBIO KP1 CNKP1 C
KP2 CNKP2
6B5031001 CNCLMコ-ドS2DN CNCLM CORD S2DN 1 XTHP KP1 CNCLM C
KP2
6B3540001 FAN1コ-ド R2B FAN CORD 1 R2B 1 XTPOW FAN1 C
6B3463001 FAN2コ-ド R2B FAN CORD 2 R2B 2 XTPOW FAN2 C
FAN3
6B1548001 SFAN2コ-ドS2D SFAN2 CORD S2D 1 KC1 SFAN C
6B5126001 SVPコ-ドR2BH SVP CORD R2BH 1 IO PCB CNSVP SRQT PCB XKS C
AVR2 CN8
KS1B
KC1
XTPOW
6A7624001 IDEコ-ド S2C IDE CORD S2C 1 LOCAL PCB CN12 SVIF-S PCB CNIDE caseA C
ONLY
6B3468001 MLINKコ-ド R2B MLINK CORD R2B 1 DVO PCB CNMLINK2 NC PCB CNMLINK caseA C
1 LOCAL PCB CNMLINK2 NC PCB CNMLINK caseB C
6A3861001 MLINKタ-ミネ-タ- MLINK TERMINATOR 1 IO PCB CNEXIO C
6B3429001 ELCPWコ-ドSTDR2B ELCPW CABLE STD R2B 1 KC1 R203 AVR11 CN1 C
T203
655722001 LUBPWコ-ドSTD32A LUBPW CABLE STD32A 1 T2 LUBPW C
6A8515001 SV1コ-ド31B SV1 CORD 31B 2 SVIF-S PCB CNSV SAMP CN3 C
S AMP CN4 X AMP CN3
6A8342001 SV2コ-ド31B SV2 CORD 31B 1 SVIF-S PCB CNSV2 C AMP CN3 C
6A7208001 SVAMPコ-ドS2C SVAMP CORD S2C 3 XAMP CN4 XAMP CN3 C
YAMP YAMP
CAMP MAGAMP
6B3378001 SVBATコ-ドR2B SV BAT CORD R2B 2 Z AMP CN4 CNBAT2 C
MAG AMP
6B3469001 SVBRKコ-ドR2B SVBRK CORD R2B 1 Z AMP CN1 SVIF-S PCB CNBRK C
MAG AMP
6B3373001 SQDコ-ドR2B SQD CORD R2B 1 IO PCB CNSQD3 SRQT PCB XSQD C
CNSQD4
CNDR
6B3377001 SRコ-ドR2B SR CORD R2B 1 IO PCB CNSQD2 SRQT PCB XSR C
6B3374001 ショ-トコ-ドSQD3A SHORT CORD SQD3A 1 SRQT PCB XSQD3A C
6B3375001 ショ-トコ-ドSQD4A SHORT CORD SQD4A 1 SRQT PCB XSQD4A C
6B3470001 ショ-トコ-ドSVIO R2B SHORT CORD SVIO R2B 1 IO PCB CNSVIO IO PCB CNLT24IN C
6B1553001 ショ-トコ-ドSQA2 S2D SHORT CORD SQA2 S2D 1 IO PCB CNSQA2 C
622429001 シヨ-トコ-ドT0H SHORT CORD T0H 1 IO PCB CNTOH IO PCB CNBIO C
6B3471001 YBコ-ドR2B YB CORD R2B 1 IO PCB CNYB CNYBZ C
CNYBM
6B3376001 CN100コ-ドR2B CN100 CORD R2B 1 IO PCB CN100 KC1 C
XTPOW
6B3440001 ショ-トコ-ドKSAB SHORT CORD KSAB 1 SRQT PCB XKS SRQT PCB CNKSAB C
6B3402001 ショ-トコ-ドKS3/4A SHORT CORD KS3/4A 1 SRQT PCB XKS3/4A EXCEPT C
EU
6B5119001 PN1コ-ドR2BH PN1 CORD R2BH 1 S AMP CNPN1 X,Y,ZAMP CNA C
MAG,CAMP
6B5120001 PN2コ-ドR2BH PN2 CORD R2BH 1 S AMP CNPN2 XTPN C
6B5125001 RTコ-ドR2BH RT CORD R2BH 1 S AMP CNA XTPOW C
6B3383101 ショートコードKS2 SHORT CORD KS2 14 SRQT PCB CNKS2 EU C
6B3382001 AC24コ-ドR2B EU AC24 CORD R2B EU 1 T2 R241 IO PCB CNLT24IN EU C
T24
6B3379001 PLTAコ-ド R2B PLTA CORD R2B 1 SRQT PCB XPLTA SQPLT1 CNPLT1 EU C
CNKS2 SQPLT2 CNPLT2
6B3380001 KS5/6コ-ドR2B KS5/6 CORD R2B 1 SRQT PCB XKS3/4A SRQT PCB CNKS5 EU C
CNKS6
6B3381001 ショ-トコ-ドKS256R2B SHORT CORD KS2/5/6 R2B 1 SRQT PCB CNKS2 EU C
CNKS5
CNKS6
6B1640001 SVAMPコ-ドS2D SVAMP CORD S2D 1 MAG AMP CN4 5-AXIS AMP CN3 OPTION C
6A7208001 SVAMPコ-ドS2C SVAMP CORD S2C 1 5-AXIS AMP CN4 6-AXIS AMP CN3 OPTION C
6-AXIS AMP 7-AXIS AMP
7-AXIS AMP 8-AXIS AMP
*caseA・･Local PCB（FB5UM）
*caseB・･Local PCB（ICE-DB-BIL-R10）
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
102-2. ケーブル関係（10K高トルク） 4/4
CABLE(10K HIGH TORQUE) 4/4

TC-R2B PART LIST

 102-2.ケーブル関係 (10K高トルク) 4-4
CABLE (10K HIGH TORQUE)

部品ｺ-ﾄﾞ 品名 個数 接続先1 接続先2 備考 分類

Part Code Part Name Q'ty Connection 1 Connection 2 Remark Classification
6A4473001 CNFOVケ-ブル32B CABLE OPERATION CNFOV 32B 1 KEYC PCB CNFOV RSFOV C
6A4474001 CNMOVケ-ブル32B CABLE OPERATION CNMOV 32B 1 KEYC PCB CNMOV RSMOV C
6A4470101 ソウサLCDケ-ブル32B CABLE OPERATION LCD 32B 1 KEYC PCB CNLCD LCD CN1 C
6A4467001 インバ-タケ-ブル32B CABLE OPERATION INVERTER 32B 1 KEYC PCB CNLCDINV INV CN1 C
6B3451001 CNSEC3ケ-ブルR2B CABLE OPERATION CNSEC3 R2B 1 SWSEC CNSEC3 C
6B1554001 CNSWケ-ブルS2D CABLE OPERATION CNSW S2D 1 CNSW SWPW C
6A4472001 CNPRTケ-ブル32B CABLE OPERATION CNPRT 32B 1 KEYC PCB CNPRT CNPWAL
SWPRT C
6A4475001 CNKSWケ-ブル32B CABLE OPERATION CNKSW 32B 1 KEYC PCB CNKSW SW ST C
6A8516001 CNPULケ-ブル31B CABLE OPERATION CNPUL 31B 1 CNPULSER SW STP
CNPUL C
6A8418001 CNQTコ-ド31B CNQT CORD 31B 1 KEYC PCB CNQT SWOUT C
*分類の"C"は制御部品、無印は機械部品の扱いです。
*"C" in the "Classification"" indicates that the part is classified into control part, while no mark indicates machine part.
（この頁は空白です。）
(This page is blank.)
 Declaration of Conformity
(Only the machines destined for EU member countries and attached with the CE marking)

We BROTHER INDUSTRIES, LTD.

(Supplier's name)

1-5 Kitajizoyama, Noda-cho, Kariya , Aichi, 448-0803, Japan

(Address)

and

NOMURA TRADING CO., LTD., FRANKFURT BRANCH

(Supplier's name)

Hoechster Str. 94, 65835 Liederbach, Germany

(Address)

declare under our responsibility that the product

TAPPING CENTER, TC-R2B

(Name, Model)

as described in the attached documentation is in conformity with the following directives

and standards .

EC Directives : Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC)

EMC Directive (2004/108/EEC)
Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)

Standards : ISO12100-1:2003 + A1 : 2009

ISO12100-2:2003 + A1 : 2009
ISO13857 : 2008
EN349 : 1993 + A1 : 2008
EN61000-6-2 : 2005
EN55011 : 2007, class A, gr. 1
EN60204-1 : 2006 + A1 : 2009
© 2009-2011 BROTHER INDUSTRIES, LTD.
MACHINERY & SOLUTION COMPANY
All Rights Reserved.
Printed in Japan
This is the original instructions.

693479001
1111 (8)

eTR2BINOKU.doc